NORTHEAST WRF IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT - 19-0029-UT - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NORTH EAST WRF
IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
(PROJECT No. 19 -0029 -UT)
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS &
SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared for
BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH
Bid Specifications
January 2021
City of Clearwater, Florida
NE WRF IMPROVEMENTS PROJECTS
(PROJECT No. 19 -0029 -UT)
SECTION I
SECTION II
SECTION III
SECTION III A
SECTION IV
SECTION IV A
SECTION IV B
SECTION IV C
APPENDIX
SECTION V
COVER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS,
DIVISION 1
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS; GRIT
REMOVAL, SALSNES FILTER AND EQUALIZATION
SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS; SLUDGE
BLEND TANK IMPROVEMENTS
ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT
DOCUMENTATION
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer
Pagel!
Updated 2/11/2016
SECTION 1
INVITATION TO BID
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
NE WRF Improvements RE -BID
Documents and plans for Project NE WRF Improvements
RE -BID #19 -0029 -UT are available at
https://www.myclearwater.com/business/engineering-
construction-bids.
The work includes modifications to existing grit and
primary treatment and sludge blend and storage
systems, and new flow equalization system at the City's
Northeast Water Reclamation Facility (WRF).
Pre -Bid Meeting: February 12, 2021 at 9:30AM
Meeting Location Information:
https://www.myclearwater.com/business/invitation-to-
bid
Pre -qualification Application Submittal DEADLINE:
February 17, 2021
Category: Wastewater Treatment Facility
Pre -qualification Amount: $19,000,000.00
Bids DUE: March 3, 2021 at 2:OOPM (EST)
Bid Opening: March 3, 2021 at 2:OOPM (EST)
Meeting Location Information:
https://www.myclearwater.com/business/invitation-to-
bid
FedEx or Drop off bids to:
City of Clearwater,
Attn: Lori Vogel
Project # 19 -0029 -UT
Procurement Office, 3rd Floor
100 S. Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33756-5520
Issued by Lori Vogel, CPPB, Procurement Manager
For additional information contact Engineering Dept.:
727-562-4750
SECTION I Page 1 Updated 5/28/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Table of Contents
SECTION II i
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1
1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1
2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1
3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1
4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2
5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3
6. CONTRACT TIME 3
7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3
8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3
9. SUBCONTRACTORS 3
10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4
11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4
12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5
13. REJECTION OF BIDS 5
14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5
15. OPENING OF BIDS 5
16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5
17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6
18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 7
19. BID PROTEST 7
20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 8
21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9
SECTION II i Updated 07/13/2020
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.1. Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are accessible through the City of Clearwater
website at address: www.myclearwater.com/bid. Bidding Documents may include, but are
not limited to, plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits, bid/proposal form,
and addendums.
1.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the
Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete
sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub -bidders, or others.
2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
2.1. Each prospective Bidder must pre -qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner. An application
package for pre -qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater,
Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 (mailing address);
100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address) or by phone at
(727) 562-4750. Pre -qualification requirement information is also available on the City of
Clearwater Website at address:
www.myclearwater. com/government/city-departments/engineering/construction-
management.
Contractors wanting to pre -qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two
weeks (ten workdays) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre -qualified by the
City do not have to make reapplication. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm pre -
qualification status before a Bid Opening.
The Contractor shall provide copies of the current Contractor License/Registration with the
State of Florida and Pinellas County in the bid response.
3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in
any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d)
study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify
Engineer in writing of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
3.2. For the purposes of bidding or construction, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the
technical data contained in reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the
site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents,
but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the
completeness thereof. Drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and
subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site
and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, may
be relied upon by Bidder for accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but
not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction.
SECTION 11
Page 1 of 9 Updated 07/13/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
3.3. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City
and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not
assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
3.4. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible
conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions
appear in the General Conditions.
3.5. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6. On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission
of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition
upon completion of such explorations and tests.
3.7. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. AH additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by
the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents.
3.8. The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the
Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without
exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the
Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
4.1. All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in
writing to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer
in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, via the Jiffy Reprographics Plan
Room to all parties recorded by the Plan Room as plan holders having received the Bidding
Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified on the pre-bid meeting agenda,
prior to the date for opening of Bids, may not be answered. Only information provided by
formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will
be without legal effect.
4.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
City or Engineer.
SECTION II
Page 2 of 9 Updated 07/13/2020
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
5.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an
amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a
certified or cashier's check or a Proposal/Bid Bond (on form provided in Section V) issued
by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions.
5.2. The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the
Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid
Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and
furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council,
the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid
Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the
award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the
successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of
other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid Opening.
5.3. The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in, the State of Florida.
6. CONTRACT TIME
6.1. The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set
forth in the Technical Specifications.
7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
7.1. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement, Section V.
8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1. The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or
equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that
a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will
not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement.
The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions
and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
9. SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1. If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested,
shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience
statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification
for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the
completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%)
of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after
due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other
person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City
Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase
in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such
substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder
SECTION!!
Page 3 of 9 Updated 07/13/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and
organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for
sacrificing the Bid Security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other
person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make
written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed
acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the
Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions.
9.2. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person, or
organization against whom he has reasonable objection.
10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM
10.1. The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be printed in ink
or typewritten. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be
to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the
Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the
price for which they will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders
are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or
item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or
item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts
shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they
be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section
or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed
individual items.
10.2. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown
below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership
shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation
or partnership.
10.3. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner,
whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be
shown below the signature.
10.4. All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS
11.1. Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a sealed envelope with the project name and
number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in
another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the
City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated
in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Bids in any other form will not be
accepted.
11.2. The sealed bid envelope shall contain, but not be limited to, the Proposal/Bid Bond and
corresponding Power of Attorney, Affidavit, Non Collusion Affidavit, Proposal (pages one
SECTION II
Page 4 of 9 Updated 07/13/2020
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
and two), Addendum Sheet, Bidder's Proposal, and Scrutinized Companies and Business
Operations with Cuba and Syria Certification Form.
12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner
that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A
request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly
authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a
new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no
Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2. After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical
or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or
scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction
of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City.
The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid.
13. REJECTION OF BIDS
13.1. To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves
the right to reject any, and all Bids, and to waive any, and all informalities. Grounds for the
rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of
form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of
any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would
not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the
Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to
meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the
right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public.
14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
14.1. Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among
the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for
the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non -Collusion Affidavit contained in the
Contract Documents.
15. OPENING OF BIDS
15.1. Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for
Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.1. The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply
with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in
any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees and
impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical
Specifications.
SECTION II
Page 5 of 9 Updated 07/13/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
' 16.2. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
1 stated by the Contractor.
16.3. The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use, and other taxes required by law.
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax
1 and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
16.4. The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials purchased by the City and
incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the
Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, as may be indicated in the Scope of Work Description
in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions.
17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
' 17.1. In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect
1 to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or
contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a
drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established
' procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a
drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor
shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the
accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace
and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition.
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy
of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and
employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees
' for drug abuse violations.
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that
are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
(4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of
working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee
will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction
' of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any
controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring
in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
' (5) Impose a sanction on or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance
or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any
employee who is so convicted.
' (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above
' requirements.
SECTION II Page 6 of 9 Updated 07/13/2020
1
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
18. AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.1. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies
in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices.
Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof
will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
18.2. In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether the
Bids comply or not with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be
requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience
of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor
for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist
in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial
ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations
to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's
satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.3. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best
interest of the City.
18.4. Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the
best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be
awarded to only one Contractor.
18.5. The successful bidder/contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida
Statutes (2014), specifically to:
(a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required
by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service;
(b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions
that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not
exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law;
(c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public
records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and
(d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City
of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of
the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential
and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored
electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible
with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater.
19. BID PROTEST
19.1. RIGHT TO PROTEST:
Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract
may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not
satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this
section.
19.2. PROTEST PROCEDURE:
SECTION II
Page 7 of 9 Updated 07/13/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal
shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of
the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not
have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest
prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due
dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five
(5) workdays after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder,
whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon
telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific
portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted
if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of
the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award,
or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing,
stating reasons for the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5)
workdays of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with
the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager.
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she
may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her
reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and
the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter
of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) workdays of
receipt of the appeal.
19.3. PROTEST FEE:
When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5%
of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the
protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing
Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee
paid.
19.4. STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST:
In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the
solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or
until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without
delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City.
20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related
to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act
(Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650
Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws.
SECTION II
Page 8 of 9 Updated 07/13/2020
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES
21.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and
implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management
programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent
the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters.
A. The control of construction -related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water
quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during
the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters.
B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment
control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment
control provisions.
NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering
Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction -related Best
Management Practices.
SECTION II
Page 9 of 9 Updated 07/13/2020
SECTION III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Table of Contents:
1. DEFINITIONS 1
2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5
2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5
2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5
2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THE PROJECT 5
2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 6
2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6
2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS 6
3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 6
3.1. INTENT 6
3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7
4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 7
4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 7
4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8
4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8
4.4. REFERENCE POINTS 8
5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 9
5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND 9
5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 9
5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE 9
5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE 10
5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE10
5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR OMISSIONS
INSURANCE 10
5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY INSURANCE 10
5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE 10
5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS 10
5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS 11
6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 12
6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12
6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 12
6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 13
6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14
SECTION III i Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.5. USE OF PREMISES 14
6.5.1. STAGING AREAS 15
6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15
6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 15
6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16
6.7.1. E -VERIFY 16
6.8. PERMITS 17
6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17
6.10. EMERGENCIES 18
6.11. DRAWINGS 18
6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18
6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19
6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 21
6.11.4. DELIVERABLES 23
6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23
6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK 24
6.14. INDEMNIFICATION 24
6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24
6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS 24
7. OTHER WORK 26
7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE 26
7.2. COORDINATION 26
8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 26
9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
27
9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 27
9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 27
9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 27
9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 27
9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 27
9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 28
10. CHANGES IN THE WORK 29
11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 30
11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 30
11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 31
11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK 31
12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 32
13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33
SECTION III ii Updated 12/3/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION 33
13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK 33
13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 34
13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 34
13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD 34
13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 35
13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 35
14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 35
14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 36
14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 36
14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 37
14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION 37
14.5. FINAL INSPECTION 38
14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 38
14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 38
14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS 39
15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 39
15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 39
15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE 39
15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 41
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION 41
17. MISCELLANEOUS 41
17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 41
17.2. GIVING NOTICE 41
17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM 42
17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 42
17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 42
17.6. RENEWAL OPTION 42
17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS 42
18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 42
19. MATERIAL USED 42
20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 43
21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 43
21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS 43
21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK 43
21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS 43
21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION 44
SECTION III iii Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 45
22.1. GENERAL 45
22.2. EXAMPLE 46
23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 46
23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE 46
23.2. PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 47
23.3. FIXED SIGN 47
23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS 47
23.5. SIGN COLORING 47
23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT 47
23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE 47
23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 48
24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE48
25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH
CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM AND ISRAEL
CERTIFICATION FORM 49
1
1
SECTION 111 iv Updated 12/3/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
1. DEFINITIONS
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or
change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agent
Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the
City.
Agreement
The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed;
other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as
provided therein.
Application for Payment
The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress
or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is
required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or
methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given
in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer
to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid
The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices
for the work to be performed.
Bidding Documents
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds
Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement.
City
The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida.
Construction Inspector
A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects
City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent
of the Contract Documents.
Construction Manager
The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The
Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction
contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the
SECTION III
Page 1 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding
contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the
Owner's Representative during construction.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation
submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the
Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits
identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of
the Agreement.
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
Contractor
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this
contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been
made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Critical Path Method Construction Schedule—CPM
A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate
to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in
a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of
the schedule.
Day
A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective
An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the
Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final
payment.
Drawings
The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement,
which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been
prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop
drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Engineer
The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County,
Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as
the Owner's Representative during construction.
SECTION III
Page 2 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
Engineer's Consultant
A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent
professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such
in the Supplementary Conditions.
F.D. O. T Specifications
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida
Department of Transportation (latest English edition).
Furnish
The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar
meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and
install complete in place and ready for service".
Inspection
The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to
ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications.
These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing.
Laws and Regulations
Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind
of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property.
Milestone
A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to the final completion date.
Notice to Proceed (NTP)
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract
Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations
under the Contract Documents.
Owner
The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the
City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible
for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain
projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during
construction.
Owner's Representative
Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction.
Person
A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity.
Project
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents
may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Partial Utilization
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is
intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
SECTION III
Page 3 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
Representative of Contractor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the
construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these
persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre -construction
conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City
Engineer.
Request for Information (RFI)
An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the
Contractor to the Engineer.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically
prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations,
brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other
information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or
equipment for some portion of the Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion
The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the
opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that
the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if
no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as
evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially
complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to
Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Supplier
A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be
incorporated in the Work by the Contractor.
Surety
Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid,
Performance or Payment Bond.
Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such
facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
SECTION III Page 4 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity,
gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or
water.
Unit Price Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work
The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of
performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the
construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be
performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or
Contract Time but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or
documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract
Price or Contract Times.
2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF
INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by
this contract.
2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional
copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO
PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall
start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done
at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. Pursuant to Section
255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, the Notice to Proceed cannot be issued until Contractor provides
City with a certified copy of the recorded bond issued by the Pinellas County Clerk of Court.
SECTION III
Page 5 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field
measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or
discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or
clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however,
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy
in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or
Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify
any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any
time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this
insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
After Contract has been fully executed and before the start of the Work, the Owner's
Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer,
Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the
Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a color
Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including
submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at the preconstruction
conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also
submit a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is
complete, and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a
completed Emergency Call List, a completed Authorized Signature List, and Verification of Illegal
Discharge Construction Site Training.
2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS
The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a
weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall
bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a
look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and
all material test reports generated in the same time period.
3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.1. INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents
are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of
the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be
SECTION III
Page 6 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which
may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade
usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or
not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well-known technical or
construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such
words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and
interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative.
Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or
association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such
reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or
code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise
specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard
specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the
responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the
duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of
their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and
interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every
provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be
deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included
herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly
inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be
physically amended to make such insertion.
3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision
of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard,
specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the
Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work
affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract
Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications,
provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for
failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or
reasonably should have known thereof.
4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND
PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS
The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work
is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements, rights of entry for access thereto, and such other
lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances
or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with
which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures
or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
SECTION III
Page 7 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification
of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site
or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by
Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to
accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly
notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the
site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the
Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further
investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional
investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that
the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical
conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which
could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change, or Change Order will
be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to
Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise
expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for
the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will
be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and
checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated
in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground
Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities
and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the
Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any
utility owners who are not a member of the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any
excavation. The Sunshine State One Call of Florida is an agency for the protection and location of
utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory.
4.4. REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in
Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall
be responsible for laying out the Work, unless otherwise noted in the Contract, shall protect and
preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the
prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever
any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in
grades or locations and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such
reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the
Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction
surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement
caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined
by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be
computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with
a minimum charge of one hour.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III
Page 8 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
5. BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND
Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond pursuant to Section 255.05, Florida
Statutes in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and
payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in
effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of
time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also
furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in
the form prescribed by the Contract Documents in Section V and shall be executed by such sureties
as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable
Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570
(amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury
Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents'
authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05,
Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety
shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to
reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or
becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project
is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall
within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be
acceptable to Owner.
5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, acquire and maintain (and cause any sub-
contractors, representatives or agents to acquire and maintain) during the term with the City,
sufficient insurance to adequately protect the respective interest of the parties. Coverage shall be
obtained with a carrier having an AM Best Rating of A -VII or better. In addition, the City has the
right to review the Contractor's deductible or self-insured retention and to require that it be reduced
or eliminated.
Specifically, the Contractor must carry the following minimum types and amounts of insurance on
an occurrence basis or in the case of coverage that cannot be obtained on an occurrence basis, then
coverage can be obtained on a claims -made basis with a minimum four (4) year tail following the
termination or expiration of this Agreement:
The following insurance limits may be achieved by a combination of primary and umbrella/excess
liability policies.
5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE
Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage, including but not limited to, premises
operations, products/completed operations, products liability, contractual liability, advertising
injury, personal injury, death, and property damage in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one
million dollars) per occurrence and $2,000,000 (two million dollars) general aggregate.
SECTION III
Page 9 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE
Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance coverage for any owned, non -owned, hired or
borrowed automobile is required in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars)
combined single limit.
5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY
INSURANCE
Statutory Workers' Compensation Insurance coverage in accordance with the laws of the State of
Florida, and Employer's Liability Insurance in the minimum amount of $100,000 (one hundred
thousand dollars) each employee each accident, $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each
employee by disease and $500,000 (five hundred thousand dollars) aggregate by disease with
benefits afforded under the laws of the State of Florida. Coverage should include Voluntary
Compensation, Jones Act, and U.S. Longshoremen's and Harbor Worker's Act coverage where
applicable. Coverage must be applicable to employees, contractors, subcontractors, and
volunteers, if any.
5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR
OMISSIONS INSURANCE
Professional Liability/Malpractice/Errors or Omissions Insurance coverage appropriate for the
type of business engaged in by the Contractor with minimum limits of $1,000,000 (one million
dollars) per occurrence. If a claims -made form of coverage is provided, the retroactive date of
coverage shall be no later than the inception date of claims -made coverage, unless prior policy was
extended indefinitely to cover prior acts. Coverage shall be extended beyond the policy year either
by a supplemental extended reporting period (ERP) of as great a duration as available, and with
no less coverage and with reinstated aggregate limits, or by requiring that any new policy provide
a retroactive date no later than the inception date of claims -made coverage.
5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY
INSURANCE
If Contractor is using its own property in connection with the performance of its obligations under
this Agreement, then Contractor's Equipment—Inland Marine Insurance and/or Property Insurance
on an "All Risks" basis with replacement cost coverage for property and equipment in the care,
custody and control of others is recommended. City is not responsible for Contractor's (or any
sub -contractors, representatives, or agents) equipment or property.
5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE
The City will provide at its expense, Builder's Risk Insurance for the project to cover all risks of
loss in the complete and full value of the project. Contractor agrees to cooperate in a timely manner
with providing any information or documentation required for the application and by the carrier as
the project proceeds.
5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS
Upon approval of this Agreement by City Council, and then annually upon the anniversary date(s)
of the insurance policy's renewal date(s) for as long as this Agreement remains in effect, the
Contractor will furnish the City with a Certificate of Insurance(s) (using appropriate ACORD
SECTION III
Page 10 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
certificate, SIGNED by the Issuer, and with applicable endorsements) evidencing all of the
coverage set forth above and naming the City as an "Additional Insured." In addition when
requested in writing from the City, Contractor will provide the City with certified copies of all
applicable policies. The address where such certificates and certified policies shall be sent or
delivered is as follows:
City of Clearwater
Engineering Department
Attn: Construction Office Specialist
P.O. Box 4748
Clearwater, FL 33758-4748
1. The Description (of Operations/Locations/Vehicles) should specify Project Name and Project
Number.
2. Contractor shall provide thirty (30) days written notice of any cancellation, non -renewal,
termination, material change or reduction in coverage.
3. Contractor's insurance as outlined above shall be primary and non-contributory coverage for
Contractor's negligence.
4. Contractor reserves the right to appoint legal counsel to provide for the Contractor's defense,
for any and all claims that may arise related to Agreement, work performed under this
Agreement, or to Contractor's design, equipment, or service. Contractor agrees that the City
shall not be liable to reimburse Contractor for any legal fees or costs as a result of Contractor
providing its defense as contemplated herein.
The stipulated limits of coverage above shall not be construed as a limitation of any potential
liability to the City, and the City's failure to request evidence of this insurance shall not be
construed as a waiver of Contractor's (or sub -contractors, representatives, or agents) obligation to
provide the insurance coverage specified.
5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS
The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on
Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants
and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured
or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages
caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in
the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against
any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights
against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and
damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and
any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against
Sub -contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the
Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for
losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party
making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so
issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer,
Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss
due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct
physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting
from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the
completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured
SECTION III
Page 11 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the
Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment.
6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such
attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be
responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method,
technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly
required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent
resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative
except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative
at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the
superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall
keep a mobile cell phone on his person, so he can be contacted whenever necessary.
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's
Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, disrespectful or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be
removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of
the Owner's Representative. Contractor represents the City of Clearwater and shall conduct
themselves in a professional manner to the public at all times.
Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a
result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved
holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime
slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the
end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to
the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector
overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check.
Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four
hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $80.00 per hour.
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary
accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct
the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons
or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the
Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours.
SECTION III
Page 12 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
Contractor shall adhere to the Community Development Code, Section 3-1508 regarding noise
restrictions from 6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. any day and all day Sunday. Contractor will not permit
overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without
Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and
equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in
the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored,
may be rejected by the Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment or
materials to be incorporated into the Work under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, per
Section III, Article 21. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of
Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures.
6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification
or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item
or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of
other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material
or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar
so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval.
If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does
not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor
shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine
that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an
acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be
not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor.
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's
Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a
determination. Request for substitute shall identify why a substitute is submitted and include
advantages to the Owner. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or
"or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of
acceptability.
SECTION III
Page 13 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction
conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by
the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list
the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization
for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative
for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and
organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor.
Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a
direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer
and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of
Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating
the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work
under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors,
Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with
the Engineer through Contractor.
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work
to be performed by any specific trade.
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable
objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable
obj ection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
6.5. USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and
easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant
because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by
negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or
SECTION III
Page 14 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and
hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees
and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from
any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner,
Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon
Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work
or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish
and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment
and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not
designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
6.5.1. STAGING AREAS
The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and
storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. Use of right of way within the limits of
construction must be approved by the City. All applicable erosion control, tree barricade and
restoration, including time limits, specifications, etc., must be followed.
6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS
The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the
Citizens of Clearwater therefore, these time limits are imposed:
• Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days.
• Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive
calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times.
• All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP.
• Local streets and asphalt driveways, shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is
generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days.
Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times.
• Any irrigation systems or components damaged or impacted by construction activities
shall be repaired or replaced "in-kind" within forty-eight (48) hours to minimize the
loss of turfgrass or landscape plantings, particularly during periods of drought.
• Sod must be restored "in-kind" within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a
successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations,
replacement of driveways or sidewalks or another project specific milestone. It must
be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust
control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times.
If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod
restoration may be considered.
6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the
SECTION III
Page 15 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to
patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the
existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and
damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident
to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies,
which are applicable during the performance of the work.
6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing
and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and
Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring
Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing
or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims,
costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be
Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in
accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's
obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above.
6.7.1. E -VERIFY
When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11-02
shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E -Verify System to verify employment
eligibility.
Contractor and its Subcontractors shall register with and use the E -Verify system to verify the
work authorization status of all newly hired employees. Contractor will not enter into a contract
with any Subcontractor unless each party to the contract registers with and uses the E -Verify
system. Subcontractor must provide Contractor with an affidavit stating that Subcontractor does
not employ, contract with, or subcontract with an unauthorized alien. Contractor shall maintain a
copy of such affidavit.
The City may terminate this Contract on the good faith belief that Contractor or its Subcontractors
knowingly violated Florida Statutes 448.09(1) or 448.095(2)(c). If this Contract is terminated
pursuant to Florida Statute 448.095(2)(c), Contractor may not be awarded a public contract for at
least 1 year after the date of which this Contract was terminated. Contractor is liable for any
additional costs incurred by the City as a result of the termination of this Contract.
See Section 448.095, Florida Statutes (2020).
See "VERIFICATION OF EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY FORM" in Apendix.
SECTION III
Page 16 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.8. PERMITS
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in
obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection
fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of
Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner
shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment
fees.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be
waived.
6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the
safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all
persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and
equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property
at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways,
structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or
replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or
during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and
shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury
from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or
materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or
any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced
at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention
program which shall include but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of
programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention
of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his
employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention
program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases
of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal
protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The
Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's
employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or
risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall
remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all
persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his
employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their
safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians
and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and
shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall
notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
execution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal,
SECTION III
Page 17 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused,
directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other
person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any
of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor.
Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue
until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and
Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
6.10. EMERGENCIES
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or
the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall
give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work
or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's
Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the
action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change
Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action.
6.11. DRAWINGS
6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL
REVIEW
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the
Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will
be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to
Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor
shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified
performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information
with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling,
storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all
information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.
Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other
Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each
submittal will have a transmittal cover sheet identifying the shop drawing name, number, and
technical specification reference; will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor
has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's
review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer
specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may
have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written
communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be
made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each
such variation.
The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall
receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal
SECTION III
Page 18 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for
information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at
each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within fourteen (14)
consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for
a delay claim from the Contractor.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to
the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's
review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make
corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop
Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct
specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on
previous submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of
submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will
any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the
requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor.
Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to
achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves
the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number
greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals, per the approved
initial submittal log. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all
third submittals. The number of first-time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals
agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal
of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor
at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due
Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously
approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be
backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of
Contractor.
6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order
and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and
annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes
or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including
revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction
process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile,
of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the
SECTION III
Page 19 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed
during the construction period.
The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant,
and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project.
The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for
accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the
monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up redline prints do not
conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the
Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay
request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by
the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness.
Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The Owner's acceptance of the "As -Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings.
6.11.2.1. General
The Contractor shall prepare an "AS -BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 5J-17.052, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land
surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built
Drawings and an AutoCAD file.
5J-17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or
vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also
known as Record Survey.
This survey shall be clearly titled "As -Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction
Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will
procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and
will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner
with the required As -Built Survey.
6.11.2.2. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation)
based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the
construction plans. New and replaced service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest
downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations,
manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the
plan view and also on the profile if one exists. The terminal ends of all subdrains, inverts of all
pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets shall also be noted on the plan view and also on
the profile if one exists.
2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
SECTION III
Page 20 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.11.2.3. Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the
approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans.
Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also, all new and
replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above.
Additionally, there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type
construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points.
6.11.2.4. Electrical and Control Wiring
The as -built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built
drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where
this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall
prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional
conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic
diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder
diagram.
6.11.2.5. Horizontal and Vertical Control
The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or
if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90
(horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be
the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must
be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department.
6.11.2.6. Standards
The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J-17 and the
Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that
pertain to the as -built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points
at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
6.11.2.7. Other
The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same
level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS
6.11.3.1. Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1.
Prefixes and Suffixes
DI
prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
EP
prefix denotes existing points - field collected
EX
prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols
PR
prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols
SECTION III
Page 21 of 50
Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
FU
prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line
work and symbols
TX
suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix
6.11.3.1.2. Laver Naming Definitions:
GAS
gas lines and appurtenances
ELEC
power lines and appurtenances
PHONE
telephone lines and appurtenances
CABLE
cable TV lines and appurtenances
BOC
curbs
WALK
sidewalk
WATER
water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
STORM
storm lines and appurtenances
TREES
trees, bushes, planters
SANITARY
sanitary lines and appurtenances
FENCE
all fences
BLDG
buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation
DRIVE
driveways
EOP
edge of pavement without curbs
TRAFFIC
signal poles, control boxes
TOPBANK
top of bank
TOESLOPE
toe of slope
TOPBERM
top of berm
TOEBERM
toe of berm
SEAWALL
seawall
CONCSLAB
concrete slabs
WALL
walls, except seawall
SHORE
shoreline, water elevation
CL
centerline of road
CLD
centerline of ditch
CLS
centerline of swale
CORNER
property corners, monumentation
BENCH
benchmark, temporary benchmarks
Other layers may be created as required, using above format.
SECTION III
Page 22 of 50
Updated 12/3/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.11.3.2. Layer Properties
All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer.
All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer.
All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts.
6.11.3.3. Text Styles
Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008
times the plot scale.
Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text height
of .010 times the plot scale.
6.11.4. DELIVERABLES
The as -built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1"=20' unless
approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver two hard copies and one digital copy of all
drawings. Requested file formats are: Autodesk DWG and Adobe PDF files.
Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail
address Thomas.Mahony@myClearwater.com.
6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND
GUARANTEE
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work
will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty
and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or
operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of
the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he
shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the
elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non -execution of the
Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or
damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final
acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his
own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a
period of one year from the date of final acceptance".
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work,
which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the
Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is
not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative,
(ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance
of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the
Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any
acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer.
SECTION III
Page 23 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK
Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.14. INDEMNIFICATION
To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold the City,
its officers, agents, and employees, harmless from and against any and all liabilities, demands,
claims, suits, losses, damages, causes of action, fines or judgments, including costs, attorneys',
witnesses', and expert witnesses' fees, and expenses incident thereto, relating to, arising out of, or
resulting from: (i) the services provided by Contractor personnel under this Agreement; (ii) any
negligent acts, errors, mistakes or omissions by Contractor or Contractor personnel; and (iii)
Contractor or Contractor personnel's failure to comply with or fulfill the obligations established
by this Agreement.
Contractor will update the City during the course of the litigation to timely notify the City of any
issues that may involve the independent negligence of the City that is not covered by this
indemnification.
The City assumes no liability for actions of Contractor and will not indemnify or hold Contractor
or any third party harmless for claims based on this Agreement or use of Contractor -provided
supplies or services.
Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, this indemnification provision shall
not be construed as a waiver of any immunity to which Owner is entitled or the extent of any
limitation of liability pursuant to § 768.28, Florida Statutes. Furthermore, this provision is not
intended to nor shall be interpreted as limiting or in any way affecting any defense Owner may
have under § 768.28, Florida Statutes or as consent to be sued by third parties.
6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION
Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in
company contact information. This includes contact phone, address, project manager, email
addresses, etc.
6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS
The CONTRACTOR will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes.
IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE
APPLICATION OF CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, TO THE
CONTRACTOR'S DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC RECORDS RELATING
TO THIS CONTRACT, CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC
RECORDS, Rosemarie Call, phone: 727-562-4092 or
Rosemarie.Call@myclearwater.com, 600 Cleveland Street, Suite 600,
Clearwater, FL 33755.
The Contractor's duty to comply with public records law applies specifically to:
SECTION III
Page 24 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public
agency") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder.
b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public
agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or
copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in
Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise
provided by law.
c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public
records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the
duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor
does not transfer the records to the public agency.
d) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public
records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by
the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to
the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any public
records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure
requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of
the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for the retaining public
records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon
request from the public agency's custodian of public records in a foiinat that is
compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency.
e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for
services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not
possess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor
of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow
the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time.
f) The Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the Contractor does not comply
with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract
provisions in accordance with the contract.
g) A contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a
reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes.
h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records
relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award
against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney
fees, if:
1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with
the public records request within a reasonable time; and
2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written
notice of the public request, including a statement that the contractor has not
complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor.
i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of
public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with
the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Global Express Guaranteed, or
certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery,
which may be in an electronic format.
j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the
notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement.
SECTION III
Page 25 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
7. OTHER WORK
7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE
The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform
work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the
project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes.
The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work
will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is
denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the
Contractor's work or schedule.
7.2. COORDINATION
If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the
following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be
identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be
itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all
communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative.
The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly
and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General
Conditions.
The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The
Work.
The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the
Article on Tests and Inspections.
In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer
may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's
right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances.
Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be
responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
SECTION III
Page 26 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE
Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will
either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties,
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are
set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner
and Engineer.
9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the
requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal
responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which
shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other
clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's
Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and
Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an
adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the
amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the
Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work
which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's
Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the
Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed
Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's
Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of
the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop
Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders,
see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with
Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to
Contractor and Completion.
9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other
matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the
Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under
the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will
be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in
SECTION III
Page 27 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be
delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement
promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving
rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other
party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's
Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more
accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit
any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of
the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's
Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the
opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's
written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner
and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty
(30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a
Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or
(ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention
to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor
to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision
and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction
to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days
of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor.
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the
Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision
rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative
with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise
by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the
Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other
matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S
RESPONSIBILITIES
Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other
provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good
faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise
or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose
or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of
them.
Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible
for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative
will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
SECTION III
Page 28 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any
of the work.
Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and
certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by
the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and
approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants.
10. CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time
or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions
or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change
Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work
involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents
(except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work
Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract
Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as
amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case
of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for
Uncovering Work.
The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments
recommended by Owner's Representative covering:
• changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of
acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or
correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or
(iii) agreed to by the parties;
• changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
• changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any
written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions
on Disputes;
• provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from
any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and
applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on
the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing
the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
SECTION III
Page 29 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable
to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or
undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price.
The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any
claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the
general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to
Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the
occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting
data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless
Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate
data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the
claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said
occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted
in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any
claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work
involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such
unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by
unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may
include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices
contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the
Work.
Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and
Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed
changes in the Work, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for
compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items
of direct costs required for the directed work.
The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items:
1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual
payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes
established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with
negotiating the subject change.
2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall
be substantiated through vendors' invoices.
3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs
if specifically used for the Work. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental
rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the
full -unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and
SECTION III
Page 30 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated
with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned equipment will be
paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost
combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated
operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment
on stand-by.
4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater.
The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by
the Contractor or Subcontractor.
A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If
work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five
percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%).
B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above.
C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4.
The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general
supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense.
11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE
ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such
sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances
include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's
costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other
expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the
allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's
Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by
allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be
correspondingly adjusted.
11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of
items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids
and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's
Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to
be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The
Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity
of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from
SECTION III
Page 31 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no
corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes
that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional
expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price
contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the
construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and
completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change
order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction
of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable
deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid.
12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's
Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of
the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence,
unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data
in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the
adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled
as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or
Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements
of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or
Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may
be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as
provided in the article for Changes in the
Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the
Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the
article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.
Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be
delays within the control of Contractor.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension
of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be
Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or
agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within
the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited
to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or
other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work.
SECTION III
Page 32 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL
OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work
for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing
personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these
inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments,
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or
approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required
certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner
permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and
obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for
Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or
of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase
thereof for incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by
Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this
paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative
and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative
has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if
requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and
replaced at Contractor's expense.
If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by
Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's
request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing
as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question,
furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting
from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price
for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,
may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however,
such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract
SECTION III
Page 33 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim
therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order
Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to
any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of
Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this
paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract
Price.
13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either
correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has
been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with
Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or
resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others).
13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required
by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is
found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with
the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the
Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily
correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom.
If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency
where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work
corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages
caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs
of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from
an earlier date if specifically, and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such
Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
SECTION III Page 34 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner
prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation
of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's
Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner
Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating
the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall
be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree
as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change
of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for
final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner.
13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to
correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's
Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if
Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor
fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven
days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights
and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such
corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take
possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has
paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's
Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's
Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to
exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages
incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against
Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract
Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease
in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner
may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims,
costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's
defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones)
because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of
the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder.
14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein.
Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed.
SECTION III
Page 35 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review
an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed once
each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's
Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,
payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will
only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor
and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for
Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement,
completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the
Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of
the Work under contract.
The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and
work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official
Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up as -
built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents.
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative
may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any
progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have
been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report
as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report
is provided.
14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any
Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no
later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall
be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional
sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants
that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens,
claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims
growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics,
materialmen, and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all
supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the
Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of nature hereinabove
designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner
may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the
Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money
deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is
furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be
resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this
sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety.
In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor
and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract
by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment
made in good faith.
SECTION III
Page 36 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and
process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment,
unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review
and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be
paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected,
notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing
payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying
deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. In the latter case,
Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's
Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner.
Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because
of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any
such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner
Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is
defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the
Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required
to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual
knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work
and Termination.
The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's
Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of
Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with
the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to
secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner
to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of
the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in
accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or
Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount
so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor
corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action.
14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION
Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which
(i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the
Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with
Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final
Completion of all the Work subject to the following:
The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part
of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete.
If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to
Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete
and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part
of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in
writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and
SECTION III
Page 37 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner,
Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the
Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to
be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in
writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially
complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will
apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the
division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.
14.5. FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete,
Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and
will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection
reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final
punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this
work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any
corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all
the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take
such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative
and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating
instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other
evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of
inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other
documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for
progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously
delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited
to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, and (ii) executed
consent of the surety to final payment using the form contained in Section V of the Contract
Documents.
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an
acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the
prosecution of the Work and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final
Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating
the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and
accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or
corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished
as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment
SECTION III
Page 38 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted
by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment
shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment
shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative
is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract
Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his
recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon,
Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is
acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return
the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final
payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and
substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount
recommended by Owner's Representative.
14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner
against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing
after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those
previously made in writing and still unsettled.
15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion
thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which
will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so
fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an
approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of
Contract Time.
15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events:
Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or
suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted
from time to time);
Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
Contractor violates Article 6.7.1 of this Section III;
SECTION III
Page 39 of 50
Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative;
Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract
or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the
Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein
specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that
the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or
any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed;
Lack of funding. The City's performance and obligation to pay under this Contract is
contingent upon an annual appropriation by the Clearwater City Council.
The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to
the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances,
construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be
used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the
Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor
but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such
case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If
the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained
by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to
Contractor.
If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be
reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's
Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or
remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the
Work performed.
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect
any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter
accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release
Contractor from liability.
Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may,
without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate
the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents
prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead
and profit on such Work;
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses;
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly
attributable to termination.
SECTION III Page 40 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic
loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE
If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety
(90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's
Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is
submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to
be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's
Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner
payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if
the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not
be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an
Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for
thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon
seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until
payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to
preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change
of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping
Work as permitted by this article.
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for
resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution
method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for
resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on
Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise
have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided,
however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration.
17. MISCELLANEOUS
17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other
documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be
determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner.
17.2. GIVING NOTICE
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice
will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the
notice.
SECTION III
Page 41 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM
Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error,
omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents
or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other
party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of
this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any
applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in
each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without
the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to
notice of assignment.
17.6. RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to three (3)
years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor/Vendor. All terms, conditions
and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in
the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner and must be
agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and
the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department.
17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS
All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers
and/or dumpsters for their disposal and hauling needs. For availability or pricing contact William
Buzzell, at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, by phone: (727) 562-4929 or email:
William.Buzzell@myClearwater.com.
18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to
the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the
Contractor shall work and order thereof.
19. MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all
materials.
SECTION III
Page 42 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General
Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications and Technical
Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. In the case of an
inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by
addendum, the better quality, more stringent or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in
accordance with the Engineer/Architect's interpretation.
21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP)
i 21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS
The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain portions of the materials or equipment for the
Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner
is exempt from the payment of sales tax. The contract price includes Florida sales and other
applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's
Work. Owner -purchasing of construction materials or equipment, if selected, will be administered
on a deductive Change Order basis. The contract price shall be reduced by the actual cost of the
materials or equipment purchased by owner plus the nomially applicable sales tax, even if the
actual cost is in excess of the cost for the materials or equipment as -bid by the Contractor. For
purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects' fees, and any other amounts
that are based on the contract amount, however, the original, as -bid contract amount shall be used.
Directurchase shall be considered for single items or materials that exceed $10,000 in value
p g
and/or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. The Contractor shall provide the Owner an
ODP Summary of all intended suppliers, vendors, equipment and materials for consideration as
ODP materials or equipment (refer to ODP Instructions in Contract Appendix).
21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK
Owner will issue Purchase Orders and provide a copy of Owner's Florida Consumer Certification
' of Tax Exemption and Certificate of Entitlement directly to the Vendor for ODP materials or
equipment. Invoices for ODP materials or equipment shall be issued to the Owner, and a copy sent
to the Contractor.
' Notwithstanding the transfer of ODP materials or equipment by the Owner to the Contractor's
possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all ODP materials or
equipment; therefore, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss at the time of purchase or
delivery of items, unless material is damaged as the result of negligence by the Contractor.
21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials or
equipment furnished to the Owner including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities,
verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining
all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, and inspection and acceptance
of the goods at the time of delivery. The Owner shall coordinate with Contractor and Vendor
delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally
SECTION III Page 43 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
required by the Contractor for the particular materials or equipment furnished. The Contractor
shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials or equipment. The
Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever
nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor.
As ODP materials or equipment are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect
all shipments from the suppliers and approve the vendor's invoice for items delivered. The
Contractor shall assure that each delivery of ODP materials or equipment is accompanied by
documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This
documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and/or an invoice from the supplier conforming to
the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The
Contractor will then forward an electronic copy of the invoice and supporting documentation to
the Owner for payment within fourteen (14) calendar days of receipt of said goods or materials.
Such payment shall be directly from public funds, from Owner to Vendor.
The Contractor shall insure that ODP materials or equipment conform to the Specifications and
determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials or equipment are
patently defective, and whether such materials or equipment are identical to the materials or
equipment ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers
defective or non -conformities in ODP materials or equipment upon such visual inspection, the
Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials or equipment in the
Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming
condition so that repair or replacement of those materials or equipment can occur without undue
delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise
incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming ODP materials or
equipment, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an
inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from
Contractor's incorporation of such materials or equipment into the Project, including liquidated
damages.
21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION
The Contractor shall maintain records of all ODP materials or equipment it incorporates into
Contractor's Work from the stock of ODP materials or equipment in its possession. The Contractor
shall account monthly to the Owner for any ODP materials or equipment delivered into the
Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials or equipment which have been
incorporated in the Contractor's Work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for
all materials, equipment and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair,
maintenance, or damage -repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the
appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor.
The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and
penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that purchases
made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final
determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject
to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not
subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed
assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to ODP materials
or equipment. ODP Purchase Orders must be closed out prior to closing out the contract/Contractor
SECTION III Page 44 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
Purchase Order. If material costs needed for project exceed the ODP Purchase Order amount, the
ODP Purchase Order will not be increased. Amounts in excess of the ODP Purchase Order will be
paid for by the Contractor.
22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF
CONSTRUCTION
22.1. GENERAL
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius,
unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating
the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing
the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction;
general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption
and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name,
1 Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for
residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the
proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample
1 door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of
construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be
a minimum of 4-1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences
and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to
the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all
Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access
routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice
period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries
during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive
1 citizen inquires after business hours.
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items
1 provided in the contract proposal.
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III Page 45 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
22.2. EXAMPLE
BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL . BAY TO BEACH
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY'S DATE: / /
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor performing the (state project name) for the City of Clearwater
in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property.
This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property
owners of the pending start of construction.
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way.
Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the
contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks
will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for
the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors,
textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or
structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not
be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner
wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-
of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any
particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager
at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you.
Construction is anticipated to begin on:
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public
funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this
purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during
the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work.
Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be
SECTION III Page 46 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV,
SCOPE OF WORK.
23.2. PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended
locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined
after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on
sign at the preconstruction conference.
23.3. FIXED SIGN
Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood
of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2 -inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of
two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as
necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground.
Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24 -inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or
attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted
white on both sides with exterior rated paint.
23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24 -inches by 30 -inches (24"x30") in size and will be attached
to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 -inches or
thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable
sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade.
23.5. SIGN COLORING
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering
shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign
itself. Each sign shall depict the City's logo. The Project Manager/City Representative shall
provide the appropriate electronic logo file(s) to the Contractor.
23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT
Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project
site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian
or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will
be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs
will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work
on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations
at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place
until the request for final payment.
23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement,
removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The
Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs
are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
SECTION III
Page 47 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
<PROJECT NAME>
<CONTRACT NUMBER>
<DEPARTMENT NAME> PROJECT
CONTRACTOR.
COMPLETION
COMPLETION DATE•
FUNDING'
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE -
AND .13EALTtFUL • BAY TC) BFAC
.2' minimum h
24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the
Engineer gives written Notice to Proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article
2 of these General Conditions.
It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number
of consecutive calendar days as determined in Section IV, Scope of Work. Contract Time to
commence at start date noted on the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work
within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day,
for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays,
Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on
Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of
the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of
SECTION III
Page 48 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight-hour (8)
day for each Inspector given such assignment.
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage
to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of
final acceptance.
25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS
OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION
FORM AND ISRAEL CERTIFICATION FORM
Pursuant to Section 287.135, Florida Statutes, any vendor, company, individual, principal,
subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in
business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for,
or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount
equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Any vendor, company, individual,
principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or
is engaged in a boycott of Israel, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or
enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for ANY amount.
Each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of
Clearwater that it is not on the aforementioned lists, or engaged in business operations in Cuba or
Syria, or engaged in a boycott of Israel at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in
accordance with Section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes
specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria,
including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing,
leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real
property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. Boycott Israel or
boycott of Israel means refusing to deal, terminating business activities, or taking other actions to
limit commercial relations with Israel, or persons or entities doing business in Israel or in Israeli -
controlled territories, in a discriminatory manner. A statement by a company that it is participating
in a boycott of Israel, or that it has initiated a boycott in response to a request for a boycott of Israel
or in compliance with, or in furtherance of, calls for a boycott of Israel, may be considered as
evidence that a company is participating in a boycott of Israel.
The certification forms (the Certification) are attached hereto, and must be submitted, along with
all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure
to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non-responsive. If the City of
Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed on the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities
in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or
engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, or engaged in a boycott of Israel, then the contract
may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false
certification, the City of Clearwater, on a case-by-case basis and in its sole discretion, may allow
a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract for goods or services,
if the conditions set forth in Section 287.135, Florida Statutes, apply.
The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as
provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification forms.
SECTION III
Page 49 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION III — General Conditions
See Section V of the Contract for Certification Forms to be executed and submitted with the
Bid/Proposal Form.
SECTION III
Page 50 of 50 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION IIIA
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
These Supplemental General Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the
Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All
provisions that are not so amended or supplementary remain in full force and effect. The terms
used in these Supplemental General Conditions have the meanings stated in the General
Conditions.
1. In Paragraph 1 Definitions, delete the definition for Contract Time in its entirety and
insert the following in its place:
Contract Time - The number of days or the dates stated in the Contract to: (i) achieve Milestones,
if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) achieve Final Completion.
2. In Paragraph 1 Definitions, add the following new paragraph:
Final Completion — The time at which the Work has progressed to the point where, in the opinion
of the Engineer, the Work, including all "punch list" items, is fully and finally completed in a good
and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the Contract Documents; is free of all defects and
deficiencies; all required final governmental inspections and approvals have been obtained; and
all final paperwork, including that necessary to prepare a Final Change Order (if required), has
been submitted and approved.
3. Delete Paragraph 2.3 in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE
PROJECT
The Contract Times will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. The
Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No
Work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. A Notice
to Proceed may be issued at any time within 60 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. A
Notice to Proceed will not be issued prior to the Contractor providing the City a certified copy of
the recorded payment and performance bond, pursuant to §255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes.
4. In Paragraph 6.1, delete the last sentence in the 4th paragraph and insert the following in
its place:
The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be the City's actual cost per hour, not to exceed
$120 per hour. When inspection is being provided by the Engineer or a consultant to the City, the
cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be 3.2 times the Engineer's or consultant's direct
technical labor cost.
SECTION IIIA Jan 2021 Page 1 of 4 1/03/2017
5. In Paragraph 6.11.1, delete the first full sentence of the first paragraph and insert the
following in its place:
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples as called for in the Technical Specifications,
and all other items specified to be submitted in the Division 1 specifications, to Engineer for review
as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. Items required to be
submitted in accordance with Division 1 shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements
for Shop Drawings as specified in the General Requirements.
6. Delete the last paragraph in Paragraph 6.11.1 in its entirety and insert the following in its
place:
Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy. Owner
reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for Engineer's actual direct technical labor cost times
a 3.2 multiplier for the review of any first-time submittals that account for a number greater than
two hundred and fifty (250), not to exceed $600 each. Contractor may combine or group similar
items into a single submittal, such as valves or valve O&M manuals, or may group submittals
pertaining to a single item into a single submittal, such as a valve shop drawing and the
corresponding O&M manual. Contractor shall not combine unrelated items into a single submittal,
such as valves and concrete mix. Owner reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for Engineer's
actual direct technical labor cost times a 3.2 multiplier for the review of any re -submittals, or
submittals requiring confirmation, that account for a number greater than seventy-five (75), not to
exceed a cost of $250 each. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously
approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be
back charged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of
Contractor. Said costs shall be Engineer's actual direct technical labor cost times a 3.2 multiplier,
not to exceed $600 each.
7. Delete Paragraph 24 in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
24 CONTRACT TIMES AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
24.1 Time is of the Essence
24.1.1 It is mutually agreed between the parties that time is of the essence. All Contract Time(s)
for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, Final Completion and readiness for final payment
as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.
24.2 Substantial Completion
24.2.1 Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within five hundred ten (510)
days from the date on which Owner issues Contractor a Notice to Proceed.
24.2.2 The term Substantial Completion means the time at which the Work has progressed to the
point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work is otherwise sufficiently complete in accordance
with the Contract Documents, so that the Work can be utilized for the purposes for which it is
SECTION IIIA Jan 2021 Page 2 of 4 1/03/2017
intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or
part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
24.3 Final Completion
24.3.1 Contractor shall achieve Final Completion of the Work within five hundred forty (540) days
from the date on which Owner issues Contractor a Notice to Proceed.
24.4 Liquidated Damages
24.4.1 Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence of this Contract and that Owner
will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified herein, plus any
extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. The parties
also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration
proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly,
instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for
delay (but not as a penalty), Contractor shall pay as follows:
24.4.2 In the event Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the time
specified above, Contractor shall be required to pay Owner the sum as specified in the Contract
per day for each and every calendar day elapsing after the time specified above, until the Contractor
has achieved Substantial Completion.
24.4.3 In the event Contractor fails to achieve Final Completion of the Work within the time
specified above, the Owner shall also have the right to:
A. Terminate the Contractor without further notice;
B. Complete any of the remaining items and backcharge Contractor for all costs incurred
and exercise all other rights and remedies available at law or in equity.
24.5 Work Schedule
24.5.1 If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain
the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains
incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it
becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City
of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer will require the presence of
Inspectors, the Contractor shall reimburse the City of Clearwater, Florida, the costs for each
Inspector given such assignment in accordance with the City's agreement with the Engineer to
provide such services.
24.6 Guarantee
SECTION IIIA Jan 2021 Page 3 of 4 1/03/2017
24.6.1 The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any
damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the
date of final completion.
SECTION IIIA Jan 2021 Page 4 of 4 1/03/2017
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Content:
100 SERIES: GENERAL 1
101. SCOPE OF WORK 1
101-1. GRIT REMOVAL, SALSNES FILTER AND EQUALIZATION SYSTEM
IMPROVEMENTS 1
101-2. SLUDGE BLEND TANK IMPROVEMENTS 2
102. FIELD ENGINEERING 3
101-3. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 3
101-4. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 4
103. DEFINITION OF TERMS 4
101-5. REFERENCE STANDARDS 4
104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 4
105. AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 5
101-6. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 5
101-7. SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 5
101-8. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 5
101-9. EQUIPMENT 5
101-10. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION 5
101-11. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION 5
101-12. VIEWER ORIENTATION 6
101-13. LIGHTING 6
101-14. SPEED OF TRAVEL 6
101-15. VIDEO LOG/INDEX 6
101-16. AREA OF COVERAGE 6
101-17. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 7
106. STREET SIGNS 7
107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 7
101-18. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 7
101-19. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 7
101-20. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 8
101-21. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 9
101-22. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 9
101-23. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 9
101-24. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 9
108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 10
101-25. CLEARANCE OPTIONS 10
101-26. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 10
109. PROJECT WEB PAGES 11
SECTION IV i Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV - Technical Specifications
1
101-27. WEB PAGES DESIGN 11 1
101-28. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 11
101-29. THE "BRIGHT & BEAUTIFUL" LOGO AND ITS USE 11 I 101-30. MAPS AND GRAPHICS 11
101-31. INTERACTIVE FORMS 11
101-32. POSTING 12
101-33. WEB PAGES UPDATES 12
200 SERIES: SITEWORK 13
201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 13
202. OBSTRUCTIONS 14
203. DEWATERING 14
101-34. GENERAL 14
101-35. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 14
204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 15
101-36. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 15
101-37. BASIS OF PAYMENT 15
205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 15
206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 16
101-38. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 16
101-39. BASIS OF PAYMENT 16
207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 16
101-40. GENERAL 16
101-41. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL 16
101-42. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 17
101-43. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 17
101-44. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 17
101-45. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 17
101-46. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 17
101-47. MAINTENANCE 17
101-48. COMPLIANCE 18
208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH
EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES. 18
101-49. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS 18
101-50. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION 18
101-51. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL 18
101-52. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL 18
101-53. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY 19
101-54. RIP -RAP 19
101-55. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL 19
300 SERIES: MATERIALS 20
301. CONCRETE 20
302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 20
SECTION IV
Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
101-56. EXCAVATION 20
101-57. FORMS 20
303. REINFORCEMENT 20
101-58. BASIS OF PAYMENT 21
304. BACKFILL 21
101-59. MATERIALS AND GENERAL 21
101-60. TESTING AND INSPECTION 21
305. RIPRAP 22
101-61. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 22
101-62. BASIS OF PAYMENT 23
400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 24
401. SANITARY MANHOLES 24
101-63. BUILT UP TYPE 24
101-64. PRECAST TYPE 24
101-65. DROP MANHOLES 25
101-66. FRAMES AND COVERS 25
101-67. MANHOLE COATINGS 25
101-68. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 25
402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES 25
101-69. BASIS OF PAYMENT 25
403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 26
101-70. MATERIALS 26
101-71. INSTALLATION 26
101-72. TESTING 27
101-73. BASIS OF PAYMENT 28
404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 28
101-74. INTENT 28
101-75. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 28
101-76. MATERIALS 28
101-77. CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION 29
101-78. TELEVISION INSPECTION 30
101-79. LINER INSTALLATION 31
101-80. LATERAL RECONNECTION 31
101-81. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 31
101-82. PAYMENT 31
405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 32
101-83. SCOPE AND INTENT 32
101-84. PAYMENT 32
101-85. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 32
101-86. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 33
101-87. INFILTRATION CONTROL 34
101-88. GROUTING MIX 34
101-89. LINER MIX 34
SECTION IV iii Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
101-90. WATER 35
101-91. OTHER MATERIALS 35
101-92. EQUIPMENT 35
101-93. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 36
101-94. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 37
500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE
LINES AND APPURTENANCES 43
501. SCOPE 43
502. MATERIALS 43
101-95. GENERAL 43
101-96. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 43
101-97. GATE VALVES 45
101-98. VALVE BOXES 46
101-99. HYDRANTS 46
101-100. SERVICE SADDLES 47
101-101. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 47
101-102. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 48
101-103. TAPPING SLEEVES 48
101-104. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 48
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
503. CONSTRUCTION 48
101-105. MATERIAL HANDLING 48
101-106. PIPE LAYING 49
101-107. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 50
101-108. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES 51
504. TESTS 51
101-109. HYDROSTATIC TESTS 51
101-110. NOTICE OF TEST 52
505. STERILIZATION 52
101-111. STERILIZING AGENT 52
101-112. FLUSHING SYSTEM 52
101-113. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 52
101-114. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 52
101-115. BACTERIAL TESTS 52
506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 53
101-116. GENERAL 53
101-117. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 53
101-118. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 54
101-119. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND
COVERS 54
101-120. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 54
600 SERIES: STORMWATER 55
601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 55
101-121. BASIS OF PAYMENT 55
1
1
1
SECTION IV iv Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
602. UNDERDRAINS 55
101-122. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 55
101-123. BASIS OF PAYMENT 56
603. STORM SEWERS 56
101-124. TESTING AND INSPECTION 56
101-125. BASIS OF PAYMENT 57
604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES 57
101-126. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 57
101-127. PRECAST TYPE 58
101-128. BASIS OF PAYMENT 58
605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 58
101-129. MATERIAL 58
101-130. PERFORMANCE 59
700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 61
701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS,
SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 61
702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 61
101-131. BASE 61
101-132. SUBGRADE 63
703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 64
101-133. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 64
101-134. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT &
QUALITY ASSURANCE 64
101-135. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 65
101-136. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 65
101-137. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 65
101-138. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 65
101-139. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 66
101-140. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 66
101-141. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 67
101-142. BASIS OF PAYMENT 67
704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 67
705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS 68
101-143. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 68
101-144. BASIS OF PAYMENT 68
706. CONCRETE CURBS 68
101-145. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 68
101-146. BASIS OF PAYMENT 68
707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 69
101-147. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 69
101-148. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 69
101-149. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS 69
SECTION IV v Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
1
101-150. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 69
101-151. BASIS OF PAYMENT 69
708. MILLING OPERATIONS 70
101-152. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 70
101-153. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 70
101-154. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 71
101-155. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 71
101-156. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 71
101-157. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 71
101-158. TYPES OF MILLING 71
101-159. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 71
101-160. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 72 1
101-161. BASIS OF PAYMENT 72
800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 73
801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 73
101-162. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 73
802. SIGNING AND MARKING 73 1
101-163. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 74
803. ROADWAY LIGHTING 74
101-164. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 74
900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION 75
901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 75
902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 75
101-165. IRRIGATION 75 1
101-166. LANDSCAPE 85
903. SODDING 99
904. SEEDING 100
905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 100
101-167. SCOPE 100
101-168. SCHEDULING OF WORK 101
101-169. WORK METHODS 101
906. LEVEL OF SERVICE 103 1
907. COMPLETION OF WORK 103
908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 103
909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 104
910. TREE PROTECTION 104
101-170. TREE BARRICADES 104
101-171. ROOT PRUNING 105
101-172. PROPER TREE PRUNING 106
1
1
SECTION IV vi Updated 10/12/2018
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
100 SERIES: GENERAL
101. SCOPE OF WORK
Project Name: NE WRF Improvements
Project Number: 19 -0029 -UT
Scope of Work:
This project is the combination of two projects that were designed separately by two different
consultants. Prior to bidding, the two projects were combined into a single project for bidding and
construction purposes. The scope of each project is described in this section. Technical
specifications (Divisions 2 through 16) have been developed for each project and are applicable to
each project only.
101-1. GRIT REMOVAL, SALSNES FILTER AND EQUALIZATION
SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
This work includes the modifications and improvements to the grit removal and primary treatment
systems, installation of a new equalization basin and pumping system, and inspection and
rehabilitation of existing concrete other flow channels as required.
The Work consists of, but is not limited to, the tasks described hereinafter.
1. Pretreatment System Improvements
a. Demolition and removal of the existing primary sludge thickener equipment and
grit pumps. Modifications to the existing primary sludge thickener structure.
b. Installation of four stacked -tray grit removal units with four recessed impeller
pumps. Installation of one new grit cyclone and new grit classifier, rehabilitation
of two existing cyclones and one existing classifier. All related and associated site
piping, electrical, SCADA, structural work, etc.
c. Demolition of and modifications to the existing odor control equipment and
ductwork as shown on the drawings.
d. Installation of water control gates into existing flow channels and inspection and
rehabilitation of those channels as warranted by the inspection.
e. Repair of existing concrete flow channels
2. Primary Treatment System Improvements
a. Demolition of two existing primary clarifiers and primary sludge pumping
equipment.
b. Installation of three (3) Salsnes filters, three (3) filter feed pumps, three filter sludge
pumps and associated site piping, electrical, SCADA, structural work, etc.
c. Inspection of an existing below grade box channel that conveys flow from the
primary clarifies and rehabilitation of that channel as warranted by the inspection,
if required by the Owner.
3. Equalization system improvements
a. Demolition of and removal of an existing irrigation tank and associated structures
and equipment.
SECTION IV
Page 1 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
b. Installation of one (1) new glass fused -to -steel equalization tank.
c. Installation of two (2) return and two (2) feed pumps, and associated site piping,
electrical, SCADA, structural work, etc.
d. Installation of a compressed gas mixing system for the equalization tank.
4. Rehabilitation and upgrade of an existing in -plant submersible duplex lift station.
5. Design furnish and install temporary bypass pumping, screening, and grit removal
equipment systems to maintain plant flow and treatment during construction of the
permanent improvements. The plant must remain in service during the construction of the
project. Refer to the Construction Phasing Plan for details on the order of the project
construction.
101-2. SLUDGE BLEND TANK IMPROVEMENTS
1. Demolish the Following within the Existing Sludge Storage and Blend Tanks: FRP
Covers, Agitators, Aeration Piping and Diffusers, Existing Piping (as shown in the
Contract Drawings).
2. Remove Grit, Sludge, and Rags Remaining in Existing Sludge Storage and Blend
Tanks and Dispose Off -Site in accordance with FDEP Regulations.
3. Temporarily remove, store, and protect FRP Odor Control Ducts for reconnection
to new Storage and Blend Tank Covers.
4. Repair and Refurbish the Existing Sludge Storage and Blend Tanks and Stairs.
5. Drain, Clean, and Coat the Interior and Exterior of the Existing Sludge Storage and
Blend Tanks.
6. Concrete Repair and Recoating of the Existing Pipe Trench between the North and
South Blend Tanks and addition of new grating.
7. Demolition of Existing Truck Off -Loading Pump Station North of the Sludge
Storage and Blend Tanks, preserving concrete for the stair column footer (as shown
in the Contract Drawings).
8. Install two In -Line Grinder systems as specified on the Drawings near the Blend
Tanks.
9. Install New Mixers in the Sludge Storage and Blend Tanks.
10. Install New Aluminum Covers with Access Ladders and Harness Tie -Off Points
from Walkway on the Sludge Storage and Blend Tanks.
11. Install New Truck Off -Loading Pump Station east of the Sludge Storage and Blend
Tanks.
12. Install Anaerobic Digester Feed Pump Station and Associated Yard Piping at the
Sludge Storage and Blend Tanks.
13. Install New Canopy over New Truck Off -Loading Pump Station and Anaerobic
Digester Feed Pump Station.
14. Remove and Replace Dewatering Feed Pump Station Pumps and Piping located at
Sludge Storage and Blend Tanks.
SECTION IV
Page 2 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
vow
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
1 15. Remove and Replace Dewatering Feed Pump Station Canopy and Concrete
Foundation (as shown in the Contract Drawings).
1 16. Install #57 stone and geotextile fabric in the existing grassed areas (as shown in the
Contract Drawings).
17. Remove concrete sidewalk and pad (as shown in the Contract Drawings),
preserving the pipe trench and leaving appropriate base and support for stair landing
and stair columns supports.
1 18. Remove and Replace process and drain piping between Storage and Blend Tanks
(as shown in the Contract Drawings).
' 19. Modify Yard Piping of the Thickened Primary Sludge (TPSL) and Thickened
Waste -Activated Sludge (TWAS) and install valve concrete pad.
20. Incorporate Electrical, Arc Flash Requirements, Instrumentation & Controls (I&C)
1 and SCADA Integration for Proposed Improvements.
Contract Period: 730 Consecutive Calendar Days
102. FIELD ENGINEERING
' 101-3.LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service
required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to
locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the
construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required
' to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed
professionals under the laws of the State of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3)
complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in
1 Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents.
102-2.1. GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS
Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the
Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall
' preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent
property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any
such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of
construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Professional Land
Surveyor licensed in the State of Florida.
102-2.2. LAYOUT DATA
The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the
Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing
locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record
drawings for the project.
SECTION IV Page 3 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
101-4.LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
If line and grade is supplied by the City, at the completion of all work the Contractor shall be
responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes
used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of
Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer,
will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual
time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is
$100.00. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer
prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2
of these Contract Documents.
103. DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the Purpose of these Technical Specifications, the Definition of Terms from Section III, Article
1 - Definitions of these Contract Documents shall apply.
For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the
estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal is approximate and is given only as a basis of
calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any
responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities
nor shall the Contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of
quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining
thereto.
101-5.REFERENCE STANDARDS
Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local
or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted
and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise.
The most stringent specification prevails in the case where more than one specification is
referenced for the same task.
Contractor shall utilize applicable FDOT Standards and Specifications for tasks that are not
covered by City's Standards and Specifications.
104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, trenches shall be bridged
in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway
or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used,
and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the
Engineer.
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation.
SECTION IV
Page 4 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
' 105. AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS
101-6.CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording
taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements,
rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of
pre -construction conditions.
' 101-7.SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING
' The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in
any area.
101-8.PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio/video
recording shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly
engaged in the business of pre -construction color audio/video recording documentation.
101-9.EQUIPMENT
All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The total audio/video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate
colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio
portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper
volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio/video
' coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage
shall be obtained by walking.
' 101-10. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION
Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general
' location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each
video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording,
exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer
orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description
of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall
also be free from any conversations.
1 101-11. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date
and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time
information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed
periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number,
1 direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme
upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be
sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during video playback. In
SECTION IV Page 5 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video
level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted
to maximize picture quality.
101-12. VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end,
overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas
where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the video viewer, highly
visible yellow flags shall be placed by the Contractor in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the
proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances
for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not
exceed ten feet (10'). The camera shall be filrrily mounted such that transport of the camera during
the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
101-13. LIGHTING
All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No videoing shall be done during
precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to
properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those
subj ects.
101-14. SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to
the number, size and value of the surface features within the construction area's zone of influence.
The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during videoing shall not
exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute.
101-15. VIDEO LOG/INDEX
All videos shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by video number and
project title. Each video shall have a log of that video's contents. The log shall describe the various
segments of coverage contained on the video in terms of the names of the streets or location of
easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers,
engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date.
101-16. AREA OF COVERAGE
Video coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of
construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes,
landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., within the
area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or
defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at
any one time.
SECTION IV
Page 6 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
101-17. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items
provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work.
106. STREET SIGNS
The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is prohibited.
All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division
in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of twenty-four (24)
hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
101-18. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE
TRAFFIC CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic
control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard
warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be
necessary at outlying points.
101-19. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of
performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits
issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project,
incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic
Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management
Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department
of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most
recent addition. This plan shall be reviewed and approved by City Traffic Operations personnel
regardless if MOT plan details are included in the contract plans.
107-2.1. WORK ZONE SAFETY
The general objectives of a program of work zone safety are to protect workers, pedestrians,
bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective
may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives:
• Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
• Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation they will be facing as the
driver proceeds through or around the work zone.
• Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
• Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
• Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
SECTION IV
Page 7 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
• Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or
maintenance work zones.
Per the 2014 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 or latest revision:
"When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only
approved pedestrian longitudinal channelizing devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic
control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and marked detours
shall be provided by appropriate signs."
Per the 2014 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction or latest revision
FDOT Design Standards (DS): 102-5 Traffic Control, 102-5.1 Standards, are the minimum
standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans.
101-20. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of
requirements increases with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting
business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local
streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the
designated "Spring Break" season without prior approval by the City Engineer.
107-2.2. ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County or Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards.
107-2.2.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected
by the construction process.
107-2.3. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL
COLLECTORS
Consult with City Traffic Division staff for preliminary traffic control options.
Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
107-2.3.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Message Board Display, Minimum of seven (7) day notice period prior to road closure and
potentially longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
SECTION IV Page 8 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
1 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
1 107-2.4. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
107-2.4.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
C -View Release
107-2.5. MAJOR ARTERIALS
' 107-2.5.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
News Release
The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than seven (7) days.
101-21. 21. APPR OVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a
specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the
Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone
(727) 562-4747, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control
plan. All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer
or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida.
101-22. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
OPERATION
i
The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control
devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make
' known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The
Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector.
' 101-23. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction
1 costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise.
101-24. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
' SUPERVISOR
The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
' the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control
Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety
Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation.
This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these
Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor
will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a twenty-four (24) hour per day basis and
shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic
control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed
SECTION IV Page 9 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor
shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a twenty-four (24) hour period.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification
of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or
to provide alternate traffic arrangements.
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be
grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated
Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary
suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to
be necessary for project maintenance and safety.
108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE
101-25. CLEARANCE OPTIONS
When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines, the Contractor shall utilize one of the
following options:
Option 1 - Having the power lines de -energized and visibly grounded.
Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of twenty feet (20') of clearance for voltages
up to 350 kV and fifty feet (50') of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV.
Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the
following table.
101-26.
REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES
VOLTAGE
(nominal, kV, alternating current)
MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE
(feet)
Up to 50
10
Over 50 to 200
15
Over 200 to 350
20
Over 350 to 500
25
Over 500 to 750
35
Over 750 to 1,000
45
Over 1,000
(as established by the utility owner/operator
or registered professional engineer who is a
qualified person with respect to electric
power transmission and distribution)
SECTION IV
Page 10 of 107
Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV - Technical Specifications
1 Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200
means up to and including 200kV.
109. PROJECT WEB PAGES
' 101-27. WEB PAGES DESIGN
If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current
City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information
as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts.
Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall
1 consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project
Web Pages.
101-28. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES
Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508
guidelines whenever possible:
http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/
http://www.section508.gov/
In particular, use of variable -width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images,
CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics.
101-29. THE "BRIGHT & BEAUTIFUL" LOGO OGO AND ITS USE
' The City's "Bright & Beautiful" logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and
electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising,
vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the
proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise
distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by City departments and is not to be used by
outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public
' Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from Public
Communications.
1 101-30. MAPS AND GRAPHICS
Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should
1 be posted to the Project Web Pages.
101-31. INTERACTIVE FORMS
The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow the Public's input sent
back to the City regarding the Project.
1
1
SECTION IV Page 11 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
101-32. POSTING
The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web
Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different server than City's Web server, if approved,
should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity
issues.
101-33. WEB PAGES UPDATES
Unless otherwise specified and agreed, Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages
up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's
Webmaster for posting.
SECTION IV
Page 12 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
200 SERIES: SITEWORK
201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK
The Contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner
which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining
the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The
Contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of
all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these
plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency
safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the Contractor.
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to
consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as
OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for
excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the
removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of
a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify their Competent
Person to City staff at the start of construction.
City staff is required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other
similar activity in an excavation prepared by the Contractor. City staff, in conformance with the
OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements, is to only enter an excavation in compliance with these
OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation
if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not
conform to OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the Contractor must either provide
the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's
work at the Contractor's expense.
The construction quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract do not contain
sufficient quantities to allow the Contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open
cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to
OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor
is required to use excavation and trench -shoring methods in compliance with all safety
requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to
complete the project.
Not more than four hundred feet (400') of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the
completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified.
For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be a minimum of six inches (6") wider on each side
than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be
laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow
the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place,
excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling
and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without
compensation.
SECTION IV
Page 13 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
202. OBSTRUCTIONS
Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be
carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and
properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Any
survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before
removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a
registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed
to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved
means.
203. DEWATERING
101-34. GENERAL
Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry".
The Contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work,
using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity
underdrain system, or sumps with pumps.
Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation
and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and
reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the
pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of
handling large volumes of air as well as of water.
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering
operations and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the
surrounding area, or the general public. Contractor shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in
excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this Contractor may be required
to divert the water to a suitable place of discharge as may be determined by the Engineer. Where
possible, Contractor may contain produced groundwater on the project site, a dewatering plan must
be submitted to the City for approval if a discharge permit is not obtained or required.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per linear foot of pipe, or, in the case
of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
101-35. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
203-2.1. DEWATERING DISCHARGE
The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting the Notice of Intent to use the Generic Permit
for the Discharge of Groundwater from Dewatering Operations and associated fee in accordance
with Florida DEP Requirements, F.A.C. 62-621.300(2)(b) prior to discharging of produced
groundwater into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways.
Prior to construction, a dewatering plan must be prepared and submitted to the City for review. It
shall include site-specific notes and details presenting the Contractor's proposed dewatering and
disposal methods. The City will field -inspect the dewatering operation throughout construction.
SECTION IV
Page 14 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated from under pipes,
structures and roadways and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the
Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-site at their expense. The limits and depths of
the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer.
101-36. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of cubic yards of clean fill placed as determined by
either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of
Work and Contract Proposal. Included in the cost of cubic yards of suitable material placed is the
removal, hauling and disposal of unsuitable material.
101-37. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools,
labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable
material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item.
205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING
The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on
the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of
the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross
diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service
connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by
the American Public Works Association as follows:
SAFETY RED
Electric power, distribution & transmission
Municipal Electric Systems
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW
Gas Distribution and Transmission
Oil Distribution and Transmission
Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE
Telephone and Telegraph Systems
Police and Fire Communications
Cable Television
SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE
Water Systems, Slurry Pipe Lines and Potable Water
SAFETY GREEN
Sewer Systems
LAVENDER
Reclaimed Water, Irrigation and Slurry Lines
SECTION IV
Page 15 of 107
Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
WHITE
Proposed Excavation
PINK
Temporary Survey Markings
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension
perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall
be six inch (6") x three inch (3") and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road
and vertical curb shall be four inch (4") x two inch (2") and be placed on the curb face.
206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures,
appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles,
posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through
the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction.
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take
ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State
and Federal Requirements.
101-38. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and
grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
101-39. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and
structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape
trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
101-40. GENERAL
Erosion and sediment control shall conform to the requirements of the FDOT Standard
Specifications for Prevention, Control, and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution. Contractor
shall use temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion
and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater
Standard Indices.
101-41. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL
The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) Florida
Stormwater, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control Inspector Training & Certification. All personnel
working on the Project shall complete illicit discharge training once per calendar year. Contractor
shall provide documentation to the City prior to Notice To Proceed. Example of training and
SECTION IV
Page 16 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
training sign -in sheet will be provided by the City to the Contractor at the Pre -Construction
Meeting.
101-42. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise
authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches
such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other temporary vegetation. Within
sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion
of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original
site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping.
101-43. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL
STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent
erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no
case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
101-44. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by
temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and
Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater
Standard Indices, or equals approved by the City Engineer before installation.
101-45. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS
All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of
excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to
issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.
101-46. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with
the following standards: no more than 400 linear feet of trench shall be open at any one time; and,
wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the
uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream,
channel, road ditch or waterway.
101-47. MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall
and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
SECTION IV
Page 17 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
101-48. COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent
enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order".
208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND
OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES.
Other beach erosion control structures, accompanied by a certified survey showing the location of
the groin or other beach erosion control structure and adjoining groins or other beach erosion
control structures, shall be presented to the city council for final approval. Where steps are
necessary to provide access along the beach to the public, then such steps shall be shown as part
of the plan for groin construction prior to issuance of the permit, and such steps shall be constructed
and maintained in a safe condition at all times.
101-49. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS
Existing seawalls and revetments on natural waterbodies may be replaced with a revetment or with
a vertical seawall with the provision of rip rap placed at the base of the wall up to the mean high
water line for the entire length of the seawall. Revetments and seawalls may be replaced with a
vertical seawall in manmade waterbodies, provided that the seawall is within the property line and
maintains the established shoreline.
101-50. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION
The top of cap elevation for all replacement and new seawalls and seawall caps shall not exceed
4.8 feet N.A.V.D. If the top of a seawall cap is constructed at an elevation differing from the
adjacent property owner top of cap elevation by greater than one foot, then a return wall is required
to sufficiently provide for the break in grade at the property line. Seawalls exceeding 4.8 feet
N.A.V.D. in height prior to the effective date of this article may be maintained, repaired and
replaced to their current height.
101-51. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD
OF THE CCL
Seawalls and revetments located seaward of the coastal construction setback line are controlled by
regulations of the Division of Beaches and Shores of the Florida Department of Environmental
Protection. Replacement of a seawall or revetment that is located seaward of the coastal
construction setback line necessitates submission of a permit application to the state department
of environmental protection.
101-52. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL
The placement of a new seawall waterward of an existing seawall is permitted, subject to the
following conditions:
(a) A Florida registered professional engineer must certify the new seawall design.
(b) The new seawall shall not extend more than 18 inches from the waterward face of the
original alignment of the existing vertical seawall location.
SECTION IV
Page 18 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
(c) The new seawall shall be placed vertically plumb.
(d) Placing a seawall in front of an existing seawall shall only be permitted once unless the
seawall behind the new seawall is removed.
(e) Existing seawall sections that interfere with new seawall location shall be removed.
(f) The new seawall shall include an adequate closure of gaps at each property line.
(g) For zoning purposes, the setbacks for the property will be measured from either the
property line or the waterside of the original seawall slab, whichever is more restrictive,
and will not be adjusted to accommodate the new seawall addition. For purposes of pier
construction, the shore normal dimensions will be measured from the waterside of the
original seawall slab.
101-53. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY
Prior to final inspection and approval of a new or replacement seawall or seawall cap, a post -
construction survey shall be required. Repairs of existing seawalls and seawall caps which do not
alter the height or location shall not be subject to this requirement.
101-54. RIP -RAP
On all -natural waterways, an apron of rip -rap shall be placed at the base of all new and repaired
seawalls up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall to absorb the wave
energy and protect the underlying soft earth or sand from being carried away, as well as to provide
habitat for desirable marine species. This rip -rap shall be required at the base of all new seawalls
and at the time that an existing seawall is repaired where the replacement constitutes greater than
50 percent of the entire length of the seawall or includes the replacement of a panel.
101-55. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL
A retaining wall may be built as an alternative to a vertical seawall, provided that all activities,
including dredging, filling, slope grading, or equipment access and similar activities and all
portions of the wall are located landward of the mean high water line.
SECTION IV
Page 19 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
300 SERIES: MATERIALS
301. CONCRETE
The Contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector or City a minimum of twenty-four (24)
hours in advance of all concrete placement.
Unless otherwise noted elsewhere or directed, the following requirements shall be adhered to:
All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and
Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete
Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have
fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at twenty-eight (28)
days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall
conform to ASTM C-33. All ready -mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all
concrete shall be in the range of three inches (3") to five inches (5"), except when admixtures or
special placement considerations are required.
All concrete shall be tested in the following manner:
Placement of less than five cubic yards (5 cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion.
Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding five cubic yards
(5 cy), one set of three (3) compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28
days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to
provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need
for removal, and compensation or denial thereof.
302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK
101-56. EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon
which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point
six inches (6") outside said concrete work before the forms are placed.
101-57. FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal, except curbs. Curb forms shall be metal
only, unless at radius, intermittent sections less than ten (10) linear feet or by written permission
from Engineer. They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions
required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength
when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing.
303. REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be
deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel
A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Welded wires shall
SECTION IV
Page 20 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
be elevated by the use of chairs. Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM A775/A77
requirements.
101-58. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the
contract unit price for the item of work specified.
304. BACKFILL
101-59. MATERIALS AND GENERAL
Material for backfill other than under Gabion mattress shall be carefully selected from the
excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall
be granular, free from clay, muck, organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard
fragments greater than three inches (3") in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar
material.
Material for backfill under Gabion mattress shall be an A-1 soil meeting AASHTO M145.
Backfill shall be carried up evenly in layer not exceeding eight inches (8") in thickness and shall
be compacted into place by mechanical tamping before the next layer is applied. A hydro -hammer
shall not be used for compaction. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the
sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to twelve inches (12") above the
pipe by tamping or other suitable means.
For backfill in small areas that do not permit any type of tamping, Contractor may use flowable
fill to achieve required density. Flowable fill shall adhere to Section 121 of FDOT specifications.
Where wet conditions are such that dewatering by normal pumping methods would not be
effective, as determined by the Engineer, Contractor may use #57 stone (meeting FDOT's
specifications) and hand tamping until backfill has reached an elevation and condition such as to
make the use of the mechanical tampers practical. Fully wrap the stones with a layer of Type D
filter fabric of FDOT Index 199. Do not place stones within four feet (4') of the ends of trench or
ditch; use normally accepted backfill material at the ends.
Where new cast -in-place concrete work is performed, do not place backfill until the specified
twenty-eight (28) days compressive strength occurs.
Do not allow heavy construction equipment to cross over pipes or culverts until placing and
compacting backfill material to the finished earthwork grade or to an elevation of at least four feet
(4') above the top of the pipe or culvert.
The cost of backfill, flowable fill, alternative approved material for wet conditions, and extra
dewatering effort to achieve required density, etc., shall be included in the contract unit price or
lump sum price for the item of the work specified.
101-60. TESTING AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, approved
by the Owner, to perform density testing on backfilled material. All testing shall be witnessed by
SECTION IV
Page 21 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
the Owner's Representative. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. The
Contractor shall be charged for all retests and re -inspection services.
Backfill under all type of impervious areas and around structures: Backfill in these areas shall be
compacted to a minimum of 98% Modified Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D 1557 or
ASSHTO T 180. Tests shall be performed up to the proposed bottom of pavement elevation.
Backfill outside of impervious areas: Backfill in these areas shall be compacted to a minimum of
95% Standard Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D-698 or AASHTO T-99. Tests shall be
performed up to the proposed finished grade.
Backfill Testing: The Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of backfill compaction by
performing density testing. For each test location, density testing shall be performed at eight inch
(8") lifts. The character of the backfill material will be observed during the excavation for density
testing to determine conformance with the specifications. Density testing shall be performed using
nuclear field density equipment or conventional weight -volume methods. If the weight -volume
method is used, volume shall be determined by using the sand replacement test (ASTM D 1556)
or liquid displacement methods (ASTM D 2167). If nuclear methods are used, the trench correction
effect shall be accounted for by recalibrating the nuclear gauge on its calibration block at the
location of each test prior to taking the density measurement. The Contractor shall furnish all
equipment, tools, and labor to prepare the test site for testing.
Normal Testing Frequency: One test shall be performed for each one hundred feet (100') of backfill
or fraction thereof or for each single run of pipe/culvert connecting two (2) successive structures
whichever is less. The location of the test within each section shall be selected by the Owner's
Representative. Testing shall progress as each one hundred foot (100') section is completed. Four
(4) tests equally spaced around each structure shall be performed on each eight inch (8") lift.
Testing which indicates that unacceptable material has been incorporated into the backfill, or that
insufficient compaction is being obtained shall be followed by expanded testing to determine the
limits of the unacceptable backfill.
Expanded Testing Requirements: If normal testing within a testing section indicates unacceptable
backfill, the Owner's Representative may require additional testing within the same test section to
determine the limits of unacceptable backfill. Additional testing required by the Owner's
Representative shall be paid for by the Contractor and shall not exceed testing of four (4) additional
locations within the test section. Unacceptable backfill within the limits established by the testing
shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Additional
testing beyond that required may be performed by the Contractor at his expense to further delineate
limits of unacceptable backfill.
305. RIPRAP
The work included in this specification includes the construction of riprap as shown on the plans.
The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
101-61. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the dry weight in tons.
SECTION IV
Page 22 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
101-62. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand -cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling,
equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand -cement and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and
shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing
and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No
payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap.
SECTION IV
Page 23 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER
401. SANITARY MANHOLES
101-63. BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings.
Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of
adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a
radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly.
Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete
manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer
pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe.
The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed
twenty four inches (24").
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches
(24").
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled, and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of manholes.
The entire interior and exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch (1/2") of
mortar.
Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher
course.
101-64. PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the
City Engineer.
AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of five
inches (5"). The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall
be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum
concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days.
Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for
approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance
to these specifications unless letter from Contractor requesting specific variance is approved by
the City Engineer.
Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as
numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being
sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system
shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered.
SECTION IV
Page 24 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of
Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2.
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings
are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed.
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five inches
(5") thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
401-2.1. MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring
shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade
changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 703-7, Asphaltic Concrete —
Adjustment of Manholes.
101-65. DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as
detailed on the drawings.
101-66. FRAMES AND COVERS
Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with
or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Index 301.
101-67. MANHOLE COATINGS
The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II
Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as
manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal.
The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of Sherwin Williams
Targuard® Coal Tar Epoxy or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or
PP -R Liner with a minimum thickness of two millimeters (2 mm).
101-68. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a
manhole adapter coupling by NPC Kor-N-Seal® or approved water stop coupling.
402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER
STRUCTURES
Sanitary Sewer Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by
the Engineer.
101-69. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
SECTION IV
Page 25 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
101-70. MATERIALS
403-2.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON.
Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35.
Sewer pipe with more than ten feet (10') of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly
marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber
sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212. The laying length
of pipe joints shall be a maximum of twenty feet (20').
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings
for gravity sewer shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main
except pipe shall be interior Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline
easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral
connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall
be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in these Technical
Specifications Article 501. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property
line.
403-2.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE
FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless
otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile
iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for
water main pipe except that DIP shall be Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with
manufacturer 's recommendations.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation
shall be rejected.
101-71. INSTALLATION
403-2.3. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of Thermoplastic gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended
practices contained in ASTM D 2321.
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable
width (typically pipe OD plus eight inches (8") to twelve inches (12") on each side) allowing
working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable
sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb
compacted haunching material or pipe alignment.
Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation
of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water.
SECTION IV
Page 26 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or
misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the Contractor will be required to
remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (one half inch (1/2") diameter
aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe.
Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint two (2) feet in length and shall use an
approved water stop around pipe joint entry.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The Contractor is
required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction
inspector the location of all new laterals.
403-2.4. FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Article 501 of these Technical
Specifications for water main pipe.
101-72. TESTING
403-2.5. TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all
conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may
be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above
groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head
of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water
table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall
the infiltration or exfiltration exceed fifty (50) gallons per inch of diameter per mile per day. The
Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or
exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the
Contractor at their own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by
uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by
the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found
to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains
to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance.
Any dips or sags of more than five percent (5%) of the inside pipe diameter dimension shall be
cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or
all sections of the line.
403-2.6. TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi for two (2) hours, as described
in Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
SECTION IV
Page 27 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
101-73. BASIS OF PAYMENT
403-2.7. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per linear foot per
appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment
shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes.
Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per linear foot of pipe as measured from the centerline
of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the
property line.
Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the
installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill
and grading.
403-2.8. FORCE MAIN PIPE
Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Article 501 of these
Technical Specifications for water main pipe.
404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING
101-74. INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of eight inch (8") to
twelve inch (12") sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless,
continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand
exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a
complete, fully restored and functioning installation.
101-75. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER
ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor
prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive track record for the fold and
form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval
for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed
liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and
successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified
by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and
complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer.
101-76. MATERIALS
Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell
classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to
ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from
the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have
SECTION IV
Page 28 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property
values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements:
Material
Property
ASTM Method
Value
HDPE
HDPE
Tensile Strength
D 638
3,300 psi
Elasticity Modulus
E=113,000 psi
Impact Strength
D 256 A
3.0 ft-lb/in
Flexure Modulus
E=136,000 psi
Expansion Coeff.
c=0.009 in/in/deg F
At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance
with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous
throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults.
The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from
the manufacturer, that the material confoinns with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may
at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above
requirements.
Liner shall be marked at five (5) foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the
manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded.
Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design
calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading,
water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of fifty (50) years, and no structural
strength retained from the existing pipe. Any liner system must be approved by the Engineer prior
to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or liner system approval must be
received by the Engineer no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the date for receiving bids.
101-77. CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer
from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal
in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control
the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's
treatment plants.
SECTION IV Page 29 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
101-78. TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed,
all pipe sections shall be visually inspected with a digital camera and recorded in DVD format as
specified below.
404-2.1. VIDEO, PHOTO CAPTURE AND DATA COLLECTION
REQUIREMENTS FOR MANHOLE AND PIPELINE INSPECTION
This section describes the requirements of the Contractor in providing the following minimum
requirements for Video, Photo Capture and Database structure to the City. The City is currently
using CUES Granite XP video and data collection software. The Contractor shall provide the TV
Inspections in the same Granite XP database, photo and video capture format. The Contractor -
provided TV Inspections, Database, DVDs, Photos and related files shall have the ability to direct
synchronize to the City's existing Granite XP database.
404-2.2. IMAGE (PHOTOS) CAPTURE FORMAT AND
REQUIREMENTS
The Inspection image files (pictures) shall have the ability to export to Industry Standard Formats
to include JPEG, BMP, and TIFF formats and be transferable by disk, DVD and/or external hard
drive to an external personal computer utilizing standard viewers and printers.
404-2.3. DIGITAL VIDEO FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS
Digital video files (Inspection Videos) shall be captured and/or recorded in the MPEG 1, 2 or 4
format or as specified by the City. The Video capture files shall be in MPEG format with data
linking (Inspection Observations) to the database file(s). The "Link" of the video capture file to
the database observation file is required. The inspection observation(s) shall link to the video
record in real-time.
The accompanying database shall support the following code systems: WRc, PACP, CUES
standard, or current code system being utilized by the City. The Database and Software program
(Granite XP V2.X) shall be able to import asset data from an ArcGIS (City current version) geo-
database file utilizing the network features to associate Sewer Mains with corresponding Sewer
Nodes.
The database structure shall retain information on the various structures found within a sewer or
storm system. It is important that the structures, nodes, manholes and pipe identifiers and related
attribute information be retained as separate tables from the Inspection allowing import of existing
data from multiple sources. The data structure allows different projects to reside within a single
database. Information gathered in projects shall be available to view by project or by system. Data
gathered during project inspection shall be available to view by the selected structure. Therefore,
all inspections can be viewed on a structure even if gathered in different projects.
404-2.4. SYNCHRONIZATION
The database shall have the ability to synch assets and inspections from replicated databases. The
synch process should have built-in error checking for duplicates, updates and any modifications to
SECTION IV
Page 30 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
the data being synched. This allows for multiple sources of data to be effectively consolidated into
a single unitary database for analysis and evaluation.
101-79. LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the
full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner
product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods
approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe,
pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately
notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation.
Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or
problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of
irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner
shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at their expense.
OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met.
101-80. LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer.
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be
resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected
unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. Contractor shall notify all local system users
when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers
with appropriate information regarding the construction project.
101-81. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight (8) hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup
occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property
damage costs and claims.
101-82. PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per linear foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc., to provide a fully
completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of
manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
SECTION IV
Page 31 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
101-83. SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of
manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in-place liner systems used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these
specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations
for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids
and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will
submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be
met.
101-84. PAYMENT
Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed
liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment
will be made for the following items: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal;
Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill;
Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe
extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and
grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work
as required for a complete and operable system. The cost of such work shall be included in the pay
item, per linear foot of liner.
101-85. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS
405-2.1. MATERIALS
405-2.1.1. LINERS
Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound
vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise
stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The
Contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is
solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory
certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753.
405-2.1.2. MORTAR
Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two (2) and three (3)
parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve.
405-2.1.3. GROUTING
Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four (4) bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of
clean, well graded sand.
SECTION IV
Page 32 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
405-2/. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
' Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal
of the manhole ring and corbel section.
Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls.
1 Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole.
Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the
manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner.
If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar.
Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing
inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts.
Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout.
Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside
of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertical as possible.
Pour six inches (6") of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure
an adequate bottom seal.
Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the
existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal
the area around the manhole liner and piping.
Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout.
Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure.
Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed.
' Observe water tightness and repair any visible leakage.
Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod.
Where manholes fall in paved areas, refer to Standard Detail Index 104, "Street and Driveway
Replacement for Concrete and Asphaltic Concrete Surfaces".
101-86. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious
' liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong
Seal MS 2 product.
Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The
' applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory
training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the
Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious
liner of a minimum one half inch (1/2") thickness using a machine specially designed for the
application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and with the following specifications which includes:
1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
1
SECTION IV Page 33 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a two
(2) coat application.
405-2.3. MATERIALS
405-2.3.1. PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and
shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi
3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi
4. Cement Sulfate resistant
5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf
101-87. INFILTRATION CONTROL
Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
101-88. GROUTING MIX
Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable and have a minimum
twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and a one (1) day strength of 50 psi.
101-89. LINER MIX
Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces
and shall have the following minimum requirements at twenty-eight (28) days:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi
2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi
3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi
4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H.
5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi
6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Project site. Bag weight
shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic
foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be one -
SECTION IV
Page 34 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
half inch (1/2") to five-eighths inch (5/8") long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products
shall, in the unmixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight.
Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to
the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide
conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site.
Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 to 56 pounds
per cubic foot.
Cement content must be 65% to 75% of total weight of bag.
One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 to
108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of 0.67 cubic foot of volume.
Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than one-half inch (1/2") in
length nor greater than five-eighths inch (5/8") in height.
Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any
heavy metal.
Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process.
A two (2) coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat
rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be
spray applied to assure a minimum of one-half inch (1/2") thickness after troweling or brush
finishing to a relatively smooth finish.
101-90. WATER
Shall be clean and potable.
101-91. OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
101-92. EQUIPMENT
A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of
producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles
with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete
with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered.
Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete
with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the
hydraulic system and air compressor.
SECTION IV
Page 35 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
101-93. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
405-2.4. PREPARATION
1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and
to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole.
2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high
pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and
concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large
voids with quick setting patching mix.
3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the
infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the
quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present,
drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required.
4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting
mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material.
405-2.5. MIXING
For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the
Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for thirty (30) seconds to one (1) minute after all
materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare
another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without
interruption until each application is complete.
405-2.6. SPRAYING
The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running
water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks,
crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The
light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the
first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be
fifteen (15) minutes to one (1) hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application
made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of one-half inch (1/2"). The surface is then
troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the
surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks.
Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than twenty-four (24) hours
have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed, and the bench is
sprayed such that a gradual slope is produced from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the
edge of the invert being no less than one-half inch (1/2"). The wall bench intersection shall be
rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall
have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow.
SECTION IV
Page 36 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
405-2.7. PRODUCT TESTING
' At some point during the application, at least four (4) two inch (2") cubes may be prepared each
day or from every fifty (50) bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the
Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C
1 109.
405-2.8. CURING
Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is
imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been
completed.
405-2.9. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
' Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed, and the seal inflated in accordance with the
' manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10") of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum
to drop to nine inches (9"). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds
for forty-eight inch (48") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty inch diameter (60"), and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy-two inch (72") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
101-94. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER
PRODUCT SYSTEM
405-2.10. SCOPE
Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring
structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of:
1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume
infiltration.
2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows:
a. Hydrophilic foam -injected through wall of manhole to fill voids, and/or
b. Hydrophilic gel -injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks
3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing)
4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of one-half inch (1/2")
5. Epoxy coating, minimum of thirty (30) dry mils
1
1
SECTION IV Page 37 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
405-2.11. MATERIALS
405-2.11.1. REPAIRING CEMENT
A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to
instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The
repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have
the following properties:
Set Time
Tensile Strength
ASTM C 307
Compressive Strength
ASTM -C 109
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78
1-3 minutes
1 day 510 psi
3 days 745 psi
28 days 855 psi
1 day 3,125 psi
7 days 7,808 psi
28 days 9,543 psi
1 day 410 psi
3 days 855 psi
28 days 1,245 psi
405-2.11.2. HYDROPHILIC GROUTING
Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either
one or both of the following materials:
1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks and
voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows:
Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86
Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86
Bonding Strength 250-300 psi
2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole to prevent
seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of
manhole. Physical properties are as follows:
Density 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574
Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412
Elongation 250% ASTM D-3574
Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D-1042
Toxicity Non Toxic
405-2.11.3. WATERPROOFING
A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system
combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to
seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three
components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the
substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks
the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for
SECTION IV Page 38 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
approximately six (6) months. Upon completion, the color will be light grey. Physical properties
are as follows:
Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement
ASTM C882 Modified 1,200 1,800 psi
Tensile Strength
(7 day cure)
ASTM C 190
Permeability
(3 day cure)
CRD 48 55
380 psi (2.62 MPa)
325 psi (2.24 MPa)
8.1x1W-10 cm/sec to
7.6x1OA-11 cm/sec
at 100% RH
at50%RH
405-2.11.4. CEMENT LINING
A self -bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and
provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following
properties:
Calcium Aluminate Cement
12 Hrs
24 Hrs
7 Days
28 Days
Astm C 495
Compressive Strength, Psi
7000
11000
12000
13000
Astm C 293
Flexural Strength, Psi
1000
1500
1800
2000
Astm C 596
Shrinkage At 90% Humidity
--
<0.04
<0.06
<0.08
Astm C 666
Freeze -Thaw Aft 300 Cycle
No Damage
Astm C 990
Pull - Out Strength
200 - 230 Psi Tensile
Astm C 457
Air Void Content (7 Days)
3%
Astm C 497
Porosity/Adsorption Test
4 - 5%
Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after twenty-four (24) hours moist curing at 68 degrees
Fahrenheit.
The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C
1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one (1) pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture
shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch (1/2"), but no greater than two inches (2").
It will have a dark grey color.
405-2.11.5. EPDXY COATING
A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of thirty (30) dry mils.
This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface,
including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids,
can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes.
Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the
following properties at 75 degrees Fahrenheit:
Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1
Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray
SECTION IV
Page 39 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
Pot Life, hrs 1
Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000
Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20
Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max 5
Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800
405-2.11.6. CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
The sanitary sewer liner shall be resistant to: Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet
Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%),
Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil,
Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others.
405-2.12. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
405-2.12.1. PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW
Work shall proceed as follows:
1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client.
2. Clean manhole and remove debris.
a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris.
b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease.
c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure.
d. Remove debris from work area.
3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement.
(Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required
by client.)
4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration.
5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as
needed.
6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces.
7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces.
NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step
6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four (24) hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step
7) to cement lining.
405-2.12.2. PREPARATION
An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs
shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any
loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines
and other areas by either plugging the lines (where feasible) or inserting protective screens.
SECTION IV
Page 40 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
405-2.12.3. STRUCTURAL REPAIR
Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks
and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization.
405-2.12.4. INFILTRATION CONTROL
Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam.
1. Drill five-eighths inch (5/8") holes through active leaking surface.
2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Inject material until water flow stops.
4. Remove fittings (if necessary).
405-2.12.5. WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS
1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat.
2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand.
3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal
forming process.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks.
5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat.
6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining.
405-2.12.6. CEMENT LINING
1 Dampen surface.
2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application.
3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (1/2") (and no more than two
inches (2")) has been achieved.
4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole.
5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish.
6. Allow for a twenty-four (24) hour cure time prior to epoxy coating.
NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing
times.
405-2.12.7. EPDXY COATING
Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a
thickness of at least thirty (30) mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six
(6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours.
SECTION IV
Page 41 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
405-2.12.8. CLEAN UP
The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area.
405-2.12.9. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed, and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10") of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum
to drop to nine inches (9"). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds
for a forty eight inch (48") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety
(90) seconds for seventy-two inch (72") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test,
necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests
shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
405-2.12.10. WARRANTY
All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years,
provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used.
SECTION IV
Page 42 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER
MAINS, FIRE LINES AND
APPURTENANCES
501. SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in
connection with the construction of potable water mains, fire lines, reclaimed water mains and
appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up.
502. MATERIALS
101-95. GENERAL
Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall
be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of
workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and
engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment
and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation,
except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings
and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects
during shipment and construction.
101-96. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
502-2.1. DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table:
Size
Class
Thickness
(In.)
Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI)
4"
51
0.26
350
6"
50
0.25
350
8"
50
0.27
350
12"
50
0.31
350
The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to
centerline of pipe.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with
approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 104/A21.4 80 or latest revision.
SECTION IV
Page 43 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Ductile iron pipe shall be used for all hydrant installations and for fire line installations from the
main to the backflow preventer.
502-2.2. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe four inch (4") through eight inch (8") shall be in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible
for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings.
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
Size
Dimension Ratio
(OD/Thick.)
Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI)
Laying Length
(Ft)
4
18
150
20
6
18
150
20
8
18
150
20
Pipe larger than eight inch (8") shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require
the use of ductile iron in sizes four inch (4") through eight inch (8") when needed due to laying
conditions or usage.
The bell of four inch (4") and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid
cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869.
Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling,
storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
material for potable water service.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated twelve (12) gauge A.W.G.
solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about eighteen inches (18")
between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a two inch (2") PVC
pipe to twelve inches (12") minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The two inch (2") PVC
pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the two inch (2") PVC pipe shall be
plugged with a two inch (2") removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous
with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is
to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows.
502-2.3. FITTINGS AND JOINTS
Fitting from four inch (4") through sixteen inch (16") in size will be compact ductile iron cast in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets
shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure
rating shall be 350 psi. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with
requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA
SECTION IV Page 44 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA)
manufacture will be acceptable.
502-2.4. RESTRAINT
Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical
restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be
restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants
shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors.
502-2.5. PIPE WITHIN CASING
All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining
gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing
spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing.
Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris
within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by
the Engineer.
101-97. GATE VALVES
Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with
respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures,
shall be hand wheel operated with rising stems. Valves four inches (4") and larger, buried in earth
shall be equipped with two inch (2") square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall
be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening
for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise).
Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than
150 psi cold water, non -shock.
The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body.
Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so
supported that their weight is not carried through valves.
Two Inch (2") diameter and smaller are not allowed. These should be approved ball valves.
Three Inch (3") diameter are not allowed.
Gate Valves, four inch (4") to sixteen inch (16") diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate
valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard
Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent
with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure,
all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion
resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 -ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside
and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.
Gate valves larger than sixteen inches (16") shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be
resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI/AWWA.
These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening
unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped
SECTION IV
Page 45 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers
and valved by-pass.
101-98. VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron.
No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be three-piece
valve box assemblies. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to
accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided
where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be
included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for
potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed
water valve boxes and pad detail.
101-99. HYDRANTS
No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of
the City of Clearwater potable water system:
• Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant,
• Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant
• AVK Nostalgic 2780.
• American Darling B -84-B.
No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater.
Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502
and include the following modifications:
1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery.
2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and must be UL/FM
listed.
3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure.
4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and
bottom with an 0 -ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections
with the break flange located approximately two inches (2") above the ground line.
Breakaway bolts are not allowed.
6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction.
7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and
corrosion due to moisture.
8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate
operation.
9. Operating nut shall be a #7 one and a half inch (1-1/2") pentagon nut.
SECTION IV Page 46 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, one quarter (1/4) turn type with 0 -ring seals or
threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device.
11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber.
12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0 -
rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe.
13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections
with a breakable coupling.
14. Hydrant shall have a six inch (6") Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories.
15. Hydrant shall have a five and one quarter inch (5-1/4") valve opening, and shall be a left
hand operation to open.
16. Hydrant shall be without drains.
17. Hydrant shall have two (2) two and one half inch (2-1/2") hose nozzles and one (1) four
and one half inch (4-1/2") pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National
Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications.
18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with
AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision.
All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502.
Restrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the
hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Restrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement
of the hydrant.
All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be
shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system.
No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of
Clearwater's Engineering Department.
101-100. SERVICE SADDLES
Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to four inch (4") P.V.C. water main. The largest
service connection allowable on four inch (4") main shall be one and one half inch (1-1/2").
Service saddles shall be used on all two inch (2") service connections to six inch (6") and larger
mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron
with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps.
101-101. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA
Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the
tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials.
2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and
no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory
material shall be used.
SECTION IV
Page 47 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects
shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site.
4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in
handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The
Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
101-102. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed
within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed
by City work forces.
Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service
connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision.
Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, and when
required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from
possible backflow of water within the customer's private system. The types of devices allowed
are:
1. Double Check Valve Assembly - a device composed of two (2) single, independently
acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end
of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the water tightness of each check valve.
2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device - a device containing a minimum
of two (2) independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically
operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit
must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each
device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
101-103. TAPPING SLEEVES
Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel
body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel
bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and three-quarter inch (3/4") bronze test plug.
101-104. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
Blow offs are not allowed.
503. CONSTRUCTION
101-105. MATERIAL HANDLING
1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with
hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such
materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe
already on the ground.
SECTION IV
Page 48 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any
part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at their
expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or
near the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
101-106. PIPE LAYING
503-2.1. ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and
hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems
plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and
sterilization of the pipe can be completed.
The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of thirty inches (30") and a maximum
of forty-two inches (42") below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid
conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during
the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required,
the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and
grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction
of the obstructions.
503-2.2. INSTALLATION
Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by
the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and
hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or
other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective
coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench.
If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall
be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs
or rejection of the damaged items.
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended
above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined
with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or
fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or
rejection.
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe,
and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and
dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being
placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without
getting earth into the pipe, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench,
a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the
SECTION IV Page 49 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing
or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the
pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with
approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent
dirt from entering the joint space.
At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight
plug or other means approved by the Engineer.
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and
workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end
at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of ten percent (10%) or greater, the laying shall start at
bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade.
Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal
plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems, or where long radius curves are permitted, the
amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of
ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions.
No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable.
101-107. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
503-2.3. GENERAL
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified
above for installation of pipe.
503-2.4. VALVES
Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless
shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed
eighteen inches (18") from the main line.
The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb
over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement
or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5
for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for
reclaimed water valve box and pad detail.
503-2.5. HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and
minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located ten
feet (10') of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the
hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of
two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 4 of 4 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall
SECTION IV
Page 50 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's
Engineering Department.
All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the
curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with
nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer.
Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a six inch (6") ductile iron branch controlled by
an independent six inch (6") gate valve. If hydrant is placed greater than ten feet (10') from the
main, an additional valve shall be installed at the hydrant and shall be included in the hydrant
assembly cost.
503-2.6. ANCHORAGE
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by
attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturer's
recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining
mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant run out length precludes the use
of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on
the plans.
101-108. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this
contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made
until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and
the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer.
Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made
in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual
conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized, and pipe will be properly swabbed before
connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the
supervision of the City of Clearwater.
504. TESTS
101-109. HYDROSTATIC TESTS
After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service
taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds
per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All
mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any
hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump
connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all
necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at
their expense.
The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water
for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line.
SECTION IV
Page 51 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
101-110. NOTICE OF TEST
The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative forty-eight (48) hours
advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
505. STERILIZATION
Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new
construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance
with AWWA C651.
101-111. STERILIZING AGENT
The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal
Specification O -S -602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or
"Perchloron".
101-112. FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing
shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not
available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices
generally at the ends of the lines.
101-113. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE
All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a
minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then
remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more
than twenty-four (24) hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be
opened and closed several times during the contact period.
101-114. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free
residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be
in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set.
101-115. BACTERIAL TESTS
After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of
Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water
from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall
forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial
examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of
coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the
absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system
is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as
outlined above.
SECTION IV
Page 52 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in
accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall
have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples
shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The
City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of
Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation.
506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
101-116. GENERAL
Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment
for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for
the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all
labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made
for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of
work:
• Clearing and grubbing
• Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
• Shoring and/or dewatering
• Structural fill
• Backfill
• Grading
• Tracer wire
• Refill materials
• Joint materials
• Tests and sterilization
• Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
101-117. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
506-2.1. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type
satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line,
including the length of valves and fittings.
506-2.2. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains completely and ready for operation.
SECTION IV
Page 53 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
101-118. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
506-2.3. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings
satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the
body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the
tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C 110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight
will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance.
506-2.4. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings.
101-119. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES
COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS
506-2.5. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished
and installed.
506-2.6. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all
plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover.
101-120. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
506-2.7. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed.
The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in
Article 501-2.5 of these Technical Specifications. No exceptions.
506-2.8. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant completely including necessary thrust
anchorage, six inch (6") pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on
the hydrant lead.
SECTION IV Page 54 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
600 SERIES: STORMWATER
601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES
Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by
the Engineer.
101-121. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
602. UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor shall construct sub -surface drainage pipe as directed in the Scope of Work and
detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be
embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface
covered with a non -degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of
#6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be eight inches (8") in diameter,
polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth
Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in
conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in
FDOT Section 948-1.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35.
Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe that
exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C,
manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of
splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting
and with a double gasket joint.
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non -perforated pipe
with compacted backfill. All poly -chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to
ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be
the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain
aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal)
per the construction detail drawings.
Filter aggregate for underdrains shall be as specified in the FDOT Standard Specifications, Section
901 — Course Aggregate, and shall be either #6 or #57. If #57 is used, it must be washed and
screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag, or crushed gravel.
101-122. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of linear feet of eight inch (8") Sub -drain in place and accepted.
SECTION IV
Page 55 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
101-123. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per linear foot for underdrain as measured above, which
shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall
include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically
underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and
sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item.
603. STORM SEWERS
All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be steel reinforced concrete unless
otherwise approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 430 of FDOT
Standard Specifications.
All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent
(as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit
price for the pipe.
All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty
is found in fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before
laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to
be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply
wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts
coincide and pipe is clear throughout.
101-124. TESTING AND INSPECTION
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a watertight sewer under all conditions.
The work under this Article shall include the internal video recording of new stormwater drainage
pipes and drainage structures. The Contractor shall provide the City with a video of the completed
stormwater drainage system, and a written report. The Contractor shall pump down and clean the
pipes and drainage structures, to the satisfaction of the City, prior to video recording. The video
shall be of the standard DVD format, in color, with all the pertinent data and observations recorded
as audio on the DVD. The data should include:
1) An accurate recorded footage of the pipe lengths.
2) The drainage structure number and pipe size.
3) The run of the pipe and direction of flow (i.e. from S-1 to S-2).
4) Details of structural defects, broken pipes, sags, dips, misalignments, obstructions and
infiltration.
The written report shall include the four (4) items listed previously.
All visual and video recording inspections shall be completed by the Contractor and be in
accordance with Section 430-4.8 of FDOT Standard Specifications. Any deficient or damaged pipe
discovered during the video recording process shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair
or replace at their own expense within the contractual duration.
SECTION IV
Page 56 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
As a complement to the video report, the Contractor shall also provide digital photos of areas of
concern in electronic (computer CD/DVD) and hard copy form (in color).
All known pipe breaks or those breaks discovered after the video inspection shall be repaired by
the Contractor regardless of the test allowances. Faulty sections of drainage pipes or drainage
structures rejected by the Engineer shall be removed and re-laid by the Contractor. Sections of pipe
that are repaired, re-laid or replaced shall be accompanied with a corresponding post construction
video inspection at the Contractor's expense. In all cases that a leak is found, re -inspection shall
be required at the Contractor's expense, to confirm that the problem has been resolved.
101-125. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured
along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes
or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required
to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, gravel bedding if needed for
stabilization, labor and incidentals, etc.).
604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR
OTHER STORM STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Index Numbers 201 to 231.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans
and applicable parts of the specifications, Articles 301, 302, 303 and 202, and as approved by the
Engineer. Said structures shall be protected from damage by the elements or other causes until
acceptance of the work.
101-126. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Built up type manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on
Index Numbers 201. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape
conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a
smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made
gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with grout.
The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with a skim coat of one half inch (1/2") of
mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a
concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer.
SECTION IV
Page 57 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
101-127. PRECAST TYPE
Precast manholes shall be constructed as shown on Index 202. The manhole base shall be set on a
pad of dry native sand approximately five inches (5") thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and
junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will
not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in
accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturer's option.
Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside,
the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure
be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole
ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be
provided.
101-128. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis.
605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
101-129. MATERIAL
605-2.1. PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES
605-2.1.1. GABION & MATTRESS BASKETS
Gabion and mattress baskets units shall conform to ASTM A975, be of non -raveling construction
and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns
developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of
0.106 inches.
605-2.1.2. PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less
than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious
effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material
difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from
acids and resistant to abrasion.
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated
wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches
by 4 '/A inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating)
shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core,
0.134 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core
plus PVC coating) of 0.174 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength
(75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and
having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of
alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener
SECTION IV
Page 58 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining
in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to
6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge
wires.
605-2.1.3. GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:
The filler stone shall be from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started.
Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier
for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of
2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The
individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote
deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be
retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical
diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by
weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening.
Crushed concrete shall not be used for filler material.
605-2.1.4. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 985.
101-130. PERFORMANCE
Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations
and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the
sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets
of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit
construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of
these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and
flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the
gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided
by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary
diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this
juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to
resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand
in a section of mesh is cut.
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The
binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single
and double loops are alternated.
A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and
binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced
edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions
shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back.
SECTION IV
Page 59 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions
shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to
opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and
one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two
third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top.
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than twelve inches (12") into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the
cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut
the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement.
Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or
repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled
so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations
or five days, whichever is less.
In wet conditions, a base shall be established by spreading and compacting #57 stone prior to
placement of geotextile fabric and gabions or mattresses.
SECTION IV
Page 60 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS,
CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and
shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards,
whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced
with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as
determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All
replaced base shall be a minimum eight inches (8") compacted thickness, or same thickness as
base destroyed plus two inches (2"), if over six inches (6"), and compacted to 98% of maximum
density per AASHTO T-180.
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor,
materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per linear foot of main or square
yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall
include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on
a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall
be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All necessary
restoration exceeding this footprint will be at the Contractor's expense.
The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in
the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and
shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard:
concrete - per square foot; curbs - per linear foot; sidewalk four inches (4") or six inches (6") thick
- per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of six inches (6") thick and be
reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 303 and 707). The Contractor
shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all driveway,
curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
101-131. BASE
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall
refer to Section IV, Article 101 "Scope of Work" of the City's Contract Specifications for additional
roadway base and subgrade items.
Roadway base shall be eight inches (8") compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on
the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be twelve inches (12") compacted
minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted
on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing
laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an
independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is
SECTION IV Page 61 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the
City's Technical Specifications will apply.
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to the base
that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's
satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until
the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in
the bid item for base.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance
of all base and subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
1. Shell Base: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown
on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be
included in the bid item price for base.
2. Limerock Base: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and
911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as
shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost
of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
3. Crushed Concrete Base: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with
Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT
approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm
that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR
shall be a minimum of 100. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the City by the
Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless
requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat
shall be included in the bid item price for base.
4. Superpave Asphalt Base: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with
Section 234 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted
thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall
be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope
and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or
base.
5. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement Base: Reclaimed asphalt pavement base shall be
constructed in accordance with Section 283 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall
have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. As per FDOT Section 283,
RAP material shall be used as a base course only on non -limited access paved shoulders,
shared use paths, or other non -traffic bearing applications. The cost for preparation,
placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included
in the bid item price for asphalt or base.
SECTION IV
Page 62 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
702-2.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED
BASE
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as
called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas
deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if
so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be
made for such deficient areas that are left in place.
702-2.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item),
stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt
unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
101-132. SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a
minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the
Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade,
Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the City's Contract Specifications will
apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted
construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing
any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of
this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from
an independent testing laboratory the bearing value of the subgrade after the materials are mixed
for the stabilized subgrade.
702-2.3. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and
accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be
per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per
Section 160-7.2 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values
shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in
writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such
deficient areas that are left in place.
702-2.4. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for subgrade shall include roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction,
finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals
necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item
for base.
SECTION IV
Page 63 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This specification is for the preparation and application of all asphaltic concrete materials on
roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted.
101-133. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
703-2.1. AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections
901 through 915 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
703-2.2. BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
101-134. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT,
METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials
shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless
otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform
to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
The City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at
the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. The results of such tests
and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to
determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed.
The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is
discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet
the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and
investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work
shall be borne solely by the Contractor.
Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following:
1. Density per FDOT's Standard Specifications.
2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per FDOT's Standard Specifications.
3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of 1/4" or greater shall be
corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness
for a length extending at least twenty-five feet (25') from each end of the deficient area, or
when the Engineer allows for an overlay per FDOT's Standard Specifications. In addition,
for excesses of one-quarter inch (1/4") or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess
area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can
remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance
of the placement of all asphalt.
SECTION IV
Page 64 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
101-135. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
All asphalt mix designs, acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall
conform to the requirements of Sections 330 and 334 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All asphalt
mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the paving operation.
Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic
concrete mixes up to 25% by weight.
101-136. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER
THICKNESS
All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements:
Type SP/Spec 334-1
Type FC/Spec 337-8
Type B/Spec 234-8
ATPB/287-8
101-137. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of
operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture,
surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, Quality Control Testing, etc.) shall be
in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
101-138. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
703-2.3. CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the
following steps:
1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method.
2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as
appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the
level of the surrounding roadway surface.
3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks
are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking.
4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
703-2.4. POTHOLES
Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
SECTION IV Page 65 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
101-139. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be
accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions:
The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements.
The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum
requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel
adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or
fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per
manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser
shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section
shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting,
prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the
manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly
cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of
pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and
compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable.
The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable.
All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic
concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall
occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways,
the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and
final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc., will
be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the
asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is
the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and
coordinate their adjustments, so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving.
101-140. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed
by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid
item for asphalt.
2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the
road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely
manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all
construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or
mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped
SECTION IV
Page 66 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
with its own water supply for pre -wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall
sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the
job site.
5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's
discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Tack shall
also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling
and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted
in the project scope and plans.
6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the
plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the
project scope and plans.
7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336
of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be one-quarter inch
(1/4") above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101.
101-141. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and
accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used.
101-142. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and
measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or
prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of
cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary
to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications.
704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in
accordance with the following provisions:
1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price
Index varies more than ten percent (10%) from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall
be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site.
The address is: http://www. dot. state.fl.us/construction/fuel&bit/fuel&bit.shtm. For
additional information, call FDOT at (850) 414-4252.
3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used
for the initial determination of the asphalt price.
4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will
be used for payment calculation.
SECTION IV
Page 67 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period
for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for
any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt.
705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS
New driveways or existing asphalt driveways that must be altered for project construction shall be
constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the
exception that the base shall be six inches (6"). Remove only enough to allow adequate grade for
access to the street. Use Article 703 Asphaltic Concrete, of these Technical Specifications, as
specified for the street paving.
When the finished surface of the existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material.
Payment shall be the same as Asphalt Driveways.
101-143. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Asphalt Driveways in place and accepted.
101-144. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Asphalt Driveways as measured above, which
price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and
shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
706. CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans.
Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed
100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed ten feet (10'). In addition, all
the requirements of City Articles 301, 302 and 303 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify
the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all
concrete curbs.
101-145. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be linear feet of curb in place and accepted.
101-146. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for
all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
SECTION IV
Page 68 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
101-147. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans
or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh
reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified,
all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have
a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness
of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for
all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to
upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not
properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet,
and scoring marks shall be made every five feet (5'). Concrete shall be poured only on compacted
subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical
Specifications shall also apply.
101-148. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six inches
(6') in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal
distance between expansion joints of no less than four feet (4') measured in any direction. The
welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No
compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303
of these Technical Specifications shall also apply.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance
of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways.
101-149. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS
The contractor is responsible for constructing ADA compliant concrete curb ramps per the plans
and installing detectable warning surfaces on said ramps as called for in the plan set. Concrete curb
ramps and detectable warning surfaces are to be constructed per FDOT Standards and
Specifications.
101-150. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of four inch (4") concrete sidewalk,
six inch (6") concrete sidewalk, and six inch (6") concrete driveways in place and accepted.
101-151. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which shall be
full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the
specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required,
labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
SECTION IV Page 69 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
708. MILLING OPERATIONS
101-152. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED
SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed
in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify
the City of Clearwater Project Representative a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of
all milling.
101-153. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the Contractor is responsible
to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal
environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment.
2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven (7) days from the time it was milled,
unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.
3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the
vacuum or the mechanical type that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must
be equipped with its own water supply for pre -wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the
Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the
roadways before leaving the job site.
4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled
to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line
and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this
removal shall be included in the bid item for milling.
6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the
road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed
that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications. Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the
prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's
expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired
base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling.
9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after
the milling operation is complete.
SECTION IV
Page 70 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
101-154. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
Unless otherwise specified, all salvageable materials resulting from milling operations shall
remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be
performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the City Project Representative to
schedule delivery of material at least 48 hours prior to starting work.
101-155. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the responsibility of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all
regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City.
101-156. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF
UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
All private utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by
their owners at the owner's expense. City -owned utilities and structures shall be located by the
Owner/City and adjusted by the contractor. The Contractor shall arrange their schedule to allow
utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours' notice per State Statute).
All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing
operations.
101-157. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances
shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 703-7 of the City's
Technical Specifications.
101-158. TYPES OF MILLING
There are two types of milling used by the City:
A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot (6') wide strip along the curb line of the
pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height
and pavement cross section.
B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement
to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain
unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer.
101-159. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS
Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to
restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend
approximately fifty (50) to one hundred (100) feet in both directions from the low point of the
existing swale.
SECTION IV
Page 71 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
101-160. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
101-161. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and
stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius
returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion,
removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications.
SECTION IV
Page 72 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND
MARKINGS
801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
All traffic signal work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603
through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment,
materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal
and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service
assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian
detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing
traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs.
All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast
Arm Assembly standard and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the
State of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed
and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm colors shall
be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer.
All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LEDs and, approved by both the
City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features.
Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is prohibited unless directed by the City's
Traffic Engineering Division.
All damaged inductive loop detectors shall be restored by the contractor per FDOT Index 17781.
101-162. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete
the work per the plans.
802. SIGNING AND MARKING
All signing and marking work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless
otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and
markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular
delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or
markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment
will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be
corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
SECTION IV
Page 73 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
The Contractor is responsible for restoring all striping in paint and reflective beading per the FDOT
indices mentioned above. The City's Traffic Engineering department shall follow up with
thermoplastic striping at a later date unless otherwise specified.
101-163. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work per the plans.
803. ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
101-164. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work
per the plans.
SECTION IV
Page 74 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION
901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the
construction progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration activities within a reasonable time
following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within
a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a
delay in approval of partial payment requests.
Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery
removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
The Contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on
any and all phases of the contract work. The Contractor shall not obtain water from local residents
or businesses except as the Contractor shall obtain written permission.
Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's Water Reclamation
Facilities, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for
Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the Water Reclamation Facilities will be coordinated at
the pre -construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory
requirements.
902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
101-165. IRRIGATION
902-2.1. DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground
irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment,
services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground
sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work
noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item.
B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the
turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be
sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the
Engineer.
902-2.1.1. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation
subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope,
mainline, system pressure, controls, etc.
B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable
building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply.
SECTION IV
Page 75 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with
the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material
or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be
removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the Contractor's expense.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of
three (3) hard cover binders, with three rings, containing the following information:
1. Index sheet stating the Contractor's address and business telephone number, twenty-
four (24) hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with
name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier
where replacement equipment can be purchased.
2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and
"hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the
Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and
maintenance.
b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and
maintenance.
902-2.1.2. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground
improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting
requiring excavation of twenty-four inch (24") diameter and larger with the Engineer prior
to installation of main lines.
B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials.
C. The Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final
acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or
missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer
prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the
FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public.
902-2.1.3. WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory
service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of
Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or
faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater.
SECTION IV
Page 76 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
i
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
1 902-2.2. PRODUCTS
902-2.2.1. GENERAL
A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations
from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
1 902-2.2.2. PIPING
A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and
tested in accordance with these specifications.
B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40,
conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785.
C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the
mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80.
902-2.2.3. PIPE FITTINGS
1 A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or
trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval.
The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with
threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples.
902-2.2.4. PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER
' A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended
by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end.
B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The
Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe.
902-2.2.5. THREADED CONNECTIONS
' A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
1 902-2.2.6. GATE VALVES
902-2.2.6.1. MANUAL GATE VALVES TWO INCHES (2") AND SMALLER
1 A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve
2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals
3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors
1 4. Non -Shock Safe -T -Shear Stem
5. Safe -T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal.
SECTION IV Page 77 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
902-2.2.6.2. GATE VALVES TWO AND A HALF INCHES (21/2") AND LARGER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. AWWA-C-509
2. 200 Ib. O.W.G.
3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4. Deep socket joints
5. Rising stem
6. Bolted bonnet
7. Double disc
8. Equipped with two inch (2") square operating key with tee handle
B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve three inches (3") and larger. The "street key"
shall be five feet (5') long with a two inch (2") square operating nut.
902-2.2.7. SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater)
902-2.2.8. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance -pressure across -the
diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a
pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating
shall not be less than 150 psi.
B. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic,
stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm
shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C. The valve body shall have a one inch (1") (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch (1") slip
by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections.
D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable
from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California, or approved equal.
F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
902-2.2.9. VALVE BOXES
A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete
value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover or approved equal.
B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 ten inch (10") circular valve box with
#181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
SECTION IV
Page 78 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with # 182002 cover
comparable to Brooks or approved equal.
902-2.2.10. DRIP IRRIGATION
902-2.2.10.1. CONSTRUCTION
A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear polyethylene
tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers
at a specified spacing (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and
conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57
inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the
tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of
plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-flushing/cleaning elastomer
diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper.
902-2.2.10.2. OPERATION
A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet
pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and
with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating
pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9
gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure
compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The
drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be
available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline
pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system
pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be
seven inch (7").
B. For on -surface or under mulch installations, six inch (6") metal wire staples (TLS6) shall
be installed three feet (3') to five feet (5') on center, and two staples installed at every
change of direction.
902-2.2.10.3. LINE FLUSHING VALVES
A. The sub -surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each
independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning
of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect
directly to the dripline.
902-2.2.10.4.AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high
point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi.
902-2.2.10.5. PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds
per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressure of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy
shall be within +/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high -impact
SECTION IV
Page 79 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless
steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water
passage.
902-2.2.10.6. FILTERS
A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial
size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be
constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance.
902-2.2.10.7. FITTINGS
A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings
and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the
integrity of the subsurface irrigation system.
902-2.2.11. AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter
device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field
Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may
be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if
submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if
submerged in water.
B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure
waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws
allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box.
C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery for one full year
regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations
either sequentially or independently.
D. The controller shall have three (3) independent programs with eight (8) start times each,
station run time capability from one (1) minute to twelve (12) hours in one (1) minute
increments, and a seven (7) day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching
solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field
Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall
be capable of manual single station or manual program operation.
E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California USA.
902-2.2.12. FIELD TRANSMITTER
A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field
Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an
infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS
plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall
operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery.
SECTION IV Page 80 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A
beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after
one minute when not in use.
C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK
Control Modules.
D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
902-2.2.13. LATCHING SOLENOID
A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing
installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES -B, GB, of EFB series
valve.
B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
902-2.3. EXECUTION
902-2.3.1. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details
of the work.
B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.
C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary
shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed,
except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor
in Contractor's absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding
as if given to the Contractor.
D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by
outside authorities.
E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically
mentioned in these Technical Specifications.
F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific
interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or
clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the
decisions. In the event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall
be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler
equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities.
Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this
information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the
installation.
SECTION IV Page 81 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that
obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or
specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer.
I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior
to roadway base.
902-2.3.2. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
902-2.3.2.1. TRENCHING - GENERAL
A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches.
Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on
Drawings.
B. Maintain six inch (6") horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and
between all lines of other trades.
C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind.
D. Maintain six inch (6") vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of
45 degrees to 90 degrees.
E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities.
902-2.3.2.2. BACKFILLING
A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have eighteen inches (18") of fill placed over the
pipe.
B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger
than one half inch ('/2").
C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Standard Specifications.
D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs.
F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per
AASHTO T 180. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum
density.
G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers.
When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six
inches (6") thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face
area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent
damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities.
902-2.3.2.3. ROUTING OF PIPING:
A. Routing of pressure and non -pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on
Drawings.
SECTION IV
Page 82 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated.
C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure
supply line.
D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site
and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original
Drawings, and without additional cost.
E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method and maintain the staking of approved
layout.
902-2.3.3. INSTALLATION
902-2.3.3.1. WATER SUPPLY
A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the
Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to
the Owner.
902-2.3.3.2. ASSEMBLIES
A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install
lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings.
B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own
outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical
Specifications.
D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male
threads only.
902-2.3.3.3. SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER)
A. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway,
utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
902-2.3.3.4. PLASTIC PIPE
A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
1. Allow welded joints as least fifteen (15) minutes setup/curing time before moving or
handling.
2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water
pressure is on.
SECTION IV
Page 83 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four (4) hours has elapsed for
solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent
manufacturer.
C. Curing
1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least twenty-
four (24) hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
D. Flushing the system:
1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control
valves and flush out the system with a full head of water.
E. Installing piping under existing pavement:
1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring.
2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement.
All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished
at no additional cost.
902-2.3.3.5. CONTROLLERS
A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineer's representative prior
to installation.
902-2.3.3.6. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than six inches (6"), nor less than four inches
(4") cover from the top of the valve to finish grade.
B. Install valves in a plumb position with twenty-four inch (24") minimum maintenance
clearance from other equipment, three feet (3') minimum from edges of sidewalks,
buildings, and walls, and no closer than seven feet (7') from the back of curb or edge of
pavement along roadways.
C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for
each sprinkler zone.
902-2.3.3.7. GATE VALVES
A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper
maintenance.
B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill.
SECTION IV Page 84 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
' 101-166. LANDSCAPE
' 902-2.4. GENERAL
902-2.4.1. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
1 A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory
agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and
environmental matters.
B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the
contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having
jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor,
unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
902-2.4.2. SCOPE OF WORK
A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to
' the work specified in this Article. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental
to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and
as specified herein.
B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to
prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish
grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish,
plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to
execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans.
C. Work under this Article shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to
prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will
appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the
landscape drawings.
D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
1 902-2.4.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who
' shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under
the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be
made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of
work on the project.
B. All work of this Article shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's
convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If
conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plans shall predominate and be
considered the controlling document.
D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons
in their employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health
SECTION IV Page 85 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be
held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or
non-compliance with these standards.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is
built into or affects the work in this Article.
F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to
excavation. Call "One Call"/"Sunshine 811" at 8-1-1; "Sunshine 811" administrative
offices may be reached at (800) 638-4097.
G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the
work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in
conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect.
902-2.4.4. SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance
period, two (2) copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be
established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one (1) year.
B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor
specified work.
for
all
902-2.4.5. ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor
must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of
bidding.
B. The Owner, through their Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of
the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void.
C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any
substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without
approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk.
D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions
and warranties stated herein.
902-2.4.6. ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS
O.A. or HT: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied
state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
C. T: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with
no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or
similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
C. W: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf
sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms
or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the
fronds.
SECTION IV
Page 86 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not
including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
ST. TR.: Straight trunk.
MIN.: Minimum.
GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc.
0.C.: On center, distance between plant centers.
DIA.: Diameter.
LVS.: Leaves.
D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above
grade.
CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade,
larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American
Association of Nurserymen.
PPP: Plants per pot.
FG: Field grown.
STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk.
Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work
is performed.
Owner's Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of
quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation.
Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape
Contractor.
Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who
produces the landscape Plans and Specifications.
902-2.4.7. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
902-2.4.7.1. PLANT MATERIALS
A. Provide container -grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior
to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break
branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant
delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered.
B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected
from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been
cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled
by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
SECTION IV
Page 87 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
C. Balled and burlapped ("B & B") plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not
less than one foot (1') diameter of ball to every one inch (1") caliper of trunk; root ball
depth shall not be less than two-thirds (2/3) of root ball diameter. B & B plants which
cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch.
D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning
to be done a minimum of four (4) weeks before removal from the field and planting at the
site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except
plastic shrink wrap for transport only.
E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of twelve
inches (12") of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms,
only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and
handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots
shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within
twenty-four (24) hours of delivery.
F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in
shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist.
G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
H. Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping.
Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded
area.
902-2.4.8. JOB CONDITIONS
902-2.4.8.1. ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A. The Contractor shall examine the sub -grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions
under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project
Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions
and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and
following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape
Architect for adjustments to the Schedule.
C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting
procedures.
D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage
conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing
prior to planting.
SECTION IV
Page 88 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to sod installation or
seeding lawns. Protect existing lawn, trees, and promptly repair damages from planting
operations.
902-2.4.8.2. SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon
award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy
to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor
shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule.
B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc., in order
to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress
schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. The Owner's Representatives may request work stoppage in writing. Upon written request
from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of
material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the
Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor, with respect to any additional costs
which may result from work stoppage.
902-2.4.8.3. UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities.
Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities.
Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties
concerned.
902-2.5. PRODUCTS
902-2.5.1. MATERIALS
902-2.5.1.1. PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
A. Plant species, sizes, etc., shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Schedule.
Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture,
L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on
Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions) or conforms with names accepted in the
nursery trade.
902-2.5.1.2. PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in
the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species
and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insects, pests or their eggs, plant diseases,
defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and
shall have healthy, well-developed root systems.
B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant
materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided
SECTION IV
Page 89 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees
that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable.
C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality
for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida
Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition).
D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the
place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for
name, variety, size, quality, or designated area.
E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by
governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that
are applicable to landscape materials.
F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit to the
Landscape Architect proof of it being non -available. In such event, if the Landscape
Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source.
When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment
to Contract amount.
G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall
be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement
shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning
for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the
plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with
the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect, with no increase to the Contract price.
Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery.
H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where
symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter
and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant
and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls
and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures.
J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa
provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves
the substitution.
K. Container -grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but
not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition
exists.
902-2.5.1.3. GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of
even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious weed, freshly mowed
before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than twenty-
four (24) hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it
will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation.
SECTION IV
Page 90 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity,
germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements.
902-2.5.1.4. MULCH
A. Mulch shall be as specified in the plans or by the project manager.
B. Install mulch to an even depth of three inches (3") before compaction, as shown in the
PLANTING DETAILS in the plans.
902-2.5.1.5. FERTILIZER
A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for
application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags
bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming
to State of Florida fertilizer laws.
B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the
appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein.
C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all
plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling.
D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release
Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St.
Augustine grasses at the rate of one pound (1 Ib.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet
(1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the
nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be
1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than one-fourth
('/4) the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e.
manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.).
902-2.5.1.6. STAKES AND GUYS
A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree
trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used.
B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over two inch (2")
caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees two inch (2") caliper
and under. A minimum of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree
shall be used.
C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a
minimum of three (3) stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x
4" by 16" wood connected with two — three-quarter inch (3/4") steel bands shall be used
around the palm trunk.
D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved.
902-2.5.1.7. PLANTING SOIL
SECTION IV
Page 91 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and
loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test,
prior to planting and at no additional cost to the City, any soils which may be unsuitable
for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape
Architect immediately in writing.
B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist
of one-third (1/3) peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy loam, with no lumps over one inch (1").
C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There
must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or
carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and
toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance
to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil,
such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt.
D. Bed preparation for annual beds under one (1) gallon container size shall consist of three
inches (3") of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full
length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer six inches (6") to eight inches (8")
into native soil.
902-2.5.1.8. SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting
soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's
recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans.
902-2.5.1.9. TREE PROTECTION
A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal
members. Space vertical members six feet (6') to eight feet (8') on center. The barricade
shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area
surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot (1') for each inch of the
tree's diameter at breast height DBH (four and one half feet)') above grade.
902-2.5.1.10. ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for
protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install
as directed by the manufacturer.
902-2.5.1.11. PACKAGED MATERIALS
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the
site.
902-2.5.1.12. PESTICIDES
A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's
directions.
SECTION IV
Page 92 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
902-2.6. EXECUTION
902-2.6.1. PREPARATION
902-2.6.1.1. OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities,
irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation
of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a
relocated position for any materials necessary.
902-2.6.1.2. GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's
specifications.
B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been
achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting
' bed.
C. Pre -emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or "Rodeo"
and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect.
D. Should any plant material in the same or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the
same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor
at no cost to the Owner.
E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the
Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish
' grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will
conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage
without puddling.
' F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over one and one half inches
(PA") in any dimension from individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the
excavated material off the site.
902-2.6.1.3. PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread three inches
(3") of one-third (1/3) Florida peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy, or other approved organic
soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic
layer six inches (6") to eight inches (8") into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by
"crowning' to ensure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates.
Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
' 902-2.6.1.4. PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
1
SECTION IV Page 93 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's
Specifications.
B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub -
grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of four inches (4").
C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth,
even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush
to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard
drains.
D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one pound
(1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial
grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release
form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top four inches (4") of soil.
E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition.
902-2.6.2. INSTALLATION
902-2.6.2.1. BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED)
A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated.
Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper
drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well -
drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 -
6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
902-2.6.2.2. LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans
by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc., as
the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent
blockage of signage, etc.
B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material
schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally
accepted spacing for each species.
C. Leave an eighteen inch (18") (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer
leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all
plant sizes.
D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the
Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as
possible to the intent of the Plans.
SECTION IV
Page 94 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
902-2.6.2.3. PLANTING PROCEDURES
A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides
and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of
the root ball.
B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after
settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface
will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain
conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball
about one inch (1") higher than the surrounding grade.
C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved
equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting
tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle
and the bottom of the root mass.
Application rate:
1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet
3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet
5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet
7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet
Trees 3 tablets each 1/2" (12 millimeters) caliper
Palms 7 - 21 gram tablets
D. Native soil shall be used in back -filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers.
E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the
base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the
sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 four inches (4") (100 millimeters) of burlap wire,
and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom
of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade.
Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in
among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection.
F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of
the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of
the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball.
Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade.
G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each
variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight
or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a
minimum of eighteen inches (18") from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the
plant.
H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free
Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree
angles in a triangular pattern.
I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved.
SECTION IV
Page 95 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
902-2.6.2.4. SODDING
A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil
adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut.
B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to
all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen
per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). The ground shall be moistened before the sod is
laid in place.
C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface
edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas.
Cut down soil level to one inch (1") to one and one half inches (1-1/2") below top of walks
prior to laying sod.
D. Within two (2) hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient
water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of two inches
(2") (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the
application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will
prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep
sod moist until rooted to subgrade.
E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other
approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and
insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of
sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall
be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated.
F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean
silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be
leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
G. On slopes 3:1 or steeper, and as required, a geotextile fabric shall be installed per
manufacturer's specifications prior to placing sod. The sod shall be fastened in place with
suitable wooden pins or by other approved method.
902-2.6.2.5. SEEDING
A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of
Transportation. See plan for type of seed.
902-2.6.2.6. TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound
nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum
of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall
be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by
approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of four feet (4')
height of stake above grade and a minimum of thirty inches (30") of stake below grade.
B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall
be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of five (5) layers of burlap and five (5) - 2
SECTION IV
Page 96 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two (2) three-quarter inch (3/4") steel bands.
Palms shall be staked with a minimum of five feet (5') of stake above grade.
C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after
the date of final acceptance of the landscape work.
D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially
hazardous areas.
902-2.6.2.7. MULCHING
A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching.
B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch.
Mulch should be below top of curb and resistant to washout from stormwater run-off.
C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a three inch (3") layer (before
compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified
on the Plans or General Notes.
D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings.
Maintain a minimum three inch (3") clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum
six inch (6") clearance for the walls of buildings.
E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed
in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum six inches (6") of non -mulched
clearance from the outside edge of annuals.
902-2.6.2.8. PRUNING
A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape
and form of the plant.
B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and
branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree.
902-2.6.2.9. CLEAN-UP
A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job,
keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess
soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying,
staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications.
902-2.6.2.10. PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on,
about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards.
B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage.
SECTION IV
Page 97 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
C. The Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to
landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as
specified.
902-2.6.2.11. REPAIR OF DAMAGES
E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by their operations to other materials,
property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by their work or employees
to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done
by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor
who is responsible for the damage.
902-2.6.3. MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the
beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B. Operations:
1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds,
mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control,
replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections,
replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out
repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural
practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the
Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University
of Florida Cooperative Extension Service.
2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance
practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy,
vigorous growth of the landscape.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch (1")
of water for all planted materials before leaving the site.
902-2.6.4. INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
902-2.6.4.1. INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's
Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within fifteen (15) days of notifications,
the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic
inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor.
902-2.6.4.2. REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any
part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set
forth in the Plans and Specifications.
SECTION IV
Page 98 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within fifteen (15) days and notify the
Landscape Architect that the correction has been made.
902-2.6.4.3. ACCEPTANCE
A. After replacement of rejected plant material, if any, have been made, and completion of all
other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in
writing.
B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the
terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty
period.
C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the
Owner.
1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in
performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment
sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such
claim.
2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or
in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species
specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from their Contract
price. The final selection rests with the Owner or their representative.
3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to
request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to
compensate for the value not received from the under -specified plant materials. No
additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed
specifications.
902-2.6.5. WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period
of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead
or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the
Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the
warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or
workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no
additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be
given the equal amount of warranty.
903. SODDING
Unless otherwise noted herein, the Contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at
the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications. The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable
depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed
with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller
immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit
SECTION IV
Page 99 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than seventy-
two (72) hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be
thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as
needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions,
to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable
to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation.
Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials,
placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these
associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly
placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor,
equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis
of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor
provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
904. SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The
seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to
be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic
conformance with FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no
wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia.
No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per
acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said
seed until growth is assured.
When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including
water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and
accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as
stated above shall be included in the cost of other work.
905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
101-167. SCOPE
To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant
beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental
pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated
areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting
irregularities in the work zone.
The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the specified
landscaped street areas including:
• Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic;
• Trash and debris removal from the job site;
• Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
• Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms;
SECTION IV
Page 100 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted);
• Irrigation service and repair;
• Mulch replacement;
• Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the
• Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
101-168. SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between
the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The
City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, such as cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be
completed before leaving the job site.
101-169. WORK METHODS
905-2.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any
variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in
writing by an authorized representative of the other party.
905-2.2. DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The Contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated
location:
905-2.2.1. LITTER AND DEBRIS
Remove trash and debris from the project site. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is the
Contractor's responsibility. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes,
vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The Contractor should report
such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from
the Contractor would be considered. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon
completion. All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by
the Contractor.
905-2.2.2. VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or
damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within twenty-four
(24) hours after providing the service.
905-2.2.3. PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size
of the particular species. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a
neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while
SECTION IV
Page 101 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants
shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.
Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following
flower formation, consistent with the following specification:
905-2.2.3.1. PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE,
ETC.)
Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to
remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads
that are encountered in the pruning process; and remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation,
such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the
trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on
palms.
905-2.2.3.2. TRAFFIC CONTROL
Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the
Contractor, according to the approved Maintenance of Traffic specifications.
905-2.2.3.3. PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users
are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian
use areas.
905-2.2.4. PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur
coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in
mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts
will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials.
905-2.2.5. WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable.
Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied
by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by Contractor
at their expense.
905-2.2.6. MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil
moisture, usually three inches (3").
905-2.2.7. IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
Should be performed at each visit to assure the system's proper operation and timing. Drip tubing
should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating
schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system
running time.
SECTION IV
Page 102 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
905-2.2.8. LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a
less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be
replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on
City properties.
905-2.2.9. PALM FERTILIZATION
Apply three (3) pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across
the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February.
905-2.2.10. FREEZE PROTECTION
The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost
sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility.
Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants,
securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will
furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor
one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After
uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility.
Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the
City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in
place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at
any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be
compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-
hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the
covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and
Contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should
freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed
by the City.
906. LEVEL OF SERVICE
The Project Site is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within seven
(7) working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six (6) and no
further than ten (10) calendar days apart.
907. COMPLETION OF WORK
Within twenty-four (24) hours of completing work the City either in person or by phone of said
completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message.
908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the
following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City
shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be
SECTION IV
Page 103 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
given forty-eight (48) hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has
been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed.
909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a twelve (12)
month period on plants, trees and palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation
operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape
materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as they
feel appropriate.
2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
3. All work shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade
practices and standards which prevail in the industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused
by the Contractor or their employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the
specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the
Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs on the next regular
payment to the Contractor.
5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked
vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular
schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences and shall
schedule to perform the required work to the location as soon as the pertaining
circumstances are relieved.
910. TREE PROTECTION
101-170. TREE BARRICADES
A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land
preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging
and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms.
2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer
species.
3. At or greater than two-thirds (2/3) of the dripline of all other protected species
4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand.
B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two inch (2") lumber for upright
posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet (4') in length with a minimum of one foot (1')
anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet (8')
apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch (1") by four -inch (4")
lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The City's representative
must approve any variation from the above requirements.
SECTION IV
Page 104 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is
terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during
construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall
remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor
utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative.
D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or
debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier
no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment,
chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective
barriers.
E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any
protected tree or palm.
F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this
section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees.
101-171. ROOT PRUNING
A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical
root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society
of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce
the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to
any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean
pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be
pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging
a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree
pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited.
Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by construction activities shall be
pruned to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") below existing grade or to the depth of
the proposed impact if less than eighteen inches (18") from existing grade. The City's
Representative on Engineering Department projects for Root Pruning issues is the Senior
Landscape Architect and can be reached at (727) 562-4747, or through the construction
inspector assigned to the project.
B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International
Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist.
C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected
and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning.
D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible,
but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree
protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any
root pruning activities.
SECTION IV
Page 105 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches (10") per one inch (1") of the trunk
diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior
to said root pruning.
G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be
done to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") from existing grade, or to the depth of the
disturbance if less than eighteen inches (18").
H. Root pruning shall be performed using a root cutting machine specifically designed for this
purpose. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative,
prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved.
I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any
excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree
roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled
around to prevent damage to the root.
K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or
burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established.
L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require
a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned
trees.
M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning
requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as
opposed to open trenching.
101-172. PROPER TREE PRUNING
A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or
under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified
arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other
Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300.
B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts
(pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree)
are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be
recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require
replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community
Development Code.
C. No protected tree shall have more than thirty percent (30%) of its foliage removed.
D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion -tailed. Any protected tree that has been
improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing
condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances
and Community Development Code.
SECTION IV
Page 106 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage
trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been
damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy
growing condition and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of
Ordinances and Community Development Code.
SECTION IV
Page 107 of 107 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IVA
NORTHEAST WRF IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(PROJECT No. 19 -0029 -UT)
PREPARED FOR:
•
BR! HT ANT: BEAI.TIIFUL • BAY TO BEACH
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
100 SOUTH MYRTLE AVENUE
CLEARWATER, FL 33756
PREPARED BY:
Kin
ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC.g
KING ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC.
4921 MEMORIAL HIGHWAY
ONE MEMORIAL CENTER, SUITE 300
TAMPA, FL 33634
Bid Specifications
January 2021
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01014 SUMMARY OF WORK
01015 CONTROL OF WORK
01016 CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
01030 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01040 COORDINATION
01050 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01065 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS
01150 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01152 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01153 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01200 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01300 SUBMITTALS
01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND
SAMPLES
01385 COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01410 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01505 MOBILIZATION
01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01610 WATER TIGHTNESS TEST FOR HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
01625 START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01640 QUALITY CONTROL
01670 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01710 CLEANING
01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01820 TRAINING
- iv -
Index of Technical Specifications
Sign and Seal Sheet
for
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NE WRF IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
PROJECT No. 19 -0029 -UT
SPECIFICATIONS
KING ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC.
SECTION IVA
Division 01 - General Requirements
01005, 01014, 01015, 01016, 01030, 01040, 01050, 01065, 01090, 01150, 01152, 01153, 01200,
01300, 01310, 01340, 01385, 01410, 01500, 01505, 01510, 01580, 01600, 01610, 01625, 01640,
01670, 01700, 01710, 01720, 01730, 01740, 01820
SECTION IVB
Division 02 - Sitework
02050, 02062, 02063, 02064, 02080, 02083, 02085, 02100, 02125, 02140, 02220, 02221, 02276,
02485, 02525, 02575, 02720, 02730
Division 6 - Wood and Plastics
06600
Division 09 - Finishes
09865, 09900
Division 11 - Equipment
11203, 11306, 11310, 11317, 11320, 11321, 11323, 11324, 11335, 11350, 11560
Division 13 - Special Construction
13210, 13300, 13525, 13567, 13600, 13615, 13630, 13640, 13650
Division 15 - Mechanical
15010, 15062, 15064, 15065, 15080, 15094, 15100, 15480
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Index of Technical Specifications
Sign and Seal Sheet
for
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NE WRF IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
PROJECT No. 19 -0029 -UT
SPECIFICATIONS
JONES EDMUNDS & ASSOCIATES, INC.
SECTION IVC
Division 02 - Site Construction
02220, 02225, 02230, 02240, 02305, 02370, 02700, 02920
Division 03 - Concrete
03100, 03180, 03200, 03250, 03300, 03360, 03600, 03930
Division 05 - Metals
05500
Division 09 - Finishes
09900
Division 11 - Equipment
11000, 11228, 11330, 11356
Division 13 - Special Construction
13232, 13316, 13401
Division 15 - Mechanical
15055, 15060, 15075, 15110, 15120, 15121, 15122, 15125, 15144, 15155, 15290, 15860
Division 16 - Electrical
16050, 16060, 16110, 16120, 16130, 16140, 16150, 16160, 16170, 16370, 16402, 16450, 16460,
16500, 16601, 16921
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Index of Technical Specifications
Sign and Seal Sheet
for
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NE WRF IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
PROJECT No. 19 -0029 -UT
SPECIFICATIONS
WEKIVA ENGINEERING, LLC
SECTION IVB
Division 03 — Concrete
03100, 03200, 03250, 03300, 03350, 03600, 03740, 03750, 03800
Division 05 — Metals
05500
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Index of Technical Specifications
Sign and Seal Sheet
for
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NE WRF IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
PROJECT No. 19 -0029 -UT
SPECIFICATIONS
CARASTRO & ASSOCIATES, INC.
SECTION IVB
Division 16 - Electrical
16010, 16050, 16110, 16120, 16135, 16142, 16143, 16170, 16190, 16195, 16452, 16460, 16470,
16480, 16481, 16482, 16620, 16670, 16775
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1 SECTION 01005
2
3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Description
10
11 The design and permitting for the Work of this project was performed by two
12 independent consulting engineering firms: Ardurra Group (Ardurra) (fka King
13 Engineering Associates) and Jones Edmunds and Associates (JEA). The two
14 designs (plans and specification) have been merged into a single construction
15 project for the convenience of the Owner.
16
17 In performing the Work, the particular attention of the Contractor is called to the
18 fact that the Work shall conform in all respects to the design (Drawings and
19 Specifications) pertinent to that portion of the Work. The Work associated with
20 the design provided by Ardurra is as shown on the Drawings labeled Northeast
21 WRF Grit, Salsnes and Equalization System Improvements and the technical
22 specifications titled Section IVB. The Work associated with the design provided
23 by JEA is as shown on the Drawings labeled Northeast Water Reclamation
24 Facility (NEWRF) Sludge Blend Tank Improvements and the technical
25 specifications titled Section IVC. The work described in Sections I, II, IIA, III,
26 IIIA, IV, IVA (Division 1 General Requirements specifications) and V is
27 applicable to all the Work.
28
29 The work to be completed consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials and
30 equipment, and the performance of all Work included in this Contract. At all
31 times during construction of the project, the Water Reclamation Facility (WRF)
32 shall remain in service. Throughout the project, the Contractor shall cooperate
33 fully with operations staff in order to minimize disruption to facility operations.
34 No facility or structure shall be taken out of service, except those specifically
35 scheduled to be demolished, without the prior written approval of the Owner or
36 Engineer. Plant operations and regulatory compliance will take priority over and
37 may impact the construction schedule.
38
39 B. Work Included
40
41 The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plant, power,
42 light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies and other means
43 of construction necessary or proper for performing and completing the Work.
44 Perform and complete the Work in the manner best calculated to promote rapid
45 construction consistent with safety of life and property and to the satisfaction of
46 the Engineer, and in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The
47 Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during and after construction,
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-1 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 until accepted, and shall do all work and pay all costs incidental thereto. He
2 shall repair or restore all structures and property that may be damaged or
3 disturbed during performance of the Work.
4
5 The cost of incidental work described in these General Requirements, for which
6 there are no specific Bid Items, shall be considered as part of the general cost
7 of doing the work and shall be included in the prices for the various Contract Bid
8 Items. No additional payment will be made therefore.
9
10 The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and
11 equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in a
12 satisfactory and acceptable manner all the work required by this Contract. Only
13 equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. The
14 Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his workmanship,
15 materials and equipment, prior review of the Engineer notwithstanding.
16
17 C. Public Utility Installation and Structures
18
19 Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all poles,
20 tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, house service connections, vaults, manholes and
21 all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether owned or
22 controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodies or privately owned by
23 individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the public with transportation,
24 traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage, water or other
25 public or private property which may be affected by the work shall be deemed
26 included hereunder.
27
28 The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from
29 damage during the work. Access across any buried public utility installation, or
30 structure, shall be made only in such locations and by means reviewed by the
31 Engineer. The Contractor shall so arrange his operations as to avoid any
32 damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction shall
33 be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities
34 damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his expense.
35 No separate payment will be made for such protection or repairs to public utility
36 installations or structures.
37
38 Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or other
39 governmental body, which are shown on the Plans to be removed, relocated,
40 replaced or rebuilt by the Contractor, shall be considered as a part of the general
41 cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for the various
42 contract items. No separate payment shall be made therefore.
43
44 Where public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner
45 or other governmental body are encountered during the course of the Work, and
46 are not indicated on the Plans or in the Specifications, and when, in the opinion
47 of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding is necessary to
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-2 12/17/2020
1 complete the work under this Contract, such work shall be accomplished by the
2 utility having jurisdiction, or such work may be ordered, in writing by the
3 Engineer, for the Contractor to accomplish. If such work is accomplished by the
4 utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously and the Contractor
5 shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete the removal,
6 relocation, replacement or rebuilding as required. If such work is accomplished
7 by the Contractor, it will be in accordance with the General and Supplemental
8 General Conditions.
9
10 The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner and other governmental utility
11 departments and other owners of public utilities of the locations of his proposed
12 construction operations, at least forty-eight hours in advance of breaking ground
13 in any area or on any unit of the work.
14
15 The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation or rebuilding of public utility
16 installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein
17 provided, shall be done by methods reviewed by the Engineer.
18
19 1.02 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
20
21 A. Drawings
22
23 When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used
24 in preference to scaled dimensions, and large-scale drawings in preference to
25 small-scale drawings.
26
27 B. Copies Furnished to Contractor
28
29 The Engineer may incorporate the addenda into a set of "conformed" drawings
30 and specifications and may provide one electronic copy of each to the
31 Contractor. The conformed drawings and specifications shall not supersede the
32 Contract Documents and addenda provided to the Contractor. It shall be the
33 responsibility of the Contractor to check that the conformed drawings and
34 specifications properly include all revisions/addenda to the Contract
35 Documents. The Contractor shall furnish each of the subcontractors,
36 manufacturers, and suppliers such copies of the Contract Documents as may
37 be required for their work. Additional copies of the Drawings and Specifications,
38 when requested, may be furnished to the Contractor at cost of reproduction.
39
40 C. Supplementary Drawings
41
42 When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more
43 fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show any changes
44 that may be required, Drawings known as Supplementary Drawings, with
45 Specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the Engineer and copies
46 thereof will be given to the Contractor and the Owner.
47
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-3 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 D. Contractor to Check Drawings and Data
2
3 The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the
4 Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications or other data
5 received from the Engineer and shall notify him of any errors, omissions,
6 conflicts and discrepancies found therein. The Contractor shall submit to the
7 Engineer a Request for Information (RFI), consecutively numbered and on a
8 form provided by the Engineer, detailing all conflicts and discrepancies.
9 Engineer shall promptly provide a response to all RFIs submitted by the
10 Contractor. Contractor will not be allowed to take advantage of any conflicts
11 and discrepancies, as full instructions will be furnished by the Engineer, should
12 such conflicts and discrepancies be discovered.
13
14 E. Specifications
15
16 The Technical Specifications generally consist of three parts: General,
17 Products, and Execution. The General Section contains General Requirements
18 that govern the work. Products and Execution modify and supplement these by
19 detailed requirements for the work and shall always govern whenever there
20 appears to be a conflict.
21
22 F Intent
23
24 All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not
25 shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice -verse, shall be of like effect
26 as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the Drawings or
27 in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or in the complete
28 and proper execution of the work, is required and shall be performed by the
29 Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or described.
30
31 The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent
32 omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done
33 and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best
34 general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the best
35 quality is to be used, and interpretation of these Specifications shall be made
36 upon that basis.
37
38 The inclusion of the Related Requirements (or work specified elsewhere) in the
39 General part of the specifications is only for the convenience of the Contractor,
40 and shall not be interpreted as a complete list of related Specification Sections.
41
42 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
43
44 A. Manufacturer
45
46 The names of proposed manufacturers, suppliers and dealers who are to furnish
47 materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances or other fittings shall be submitted to
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-4 12/17/2020
1 the Engineer for review. Such review must be obtained before shop drawings
2 will be checked. No manufacturer will be approved for any materials to be
3 furnished under this Contract unless he shall be of good reputation and have a
4 plant of ample capacity. He shall, upon the request of the Engineer, be required
5 to submit evidence that he has manufactured a similar product to the one
6 specified and that it has been previously used for a like purpose for a sufficient
7 length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory performance. All transactions with
8 the manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through the Contractor, unless the
9 Contractor shall request, in writing to the Engineer, that the manufacturer or
10 subcontractor deal directly with the Engineer. Any such transactions shall not
11 in any way release the Contractor from his full responsibility under this Contract.
12
13 Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type or
14 classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by
15 the same manufacturer.
16
17 B. Delivery
18
19 The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to insure the most
20 speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work so as to complete the work within
21 the allotted time. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in order to
22 avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any related
23 Contractor.
24
25 C. Tools and Accessories
26
27 The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,
28 furnish with each type, kind or size of equipment, one complete set of suitably
29 marked high grade special tools and appliances that are needed to adjust,
30 operate, maintain or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances shall be
31 furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled and equipped with
32 good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys.
33
34 Spare parts shall be furnished as specified. Where spare parts are specified to
35 be "manufacturer's recommended" or "as recommended by the manufacturer",
36 the Contractor shall furnish those spare parts that are normally or commonly
37 recommended by the manufacturer as shown on the manufacturer's readily
38 available literature.
39
40 Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate,
41 securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name,
42 year of manufacture, serial number, weight and principal rating data.
43
44 D. Installation of Equipment
45
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-5 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient proper equipment and machinery
2 of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies normally
3 encountered in work of this character.
4
5 Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the
6 foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings, unless
7 directed otherwise by the Engineer during installation. All equipment shall be
8 correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for satisfactory operation and shall be
9 installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made readily
10 between the various units.
11
12 The Contractor shall furnish, install and protect all necessary anchor and
13 attachment bolts and all other appurtenances needed for the installation of the
14 devices included in the equipment specified. Anchor bolts shall be as reviewed
15 by the Engineer and made of ample size and strength for the purpose intended.
16 Substantial templates and working drawings for installation shall be furnished.
17
18 The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish all materials and labor for, and
19 shall properly bed in non -shrink grout, each piece of equipment on its supporting
20 base that rests on masonry foundations. Grout shall completely fill the space
21 between the equipment base and the foundation. All metal surfaces coming in
22 contact with concrete or grout shall receive a coat of coal tar epoxy equal to
23 Kop-Coat 300M.
24
25 E. Service of Manufacturer's Representative
26
27 The prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and
28 experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the manufacturer
29 and shall assist the Contractor, when required, to install, adjust, test and place
30 in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents.
31
32 Prior to placing the equipment in permanent operation, the manufacturer shall
33 furnish to the Engineer and Contractor a written Certificate of Proper Installation
34 stating that the equipment has been installed properly in strict accordance with
35 the manufacturer's recommendations.
36
37 After the equipment is placed in operation by the Contractor, such engineer or
38 superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by the Engineer
39 to prove that such equipment is proper and in satisfactory operating condition,
40 and shall instruct/train such personnel as may be designated by the Owner in
41 the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment.
42
43 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING
44
45 A. General
46
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-6 12/17/2020
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall
make the necessary inspections and tests and the reports thereof shall be in
such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract
Documents. Five copies of the reports shall be submitted and the authorities'
certification thereof must be furnished to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the
acceptance of any material or equipment. Testing for the Blend and Storage
Tank portion of the project shall be in accordance with Technical Specification
IVC, Section 11000 and as described herein.
If in the making of any test of any material or equipment it is ascertained by the
Engineer that the material or equipment does not comply with the Contract, the
Contractor will be notified thereof and he will be directed to refrain from
delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly from the site or
from the work and replace it with acceptable material, without cost to the Owner.
Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be
conducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or the
IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment
during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim
for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner
formally takes over the operation thereof.
B. Costs
All inspection of materials furnished under this Contract will be performed by the
Owner or duly authorized inspections engineers or inspection bureaus without
cost to the Contractor, unless otherwise expressly specified. The cost of shop
and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests specifically called for in
the Contract Documents shall be borne by the Contractor and such costs shall
be deemed to be included in the Contract price.
Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as equivalent to those
specified may be tested by the Owner for compliance with the specifications.
The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the expenditures incurred in
making such tests on materials and equipment that are rejected for non-
compliance.
C. Inspection of Materials
The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Engineer, sufficiently in
advance of his intention to commence the manufacture or preparation of
materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the
permanent construction. Such notice shall contain a request for inspection, the
date of commencement and the expected date of completion of the manufacture
or preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, the Engineer will
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-7 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 arrange to have a representative present at such times during the manufacture
2 as may be necessary to inspect the materials or he will notify the Contractor that
3 the inspection will be made at a point other than the point of manufacture, or he
4 will notify the Contractor that inspection will be waived. The Contractor must
5 comply with these provisions before shipping any material. Such inspection
6 shall not release the Contractor from its responsibility for furnishing materials
7 meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents.
8
9 D. Certificate of Manufacture
10
11 When inspection is waived or when the Engineer so requires, the Contractor
12 shall furnish authoritative evidence in the form of Certificates of Manufacture
13 that the materials to be used in the work have been manufactured and tested in
14 conformity with the Contract Documents. These certificates shall be notarized
15 and shall include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical analyses,
16 where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or on similar
17 products of the manufacturer. Submit Certificates of Manufacture in accordance
18 with Section 01300.
19
20 E. Shop Tests of Operating Equipment
21
22 Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency,
23 performance, function or special requirements are specified shall be tested in
24 the shop of the maker in a manner that shall conclusively prove that its
25 characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
26 No such equipment shall be shipped to the work until the Engineer notifies the
27 Contractor, in writing, that the results of such tests are acceptable.
28
29 Five copies of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results
30 thereof, accompanied by a certificate of authenticity sworn to by a responsible
31 official of the manufacturing company, shall be forwarded to the Engineer for
32 review in accordance with Section 01300.
33
34 The cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop
35 test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the Contractor.
36
37 F Preliminary Field Tests
38
39 As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
40 and instruments and shall make preliminary field tests of equipment. If the
41 preliminary field tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract that
42 does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
43 Contractor shall, prior to the acceptance tests, make all changes, adjustments
44 and replacement required. The Contractor shall assist in the preliminary field
45 tests as applicable.
46
47 G. Final Field Tests
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-8 12/17/2020
1
2 Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, all equipment and
3 systems installed under this Contract shall be subjected to acceptance tests as
4 specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents.
5
6 The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water and all other materials,
7 equipment and instruments necessary for all acceptance tests, at no additional
8 cost to the Owner. The equipment suppliers and subcontractors shall assist in
9 the final field tests, as applicable.
10
11 H. Failure of Tests
12
13 Any defects in the materials and equipment or their failure to meet the tests,
14 guarantee or requirements of the Contract Documents shall be promptly
15 corrected by the Contractor by replacement or otherwise as directed by the
16 Engineer. The decision of the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractor has
17 fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive. If the
18 Contractor fails to make these corrections or if the improved materials and
19 equipment, when tested, shall again fail to meet the guarantees or specified
20 requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding its partial payment for work, materials
21 and equipment, may reject the work, materials and equipment and may order
22 the Contractor to remove them from the site at his own expense.
23
24 I. Final Inspection
25
26 During such final inspections, the work shall be clean and free from water. In
27 no case will the final change order be prepared until the Contractor has complied
28 with all requirements set forth and the Engineer has made his final inspection of
29 the entire work and is satisfied that the entire work is properly and satisfactorily
30 constructed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
31
32 1.05 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES
33
34 A. Temporary Fences
35
36 If, during the course of the work, it is necessary to remove or disturb any fence
37 or part thereof, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, if so ordered by the
38 Engineer, provide a suitable temporary fence, which shall be maintained until
39 the permanent fence is replaced. The Engineer shall be solely responsible for
40 the determination of the necessity for providing a temporary fence and the type
41 of temporary fence to be used.
42
43 B. Temporary Driveways
44
45 At its own expense, the Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain and remove all
46 temporary driveways and access roads required to provide access to the work
47 and through the site of the work to maintain existing operations and to allow
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-9 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 construction of other projects in the area. The Contractor shall fully cooperate
2 with the Owner in providing this access.
3
4 C. Temporary Structures and Facilities
5
6 The Contractor shall construct any temporary piping and facilities as required in
7 order to maintain existing treatment capacity and operations during
8 construction.
9
10 1.06 TEMPORARY SERVICES
11
12 A. First Aid
13
14 The Contractor shall keep upon the site, at each location where work is in
15 progress, a completely equipped first aid kit and shall provide ready access
16 thereto at all times when people are employed on the work.
17
18 1.07 LINE AND GRADE
19
20 A. Line and Grade
21
22 All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines
23 and grades shown on the Drawings, or as given by the Engineer. The full
24 responsibility for maintaining alignment and grade rests upon the Contractor.
25
26 The Contractor, prior to commencing of construction, shall have established
27 benchmarks and base line controlling points. The Contractor shall so place
28 excavation and other materials as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the
29 reference marks provided. He shall remove any obstructions placed by him
30 contrary to this provision.
31
32 B. Surveys
33
34 The Contractor shall furnish and maintain, at his own expense, stakes and other
35 such materials to establish all working or construction lines and grades, as
36 required, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy thereof.
37
38 All surveying shall be performed in accordance with Specification 01050.
39
40 C. Safeguarding Marks
41
42 The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments and
43 bench marks made or established on the work, bear the cost of re-establishing
44 them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work improperly
45 installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without
46 authorization such established points, stakes and marks.
47
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-10 12/17/2020
1 The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners,
2 monuments and marks adjacent to but not related to the work and, if required,
3 shall bear the cost of re-establishing them if disturbed or destroyed.
4
5 1.08 ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND LANDSCAPING
6
7 A. The Contractor shall also be entirely responsible and liable for all damage or
8 injury as a result of his operations to all other adjacent public and private
9 property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto met with during the
10 progress of the work. The cost of protection, replacement in their original
11 locations and conditions or payment of damages for injuries to such adjacent
12 public and private property and structures affected by the work, whether or not
13 shown on the Drawings or specified shall be included in the various Contract
14 Items and no separate payments will be made therefore. Where such public
15 and private property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto are not
16 shown on the Drawings and when, in the opinion to avoid interference with the
17 work, payment therefore will be made as provided for in the General Conditions.
18
19 Contractor is expressly advised that the protection of buildings structures,
20 tunnels, tanks, pipelines, etc. and related work adjacent to and in the vicinity of
21 his operations, wherever they may be, is solely his responsibility. Conditional
22 inspection of buildings or structures in the immediate vicinity of the project which
23 may reasonably be expected to be affected by the Work shall be performed by
24 and be the responsibility of the Contractor.
25
26 Contractor shall, before starting operations, make an examination of the interior
27 and exterior of the adjacent structures, buildings, facilities, etc., and record by
28 notes, measurements, photographs, etc., conditions that might be aggravated
29 by open excavation and construction. Repairs or replacement of all conditions
30 disturbed by the construction shall be made to the satisfaction of the Owner and
31 to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This does not preclude conforming to the
32 requirements of the insurance underwriters. Copies of surveys, photographs,
33 reports, etc., shall be given to the Engineer.
34
35 Prior to the beginning of any excavations, the Contractor shall advise the
36 Engineer of all buildings or structures discovered which may impact their work.
37 The Contractor shall receive approval from the Owner or Owner's
38 representative before performing work on those buildings and structures. They
39 shall Document in the Record Drawings the work on these buildings or
40 structures which the project work affect.
41
42 B. Protection of Trees
43
44 1. The Contractor shall adequately protect all trees and shrubs with boxes
45 or otherwise in accordance with ordinances governing the protection of
46 trees. No excavated materials shall be placed so placed as to injure such
47 trees or shrubs. Trees or shrubs destroyed through negligence of the
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-11 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Contractor or his employees shall be replaced with new stock of similar
2 size and age, in the proper season and at the sole expense of the
3 Contractor.
4
5 2. Beneath trees or other surface structures, where possible, pipelines may
6 be built in short tunnels, backfilled with excavated materials, except as
7 otherwise specified, or the trees or structures carefully supported and
8 protected from damage.
9
10 3. The Owner may order the Contractor, for the convenience of the Owner,
11 to remove trees along the line or trench excavation. If so ordered, the
12 Owner will obtain any permits required for removal of trees.
13
14 C. Lawn Areas
15
16 Lawn areas shall be left in as good condition as before the starting of the work.
17 Where sod is to be removed, it shall be carefully removed, and later replaced,
18 or the area where sod has been removed shall be restored with new sod.
19
20 D. Restoration of Fences
21
22 Any fence, or part thereof, that is damaged or removed during construction shall
23 be replaced or repaired by the Contractor and shall be left in as good or better
24 a condition as existed before starting the work. The manner in which the fence
25 is repaired or replaced and the materials used in such work shall be subject to
26 the review of the Engineer. No additional payment will be made for the
27 replacement or repair of any fence.
28
29 1.09 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PUBLIC
30
31 A. Barriers and Lights
32
33 During the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall install and maintain at
34 all times such barriers and lights as will effectively prevent accidents. The
35 Contractor shall provide suitable barricades, red lights, "danger" or "caution" or
36 "street closed" signs and watchmen at all places where the work causes
37 obstructions to the normal traffic or constitutes in any way a hazard to the public.
38
39 B. Smoke Prevention
40
41 The Contractor shall use hard coal, coke, oil or gas as fuel for equipment
42 generating steam. A strict compliance with ordinances regulating the production
43 of emission of smoke will be required. No open fires will be permitted.
44
45 C. Noise
46
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-12 12/17/2020
1 The Contractor shall eliminate noise to as great an extent practicable at all
2 times. Air compressing plants shall be equipped with silencers and the exhaust
3 of all gasoline motors or other power equipment shall be provided with mufflers.
4 In the vicinity of hospitals and schools and where directed by the Engineer,
5 special care shall be used to avoid noise or other nuisances. The Contractor
6 shall strictly observe all local regulations and ordinances covering noise control.
7
8 Except in the event of an emergency, no work shall be done between the hours
9 of 7:00 P.M. and 7:00 A.M., or on Sundays, oras otherwise stated in the General
10 Conditions. If the proper and efficient prosecution of the work requires
11 operations during the night, the written permission of the Engineer shall be
12 obtained before starting such items of the work.
13
14 D. Access to Public Services
15
16 Neither the excavated materials nor the materials or plant used in the
17 construction of the work shall be so placed as to prevent free access to all fire
18 hydrants, valves or manholes.
19
20 E. Dust Prevention
21
22 The Contractor shall minimize dust nuisance from all construction operations
23 and from traffic by keeping the roads and/or construction areas sprinkled with
24 water at all times or when directed by the Owner and/or Engineer.
25
26 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING
27
28 A. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his portion of the work
29 that may be required to make the several parts thereof join and coordinate in a
30 manner satisfactory to the Engineer and in accordance with the Drawings and
31 Specifications. The work shall be performed by competent workmen skilled in
32 the trade required by the restoration.
33
34 1.11 CLEANING
35
36 A. During construction of the work, the Contractor shall, at all times, keep the site
37 of the work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and rubbish as
38 is practicable and shall remove the same from any portion of the site if, in the
39 opinion of the Owner or Engineer, such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes
40 a nuisance or is objectionable.
41
42 The Contractor shall remove from the site all of his surplus materials and
43 temporary structures when no further need therefore develops.
44
45 B. Final Cleaning
46
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-13 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 At the conclusion of the work, all erection plant, tools, temporary structures and
2 materials belonging to the Contractor shall be promptly taken away, and he shall
3 remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other foreign
4 substances.
5
6 The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials installed by
7 him and shall deliver such materials and equipment undamaged in a bright,
8 clean, polished and new operating condition.
9
10 1.12 MISCELLANEOUS
11
12 A. Protection against Siltation and Bank Erosion
13
14 1. The Contractor shall arrange his operations to minimize siltation and
15 bank erosion on construction sites and on existing or proposed water
16 courses, drainage ditches, wetlands and other areas of concern.
17
18 2. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove any siltation deposits
19 and correct any erosion problems as directed by the Engineer that results
20 from his construction operations.
21
22 3. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any fines resulting from the
23 encroachment of any environmentally protected areas.
24
25 B. Protection of Wetland Areas
26
27 The Contractor shall properly dispose of all surplus material, including soil, in
28 accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations and the permits issued
29 for this project. Under no circumstances shall surplus material be disposed of
30 in wetland areas as defined by the Florida Department of Environmental
31 Protection, Southwest Florida Water Management District, U.S. Army Corps of
32 Engineers, etc.
33
34 C. Existing Facilities
35
36 The work shall be so conducted to maintain existing facilities in operation insofar
37 as is possible. Requirements and schedules of operations for maintaining
38 existing facilities in service during construction shall be as described in these
39 Specifications.
40
41 D. Use of Chemicals
42
43 All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation,
44 whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of other
45 classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all such
46 chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with
47 manufacturers' instructions.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-14 12/17/2020
1
2 E. Tree Removal
3
4 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and any regulatory authorities forty -
5 eight (48) hours in advance of any removal of trees on the project. No clearing
6 shall occur and no earth moving equipment shall be placed on-site until after
7 the notice has been issued. The Contractor shall provide maintenance of the
8 tree barricades and other preventive measures to protect the trees that are to
9 remain. Failure to notify the Engineer before removing trees shall result in the
10 in-kind replacement of the tree at no additional cost to the Owner.
11
12 F. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Systems
13
14 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the satisfactory installation of
15 storm sewer and sanitary sewer systems to be in substantial conformance to
16 the approved Drawings. No roadway base or paving shall be constructed until
17 the Contractor has performed lamping of these lines to his and the Engineer's
18 satisfaction, and all storm sewer and sanitary sewer invert grades are verified
19 in the field by the Owner. The lamping of lines and verification of elevations in
20 no way absolves the Contractor from any of contractual obligations.
21
22 G. Related Permits
23
24 The Contractor recognizes that the Owner has applied for, and may have
25 received, certain permits pertaining to the work. At the sole discretion of the
26 Owner, the Owner may assign said permits to the Contractor and the Contractor
27 shall accept said assignments upon such request from the Owner.
28
29 H. All work in the vicinity of open waters, wetlands or any jurisdictional area is to
30 be performed in strict accordance with applicable environmental permits and
31 their conditions. Erosion barriers, when shown on the construction Drawings,
32 are the minimum required. If the Contractor's construction methods require that
33 additional erosion control is necessary to satisfy these permits, such controls
34 shall be supplied, installed and maintained throughout the construction process
35 by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer.
36
37 It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to submit, in a timely manner, any
38 information, data, etc. that is required as a condition of a permit. Required
39 information, data, etc. shall be submitted directly to the permitting agency by the
40 Contractor with copies to the permittee and the Engineer. The Contractor will
41 be held responsible for any fine(s) or other action resulting from a violation of
42 permit conditions.
43
44 113 DISPOSAL
45
46 A. The Contractor shall directly pay all tipping fees associated with disposal of
47 construction demolition debris. The Contractor shall include in its bid all costs
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-15 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
1 associated with disposal of construction debris including collection, storage,
2 hauling and tipping fees.
3
4 1.14 RESTORATION OF PROPERTY
5
6 A. Responsibility. All damage resulting from construction work on existing
7 structures, wetland areas, roadway pavement, driveways, other paved areas,
8 fences, utilities, traffic control devices and any other obstruction not specifically
9 named herein, shall be repaired, restored or replaced by the Contractor, at their
10 own expense, unless otherwise specified.
11
12 B. Temporary Repairs. All damage named in Paragraph A above shall be at least
13 temporarily repaired, restored or replaced immediately following construction
14 efforts at that location. Temporary restoration shall mean putting the affected
15 area back into a safe, usable condition. In no case shall trenches remain open
16 overnight within a street right-of-way unless the governing Traffic Control
17 Division grants specific approval.
18
19 C. Permanent Repairs. All damage shall be permanently repaired, restored, or
20 replaced not later than the 30th calendar day following the completion of
21 construction at that location unless otherwise stipulated. Permanent repairs
22 shall be accomplished in a professional workmanship -like manner in
23 accordance with Specifications contained herein, or contract documents, if
24 addressed. The Contractor may be relieved of the 30 -day time limit above only
25 by specific written agreement with the Engineer.
26
27 D. Owner Retribution. In the event that the Contractor fails to make the permanent
28 repairs within the time specified, the Owner, at its option, will, with its own
29 resources or by contract with others, cause the repair, restoration, or
30 replacement of the affected area to be accomplished. The costs of such work
31 will be deducted either from the next pay request or from any other monies owed
32 the Contractor.
33
34 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
35
36 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
37
38
39 END OF SECTION
40
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-16 12/17/2020
1 SECTION 01014
2
3 SUMMARY OF WORK
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 LOCATION OF WORK
8
9 A. All Work of this Contract is located in rights-of-way, easements, or on property
10 owned by the City of Clearwater, Florida.
11
12 1.02 WORK TO BE DONE
13
14 A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services and
15 incidentals to complete all work required by these Specifications and as shown
16 on the Drawings.
17
18 B. The Contractor shall perform the work complete, in place and ready for
19 continuous service, and shall include repairs, testing, permits, clean up,
20 replacements, and restoration required as a result of damages caused during
21 this construction.
22
23 C. All materials, equipment, skills, tools, and labor which is reasonably and properly
24 inferable and necessary for the proper completion of the work in a substantial
25 manner and in compliance with the requirements stated or implied by these
26 Specifications or Drawings shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor
27 without additional compensation, whether specifically indicated in the Contract
28 Documents or not.
29
30 D. The Contractor shall comply with all Municipal, County, State, Federal, and other
31 codes applicable to the proposed construction work.
32
33 1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE PERFORMED
34
35 A. The work of this Contract comprises the general rehabilitation of the following
36 facilities, as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein.
37
38 1. Mobilization, demobilization, insurances, permits and bonds.
39
40 2. Rehabilitation and modifications of existing facilities as shown on the
41 Drawings and described in Specification Sections I through V.
42
43 1.04 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES
44
45 A. General
46
SUMMARY OF WORK
01014-1 05/04/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 Upon successful construction completion of each new component, and
2 pre -operational testing, Contractor shall conduct testing as required by
3 the Contract Documents.
4
5 2. Contractor shall ensure that, prior to start-up of any component, all
6 handrails, walkways, lighting and associated safety-related facilities are
7 in place.
8
9 3. Contractor shall provide Engineer a minimum of 14 -calendar days
10 advance written notice of any requested change in operation to the
11 existing facility, bypass requirements or connections to existing facilities,
12 and shall obtain the Engineer's written review before scheduling this
13 work.
14
15 B. Restrictions
16
17 1. In planning its work, the Contractor shall consider the following
18 requirements.
19
20 a. As noted elsewhere in these Specifications and on the Drawings,
21 existing equipment and pipelines that can be taken out of service
22 will be limited.
23
24 b. The Contractor shall not take any existing facilities out of service
25 without first obtaining the Owner's or Engineer's written approval.
26
27 c. All new facilities shall be tested in accordance with Specification
28 01625 to demonstrate to the Engineer and Owner that the new
29 facility and associated equipment properly operates prior to taking
30 any other existing facilities or equipment out of service.
31
32 d. All manipulation of valves shall be performed by the Owner's
33 personnel. The Contractor shall not be allowed to manipulate any
34 valves. If there is an emergency, the Contractor shall notify the
35 Owner immediately.
36
37 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
38
39 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
40
41
42 END OF SECTION
SUMMARY OF WORK
01014-2 05/04/2020
1 SECTION 01015
2
3 CONTROL OF WORK
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 WORK PROGRESS
8
9 A. The Contractor shall provide equipment that will be efficient, safe, appropriate
10 and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of progress
11 that will ensure the completion of the work within the Contract Time(s). If, at
12 any time, such facilities appear to the Engineer to be inefficient, inappropriate,
13 insufficient or unsafe for securing the quality of work required or for producing
14 the rate of progress aforesaid, he may order the Contractor to increase the
15 facilities equipment, and the Contractor shall conform to such order. Failure of
16 the Engineer to give such order shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his
17 obligations to secure the quality of the work and rate of progress required to
18 meet the Contract Time(s).
19
20 1.02 PRIVATE LAND
21
22 A. The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside of easements,
23 except by permission of the Owner.
24
25 1.03 WORK LOCATIONS
26
27 A. Work shall be located substantially as indicated on the Drawings, but the
28 Engineer reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be
29 found desirable to avoid interference with existing structures or for other
30 reasons. Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the
31 Contractor's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing
32 different or additional items where required.
33
34 1.04 OPEN EXCAVATIONS
35
36 A. All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing temporary
37 barricades, caution signs, lights and other means to prevent accidents to
38 persons, and damage to property. The Contractor shall, at his own expense,
39 provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating travel
40 by Owner's personnel, pedestrians and workmen. Bridges provided for access
41 to private property during construction shall be removed when no longer
42 required. The length of open trench will be controlled by the particular
43 surrounding conditions and does not endanger existing facilities. If the
44 excavation becomes a hazard, or if it excessively restricts traffic, construction
45 procedures such as limiting the length of open trench, prohibiting stacking
46 excavated material in the street, and requiring that the trench shall not remain
47 open overnight.
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-1 03/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 B. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to open
3 trenches. All trenches, excavated material, equipment, of other obstacles,
4 which could be dangerous to the public, shall be well lighted at night.
5
6 1.05 TEST PITS
7
8 A. The Contractor shall excavate test pits (pot -hole) for locating underground
9 pipelines or structures in advance of construction to verify that the work can be
10 constructed as intended. Test pits shall be excavated and backfilled by the
11 Contractor so as not to create a hazardous area. Test pits shall be backfilled
12 immediately after their purpose has been satisfied and the surface restored and
13 maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
14
15 1.06 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
16
17 A. Unless permission to close a street or plant roadway is received in writing from
18 the proper authority, all excavated material shall be placed so that vehicular and
19 pedestrian traffic may be maintained at all times. If the Contractor's operations
20 cause traffic hazards, he shall repair the road surface, provide temporary ways,
21 erect wheel guards or fences, or take other measures for safety satisfactory to
22 the Engineer.
23
24 B. Maintenance of traffic shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the Florida
25 Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standards. Detours around construction
26 will be subject to the review of the Owner and the Engineer. Where detours are
27 permitted, the Contractor shall provide all necessary barricades and signs as
28 required to divert the flow of traffic. While traffic is detoured the Contractor shall
29 expedite construction operations and those periods when traffic is being
30 detoured will be strictly controlled by the Owner.
31
32 C. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to open
33 trenches. Night watchmen may be required where special hazards exist, or
34 police protection provided for traffic while work is in progress. The Contractor
35 shall be fully responsible for damage or injuries whether or not police protection
36 has been provided.
37
38 1.07 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
39
40 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and private
41 property and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage thereto.
42 If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private property by or on
43 account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the work
44 on the part of the Contractor, such property shall be restored by the Contractor,
45 at his expense, to a condition similar or equal to that existing before the damage
46 was done, or he shall make good the damage in other manner acceptable to
47 the Engineer.
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-2 03/17/2020
1
2 B. All sidewalks that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations shall be restored
3 to their original condition with the use of similar or comparable materials. All
4 curbing shall be restored in a condition equal to the original construction and in
5 accordance with the best modern practice.
6
7 C. Along the location of the work all fences, walks, bushes, trees, shrubbery, and
8 other physical features shall be protected and restored in a thoroughly
9 workmanlike manner. Fences and other features removed by the Contractor
10 shall be replaced in the location indicated by the Engineer as soon as conditions
11 permit. All grass areas beyond the limits of construction that have been
12 damaged by the Contractor shall be restored to original conditions.
13
14 D. Trees close to the work shall be boxed or otherwise protected against injury.
15 The Contractor shall trim all branches that are susceptible to damage because
16 of his operations, but in no case shall any tree be cut or removed without prior
17 notification of the appropriate tree authority. All injuries to bark, trunk, limbs,
18 and roots of trees shall be repaired by dressing, cutting, and painting in
19 accordance with approved methods, using only approved tools and materials.
20
21 E. The protection, removal, and replacement of existing physical features shall be
22 part of the work under the Contract and all costs in connection therewith shall
23 be included in the unit and/or lump sum prices established.
24
25 1.08 PROTECTION AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
26
27 A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection of all buildings,
28 structures, and utilities, public or private, including poles, signs, services to
29 buildings, utilities in the street, gas pipes, water pipes, hydrants, sewers, drains,
30 and electric and telephone cables, whether or not they are shown on the
31 Drawings. The Contractor shall carefully support and protect all such structures
32 and utilities from injury of any kind. Any damage resulting from the Contractor's
33 operations shall be repaired at no additional cost.
34
35 B. The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for obtaining all locations of
36 underground structures and utilities (including existing water services, drain
37 lines, and sewers). Services shall be maintained and all costs or charges
38 resulting from damage thereto shall be paid by the Contractor.
39
40 C. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, permanent relocation of a utility owned by the
41 Owner is required, the Engineer may direct the Contractor in writing, to perform
42 the work. Work so ordered will be paid for at the unit prices bid in the Proposal,
43 if applicable, or as extra work as provided for in the General Conditions. If
44 relocation of a privately owned utility is required, the Owner will notify the Utility
45 to perform the work as expeditiously as possible. The Contractor shall fully
46 cooperate with the Owner and Utility and shall have no claim for delay due to
47 such relocation.
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-3 03/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 D. Underground and above ground utilities/facilities are identified on the Drawings
3 based on best information available at the time for the preparation of the plans.
4 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to locate all utilities prior to any
5 excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to existing
6 underground utilities and facilities and shall coordinate the protection of these
7 utilities with the Owner.
8
9 1.09 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND SERVICES
10
11 A. The Contractor shall interrupt water, telephone, cable TV, Internet service,
12 sewer, gas, or other related utility services and disrupt the normal functioning of
13 the system as little as possible, and shall notify the Owner, Engineer and public
14 well in advance of any requirement for dewatering, isolating, or relocating a
15 section of a utility, so that necessary arrangements may be made with the
16 appropriate agency.
17
18 B. If it appears that utility service will be interrupted for an extended period, the
19 Engineer may order the Contractor to provide temporary service lines.
20 Inconvenience of the users shall be the minimum, consistent with the existing
21 conditions. The safety and integrity of the system is of prime importance in
22 scheduling work.
23
24 1.10 PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT
25
26 A. All newly constructed work shall be carefully protected from injury or damage in
27 every way. No wheeling or walking or placing of heavy loads shall be allowed
28 and any portion injured or damaged shall be reconstructed by the Contractor at
29 his own expense.
30
31 1.11 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
32
33 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and paying for all water
34 required for construction purposes. The Contractor shall make all connections
35 and other provisions, including backflow prevention and metering provisions,
36 necessary to obtain said water from the local utility's potable and/or reclaimed
37 water system, as required. The Contractor shall pay the appropriate party for
38 all water used for construction purposes. Bid prices shall include the costs
39 incurred for water usage.
40
41 1.12 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW
42
43 A. The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide for the flow of sewers, drains, and
44 water courses interrupted during the progress of the work, and shall immediately
45 remove all offensive matter. The entire procedure for maintaining existing flows
46 shall be reviewed by the Engineer in advance of the interruption of any flow.
47
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-4 03/17/2020
1 1.13 COOPERATION WITHIN THIS CONTRACT
2
3 A. All firms or persons authorized to perform any work under this Contract shall
4 cooperate with the General Contractor and his subcontractors or trades, and
5 shall assist in incorporating the work of other trades where necessary or
6 required.
7
8 B. Cutting and patching, drilling and fitting shall be carried out where required by
9 the trade or subcontractor having jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated herein
10 or directed by the Engineer.
11
12 1.14 COOPERATION OUTSIDE THIS CONTRACT
13
14 A. As part of normal and/or emergency system operations and maintenance, the
15 Owner may employ the services of contractors outside this contract. As such,
16 the Contractor of this Work shall coordinate their schedule with and
17 accommodate said contractor as necessary for the execution of their work. This
18 coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
19
20 B. As part of normal and/or emergency system operations and maintenance, the
21 Owner has normal delivery and maintenance suppliers that will be on-site on a
22 regular basis. Contractor shall allow continuous access to all equipment and
23 facilities, so as not to impede the operation and maintenance of said facility.
24 This coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
25
26 1.15 CLEAN-UP
27
28 A. During the course of the work, the Contractor shall keep the site of his
29 operations in a clean and neat condition. He shall remove, transport and
30 properly dispose of all surplus broken pavement, crushed concrete, lumber,
31 excess steel, equipment, temporary structures, and any other refuse from the
32 construction operation, on a weekly basis or as directed by the Owner and/or
33 Engineer. At the conclusion of the work, remove, transport and properly dispose
34 of any surplus excavation, and refuse remaining from the construction
35 operation, and leave the entire site of his work in a neat and orderly condition.
36
37 B. The Contractor shall provide for disposal of excavated material removed from
38 the site.
39
40 1.16 COORDINATION WITH ELECTRICAL UTILITY
41
42 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the power company to
43 have electrical service supplied to the site.
44
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-5 03/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1.17 WORK SEQUENCE
2
3 A. The Owner may incur penalties for failure to maintain service/operations.
4 Therefore, the Contractor will schedule and complete the work in a manner that
5 assures that the facility maintains service including redundancy throughout the
6 duration of the project. Prior to taking any service or operation off-line,
7 Contractor shall prepare a work sequence plan and coordinate all shutdowns
8 with the Owner and/or Engineer. All temporary measures and materials
9 required to meet this condition during construction shall be provided, installed,
10 maintained and removed by the Contractor. All costs associated with this effort
11 shall be borne by the Contractor. All fines imposed by failure to meet this
12 operating condition, due to the Contractor's Work Sequence, shall be borne by
13 the Contractor.
14
15
16 1.18 CHARACTER OF THE CONTRACTOR'S SUPERINTENDENT AND WORKERS
17
18 A. The Contractor's superintendent and project manager shall conduct themselves
19 in a professional manner. If, in the opinion of the Owner and the Engineer, the
20 superintendent and project manager do not conduct themselves in a
21 professional and courteous manner, the Engineer can recommend to the Owner
22 that the superintendent and/or the project manager be relieved of their
23 responsibilities and removed from the project. Upon written notice from the
24 Owner, the Contractor shall immediately remove the superintendent and/or the
25 project manager of their responsibilities and removed from the project. The work
26 of this project must be conducted under the supervision of a full-time
27 superintendent.
28
29 B. Any person employed by the Contractor or by any subcontractor who in the
30 opinion of the Engineer does not conduct him/herself in a professional and
31 courteous manner or is intemperate or disorderly, shall, at written request of the
32 Owner be replaced by the Contractor.
33
34 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
35
36 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
37
38
39 END OF SECTION
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-6 03/17/2020
1 SECTION 01016
2
3 CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 A. At all times during construction of the project, the City of Clearwater's Northeast
10 Water Reclamation Facility shall remain in service, except for temporary
11 shutdowns described herein. Throughout construction, the Contractor shall
12 cooperate fully with the City's operations and maintenance staff in order to
13 minimize disruption to the facility's operation.
14
15 B. The Owner will continue to operate the existing and new or rehabilitated
16 treatment facilities during construction and will be responsible for maintaining
17 effluent quality. The Contractor will operate all temporary treatment systems in
18 cooperation with the City. This includes the requirement to schedule
19 construction operations such as to not impact any treatment that might affect
20 the performance of the plant during the City's quarterly chronic toxicity testing
21 associated with its FDEP operating permit.
22
23 C. The Contractor shall schedule and conduct the work in such a way that it will
24 not impede any treatment process, create potential hazards to operating
25 equipment or to personnel, will not reduce the quality of plant effluent and
26 residuals, and not cause odor or other nuisance.
27
28 D. The general intent of this project is to rehabilitate the existing facilities while
29 continuously treating wastewater and sludge using existing, new, temporary, or
30 rehabilitated equipment and facilities. The Contractor shall design, furnish,
31 install, test, operate and maintain all temporary bypass pumping, treatment and
32 piping system(s) required to complete the work as shown.
33
34 E. No facility or structure shall be taken out of service until a temporary
35 utilities/facility or the new replacement utility/facility or structure is constructed,
36 tested and accepted by the Owner. Vehicle and personnel access to all
37 operating treatment units shall be maintained at all times.
38
39 F. The phasing plans described herein are representative only. It is the
40 Contractor's responsibility to devise its own phasing plan, which will meet the
41 requirements specified herein. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
42 construction phasing plan for review for conformance with these specifications
43 prior to beginning any construction onsite.
44
45 G. Brief shutdowns of equipment may be allowed during critical phases, but only
46 with the Owner's prior written approval. The Contractor shall request the
47 Owner's approval a minimum two (2) weeks prior to any temporary shutdowns.
CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
01016-1 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 H. The Contractor shall maintain in service all existing facilities until the
3 rehabilitated or replacement facilities are constructed, tested and accepted by
4 the Owner. All materials, piping, equipment, power, labor, etc. associated with
5 temporary utilities/facilities or temporary pumping or piping shall be the
6 responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate and provide a
7 new temporary service drop from the power company and pay for all electrical
8 power usage for power to all temporary facilities, temporary treatment process
9 equipment, temporary bypass pumping equipment, and all other temporary
10 power needs during construction.
11
12 I. Prior to taking any structure or facility out of service, the Contractor shall furnish,
13 install and test all temporary bypass pumping, treatment and piping systems
14 and other temporary piping connections and equipment as required or directed.
15 All power, labor, equipment, and materials for any temporary pumping and
16 piping shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Temporary bypass pumping
17 and treatment systems, if any, shall meet the requirements of Specification
18 Sections IVB 13567, Section IVC and as shown on the Contract Drawings.
19
20 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
21 (NOT USED)
22
23 PART 3 — EXECUTION
24
25 3.01 HEADWORKS AND PRIMARY TREATMENT PHASING PLAN
26
27 A. The phasing plan for the headworks and primary treatment portion of project
28 shall observe the following priorities with respect to plant operations.
29
30 • Maintain plant flow
31 • Maintain grit removal
32 • Maintain primary sludge removal
33 • Maintain primary sludge thickening
34 • Maintain headworks odor control system
35
36 B. The following describes a phased approach to constructing the project while
37 observing the priorities listed in 3.01 A.
38
39 Phase 1 — Install temporary LS No. 2 pump station, establish its reliability and
40 re-route the discharge piping LS 2 to upstream of the existing bar screens as
41 shown on the drawings before any other work associated with the Headworks
42 and Primary Treatment Systems is performed. Coordinate the work associated
43 with in -plant Pump Station No. 2 with the Sludge Blend Tank Improvements
44 work such that construction of these two systems is not occurring concurrently.
45
CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
01016-2 12/17/2020
1 Phase 2 — In this phase, the existing north primary clarifier is demolished, the
2 continuous moving belt filter facility is constructed, and a temporary bypass
3 pumping, screenings/grit removal and yard piping are installed, tested and
4 placed in service. The temporary bypass pumping system, screenings/grit
5 removal system, and continuous moving belt filter system will be operated so
6 as to maintain flow, screenings/grit removal, and primary sludge removal while
7 the work associated with the headworks building, the north primary clarifier, and
8 the primary effluent box channel is completed. The City will operate the
9 continuous belt moving filters and the Contractor will operate the temporary
10 bypass pumping and temporary screenings/grit removal systems. Other items
11 of work associated with this phase include:
12
13 • Construct scab wall on inside face of the north primary clarifier wall
14 before demolishing the clarifier. Plug the existing primary clarifier influent
15 and sludge withdrawal pipes.
16 • Temporarily relocate the 4 -inch force main from the influent channel
17 upstream of the existing Parshall flume to a point upstream of the bar
18 screens or into the temporary grit removal system.
19 • Temporarily relocate the common force main serving in -plant pump
20 stations No. 2 and No. 3 from the existing primary clarifier splitter box to
21 a point upstream of the existing bar screens or into the temporary grit
22 removal system.
23 • Make two (2) 48" x 30" wet taps on the existing 48" pipe carrying flow to
24 the secondary treatment system.
25 • Install all temporary and permanent yard piping required to maintain full
26 plant flow and to operate the continuous belt moving filters, including the
27 temporary piping between the temporary grit removal facility and the inlet
28 to the moving belt filters.
29 • Install, test and bring on-line all electrical power, controls, and SCADA
30 systems for the continuous moving belt filters.
31 • Furnish and install a temporary flowmeter with totalizer on the discharge
32 of the temporary bypass pump system, with connection to the existing
33 SCADA system.
34 • Place the temporary bypass pumping system, the temporary
35 screenings/grit removal system and the moving belt filter system in
36 service. Close the influent gates to the existing bar screens and install
37 the slide gate in the Diversion Chamber to isolate the existing headworks
38 building, the primary clarifier and sludge pump building and the primary
39 effluent box channel.
40
41 Phase 3 — In this phase, all remaining work upstream of the effluent Diversion
42 Chamber is performed, tested and made ready for operation while the
43 temporary bypass pumping system, the temporary screenings/grit removal
44 system, and the continuous moving belt filters are in operation.
45
46 Phase 4 — In this phase, the temporary bypass pumping system, temporary
47 screenings/grit removal system, and all temporary yard piping are removed and
CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
01016-3 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 flow is re-established to the permanent configuration as those systems are
2 brought on-line.
3
4 3.02 FLOW EQUALIZATION SYSTEM PHASING PLAN
5
6 Phase 5 — During this phase, the existing irrigation tank is removed and the new
7 flow equalization facility is constructed. The completion of this phase should
8 coincide with the completion of the Headworks and Primary Treatment Phasing
9 Plan so that the permanent connections to the existing 48" pipe carrying flow to
10 the secondary treatment system can be made.
11
12 • Demolish existing irrigation tank, with associated control building and
13 piping.
14 • Construct the foundation and floor of the new flow equalization tank
15 • Construct glass -fused -to -steel tank.
16 • Install tank platform and internal equipment including pulsed air mixing
17 system piping.
18 • Construct equalization basin supply and return pump stations,
19 compressed air system and all associated piping and electrical systems.
20 • When the temporary pumping and screenings/grit removal treatment
21 systems are no longer required for construction of the Headworks and
22 Primary Treatment Improvements, startup the flow equalization tank and
23 associated equipment.
24
25 3.03 DESCRIPTION OF SLUDGE BLEND TANK IMPROVEMENTS WORK
26
27 A. Specific Constraints and Sequencing
28
29 The following constraints shall be applied to the sequencing of
30 construction on the project. These constraints and sequencing do not
31 purport to include all constraints for sequencing required for the
32 construction of the project.
33
34 1. The daily scheduled deliveries of the East WRF thickened WAS
35 (TWAS) shall not be interrupted during construction. Typical
36 deliveries are in 6,000 gallon tanker trucks with 2-3 deliveries each
37 day. The existing Truck Off -Loading Pump Station shall be used
38 during construction of the new facilities until such time that startup
39 and testing of the new Truck Off -Loading Pump Station is
40 completed and can be placed into service and operated by the
41 Owner. The daily transfer of TWAS and thickened Primary Sludge
42 (TPSL) to the Anaerobic Digesters shall not be interrupted during
43 construction.
44
45 2. The daily dewatering of the anaerobic sludge from the Storage
46 and Blend Tanks shall not be interrupted during construction. The
47 Owner typically dewaters from 5:00 p.m. to 1:00 a.m. for single
CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
01016-4 12/17/2020
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
loads and from 1:00 p.m. to 5:00 a.m. for double loads Monday
through Saturday. Saturday evening through Sunday evening is
the only time the Owner does not typically dewater. The
Contractor is responsible for verifying this schedule with the
Owner. One of the Sludge Storage and Blending Tanks shall
remain in service at all times to store and dewater anaerobic
digested sludge and maintain a dewatering unit in operation. The
Dewatering Pumps shall be temporarily relocated as shown in the
Contract Drawings and will act as a temporary bypass during the
construction and installation of the new dewatering equipment and
associated piping, valves, concrete, and electrical. The
Contractor shall provide all temporary valves and piping to
perform the required work. Temporary bypass piping shall be
constructed and installed in a method similar to the bypass piping
plan shown in the Contract Drawings. The Contract Drawings
show a feasible bypass option, but the Contractor may submit
another bypass plan for Owner and Engineer approval. The
Contractor is responsible for the actual means and methods
employed.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for operating and maintaining
all temporary systems during construction.
4. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer and Owner
before taking any pumps, pipes, or other equipment out of service.
All temporary systems shall be installed and operational, all flow
diversion valves shall be checked and operable, and the
appropriate flow channel shall be cleaned.
5. Coordinate the Sludge Blend Tank Improvement Work with the
work associated with in -plant Pump Station No. 2 such that
construction of these two systems is not occurring at the same
time.
B. Storage and Blend Tank Sequencing:
1. All tank processes shall be operated out of the South Dewatering
Storage Tank while improvements are made to the North Biosolids
Blend Tank. Improvements on the North Biosolids Blend tanks
shall be up to and including the riser piping so that the tank can
be fully operational with electrical, instrumentation, and SCADA
elements in place. The existing below grade piping to the South
Dewatering Storage Tank shall remain protected and undisturbed
until the North Biosolids Blend Tank construction is complete and
is prepared to begin operation.
CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
01016-5 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 2. When construction on the North Biosolids Blend Tank is complete,
2 the riser piping will be tied into the existing plant feed piping where
3 the south isolation valve will be closed and plugged and the riser
4 isolation valve will remain open to receive plant sludge.
5 Construction shall commence on the South Dewatering Storage
6 Tank and demolition and replacement of the concrete and piping
7 between the tanks, east of the pipe trench, during this period.
8
9 C. Dewatering Feed Pumps:
10
11 1. While the North Biosolids Blend Tank is being upgraded, the
12 Dewatering Feed Pumps will be relocated while maintaining
13 dewatering feed from the South Dewatering Storage Tank using
14 the relocated existing active Dewatering Feed Pumps (one
15 designated for the Centrifuge, one for the Belt Filter Press, and
16 the other as a Standby Feed Pump as shown in the Contract
17 Drawings).
18
19 2. The Contractor shall have a minimum of one operating dewatering
20 pump relocated to the bypass area with all electrical, piping, and
21 appurtenances required for operation. The Contractor shall
22 connect the dewatering bypass system to the South Dewatering
23 Storage Tank during the schedule provided by the Owner when
24 the Dewatering Operation is not occurring. The remaining
25 dewatering pumps will then be connected to the dewatering
26 bypass no Tess than 3 days after initial connection and bypass
27 startup.
28
29 3. Once the North Biosolids Blend Tank work has been completed
30 and the tank can be put into service and operated by the Owner,
31 the South Dewatering Storage Tank shall be taken offline and the
32 Digested Sludge from the Anaerobic Digester shall be diverted to
33 the North Biosolids Blend Tank.
34
35 4. During the work sequence above, the Dewatering Feed header
36 piping between the two tanks in the open trench shall be replaced
37 as shown in the Contract Documents. The relocated Dewatering
38 Feed Pumps shall maintain all capacity for this duration.
39
40 5. At least three Dewatering Feed Pumps shall remain in service
41 during construction at all times. The Contractor shall provide
42 temporary power and perform any work required to maintain
43 operation of the relocated Anaerobically Digested Sludge
44 Dewatering System.
45
46 D. TWAS and TPSL:
47
CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
01016-6 12/17/2020
1 1. The Contractor shall construct the components of the new sludge
2 valve station piping, flow meter, and motor operated valves
3 without interrupting the existing TWAS and TPSL lines (to the
4 maximum extent possible) that feed sludge to the anaerobic
5 digester.
6
7 2. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to schedule a
8 temporary shutdown and bypass piping (as required) of the TPSL
9 and TWAS flows to connect the newly constructed piping to the
10 existing sludge lines in order to keep the processes in service. In
11 addition, construct the connection of the 4 -inch blended sludge
12 line to the existing anaerobic digester feed line at the anaerobic
13 digester during the shut -down or schedule a separate bypass
14 shut -down event.
15
16 3. The TWAS and TPSL shall maintain flow to the Anaerobic
17 Digesters uninterrupted during construction of the piping from the
18 Sludge Storage and Blend Tanks to the connection point at the
19 existing digester feed piping.
20
21 E. Electric Duct Bank:
22
23 1. Contractor shall coordinate construction of the Duct Bank shown
24 on the Electrical Contract Drawings so that access shall be
25 permitted from either the South or West direction. Access shall be
26 defined as a complete constructed asphalt surface for roll -off
27 trucks to remove and replace the dumpster for emptying.
28
29 2. The Contractor shall complete all pavement restoration over one
30 section of the duct bank before beginning excavation on the other
31 section.
32
33 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the
34 Owner on the Grit Dumpster Removal schedule in order to ensure
35 the Work of this project will not interrupt Dumpster Pad Access.
36
37 4. Access to the Dumpster Pad west of the South Dewatering
38 Storage Tank shall be maintained at all times to allow plant
39 operation related to the removal of the grit dumpster on a regular
40 basis.
41
42 F Odor Control Reconnection:
43
44 1. Contractor to ensure the Odor Control Piping is stored and
45 protected during the Work describe herein. When the construction
46 on the North Blend Tank is completed, the Contractor may
47 reconnect the Odor Control Piping to the North Biosolids Blending
CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
01016-7 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Tank and modify to plug the portion that would go to the South
2 Dewatering Storage Tank at the discretion of the Owner.
3
4 2. Modifications may be needed to reconnect the existing Odor
5 Control Piping to the penetration provided by the selected cover
6 manufacturer. The Contractor shall coordinate this with the cover
7 manufacturer and shall be responsible for the material and labor
8 associated with the Odor Control piping modifications during
9 reconnection.
10
11 END OF SECTION
12
13
14
15
CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
01016-8 12/17/2020
1 SECTION 01030
2
3 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8
9 A. When a specific product is specified or called for, it is intended and shall be
10 understood by the Contractor that the Contractor's proposal includes those
11 products in its bid. Should the Contractor desire to incorporate products equal
12 to those specified, the Contractor shall furnish information as described in the
13 General Conditions. The alternate product or products submitted by the
14 Contractor shall meet the requirements of the Specifications and shall, in all
15 respects, be equal to the products specified by name herein.
16
17 B. All apparatus, mechanism, equipment, machinery and manufactured articles for
18 incorporation into the Work shall be the new and unused standard products of
19 recognized reputable manufacturers unless specifically noted otherwise.
20
21 C. Contractor shall properly dispose of all excess materials from the site.
22
23 1.02 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS
24
25 A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate and prepare
26 for connections to the existing systems, as shown on the Drawings. All
27 connections to existing systems shall be coordinated with the Owner and/or
28 Engineer prior to commencing the work. All connections to existing systems
29 shall be attended by the Owner and/or Owner's Representative. The costs for
30 this work and for the actual connection to the existing systems shall be included
31 in the various prices bid and shall not result in any additional cost to the Owner.
32
33 B. During the initial phases of the work, the Contractor is responsible to do
34 reconnaissance of the site and verify the correct location and sizing of the
35 facilities at all connection points before purchasing the necessary materials.
36
37 1.03 EXISTING UNDERGROUND PIPING, STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
38
39 A. The attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that during excavation, the
40 possibility exists that the Contractor may encounter water, gas, telephone,
41 electrical, internet, and/or other utilities not shown on the Drawings. The
42 Contractor shall exercise extreme care before and during excavation to locate
43 and flag these lines so as to avoid damage thereto. Should damage occur to
44 an existing line, the Contractor shall immediately contact the utility and the
45 Owner. If the repair is to be completed by the Contractor it shall be carried out
46 in a timely and quality manner. Costs associated with such damage shall be
47 borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-1 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all utility or other poles,
3 the stability of which may be endangered by the close proximity of excavation,
4 are temporarily supported in position while work proceeds in the vicinity of the
5 pole and that utility or other companies concerned be given reasonable advance
6 notice of any such excavation by the Contractor.
7
8 C. The locations of existing utilities are shown without express or implied
9 representation, assurance, or guarantee that they are complete or correct or
10 that they represent a true picture of underground piping to be encountered.
11 Encountering existing utilities at different depths or locations than shown on the
12 Drawings shall not be cause for additional costs to the Owner.
13
14 D. The existing piping and utilities that interfere with new construction shall be
15 rerouted as shown, specified or required. The Contractor shall excavate test
16 pits sufficiently ahead of the proposed work to predict potential conflicts. Before
17 any piping and utilities not shown on the Drawings are disturbed, the Contractor
18 shall immediately notify the Engineer of the location of the pipeline or utility and
19 shall reroute or relocate the pipeline or utility as directed.
20
21 E. The Contractor shall exercise care in any excavation to locate all existing piping
22 and utilities. All utilities that do not interfere with completed work shall be
23 carefully protected against damage. Any existing utilities damaged in any way
24 by the Contractor shall be restored or replaced by the Contractor at his expense,
25 as directed by the Engineer.
26
27 F. It is intended that wherever existing utilities such as water, gas, telephone,
28 electrical, or other service lines must be crossed, deflection of the pipe within
29 recommended limits and cover shall be used to satisfactorily clear the
30 obstruction unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. However, when in the
31 opinion of the Owner or Engineer this procedure is not feasible, he may direct
32 the use of fittings for the utility crossing. The Contractor shall verify utility
33 crossings with test pits prior to construction as required by the Engineer.
34
35 1.04 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN
36
37 A. Bid prices for equipment furnished shall include the cost of a competent field
38 service technician of the manufacturers of all equipment to assist in the
39 installation, adjustment and testing of the equipment, and to instruct the Owner's
40 operating personnel on operation and maintenance. The approved
41 manufacturer's operation and maintenance data shall be delivered to the
42 Engineer prior to instructing the Owner's personnel. This supervision may be
43 divided into two or more time periods, as required by the installation program or
44 as directed by the Engineer.
45
46 B. After installation of the equipment has been completed and the equipment is
47 presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-2 12/17/2020
1 manufacturer's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test and adjust the
2 equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points where
3 applicable:
4
5 1. Soundness (without damaged parts).
6
7 2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required.
8
9 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various
10 parts.
11
12 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubricants.
13
14 5. Calibration and adjustment of all related instrumentation and controls.
15
16 6. Energize equipment.
17
18 7. Deficiency correction.
19
20 8. Demonstration of compliance with applicable performance specification.
21
22 C. The operation, testing and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the
23 equipment has been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the
24 conditions specified.
25
26 D. Upon completion of this work, the manufacturer's field service technician shall
27 submit to the Engineer, a complete, signed report of the results of his inspection,
28 operation, adjustments and tests in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals.
29 The report shall include detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and
30 adjustments made, quantitative results obtained if such are specified, and
31 suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance.
32
33 E. Each equipment manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner's operating
34 personnel. Training shall be in accordance with Section IVB, Specification
35 11000 and as described herein. Training shall not be performed until the
36 requirements of Paragraphs B, C and D above have been fully satisfied and any
37 specified performance testing completed. Training shall be provided for the
38 number of days specified in each equipment section of these specifications.
39 Training shall be provided on an 8 -hour per day basis. Partial days of Tess than
40 eight (8) full working hours shall not be credited toward the specified duration.
41 Training shall not be concurrent with on-going testing, debugging or installation
42 activities; but shall be on a separate activity devoted exclusively to the
43 instruction of the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the
44 manufacturer's equipment. Qualified representatives of each equipment
45 manufacturer specifically skilled in providing instruction to operations personnel
46 shall perform training. Training shall provide an overview of operations and
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-3 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 maintenance requirements and shall include as a minimum, but not be limited
2 to:
3
4 1. Description of unit and component parts.
5
6 2. Operating capabilities and performance criteria.
7
8 3. Operating procedures.
9
10 4. Maintenance procedures.
11
12 5. Servicing and lubrication schedules.
13
14 6. Troubleshooting.
15
16 7. Electrical instrumentation and control requirements and interface.
17
18 The operating and maintenance data to be provided shall be used as a basis
19 for training. Additional requirements for Training are provided in Section 01820
20 and Section IVB, Specification 11000.
21
22 F. A written "Certificate of Proper Installation" executed by the manufacturer
23 stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment
24 has been satisfactorily tested and is ready for operation, and that the Owner's
25 personnel have been instructed in the proper operation and maintenance of the
26 equipment shall be submitted before start-up by the Contractor. The Certificate
27 shall indicate date and time instruction was given and names of Owner's
28 personnel in attendance. This certification shall be submitted on a certification
29 form reviewed by the Engineer.
30
31 G. See the Technical Specifications for additional requirements for furnishing the
32 services of the manufacturer's field service technician.
33
34 H. For other equipment furnished, the Contractor, unless otherwise specified, shall
35 furnish the services of accredited field services technicians of the manufacturer
36 only when some evident malfunction or over -heating makes such services
37 necessary in the opinion of the Engineer.
38
39 1.05 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
40
41 A. Operating and Maintenance information shall be in accordance with Section
42 01730 and as described herein.
43
44 B. Operating and maintenance data for each piece of equipment furnished shall
45 be delivered directly to the Engineer for review within 60 days of shop drawing
46 review completion. No payment shall be made for equipment installed or stored
47 on-site until the Engineer has reviewed the adequacy and completeness of
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-4 12/17/2020
1 operating and maintenance data. Final copies of operating and maintenance
2 data shall have been delivered to the Engineer prior to scheduling the
3 training/instruction period with the Owner.
4
5 1.06 EQUIPMENT DATA LIST
6
7 A. Obtain, prepare and submit a complete, detailed listing of equipment and motor
8 data for all electrical items furnished under this Contract. This listing shall be
9 submitted with the preliminary draft of Operations and Maintenance Data
10 Manuals on Equipment Data Sheets.
11
12 1.07 SPARE PARTS
13
14 A. Spare parts to be provided for certain equipment are specified in the pertinent
15 sections of the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store
16 all spare parts in a manner approved by the manufacturer. In addition, the
17 Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the
18 equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, and
19 the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be
20 furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. The Contractor
21 shall deliver the spare parts to the Engineer ten (10) days prior to start-up of the
22 equipment.
23
24 B. All spare parts shall be furnished in containers clearly identified in indelible
25 markings as to contents. Each container shall be packed for prolonged storage.
26
27 C. No start-up activities shall take place until the specified spare parts have been
28 furnished.
29
30 1.08 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
31
32 A. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment, with
33 particular attention to mechanical equipment such as pumps and electric drives.
34 The units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified millwrights
35 after their sole plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the anchor bolts.
36 The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened against the shims.
37 After the foundation alignments have been approved by the manufacturer, the
38 bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be securely bolted in place. The
39 alignment of equipment shall be further checked after securing to the
40 foundations, and after confirmation of all alignments, the sole plates shall be
41 finally grouted in place. The Contractor shall be responsible for the exact
42 alignment of equipment with associated piping and, under no circumstances,
43 will "pipe springing" be allowed.
44
45 B. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, or other materials necessary to
46 properly align, level and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the
47 Contractor. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so.
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-5 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Any grinding necessary to bring parts to proper bearing after erection shall be
2 done at the expense of the Contractor.
3
4 1.09 MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULES
5
6 A. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, the Contractor shall
7 provide a list including the equipment name; address and telephone number of
8 the manufacturer's representative and service company so that service and/or
9 spare parts can be readily obtained. Submit in accordance with Section 01300.
10
11 1.10 INSTALLATION LISTS
12
13 A. All manufacturers or equipment suppliers who propose to furnish equipment or
14 products shall submit an installation list to the Engineer along with the required
15 Shop Drawings.
16
17 B. The installation list shall include all installations (minimum of two) where
18 identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for a period
19 of at least one (1) year.
20
21 1.11 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS
22
23 A. The Contractor shall provide all openings, channels, chases, etc., and install
24 anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete, as required to
25 complete the work under this Contract, together with those required by
26 subcontractors, and shall do all cutting and patching, excepting cutting and
27 patching of materials of a specified trade and as stated otherwise in the following
28 paragraph.
29
30 B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the subcontractors to provide all sleeves,
31 inserts, hangers, anchor bolts, etc., of the proper size and material for the
32 execution of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any corrective
33 cutting and refinishing required to make the necessary openings, chases, etc.
34 In no case shall beams, lintels or other structural members be cut without the
35 written acceptance of the Engineer.
36
37 1.12 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION
38
39 A. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the run-off
40 of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumen, calcium chloride,
41 or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or other life, into the
42 supplies and surface waters of the state. Control measures must be adequate
43 to assure that turbidity in the receiving water will not be increased more than 10
44 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU), or as otherwise required by the state or
45 other controlling body, in water used for public water supply or fish unless limits
46 have been established for the particular water. In surface water used for other
47 purposes, the turbidity must not exceed 25 NTU unless otherwise permitted.
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-6 12/17/2020
1 Special precautions shall be taken in the use of construction equipment to
2 prevent operations that promote erosion.
3
4 B. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the EPA-NPDES generic
5 permit for storm water discharges and the storm water pollution prevention plan
6 developed for the project. See Section 01065.
7
8 1.13 VALVE INDICES
9
10 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing tags for all valves required on
11 the work and installing the tags required for his own work. Tags on above
12 ground valves shall be non -corrosive metal or plastic, 2 inches in diameter, 19-
13 gauge thickness. Tags for buried valves shall be secured to a concrete base
14 as shown on the Drawings. Submit to the Engineer for review, two (2) samples
15 of each type of tag proposed and manufacturer's standard color chart and letter
16 styles. Tags shall have stamped on them the information shown on the
17 Drawings and the data described herein. The Contractor shall submit to the
18 Engineer for review, not less than 120 days before start-up, a valve schedule
19 containing all valves required for the work. The schedule shall contain for each
20 valve, the location, type, a number, words to identify the valve's function, and
21 the normal operating position. The information contained in the valve schedules
22 shall be coded on the tags in a system provided by the Owner. Above ground
23 valve tags shall be furnished with non -corrosive metal wire for attachment
24 thereof.
25
26 1.14 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN
27
28 A. Within 30 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to
29 the Engineer and Owner a Hurricane Preparedness Plan. The Plan should
30 outline the necessary measures that the Contractor proposes to perform at no
31 additional cost to the Owner in case of a hurricane warning.
32
33 B. In the event of inclement weather, or whenever Engineer shall direct; the
34 Contractor shall carefully protect the Work and materials against damage or
35 injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or
36 material has been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the
37 Contractor or subcontractors to set protect the Work, such Work and materials
38 shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
39
40 1.15 WARRANTIES
41
42 A. The Contractor and the equipment manufacturers shall warranty all equipment
43 supplied under these Specifications for a minimum period of one (1) year unless
44 otherwise specified. Warranty period shall commence on the date that the Work
45 is accepted by the Owner as substantially complete.
46
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-7 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship,
2 design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the
3 warranty period, it shall be replaced and returned to service at no expense to
4 the Owner.
5
6 C. If, within the warranty period, repairs or changes are required in connection with
7 work that in the opinion of the Engineer is rendered necessary as the result of
8 the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that is inferior, defective, or not
9 in accordance with the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly upon
10 receipt of notice from the Owner and without expense to the Owner:
11
12 1. Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such work and
13 correct all defects herein.
14
15 2. Repair or replace all damage to buildings, the site, or equipment or
16 contents thereof, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is the result of the
17 use of materials, equipment or workmanship that are inferior, defective,
18 or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract.
19
20 3. Repair or replace any work or material or equipment disturbed in fulfilling
21 any such guarantee.
22
23 D. If within ten (10) days after receiving notice, the Contractor fails to proceed to
24 comply with the terms of the warranty, the Owner may have the defects
25 corrected, and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expenses
26 incurred, provided, however, that in case of an emergency where, in the opinion
27 of the Owner, delay would cause loss or damage, repairs may be started without
28 notice being given to the Contractor and the Contractor shall pay the cost
29 thereof.
30
31 E. All special guarantees or warranties applicable to specific parts of the work, as
32 may be stipulated in the Contract Documents, shall be subject to the terms of
33 this paragraph during the first year following acceptance. All special guarantees
34 and manufacturers' warranties shall be assembled by the Contractor and
35 delivered to the Engineer, along with a summary list thereof, before the
36 acceptance of the Work.
37
38 F The manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the Contractor's
39 warranty or guarantee period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed.
40 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining equipment warranties from
41 each of the respective suppliers or manufacturers for all the equipment
42 specified. The form of warranty may be included in the Contract Documents, or
43 shall otherwise be acceptable to the Owner.
44
45 G. In the event that the manufacturer is unwilling to provide a one-year warranty
46 commencing at the time of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall obtain
47 from the manufacturer a multi-year warranty as specified in Section 01740
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-8
12/17/2020
1 starting at the time that the manufacturer certified proper installation. This
2 warranty shall not relieve the Contractor of the one-year warranty commencing
3 upon Substantial Completion.
4
5 H. The Contractor's one-year warranty or guarantee period shall be part of the
6 project's Performance Bond.
7
8 I. Additional warranty requirements are specified in Section 01740.
9
10 1.16 WATER TIGHTNESS
11
12 A. Special precautions shall be taken in the curing of concrete to reduce concrete
13 cracking. All water -retaining structures (those that are intended to hold a liquid)
14 shall be filled and tested for leaks by the Contractor, with water acceptable to
15 the Engineer, prior to surface coating or painting. Procedure and manner in
16 which any leaks are repaired must be reviewed by the Engineer. All costs
17 associated with the testing and repair of leaks shall be at the expense of the
18 Contractor.
19
20 1.17 CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS
21
22 A. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the specific requirements of the
23 governmental unit or agencies having jurisdiction over the work. Wherever
24 there is a difference in the requirements of a jurisdictional body and these
25 Specifications, the more stringent shall apply.
26
27 1.18 PUBLIC NUISANCE
28
29 A. The Contractor shall not create a public nuisance including, but not limited to,
30 encroachment on adjacent lands, flooding of adjacent lands, or excessive noise.
31
32 B. Sound levels measured by the Engineer personnel shall not exceed 45 dBA 7
33 PM to 7 AM or 55 dBA 7 AM to 7 PM. This sound level shall be measured at
34 the exterior of the exterior wall of the nearest residence. Levels at the equip -
35 ment shall not exceed 85 dBA measured five (5) feet from the equipment at any
36 time. Sound levels in excess of these values are sufficient cause to have the
37 work suspended. Work stoppage by the Engineer or Owner for excessive noise
38 shall not relieve the Contractor of completing the Work in accordance with the
39 Contract Time(s), at no additional cost to the Owner.
40
41 C. No extra charge may be made for time lost due to work stoppage resulting from
42 the creation of a public nuisance.
43
44 1.19 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
45
46 A. Contractor shall perform work in accordance with OSHA, state and local safety
47 requirements.
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-9 12/17/2020
1
1 1
2 1.20 SUSPENSION OF WORK DUE TO WEATHER
1 3
4 A. During inclement weather, all work that could be damaged or rendered inferior
5 by such weather conditions shall be suspended. The orders and decisions of
I
6 the Engineer as to suspensions shall be final and binding. The ability to issue
7 such an order shall not be interpreted as a requirement to do so. During
8 suspension of the work for any cause, the work shall be suitably covered and
I9 protected so as to preserve it from injury by the weather or otherwise; and, if the
10 Engineer shall so direct, rubbish and surplus materials shall be removed.
11
12 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for documenting all inclement weather
13 conditions.
14
15 1.21 RELOCATIONS
16
17 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocation of structures, including
I
18 but not limited to light poles, signs, sign poles, fences, piping, conduits and
19 drains that interfere with the positioning of the work as set out on the Drawings.
20 The cost of all such relocations shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional
I
21 cost to the Owner.
22
23 1.22 SALVAGE
24
25 A. Any existing equipment or material including, but not limited to, valves, pipes,
26 fittings, couplings, etc., which is removed or replaced as a result of construction
27 under this project may be designated by the Owner to be salvaged. Any existing
28 equipment or material to be salvaged shall remain onsite and the Contractor
29 shall be responsible for delivering the salvage equipment/materials to the exact
I30 location onsite as directed by the Engineer.
31
32 1.23 PERMITS
33
34 A. Upon notice of award, the Contractor shall immediately apply for all applicable
35 permits, not previously obtained by the Owner, from the appropriate
I36 governmental agency or agencies. No work shall commence until all applicable
37 permits have been obtained and copies delivered to the Engineer. The costs
38 for obtaining all permits shall be borne by the Contractor.
1 39
40 1.24 PUMPING
41
I
42 A. The Contractor with his own equipment shall perform all pumping necessary to
43 prevent flotation of any part of the structures during construction operations. All
44 water collected during pumping operations shall be properly disposed of in
I
45 accordance with these specifications and/or regulatory requirements, whichever
46 is more stringent.
47
1
1
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-10 12/17/2020
1 B. The Contractor shall, with his own equipment, pump out water that may seep or
2 leak into the excavations or structures. All water collected during pumping
3 operations shall be properly disposed of in accordance with these specifications
4 and/or regulatory requirements, whichever is more stringent. Below grade
5 galleries and other operating areas shall be kept dry at all times. The extent of
6 pumping required in tanks, channels and other non-operating areas will be
7 determined by the Owner/Engineer.
8
9 1.25 NOTIFICATION OF WORK ON EXISTING FACILITIES
10
11 A. Before commencing work on any of the existing structures or equipment, the
12 Contractor shall notify the Owner/Engineer, in writing, at least 10 calendar days
13 in advance of the date he proposed to commence such work.
14
15 1.26 OWNER OCCUPANCY AND OPERATION OF COMPLETED FACILITIES
16
17 A. It is assumed that portions of the work will be completed prior to completion of
18 the entire work. Upon completion of construction of each individual facility,
19 including testing, if the Owner, at his sole discretion, desires to accept the
20 individual facility, the Contractor will be issued a dated certificate of completion
21 and acceptance for each individual facility. The Owner will assume ownership
22 and begin operation of the individual facility on that date and the one-year
23 guaranty period shall commence on that date. The Owner has the option of not
24 accepting any individual completed facility, but accepting the entire work as a
25 whole when it is completed and tested.
26
27 1.27 POTENTIAL IMPACTS ON THE SCHEDULE
28
29 A. The Owner may incur penalties for failure to maintain service/operations.
30 Therefore, the Bidders are noticed that this work is at an active and operating
31 Water Reclamation Facility and that plant operations, regulatory compliance
32 and required testing will take priority over and may impact the construction
33 schedule.
34
35
36 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
37
38 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
39
40
41 END OF SECTION
42
43
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-11 12/17/2020
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-12 12/17/2020
1 SECTION 01040
2
3 COORDINATION
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 PROJECT COORDINATION
8
9 A. The Contractor shall provide for the complete coordination of all construction
10 efforts. This shall include but not necessarily be limited to coordination of the
11 following:
12
13 1. The work of subcontractors.
14
15 2. The flow of material and equipment from suppliers.
16
17 3. The effort of equipment manufacturers during testing and start-up.
18
19 4. The interrelated work with public and private utility companies.
20
21 5. The interrelated work with the Owner where tie-ins to existing facilities
22 are required.
23
24 5. The effort of independent testing agencies.
25
26 6. The work to be provided under allowances.
27
28 B. Notify the Engineer immediately in writing if any conditions exist which will prevent
29 satisfactory results in the installation of the System. Should the Contractor or
30 subcontractor start work without such notification, it shall be construed as an
31 acceptance of all claims or questions as to the suitability of the work of others to
32 receive its Work.
33
34 C. The Contractor shall make all submittals to the single designated Construction
35 Manager with copy to the City's Project Manager. The Construction Manager will
36 disseminate the submittals to the proper engineering firm for action and response.
37
38 D. The Section IVA Northeast WRF Improvements Project Supplemental Technical
39 Specifications — Division 1 General Requirements specifications — apply to both the
40 King Engineering Section IVB Northeast WRF Grit Removal, Salsnes Filter and
41 Equalization System Improvements Project and the Jones Edmunds Section IVC
42 Northeast WRF Blend Tank Improvements; and may not be listed in the Table of
43 Contents for each of the respective Technical Specifications.
44
45 E. All references to O&M Data in the Jones Edmunds Section IVC Northeast WRF
46 Blend Tank Improvements shall be to Specification Section 01830 — O&M Manuals
47 of the Section IVA Northeast WRF Improvements Project Supplemental Technical
COORDINATION
01040-1 03/13/2020
1 Specifications — Division 1 General Requirements specifications.
2
3 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
4
5 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
6
7
8 END OF SECTION
9
COORDINATION
01040-2 03/13/2020
1 SECTION 01050
2
3 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all field engineering and survey
10 services required. Such work shall include survey work to establish existing
11 and/or proposed lines and grades and to locate and lay out site boundaries and
12 easements, project control, site improvements, structures, controlling lines and
13 levels and all other survey required for the construction of the work. Also
14 included are such engineering services as are specified or required to execute
15 the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and surveyors shall be
16 licensed professionals registered in the State of Florida.
17
18 B. The accuracy of any method of staking shall be the responsibility of the
19 Contractor. All surveying for vertical and horizontal control shall be the
20 responsibility of the Contractor.
21
22 C. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the preservation of all stakes and
23 marks. If any stakes or marks are carelessly or willfully disturbed by the
24 Contractor, the Contractor shall not proceed with any work until he has
25 established such points, marks, lines and elevations as may be necessary for
26 the prosecution of the work.
27
28 1.02 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
29
30 A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those
31 designated on the Drawings, where applicable. The Contractor shall locate and
32 protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent
33 reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property
34 corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or
35 disturb any such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are
36 disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have
37 them referenced and reset by a Registered Land Surveyor.
38
39 1.03 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
40
41 A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a Florida Registered Land Surveyor
42 to establish all lines and grades on the Drawings necessary to fully construct
43 the work in accordance with Chapter 5J-17 of the Florida Administrative Code
44
45 B. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish and stake all pipeline and
46 roadway right-of-way adjacent to construction at 100' intervals on tangents, 50'
47 intervals on curves and at all changes in direction. The surveyor shall place lath
FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01050-1 3/10/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 and hub at such points with stations indicated. Tack in hub shall not be
2 permitted.
3
4 1. The Registered Land Surveyor shall utilize current right-of-way maps,
5 plats and property deeds, all being of public record, in conjunction with
6 existing monumentation to establish the existing right-of-way lines and
7 utility easement boundaries.
8
9 C. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish a temporary benchmark system
10 in accordance with Chapter 5J-17 FAC and shall provide a written list to the
11 Contractor for his use.
12
13 D. The Contractor shall provide an as -built survey of all pipes and structures
14 constructed under the project that shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
15 Registered Surveyor and Mapper. At minimum, the As -Built Survey shall
16 include:
17
18 1. Top of concrete elevations and northings and eastings for all basins and
19 structures;
20 2. Weir elevations for all basins and structures;
21 3. Pipe inverts for gravity pipelines and top of pipe elevations for pressure
22 pipelines for all yard piping, electrical duct banks and fiber optic cable
23 conduits, and northings and eastings of all changes in pipe direction.
24 4. Concrete pads for pumps, grinders, and other mechanical
25 appurtenances.
26 5. Top of mixers, blend tank covers, and stairways and walkway between
27 tanks. Invert elevation of blend tank pipe trench, corners of finished
28 concrete pads, and new asphalt construction.
29
30 1.04 RECORDS
31
32 A. Contractor shall maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work
33 as construction progresses. Survey notes indicating the information and
34 measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in
35 notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the Record Drawings.
36
37 1.05 SUBMITTALS
38
39 A. Submit name and address of surveyor to the Engineer.
40
41 B. On request of the Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field
42 engineering work.
43
44 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
45
46 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
47 END OF SECTION
FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01050-2 3/10/2020
1 SECTION 01065
2
3 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the construction of the project
10 adheres to City, County, State, and Federal standards and regulations, and to
11 all permits and easements acquired for the project.
12
13 B. The Contractor shall coordinate all work within rights-of-way with the agency
14 having jurisdiction, including all road/lane closures, road/lane narrowing and
15 detours.
16
17 C. Copies of any Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements or License Agreements
18 that the Owner has obtained will be available for review by prospective bidders
19 at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address:
20 www.myclearwater.com/cityprojects. The Contractor shall conduct all operations
21 in accordance with the requirements of all Permits, Easements and License
22 Agreements.
23
24 D. Specific requirements for erosion and sedimentation controls are specified in
25 Part 207 of Section IV, City of Clearwater Standard Technical Specifications.
26
27 E. Where Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or License Agreements require
28 that certain Work is to be performed only in the presence of a representative of
29 the permitting entity, the Contractor shall provide all coordination and
30 notification required to assure full compliance with the permit conditions.
31
32 F. The Owner has obtained or will obtain certain Permits, Deeds, Easement
33 Agreements, or License Agreements required for construction of the project. A
34 listing of those Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or License Agreements
35 that the Owner has obtained or applied for is listed below. The Contractor shall
36 be responsible for obtaining all other Permits, Easement Agreements, or
37 License Agreements necessary for the proper execution of the Work not
38 specifically noted to be obtained by the Owner.
39
40 G. The Contractor shall comply with all terms, conditions, provisions and
41 requirements of all permits issued or to be issued for the Project. Should the
42 Contractor's failure to comply with said permits lead to enforcement action
43 by any of the permitting or jurisdictional agencies, any resultant costs in
44 the forms of repairs, fines, penalties, administrative costs, attorney's fees or
45 consultant fees shall be deducted from the Contract Price or shall be otherwise
46 collectible from the Contractor and its Surety, jointly and severally.
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-1 03/10/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 H. The Contractor shall notify the Owner a minimum of 30 days prior to the
3 expiration of a permit if said expiration occurs prior to completion of the Work.
4
5 I. Prior to any land clearing or tree removal, the Contractor shall construct a soil
6 tracking device in accordance with current Florida Department of Transportation
7 design standards.
8
9 1.02 PERMITS
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
A. Permits by, or applied for by, the Owner are as follows:
Permit Title
Agency
Permit/File Number
Building Permit
City of Clearwater
TBD
Revision to Domestic WW
Permit (Northeast)
Florida Department of
Environmental Protection
FL0128937
ERP
SWFWMD
43005372.007
B. Each bidder shall be familiar with the requirements of the permit conditions that
relate to construction activities and shall include the cost of satisfying these
permit conditions in developing a bid for the project.
19 C. At a minimum, the Contractor shall register with appropriate authorities, obtain
20 the following permits, comply with their respective conditions, and submit copies
21 of all applications and final permits to Engineer and Owner:
22
23 1. City of Clearwater building permit(s)
24 2. Generic Permit for the Production of Groundwater (if required)
25 3. Storm Water NPDES
26
27 D. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits required
28 including those necessary for clearing, grubbing, and tree removal. No clearing
29 shall occur and no earth -moving equipment shall be placed on-site until after
30 the permits have been issued.
31
32 E. The Contractor shall obtain, implement and comply with all local and state
33 permits required for dewatering, including consumptive or water use permitting,
34 if required for construction from the Southwest Florida Water Management
35 District.
36
37 F. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, and complying with, all
38 required permits relating to discharges from dewatering shall obtain a State of
39 Florida Department of Environmental Protection Generic Permit for the
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-2 03/10/2020
1 Discharge of Produced Ground Water From Any Non -Contaminated Site
2 Activity in accordance with 62-621.300(2) FAC. See specification Section
3 02140 Temporary Dewatering.
4
5 G. The Contractor shall obtain, implement and comply with the requirements of a
6 Generic Permit for Storm Water Discharge from Large and Small Construction
7 Activities (CGP), in accordance with 62-621.300(4) FAC. The Contractor shall
8 submit a CGP Notice of Intent (NOI) to the Florida Department of Environmental
9 Protection (FDEP) and develop and submit a Storm Water Pollution Prevention
10 Plan (SWPPP) as part of the CGP. The Contactor shall:
11
12 1. Obtain the CGP form and NOI Application Form from the FDEP or its
13 website, DEP Documents 62-621.300(4)(a) and 62-621.300(4)(b),
14 respectively.
15
16 2. Develop an SWPPP in compliance with FDEP storm water permitting
17 rules that shall include, at a minimum, the following:
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29 3. Complete and submit the NOI Application, including all attachments, to
30 the local FDEP office along with the appropriate application fee.
31
32 4. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the FDEP Notice of Permit, along
33 with a copy of the SWPPP, to the Engineer.
34
35 1.03 EASEMENTS
a. A site evaluation of how and where pollutants may be mobilized
by storm water.
b. A site plan for managing storm water runoff.
c. Identification of appropriate erosion and sediment controls
including Best Management Practices to reduce erosion,
sedimentation, and storm water pollution.
d. A maintenance and inspection schedule.
e. Plan and procedures for record keeping.
f. A map depicting storm water exit areas.
36
37
38
39
A.
The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the various easements for the
following parcels:
Easement Number
Owner
County Parcel ID
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-3
03/10/2020
1
2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
3
4 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
5
6
7 END OF SECTION
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-4 03/10/2020
1 SECTION 01090
2
3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Contract Documents to identify
10 reference standards.
11
12 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
13
14 A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with
15 requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when
16 requirements are modified by the Contract Documents or applicable codes
17 establish stricter standards.
18
19 B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract
20 Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified.
21
22 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES, AND ADDRESSES OF ORGANIZATIONS
23
24 Obtain copies of referenced standards direct from publication source, when needed for
25 proper performance of Work, or when required for submittal by Contract Documents.
26
27 AA Aluminum Association
28 900 19th Street NW
29 Washington, DC 20006
30
31 AASHTO American Association of State Highway
32 and Transportation Officials
33 444 North Capitol Street, NW Suite 249
34 Washington, DC 20001
35
36 ACI American Concrete Institute
37 38800 Country Club Drive
38 Farmington Hills, MI 48331
39
40 Al Asphalt Institute
41 2696 Research Park Drive
42 Lexington KY 40511
43
44 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
45 One East Wacker Drive
46 Suite 3100
47 Chicago, IL 60601-2001
48
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090-1 05/04/2020
1
1 1 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
2 1140 Connecticut Avenue
3 Suite 705
4 Washington DC 20036
5
I 6 ANSI American National Standards Institute
7 1819 L Street, NW
8 Washington, DC 20036
9
10 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
11 Three Park Avenue
I
12
13 New York, NY 10016-5990
14 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
I15 100 Barr Harbor Drive
16 West Conshohocken, PA, 19428
17
I
18
19 AWWA American Water Works Association
6666 W. Quincy Avenue
20 Denver, CO 80235
'21
22 AWS American Welding Society
23 550 N.W. LeJeune Road
I24 Miami, FL 33126
25
26 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
I27 933 N. Plum Grove Road
28 Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758
29
I
30
31 FS Federal Specification General Services
Administration Specifications and Consumer
32 Information Distribution Section (WFSIS)
33 470 L'enfant Plaza — Suite 8100
34 Washington, DC 20407
35
I
36
37 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
1300 North 17th Street
38 Suite 1847
I39 Rosslyn, VA 22209
40
41 PCA Portland Cement Association
I42 5420 Old Orchard Road
43 Skokie, IL 60077
44
I45 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
46 209 W. Jackson Blvd.
47 Chicago, IL 60606
111 48
1
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090-2 05/04/2020
1 SSPC Society for Protective Coatings
2 40 24th Street, 6th floor
3 Pittsburgh, PA 15222
4
5 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
6 333 Pfingston Road
7 Northbrook, IL 60062
8
9 ABMA American Bearing Manufacturer's Association
10
11 BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.
12
13 CSI Construction Specifications Institute
14
15 FDOT Florida Department of Transportation
16
17 NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
18
19 NFPA National Fire Protection Association
20
21 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
22
23 SSBC Southern Standard Building Code
24
25 All Local, State, and County Municipal Building Code requirement of the Owner's
26 Insurance.
27
28
29 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
30
31 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
32
33
34 END OF SECTION
35
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090-3 05/04/2020
1
1
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090-4 05/04/2020
1 SECTION 01150
2
3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. This section defines the Work included in each bid item in the Bid / Proposal
10 section of the Contract Documents. Payment will be made based on the
11 specified items included in the description in this section for each pay item
12 number.
13
14 B. All prices included in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices shall be full
15 compensation for all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, and
16 incidentals necessary to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings and/or
17 as specified in the Contract Documents. Actual quantities of each item bid on
18 a unit price basis will be determined upon completion of the construction in the
19 manner established for each item in this section. Payment for all items listed in
20 the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices shall constitute full compensation for all work
21 shown and/or specified to be performed under the Contract.
22
23 C. Measurement and Payment items A through M are applicable to the work
24 contained in Specification Section IVC and as shown on the Drawings produced
25 by Jones Edmonds and Associates, Inc. Measurement and Payment items 0
26 through T are applicable to the work contained in Specification Section IVB and
27 as shown on the Drawings produced by Ardurra/King.
28
29 D. Restoration is considered to be an integral part of the Work, and all bid prices
30 shall include the cost of restoration necessitated by the Work related to that bid
31 item. All existing structures and property including, but not limited to, paving,
32 stabilized roads, drainage piping and ditches, catch basins, head walls, yard
33 culverts, lawns, fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, walkways, sidewalks,
34 driveways, alleys, curbs, gutters, irrigation systems, buildings, structures and
35 equipment that are altered, removed or damaged during construction shall be
36 restored to the same or better condition than existed prior to construction at no
37 additional cost to the Owner. Cleanup is an integral part of restoration process.
38
39 E. The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve and protect existing facilities
40 during all periods for the construction phase. All existing structures, equipment,
41 and private property, including, but not limited to paving, stabilized roads,
42 drainage piping and ditches, latch basins, head walls, yard culverts, lawns,
43 fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, walkways, driveways, alleys, curbs, gutters
44 and irrigations systems that are altered, removed or damaged during
45 construction and are not included in the proposed alterations of the new work
46 shall be restored to the same or better condition than existed prior to
47 construction.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-1 12/18/20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 F The Contractor shall be responsible for all traffic maintenance requirements
3 necessitated by the construction/installation of those specific bid items requiring
4 traffic maintenance. The cost for this work shall be included in the specific unit
5 price submitted for that particular bid item.
6
7 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
8
9 PART 3 — EXECUTION
10
11 3.01 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
12
13 Bid Items 1 through 13 will pertain to all work shown on the Drawings and specified in
14 Section IVC of the Technical Specifications for the Northeast WRF Blend Tank
15 Improvements and all associated work as specified in Divisions 0 and 1. Bid Items 14
16 through 19 will pertain to all work shown on the Drawings and specified in Section IVB
17 of the Technical Specifications for the Northeast WRF Grit Removal, Salsnes Filter and
18 Equalization System Improvements.
19
20 A. Remove Contents of Existing Sludge Storage and Blend Tanks (Bid Item 1)
21
22 1. Measurement: Measurement for removal of the contents of the existing
23 sludge storage and blend tanks shall be made on a per cubic yard basis
24 of the actual volume of contents removed from the existing sludge
25 storage and blend tanks and disposed of in accordance with the
26 contract documents and to the satisfaction the City.
27
28 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 1 shall be made in accordance with the
29 Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of
30 all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to remove the
31 settled grit, sludge, scum, rags, solids, and trash in the tanks and wash
32 down tank walls and floor to remove accumulations. The item includes
33 but is not limited to removing, loading, transporting, and properly
34 disposing of the tank contents including liquid, sludge, scum, rags, grit,
35 hair, grease, solids, and semi-solids off site in accordance with applicable
36 federal, state, and local regulations. The Contractor should expect
37 manways may be required to access tanks, confined space conditions
38 apply, and air ventilation and monitoring will be required to complete the
39 work.
40
41 B. Existing Sludge Storage and Blend Tank Concrete Crack Repair (Bid Item 2)
42
43 1. Measurement: Measurement for concrete crack repair of the existing
44 sludge storage and blend tanks shall be made on a per lineal foot basis
45 of the actual length of the crack repair made in accordance with the
46 contract documents and to the satisfaction the City.
47
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-2 12/18/20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 2 shall be for furnishing all labor,
material, equipment, and services for the repair and refurbishment of the
Sludge Storage and Blend Tanks' concrete and pipe trench concrete.
This work includes, but is not limited to, concrete crack repair in
accordance with the concrete documents and to the satisfaction of the
City. The Contractor shall furnish all other labor, materials, equipment,
and services required to perform all requested work and shall coordinate
with the manufacturers to verify the understanding of the requested work
before submitting his Bid.
C. Existing Sludge Storage and Blend Tank Spalled Concrete Repair (Bid Item 3)
1. Measurement: Measurement for spalled concrete crack repair of the
existing sludge storage and blend tanks shall be made on a per square
foot basis of the actual quantity of spalled concrete repaired in
accordance with the contract documents and to the satisfaction the
City.
2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 3 shall be for furnishing all labor,
material, equipment, and services for the repair and refurbishment of the
Sludge Storage and Blend Tanks' concrete and pipe trench concrete.
This work includes, but is not limited to, spalled concrete repair in
accordance with the concrete documents and to the satisfaction of the
City. The Contractor shall furnish all other labor, materials, equipment,
and services required to perform all requested work and shall coordinate
with the manufacturers to verify the understanding of the requested work
before submitting his Bid.
D. Demolition of Existing Aeration Equipment, Mixing Equipment, and Associated
Appurtenances (Bid Item 4)
1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
Item 4 shall not be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum
price bid.
2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 4 shall be made in accordance with the
Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing all
labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to demolish,
remove, and dispose of non -salvageable materials in accordance with
the Contract Drawings. This item includes the removal of tank aeration
equipment including aeration grid piping, diffusers, and associated
supports. The aeration piping penetrating the tank wall shall be cut and
capped inside the tank. This item includes the removal of tank mixing
including stirring pickets, center guide shaft and bracket, and associated
supports. All electrical wiring related to the mixers shall be removed
along with the conduit. The bridge must remain in place for the duration
of the Work. Photographs should be taken to document the existing and
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-3 12/18/20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 final conditions of the Work. The items also include but are not limited
2 to: dewatering, loading, hauling, excavation, disposal, filling, backfilling,
3 compaction, grouting, and sodding all area disturbed by the Contractor's
4 operations. Salvage of items shall be as directed in the Contract
5 Documents. Loading and disposal of the construction debris shall be in
6 accordance with applicable local, state, and federal regulations
7
8 E. Existing Odor Control Piping, Stair Treads, and Tank Walkway Repair and
9 Refurbishment (Bid Item 5)
10
11 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
12 Item 5 shall not be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum
13 price bid.
14
15 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 5 shall be made in accordance with the
16 Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor,
17 materials, equipment, and services for the repair and refurbishment of
18 the odor control piping (including, but not limited to the painting, coating,
19 and restoration of all FRP piping from the tank covers to the Odor Control
20 Tower), stair treads, and tank walkway in accordance with the Contract
21 Documents. The Contractor shall furnish all other labor, materials,
22 equipment, and services required to perform all requested work and shall
23 coordinate with the manufacturers to verify the understanding of the
24 requested work before submitting his Bid.
25
26 F. Clean and Coat the Interior and Exterior of the Existing Sludge Storage and
27 Blend Tanks (Bid Item 6)
28
29 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
30 Item 6 shall not be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum
31 price bid.
32
33 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 6 shall be made in accordance with the
34 Schedule of Values and shall be for furnishing all labor, materials,
35 equipment, and services for the cleaning and coating of both existing
36 sludge storage and blend tanks and the pipe trench connecting the tanks
37 to the satisfaction of the City. This item includes pressure washing to
38 remove debris and all hardened deposits on the interior surface of the
39 tanks. This may require the tanks to be manually scraped to remove
40 muck or scale that is not removed from pressure washing. The tank shall
41 be rinsed and dried to remove any excess material or liquid from the tank
42 and otherwise prepare the tank for structural inspection. The Contractor
43 shall notify the City 48 hours before the completion of the final rinse. The
44 Contractor is responsible for dewatering the materials removed from the
45 tank and adding chemicals, as necessary, for odor control of the tank
46 contents to meet all federal, state, and local regulatory requirements.
47 Water from the dewatering process can be conveyed to the head of the
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-4 12/18/20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
WRF provided it does not contain chemicals harmful to the biological
process. Water required for dilution, wash down and related purposes
will be available from the City's water reclaimed system. Following
cleaning the interior and exterior of both tanks and trench, the existing
interior and exterior coatings shall be removed and shall be painted and
coated in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall
furnish all other labor, materials, equipment, and services required to
perform all requested work and shall coordinate with the painting and
coating manufacturers to verify the understanding of the requested work
before submitting his Bid.
G. Sludge Storage and Blend Tanks, Pump Stations, and Yard Piping Equipment
and Rehabilitation (Bid Item 7)
1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
Item 7 shall not be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum
price bid
2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 7 shall be made in accordance with the
Schedule of Values and shall be for furnishing all labor, materials,
equipment, and services required including, but not limited to, the
installation of one mixer each in the North Biosolids Blend Tank and
South Dewatering Storage Tank; new aluminum covers, access ladders,
and harness tie -off points on both tanks; refurbishment of the existing
Truck Off -Loading Pump Station, located north of the Sludge Storage
and Blend Tanks as shown in the Drawings; installation of the new Truck
Off -Loading Pump Station, piping, and associated appurtenances
located east of the Sludge Storage and Blend Tanks as shown in the
Drawings; installation of the new Anaerobic Digester Feed Pump Station,
piping, associated appurtenances, and associated yard piping to the
existing anaerobic digesters as shown in the Drawings; installation of two
inline grinder systems as shown on the Drawings; removal of the existing
Dewatering Feed Pump Station, piping, and associated appurtenances
as shown in the Drawings; and installation of the new Dewatering Feed
Pump Station, piping, and associated appurtenances; and in accordance
with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall furnish all other labor,
materials, equipment, and services required to perform all requested
work and shall coordinate with the manufacturers to verify the
understanding of the requested work before submitting his Bid.
H. New Truck Off -Loading and Anaerobic Digester Feed Pump Station Canopy
(Bid Item 8)
1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
Item 8 shall not be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum
price bid.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-5 12/18/20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 3. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 8 shall be made in accordance with the
2 Schedule of Values and shall be for furnishing all labor, materials,
3 equipment, and services for the installation of a new Truck Off -Loading
4 and Anaerobic Digester Feed Pump Station Canopy in accordance with
5 the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall furnish all other labor,
6 materials, equipment, and services required to perform all requested
7 work and shall coordinate with the manufacturers to verify the
8 understanding of the requested work before submitting his Bid.
9
10 I. Dewatering Feed Pump Station Canopy Removal and Replacement (Bid Item
11 9)
12
13 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
14 Item 9 shall not be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum
15 price bid.
16
17 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 9 shall be made in accordance with the
18 Schedule of Values and shall be for furnishing all labor, materials,
19 equipment, and services for the removal of the existing canopy over the
20 Dewatering Feed Pumps and replacement with a new Dewatering Feed
21 Pump Station Canopy in accordance with the Contract Documents. The
22 Contractor shall furnish all other labor, materials, equipment, and
23 services required to perform all requested work and shall coordinate with
24 the manufacturers to verify the understanding of the requested work
25 before submitting his Bid.
26
27 J. Thickened Primary Sludge and Thickened WAS Yard Piping Modification (Bid
28 Item 10)
29
30 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
31 Item 10 shall not be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum
32 price bid.
33
34 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 10 shall be made in accordance with the
35 Schedule of Values and shall be for furnishing all labor, materials,
36 equipment, and services for the modifications to the existing thickened
37 primary sludge and thickened WAS yard piping to route to the North and
38 South Sludge Blend Tanks in accordance with the Contract Documents.
39 The Contractor shall include Electrical, Arc Flash Requirements,
40 Instrumentation & Controls (I&C) and SCADA Integration for the
41 Proposed Improvements. The Contractor shall furnish all other labor,
42 materials, equipment, and services required to perform all requested
43 work and shall coordinate with the manufacturers to verify the
44 understanding of the requested work before submitting his Bid.
45
46 K. Mobilization (Bid Item 11)
47
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-6 12/18/20
1 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
2 Mobilization shall be on a lump sum basis, but the cost shall not exceed
3 four percent (4%) of the proposed Subtotal for Items 1-10.
4
5 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 11 shall be full compensation for all costs
6 associated with initiating the project as limited by other sections of the
7 agreement including the Contractor's Performance and Payment Bonds.
8 Payment for these performances shall be based on the terms of Section
9 01505 and in accordance with the Schedule of Values.
10
11 L. Indemnification (Bid Item 12)
12
13 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the amount stipulated under
14 Bid Item 12 Indemnification shall not be made and all items shall be
15 included in the lump sum.
16
17 2. Payment: Payment of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) for Bid Item 12
18 shall be full compensation for Indemnification of the Owner and the
19 Owner's Engineer as specified in the General Conditions and shall be
20 included in the first payment request.
21
22 M. Owner's Contingency (Bid Item 13)
23
24 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment shall be as agreed upon by
25 the Owner and Contractor.
26
27 2. Payment: Payment shall be made in accordance with the terms of the
28 Contingency Request and, if applicable, in accordance with the Schedule
29 of Values.
30
31 N. Northeast WRF Pretreatment and Primary Treatment Improvements (Bid Item
32 14).
33
34 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
35 Item 14 Pretreatment and Primary Treatment Improvements shall not be
36 made and all items shall be included in the lump sum price bid.
37
38 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 14 shall be made in accordance with the
39 Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of
40 all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision required to perform
41 the work as shown on the Drawings and Specifications as indicated
42 herein including, but not limited to:
43
44 • All work shown on the Drawings and specified in Sections IVB of the
45 Technical Specification for the Northeast WRF Grit Removal, Salsnes
46 Filter and Equalization System Improvements
47 • Associated work as specified Divisions 0 and 1;
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-7 12/18/20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 • All demolition work, as specified, shown or required;
2 • All paving grading and drainage work, as specified, shown or
3 required;
4 • All yard piping work, as specified, shown or required;
5 • All work associated with converting the existing picket thickener
6 facilities to stacked tray removal systems, including grit pumping, grit
7 concentrators and grit classifiers, including temporary pumping,
8 screening/grit removal and bypass piping, as specified, shown or
9 required;
10 • All work associated with installation of the continuous loop moving
11 belt filtration systems, including foundations, stairs and platforms,
12 feed pumps and sludge pumps, blowers, water systems, and piping
13 as specified, shown or required;
14 • All work associated with the equalization basin, including foundations,
15 tank, stairs and platforms, pumping systems, air compressors, air
16 receiver, solenoid valves, control panels, monitors, and piping and
17 nozzles as specified, shown or required; and
18 • All electrical, control systems, new SCADA work and programming,
19 work and programming on the existing SCADA system, including pre -
20 fabricated electrical enclosures with motor control centers, power
21 distribution systems, and instrumentation and controls systems, as
22 specified, shown or required.
23 • Demolition of obsolete existing odor control equipment and
24 modifications to existing odor control equipment.
25 • Rehabilitation of the in -plant submersible lift station
26
27 0. Removal and Replacement of the Top Portion of the Existing Primary Clarifier
28 Effluent Box Channel (Bid Item 15).
29
30 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
31 Item 15 shall not be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum
32 price bid. Upon the Engineer's inspection of the Primary Effluent Box
33 Channel, this work may not be performed.
34
35 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 15 shall be in accordance with the
36 Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of
37 all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision required to remove
38 and replace the top portion of the existing Primary Clarifier Effluent Box
39 Channel as shown on the Drawings and Specifications.
40
41 P. Rehabilitation of the walls and floors of the flow channels in the headworks building,
42 the flow channel to the primary clarifier splitter box, the primary clarifier splitter box,
43 the scum box, and the primary clarifier effluent box channel in accordance with
44 Section 01150, 3.01P. (Bid Item 16).
45
46 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the unit price bid for Item
47 16 shall be made on a per square foot basis using an average 1/2"
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-8 12/18/20
1 thickness. The limits of the work shall be as directed by the Engineer
2 following inspection. The Contractor shall assist the Engineer in
3 inspecting the concrete surfaces. Upon Engineer's inspection of the
4 Primary Effluent Box Channel, this work may not be performed.
5
6 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 16 shall be made in accordance with the
7 Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of
8 all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision required to perform
9 the work as shown on the Drawings and Specifications including, but not
10 limited to the removal and repair of damaged concrete.
11
12 Q. Mobilization (Bid Item 17)
13
14 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
15 Mobilization shall be on a lump sum basis, but the cost shall not exceed
16 four percent (4%) of the proposed Subtotal for Items 14-16.
17
18 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 17 shall be full compensation for all costs
19 associated with initiating the project as limited by other sections of the
20 agreement including the Contractor's Performance and Payment Bonds.
21 Payment for these performances shall be based on the terms of Section
22 01505 and in accordance with the Schedule of Values.
23
24 R. Indemnification (Bid Item 18)
25
26 3. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the amount stipulated under
27 Bid Item 18 Indemnification shall not be made and all items shall be
28 included in the lump sum.
29
30 4. Payment: Payment of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) for Bid Item 18
31 shall be full compensation for Indemnification of the Owner and the
32 Owner's Engineer as specified in the General Conditions and shall be
33 included in the first payment request.
34
35 S. Owner's Contingency (Bid Item 19)
36
37 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment shall be as agreed upon by
38 the Owner and Contractor.
39
40 2. Payment: Payment shall be made in accordance with the terms of the
41 Contingency Request and, if applicable, in accordance with the Schedule
42 of Values.
43
44 END OF SECTION
45
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-9 12/18/20
1
I1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
1
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-10 12/18/20
1 SECTION 01152
2
3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Submit Applications for Payment to the Engineer in accordance with the
10 approved payment schedule, and in the format established by the Owner.
11
12 B. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, the proposed Application for
13 Payment form, prior to the first payment request. Format shall be MS Excel.
14
15 1.02 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED
16
17 A. Submit applications typed on forms either provided in these Specifications,
18 furnished by the Owner, or as approved by the Owner, with itemized data typed
19 on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch or 8-1/2 inch x 14 -inch white paper continuation sheets.
20
21 B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet:
22
23 1. Format, schedules, line items and values: those of the Schedule of
24 Values accepted by the Engineer.
25
26 1.03 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT
27
28 A. Application Form:
29
30 1. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed
31 prior to date of submittal of application.
32
33 2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated
34 on continuation sheets.
35
36 3. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of the
37 Contractor.
38
39 B. Continuation Sheets:
40
41 1. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item
42 number and scheduled dollar value for each item.
43
44 2. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work
45 has been performed or products stored.
46 3. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, at the end
47 of the continuation sheets.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-1 04/26/2019
1
t
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 a. List by Change Order Number, and description, as for an original
3 component item of work.
4
5 4. To receive approval for payment on component material stored on site,
6 submit copies of the original invoices with the Application for Payment.
7 The application for payment must also include a table summarizing the
8 amount of each invoice and the schedule of values line item to which the
9 stored materials apply.
10
11 1.04 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
12
13 A. Provide substantiating data, containing suitable information for review of costs
14 requested with a cover letter identifying:
15
16 1. Project.
17
18 2. Application number and date.
19
20 3. Detailed list of enclosures.
21
22 4. For stored products:
23
24 a. Item number and identification as shown on application.
25
26 b. Description of specific material.
27
28 c. Supplier invoices.
29
30 d. A table identifying stored material, amount stored, amount
31 installed, and schedule of values item, which the material applies.
32
33 B. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application.
34
35 C. The Contractor is to maintain an updated set of drawings to be used as record
36 drawings. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor is
37 to exhibit the updated record drawings for review by the Owner and the
38 Engineer.
39
40 D. Contractor shall maintain an updated construction schedule in accordance with
41 these Specifications. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments,
42 Contractor shall submit the updated construction schedule with the applications
43 for progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit the required updated
44 schedule within the time prescribed, the Engineer may withhold progress
45 payment estimates until such a time as the Contractor submits the required
46 updated schedule.
47
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-2 04/26/2019
1 E. Contractor shall maintain an updated set of As -Built Drawings in accordance
2 with these Specifications. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments,
3 Contractor shall submit the updated As -Built Drawings with the applications for
4 progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit the updated As -Built
5 Drawings, the Engineer may withhold progress payment estimates until such a
6 time as the Contractor submits same.
7
8 1.05 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
9
10 A. Fill in application form as specified for progress payments.
11
12 B. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as
13 specified in the Specification.
14
15 C. All appropriate information must be entered on the application form.
16
17 1. The line title, "Application Period", must indicate the dates between which
18 all work was completed during the pay period. These dates must be
19 consecutive with the dates of the previous Payment Request and they
20 must not overlap.
21
22 2. All blank lines within the "Contract Data" and "Summary of Project
23 Status" section of the application must be completed. Also, if any
24 Change Orders have been approved, the "Change Orders" section must
25 include that information.
26
27 3. All calculations and arithmetic must be precise to the penny.
28
29 4. The application must be signed and dated by an authorized
30 representative of the Contractor.
31
32 1.06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
33
34 A. Prior to submitting a completed Application for Payment request, the Contractor
35 shall arrange a field meeting with the Owner and/or Engineer to review and
36 verify all installed quantities and/or stored materials. Only when the
37 Owner/Engineer and Contractor agree on installed quantities and percentages,
38 should the Application for Payment be submitted.
39
40 B. Submit six (6) copies of Applications for Payment to the Engineer at the times
41 stipulated in the General Conditions.
42
43 C. When the Engineer finds Application properly completed and correct, he will
44 transmit certificate for payment to Owner, with copy to Contractor.
45
46 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
47
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-3 04/26/2019
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
2
3
4 END OF SECTION
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-4 04/26/2019
1
1 SECTION 01153 1
2
3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
4 III
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6 t 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Promptly implement Change Order procedures.
10
11 1. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes.
12
13 2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material/force
14 account basis.
15
16 3. Provide full documentation to Engineer on request.
17
18 B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization:
I
19
20 1. Who is authorized to accept changes in the work.
21
22 2. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of the
23 authorization of changes in the work.
24 1 25 1.02 DEFINITIONS
26
27 A. Change Order: See General Conditions.
1
28
29 B. Work Directive Change: A written order to the Contractor, signed by Owner and
30 Engineer, which amends the Contract Documents as described, authorizes
31 Contractor to proceed with a change that affects the Contract Sum or the
32 Contract Time, and that will be included in a subsequent Change Order.
33
34 C. Engineer's Supplemental Instructions: A written order, instructions, or
35 interpretations, signed by Engineer making minor changes in the Work not
36 involving a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.
37
38 D. Field Order: A written order to the Contractor, signed by the Engineer and the
39 Contractor, which is issued to interpret/clarify the Contract Documents, order II
40 minor changes in the work. The work described by a Field Order is to be
41 accomplished without change to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, and/or
42 claims for other costs.
43
44 1.03 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
45
46 A. Owner and Engineer may initiate changes by submitting a Work Directive
47 Change to the Contractor. Request will include:
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-1
04/26/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 1 Detailed description of the change, products, and location of the change
3 in the Project.
4
5 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications.
6
7 3. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific statement
8 as to whether overtime work is or is not authorized.
9
10 4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be
11 considered valid.
12
13 B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to the Engineer,
14 containing:
15
16 1. Description of the proposed changes.
17
18 2. Statement of the reason for making the changes.
19
20 3. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
21
22 4. Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors.
23
24 5. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract
25 Time, as appropriate.
26
27 1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
28
29 A. Work Directive Change will describe changes in the Work, both additions and
30 deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of
31 the change and will designate the method of determining any change in the
32 Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time.
33
34 B. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Work Directive Change as
35 authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes.
36
37 1.05 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS
38
39 A. Support each quotation for a lump sum proposal, and for each unit price, which
40 has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data to allow
41 the Engineer to evaluate the quotation.
42
43 B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computations:
44
45 1. Labor required.
46
47 2. Equipment required.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-2 04/26/2019
1
2 3. Products required.
3
4 a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost.
5
6 b. Quantities required.
7
8 4. Taxes, insurance, and bonds.
9
10 5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented.
11
12 6. Overhead and profit.
13
14 7. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
15
16 C. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time -and -
17 material/force account basis, with documentation as required for a Lump Sum
18 proposal, plus additional information:
19
20 1. Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work and date
21 of the order.
22
23 2. Dates and times work was performed and by whom.
24
25 3. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid.
26
27 4. Receipts and invoices for:
28
29 a. Equipment used, listing dates, and times of use.
30
31 b. Products used, listing of quantities.
32
33 c. Subcontracts.
34
35 1.06 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS AND FIELD ORDERS
36
37 A. Engineer will prepare each Change Order and Field Order.
38
39 B. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions,
40 with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change.
41
42 C. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract Sum
43 and in the Contract Time.
44
45 D. Field Order will describe interpretations or clarifications of Contract Documents,
46 order minor changes in the Work, and/ or memorialize trade-off agreements.
47
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-3 04/26/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 E. Field Order work will be accomplished without change in the Contract Sum,
2 Contract Time, and/or claims for other costs.
3
4 1.07 LUMP SUM/FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER
5
6 A. Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and
7 attachments based upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor, or
8 requests from Owner, or both.
9
10 B. Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to
11 Contractor for review. After review by Contractor, all copies should be sent to
12 Owner for review. Engineer should make distribution of executed copies.
13
14 1 08 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER
15
16 A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either:
17
18 1. Engineer's definition of the scope of the required changes.
19
20 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer.
21
22 3. Survey of complete work.
23
24 B. The amounts of the unit prices to be:
25
26 1. Those stated in the Agreement.
27
28 2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor.
29
30 C. When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be
31 determined prior to start of the work:
32
33 1. Owner and Engineer will sign and date a Work Directive Change as
34 authorization for Contractor to proceed with the changes.
35
36 D. When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work:
37
38 1. Engineer or Owner will issue a Work Directive change directing the
39 Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices, and
40 the Engineer will cite the applicable unit prices.
41
42 2. Upon completion of the change, the Engineer will determine the cost of
43 such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. Contractor shall
44 submit documentation to establish the number of units of each item and
45 any claims for a change in Contract Time.
46
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-4 04/26/2019
1 3. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in
2 Contract Sum and in Contract Time.
3
4 4. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their
5 agreement with the terms therein.
6
7 5. Owner will then sign the change order.
8
9 1.09 TIME AND MATERIAL/FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER/CONSTRUCTION
10 CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
11
12 A. Engineer and Owner will issue a Work Directive Change directing Contractor to
13 proceed with the changes.
14
15 B. Upon completion of the change, the Contractor shall submit itemized accounting
16 and supporting data.
17
18 C. Engineer will determine the allowable cost of such work, as provided in General
19 Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
20
21 D. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in
22 Contract Sum and in Contract Time.
23
24 E. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement therewith.
25
26 F. Owner will then sign the Change Order.
27
28 1.10 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS
29
30 A. Not greater than monthly revise Schedule of Values and Application for
31 Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of work and to record
32 the adjusted Contract Amount.
33
34 B. Not greater than monthly revise the Progress Schedule to reflect each change
35 in Contract Time. Revise sub -schedules to show changes for other items of
36 work affected by the Change Order.
37
38 C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in
39 Record Documents.
40
41 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
42
43 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
44
45 END OF SECTION
46
47
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-5 04/26/2019
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-6 04/26/2019
1
1 SECTION 01200 1
2
3 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 PRE -CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
8
9 A. In accordance with the Contract Documents, prior to the commencement of
10 Work, a preconstruction conference shall be held at a mutually agreed time and
11 place.
12
13 B. The purpose of the conference shall be to designate responsible personnel and
14 establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination shall be
15 discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The agenda
16 shall include as a minimum:
17
18
19 1. Contractor's Initial Construction Schedule
20 2. Procedures for Transmittal, Review and Distribution of Shop Drawings
21
22 3. Procedures for Submittal and Review of Monthly Applications for
23 Payment
24 1 25 4. Maintaining As -Built Drawings
26
27 5. Critical Work Sequencing and Construction Restrictions 1
28
29 6. Field Decisions and Change Orders
30
31 7. Field Office, Storage Areas and Security
32
33 8. Equipment and Material Deliveries
34
35 9. Safety Meetings and Program
36
37 10. Traffic Control Plan
38
39 11. Pre -construction Video 1
40
41 C. The Engineer shall preside at the conference, and shall arrange for preparation
42 and distribution of the minutes.
43
44 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS
45
46 A. The Owner shall schedule and conduct regular project meetings at least
47 biweekly and at other times as deemed necessary by the progress of the work.
111
MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01200-1 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 The Contractor and the Engineer shall be represented at each meeting. The
2 Contractor and/or Engineer may request attendance by representatives of
3 material Supplier(s) and Subcontractor(s).
4
5 B. The Engineer shall preside at the conference and shall arrange for keeping the
6 minutes and distributing them to all persons in attendance. The purpose of the
7 meetings shall include but not be limited to reviewing the progress of the Work,
8 maintaining coordination of efforts, discussing changes in scheduling and
9 resolving problems that may develop; claims review; and future scheduling.
10
11 PART 2 — PRODUCT (NOT USED)
12
13 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
14
15
16 END OF SECTION
MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01200-2 12/17/2020
1
1 SECTION 01300 1
2
3 SUBMITTALS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6 I 7 1.01 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
8
9 A. All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be transmitted in the format provided
10 to the Contractor by the Engineer, certified and signed by the Contractor
11 indicating the submittal to be correct and in accordance with the Contract
12 Documents, and noting any special instructions regarding the submittal. Each
13 submittal shall identify the submittal number in the format required by the
14 Engineer, with the name and number of this contract, the Contractor's name,
15
16 and references to applicable specification paragraphs and Contract Drawings. 1
Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item in the Work. When
17 catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be clearly identified. The
18 current revision, issue number, and date shall be indicated on all drawings and
19 descriptive data.
20
21 B. Contractor shall stamp each submittal and said stamp shall be Contractor's
1
22 representation to Owner and Engineer that Contractor accepts full responsibility
23 for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field construction
24 criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that he has reviewed
25 or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the Work and the
26 Contract Documents.
27 1
28 C. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified on each submittal
29 and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal. Such submittals shall
30 indicate, as pertinent to the deviation, essential details of all changes proposed
31 by Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that may be a result of
32 the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams.
33
34 D. Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each
35 submission, and, in the case of a resubmission, shall verify that all exceptions
36 previously noted by Engineer have been taken into account. In the event that I
37 more than one resubmission is required because of the Contractor's failure to
38 account for exceptions previously noted, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for
39 the charges of Engineer for review of the additional resubmissions. I
40
41 E. Resubmittals shall be made within seven (7) days of the date of the letter
42 returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within seven (7) days
43 the Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the stipulated
44 time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed within that
45 time.
46
47 F Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining 1
SUBMITTALS
01300-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the
2 Contract Time unless delay of the Work is directly caused by a change in the
3 work authorized by a Change Order.
4
5 G. Contractor's letter of resubmittal shall list the date of his original submittal, the
6 date of the Engineer's letter returning the submittal, and the dates of submission
7 and return of any previous resubmittals.
8
9 H. Engineer's review of drawings and data submitted by Contractor will cover only
10 general conformity to the drawings and specifications, external connections,
11 and dimensions which affect the layout. Engineer's review does not indicate a
12 thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the material,
13 equipment, device or item shown. Engineer's review of submittals shall not
14 relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors, omissions, or deviations, or
15 responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents.
16
17 I It is intended that submittals be handled electronically whenever possible,
18 however, when necessary to employ paper copies, five copies of each drawing
19 and necessary data, plus the number of copies that the Contractor wants
20 returned, shall be submitted to Engineer. Engineer will not accept submittals
21 from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be consecutively numbered in
22 direct sequence of submittal and without division by subcontracts or trades.
23 Resubmittals shall bear the number of the first submittal followed by a letter (A,
24 B, etc.), to indicate the sequence of the resubmittal. If applicable, the Engineer
25 will provide the Contractor with an electronic file of the submittal format to be
26 followed.
27
28 J. When submittals are returned marked CONFIRM or REJECTED - RESUBMIT,
29 the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and as instructed by Engineer
30 and corrected copies shall resubmitted.
31
32 K. When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall in writing direct
33 specific attention to all revisions and shall list separately any revisions made
34 other than those called for by Engineer on previous submissions.
35
36 L. When the submittals are returned marked APPROVED, NO EXCEPTIONS
37 TAKEN or MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED resubmittal is not required.
38
39 1.02 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS
40
41 A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval a Schedule of Submittals
42 identifying the date of the initial submission, the beginning of manufacture as
43 applicable, and the delivery to the site. This Schedule shall be submitted as a
44 separate submittal and be approved as a prerequisite to the submission of any
45 other submittal. No other shop drawing or submittal will be reviewed until the
46 Schedule of Submittals is approved.
47
SUBMITTALS
01300-2
03/20/2020
1 B. The Schedule of Submittals shall include all submittals specified to be submitted
2 including shop drawings, schedules, permits, warranties, reports, and other
3 items specified to be submitted.
4
5 C. The Schedule of Submittals shall show the submittal of each shop drawing
6 and/or submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other
7 applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual work sections
8 of the Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing
9 times, including disapproval and resubmittal (if required), coordination with other
10 submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar sequenced
11 activities.
12
13 D. The Schedule of Submittals shall indicate those submittals that are critical to the
14 progress schedule. The Schedule shall show other, non-critical shop drawing
15 submittals spread out over the contract time as required to minimize the number
16 of concurrent reviews being performed, or as directed by the Engineer. All
17 equipment testing certifications, certifications of proper installation, warranties,
18 O&M manuals, spare parts and Owner training materials specified to be
19 provided shall be submitted in accordance with this specification, and shall
20 either be submitted with the shop drawing submittal for the equipment, or
21 submitted separately.
22
23 E. The Contractor shall so develop the Schedule of Submittals such that the total
24 number of submittals does not exceed one hundred and twenty (120) for
25 the headworks, grit removal, primary treatment, and equalization basin
26 portion of the project. In developing the Schedule of Submittals, the
27 Contractor shall identify separate submittals for:
28
29 1. Each item of equipment specified in Divisions 11 through 16.
30 2. Each pipe material of construction (ductile iron, steel, PVC, HDPE, etc.)
31 3. Demolition Plan per Section 02050.
32 4. Construction Phasing Plan per Section 01016.
33 5. Temporary Bypass Pump and Piping Plan per Section 13567.
34 6. Construction and start-up schedules.
35 7. Field testing and equipment start-up reports specified to be performed and
36 prepared by equipment suppliers.
37 8. Miscellaneous submittals such as the Construction Phasing Plan, Demolition
38 / Alteration Plan, and Start -Up Plan as specified throughout the
39 specifications.
40
41 In developing the Schedule of Submittals, the Contractor may identify a single
42 submittal for a given Division, such as Division 5 Miscellaneous Metals, or a
43 given Section, such as 15100 Valves, incorporating all items into a single
44 submittal. However, no submittal shall include items from two (or more)
45 different Divisions.
46
47 In developing the Schedule of Submittals, the Contractor may identify
SUBMITTALS
01300-3 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 equipment -related submittals for warranties, spare parts, O&M manuals, and
2 training plans separately, or with the specific equipment submittal, or in groups
3 of common items (i.e., O&M manuals, warranties, etc.).
4
5 As specified elsewhere, the Contractor will be required to submit certificates of
6 proper installation, sign -in sheets for equipment/systems training sessions,
7 and proof of delivery receipts for O&M manuals and spare parts, however,
8 such submittals will not count against the total number of submittals specified
9 above. Similarly, monthly schedule and narrative updates that are submitted
10 with Applications for Payment will not count against the total number of
11 submittals specified above.
12
13 F In accordance with Section IIIA, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for
14 Engineer's cost to review excess submittals and re -submittals and/or
15 confirmations.
16
17 1.03 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
18
19 A. Before Work is started, Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review a
20 schedule of the proposed construction operations. The construction schedule
21 shall indicate the sequence of the Work, the time of starting and completion of
22 each part, the installation date for each major item of equipment, and the time
23 for making connections to existing piping, structures, or facilities. The
24 construction schedule shall include the Construction Phasing Plan and
25 Demolition submittals as specified in Sections 01016 and Technical Section
26 IVB, Specification 02050, and other requirements specified in Section IVC.
27
28 B. The schedule shall be revised At least every 30 days or as necessary to reflect
29 changes in the progress of the Work.
30
31 C. Owner may require Contractor to add to his equipment, or construction forces,
32 as well as increase the working hours, if operations fall behind schedule at any
33 time during the construction period.
34
35 1.04 PROGRESS REPORTS
36
37 A. A progress report shall be furnished to Engineer with each application for
38 progress payment. If the Work falls behind schedule, Contractor shall submit
39 additional progress reports at such intervals as Engineer may request.
40
41 B. Each progress report shall include sufficient narrative to describe current and
42 anticipated delaying factors, their effect on the construction schedule, and
43 proposed corrective actions. Any Work reported complete, but which is not
44 readily apparent to Engineer, must be substantiated with satisfactory evidence.
45
46 C. Each progress report shall also include three (3) prints of the accepted graphic
47 schedule marked to indicate actual progress.
SUBMITTALS
01300-4 03/20/2020
1
2 1.05 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
3
4 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a Schedule of Values
5 after review of the tentative schedule and before submission of the first
6 application for payment. The schedule of values, showing the value of each
7 major unit of work, significant pieces of mechanical and rotating equipment, and
8 significant electrical and instrumentation components in sufficient detail as
9 requested by the Engineer, shall be acceptable to the Engineer before any
10 application for payment is prepared or approved.
11
12 B. The sum of the items listed in the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract
13 Price. Such items as Bond premium, temporary construction facilities, may be
14 listed separately in the schedule of values, provided the amounts can be
15 substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items. The
16 Schedule of Values shall contain at a minimum a complete listing of the various
17 project milestones that are "critical path" items according to the approved
18 construction schedule.
19
20 C. In addition to those items listed in Paragraph B, the O&M manuals, as -built
21 drawings, start-up, training, warranty, and any other individualized component
22 that the Contractor or Engineer wants separately itemized for payment shall also
23 be included on the Schedule of Values.
24
25 D. An unbalanced Schedule of Values providing for overpayment of Contractor on
26 items of Work that would be performed first will not be accepted. The Schedule
27 of Values shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to Engineer. Final
28 acceptance by Engineer shall indicate only consent to the Schedule of Values
29 as a basis for preparation of applications for progress payments and shall not
30 constitute an agreement as to the value of each indicated item.
31
32 1.06 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENTS
33
34 A. Within thirty (30) days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall furnish to
35 the Engineer a schedule of estimated monthly payments. The schedule shall
36 be revised and resubmitted each time an application for payment varies more
37 than 10 percent from the estimated payment schedule.
38
39 1.07 SURVEY DATA
40
41 A. All field books, notes, and other data developed by Contractor in performing
42 surveys required as part of the Work shall be available to Engineer for
43 examination throughout the construction period. All such data shall be
44 submitted to Engineer with the other documentation required for final
45 acceptance of the Work.
46
47 1.08 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS, WORKING DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING
SUBMITTALS
01300-5 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
s
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 DATA
2
3 A. Shop drawings, working drawings, and engineering data shall be included in the
4 Schedule of Submittals identifying the dates for the initial submission of shop
5 and working drawings, the beginning of manufacture, testing and installation of
6 materials, supplies and equipment.
7
8 B. The Schedule of Submittals shall show the submittal of each shop drawing
9 sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other applicable activi-
10 ties, or within the time specified in the individual work sections of the
11 Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing times
12 including re -review and resubmittal (if required), coordination with other
13 submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar sequenced
14 activities.
15
16 C. The Schedule of Submittals shall indicate those submittals that are critical to the
17 progress schedule and shall show other shop drawing submittals spread out
18 over the contract time as required to minimize the number of concurrent reviews
19 or as directed by the Engineer.
20
21 D. Engineering data covering all equipment and fabricated materials that will
22 become a permanent part of the Work shall be submitted to Engineer, for
23 review. These data shall include drawings and descriptive information in
24 sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and operation of
25 component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and
26 supports required; performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for
27 installation and correlation with other materials and equipment.
28
29 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
30
31 A. Operation and maintenance data submittals are specified in Section 01730.
32
33 1.10 LAYOUT DATA
34
35 A. Contractor shall keep neat and legible notes of measurements and calculations
36 made by him in connection with the layout of the Work. Copies of such data
37 shall be furnished to the Engineer for use in checking
38
39 B. Contractor's layout as provided under Lines and Grades. All such data
40 considered of value to Owner will be transmitted to Owner by Engineer with
41 other records upon completion of the Work.
42
43 1.11 SUBMITTALS FOR COLOR SELECTION
44
45 A. The following is a list of items that must be submitted together for color selection.
46 No single item on this list will be approved without the submittal of all other
47 items.
SUBMITTALS
01300-6
03/20/2020
1
2 1. Paint for piping, valves, valve box covers, meter box covers, etc.
3
4 2. Paint for equipment.
5
6 3. Additional submittal requirements as indicated in Section IV.B Specification
7 09900, Painting and Coating.
8
9 1.12 HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN
10
11 A. The Contractor shall submit a written job specific Health and Safety Plan prior
12 to beginning work on the site. The Health and Safety Plan shall have the
13 following written components at minimum:
14
15 • Project Specific Team Members and Contact Information
16 • Health, Safety and Environmental Policy Statement
17 • Location, Phone Numbers and Maps with Directions to the 4 nearest Urgent
18 Care Centers and Hospitals
19 • First Aid, Medical Response, and Transportation Procedures with Delegated
20 Responsibilities
21 • Personal Protection Equipment Policies and Procedures
22
23 PART 2 — PRODUCT (NOT USED)
24
25 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
26
27
28 END OF SECTION
29
SUBMITTALS
01300-7
03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SUBMITTALS
01300-8
03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01310
2
3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
4
5
6 PART 1 — GENERAL
7
8 1.01 GENERAL
9
10 A. Construction under this contract must be coordinated to assure that construction
11 is completed within the time allowed by the Contract Documents. The Contractor
12 will also coordinate his activities with the other contractors to allow orderly and
13 timely completion of all the work.
14
15 B. All construction schedules shall be of the critical path method, bar chart type, and
16 shall be prepared using MS Project, SURETRACK, PRIMAVERA P6, or equal.
17
18 C. The Contractor is advised that the construction schedule must reflect that no new
19 or existing major pieces of treatment equipment or systems may be shut down or
20 started up within one week prior to the toxicity screening and compliance testing
21 events on the Owner's TRE Schedule. Compliance with this requirement shall at
22 all times be subject to the Owner's approval.
23
24 1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING GENERAL PROVISIONS
25
26 A. Within 15 calendar days after the issuance of the Notice of Award, the Contractor
27 shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a preliminary construction progress
28 schedule. The schedule shall contain a sufficient number of tasks such that no
29 single task has a value that exceeds 2.0% of the total Contract Price. Partial
30 payments will not be approved until an acceptable construction progress schedule
31 has been accepted by the Engineer.
32
33 B. The schedule shall be updated monthly reflecting the baseline schedule and the
34 Contractor's progress on each activity. No progress payment will be approved
35 until the updated schedule is submitted and accepted by the Engineer.
36
37 C. Night work may be established by the Contractor as regular procedure only with
38 the prior written permission of the Owner. Such permission, however, may be
39 revoked at any time by the Owner if the Contractor fails to maintain adequate
40 equipment and supervision for the proper execution and control of the work at
41 night.
42
43 D. The Contractor shall designate an authorized representative who shall be
44 responsible for development and maintenance of the schedule and of progress
45 and payment reports. This representative of the Contractor shall have direct
46 project control and complete authority to act on behalf of the Contractor in fulfilling
47 the commitments of the Contractor's schedule.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 1.03 PROGRESS OF THE WORK
3
4 A. The work shall be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent any
5 delay to the general completion of the work. The work shall be executed at such
6 times and in or on such parts of the project, and with such forces, materials and
7 equipment to assure completion of the work in the time established by the
8 Contract.
9
10 B. If the Contractor, for his convenience and at his own expense, should desire to
11 carry on his work at night or outside regular hours, he shall submit written notice
12 to the Engineer and he shall allow ample time for satisfactory arrangements to be
13 made for inspecting the work in progress. The Contractor shall reimburse the
14 Owner for extra inspection required for work outside regular hours. The Contractor
15 shall Tight the different parts of the project as required to comply with all applicable
16 Federal and State regulations and with all applicable requirements of the
17 municipality in which the work is being done.
18
19 PART 2 — PROGRESS SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS
20
21 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
22
23 A. As required within the General Conditions, the Contractor shall submit a critical
24 path progress schedule as described herein. The schedule shall take into
25 considerations all work phasing and restrictions as specified elsewhere in the
26 Contract Documents. The schedule shall show no work taking place on any locally
27 recognized holiday.
28
29 B. The critical path progress schedule requirement shall consist of a detailed
30 schedule, monthly status reports (Monthly Reports), a start-up schedule, and
31 revisions to the schedules and analyses as described. The planning, scheduling,
32 management and execution of the work are the sole responsibilities of the
33 Contractor. The progress schedule shall allow the Engineer to review Contractor's
34 planning, scheduling, management and execution of the work; to assist Engineer
35 in evaluating work progress and make progress payments; to allow other
36 contractors to cooperate and coordinate their activities with those of the
37 Contractor; and to provide Owner with information about "construction schedule"
38 and "cumulative outlay schedule."
39
40 C. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall not relieve Contractor from the
41 responsibility for any deviations from the Contract Documents unless Contractor
42 has in writing called Engineer's attention to such deviations at the time of
43 submission and Engineer has given written concurrence to the specific deviations,
44 nor shall any concurrence by Engineer relieve Contractor from responsibility for
45 errors and omissions in the submittals.
46
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-2 03/20/2020
1 D. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive benefit of the Owner, the Engineer or
2 the Contractor. Extensions of time for performance, as specified in the General
3 and Supplementary Conditions, will be granted only to the extent that equitable
4 time adjustments for the network activity, or activities affected, exceed the total
5 float or slack time along the affected network paths, as shown in the precedence
6 diagram and report in effect at the instant of either (a) a notice to proceed with a
7 change, or (b) a notice of suspension of work or possession, or (c) detection of a
8 subsequently acknowledged differing site condition, or (d) occurrence of cause for
9 an excusable delay. Further, use of float time in the schedule, or the allocation of
10 float time to activities by means of special logic restraints or imposed dates, shall
11 be shared to the benefit of Owner, Engineer, Contractor, and his subcontractors
12 and suppliers in proportion of their scope of responsibilities. Excessive use of float
13 time to the detriment of succeeding activities may be cause for denying an
14 extension of time if it can be demonstrated that the float along the network paths
15 affected at the instant of the delaying condition would have been larger than the
16 delay had it not been for the excessive and unreasonable float usage in violation
17 of the sharing concept required by this Specification.
18
19 E. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall be only for conformance with
20 the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to the
21 means, methods, sequences and techniques or procedures of construction or to
22 safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Engineer's review of the
23 schedule submittals will be predicated on a Contractor's stamp of approval signed
24 off by Contractor. Contractor's stamp of approval on any schedule submittals shall
25 constitute a representation to Owner and Engineer that Contractor, has either
26 determined or verified all data on the submittal, or assumes full responsibility for
27 doing so, and that Contractor and his subcontractors and suppliers have reviewed
28 and coordinated the sequences shown in the submittal with the requirements of
29 the work under the Contract Documents.
30
31 2.02 SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
32
33 A. Graphic network diagrams shall be on a time -scaled precedence network format.
34 The graphic network diagram shall include the following format:
35
36 1. Description of each activity, or restraint, shall be brief but convey the scope
37 of work described.
38
39 2. Activities shall identify all items of work that must be accomplished to
40 achieve Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial completion,
41 such as the major disciplines of work; items pertaining to the approval of
42 regulatory agencies; contractor's time required for submittals, fabrication
43 and deliveries; the time required by Engineer to review all submittals as set
44 forth in the Contract Documents; items of work required of Owner to
45 support pre -operational and start-up testing; time required for the relocation
46 of utilities. Activities shall also identify interface milestones with the work
47 of other contract work under separate contracts with Owner.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-3 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 3. Any activities not shown on the graphic network diagram shall be
3 considered to have no effect on the Contractor's ability to achieve
4 Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial completion, within the
5 Contract Time. Any delays to activities that do not appear in the concurred
6 detailed schedule shall give rise only to non -prejudicial delays. Attempts
7 to impose after -the -fact logic constraints where none existed previously to
8 justify time extensions will not be permitted.
9
10 4. Activity durations shall be in whole working days.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18 B. Printout reports shall contain the following data for each activity or restraint:
19
20 1. Activity identification, activity description, activity duration, activity
21 man -days, computed or specified early start date, computed early finish
22 date, computed late start date, computed or specified late finish date, and
23 total float and free float.
24
25 2. Separate reports shall be provided, including all activities and restraints,
26 and shall be submitted monthly as follows:
27
28 a. Activity, sort by early start dates in order of ascending numbers.
29 b. Activity, sort by area/facility.
30 c. Float report, in order of ascending total float values.
31 d. Successor/predecessor report.
32
33 PART 3 — EXECUTION
34
35 3.01 DETAILED SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL
36
37 A. Submittal shall include a time -scaled graphic diagram showing all Contract
38 activities, computer printout reports, and a supporting narrative. The initial
39 Detailed Schedule submittal shall be delivered within 10 calendar days after the
40 Notice to Proceed and shall use the Notice to Proceed as the "data date". Upon
41 receipt of Engineer's comments, Contractor shall meet with Engineer and discuss
42 an appraisal and evaluation of the proposed work plan. Necessary revisions
43 resulting from this review shall be made by Contractor and the detailed schedule
44 resubmitted within 15 calendar days after the meeting. The re -submittal, if agreed
45 to by the Owner, and unless subsequently changed with the concurrence of or at
46 the direction of Owner, shall be the work plan to be used by the Contractor for
47 planning, scheduling, managing and executing the work. If Contractor fails to
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-4 03/20/2020
5. Graphic diagrams shall be time -scaled and sequenced by work areas. The
Diagram of Activities shall show numerical values for total float and be
shown on their early schedules. The diagram shall be neat and legible and
submitted on sheets no larger than 24 inches by 36 inches on a medium
suitable for reproduction.
1 provide an acceptable Detailed Schedule submittal, he will be deemed not to have
2 provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will further
3 constitute reasons for refusing to recommend payment.
4
5 B. The graphic diagram shall be formatted in accordance with Article 2.02(A) above.
6 The diagram shall include all detailed activities grouped by major areas of work.
7 The critical path activities shall be identified, including critical paths for interim
8 dates, if applicable, by clearly highlighting the path on the graphics diagram.
9
10 C. This submittal shall include five copies of the graphic diagram, the printout reports
11 and the narrative, in accordance with Article 2.02 of these scheduling
12 requirements.
13
14 D. The narrative shall include sufficient data to explain the basis of Contractor's
15 determination of durations, describe the contract conditions and restraints
16 incorporated into the schedule, and provide a "what -if' analysis pertaining to
17 potential problems and practical steps to mitigate them. Should Engineer require
18 additional data, this information shall be supplied by Contractor within ten calendar
19 days.
20
21 E. Once approved, the Detailed Schedule shall be set as the baseline for the project,
22 which shall not be changed without the Owner's and Engineer's approval.
23
24 3.02 MONTHLY STATUS REPORTS
25
26 A. Beginning with the first month, and every month thereafter, Contractor shall submit
27 to Engineer, with each Application for Payment, a Monthly Status Report (based
28 on the Detailed Schedule) with data as of the last day of the pay period. The
29 monthly Status Report shall include a revised copy of the currently accepted
30 graphic diagram, computer printouts and a narrative. The Monthly Status Report
31 will be reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall address the Engineer's
32 comments in the subsequent Monthly Status Report. If Contractor fails to provide
33 acceptable Monthly Status Reports, he will be deemed not to have provided a
34 basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will be reason for refusing to
35 recommend progress payments.
36
37 B. The revised diagram shall show, for the currently accepted detailed diagram,
38 percentages of completion for all activities, actual start and finish dates, and
39 remaining durations, as appropriate. Activities not previously included in the
40 currently accepted detailed schedule shall be added, except that contractual dates
41 will not be changed except by Change Order. Review of a revised diagram by the
42 Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with the time frames,
43 duration, or sequencing for such added activities; instead the corresponding data
44 as ultimately incorporated into an appropriate change order shall govern.
45
46 C. The narrative shall include the information shown in the following outline in a
47 narrative form:
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-5 03/20/2020
1
11
2 1. Construction progress (refer to activity number in the Detailed Schedule)
I
3
4 including:
5 a. Activities completed this reporting period;
I
6 b. Activities in progress this reporting period;
7 c. Activities scheduled to commence next reporting period.
8
I
9
10 2. Description of problem areas.
11 3. Current and anticipated delays, including:
I
12
13 a. Cause of the delay;
14 b. Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay;
I15 c. Impact of the delay on other activities, on milestones, and on
16 completion dates.
17
I18 4. Changes in construction sequence.
19
20 5. Pending items and status thereof, including:
1 21
22 a. Permits;
23 b. Change Orders;
1 24 c. Time extensions;
25 d. Other.
26
1 27 6. Contract completion date status
28
29 a. Ahead of schedule and number of days;
I30 b. Behind schedule and number of days.
31
32 3.03 REVISIONS
I
33
34 A. All revised Detailed Schedule submittals shall be in the same form and detail as
I35 the initial submittal and shall be accompanied by an explanation of the reasons for
36 such revisions, all of which shall be subject to review by Engineer. The revision
37 shall incorporate all previously made changes to reflect current as -built conditions.
I38 Minor changes to the submittal may be reviewed at monthly meetings. Changes
39 to activities having adequate float shall be considered a minor change.
40
I
41
42 B. A revised detailed work plan submittal shall be submitted for review, when required
by Engineer, for one of the following reasons:
43
I44 1. Owner or Engineer directs a change that affects the date(s) specified in the
45 Agreement or alters the length of a critical path.
46
1
1
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-6 03/20/2020
1 2. Contractor elects to change any sequence of activities in order to affect a
2 critical path of the currently accepted detailed schedule documents.
3
4 C. If, prior to agreement on an equitable adjustment to the Contract Time, Engineer
5 requires revisions to the Detailed Schedule in order to evaluate planned progress,
6 Contractor shall provide an interim revised submittal for review with change
7 effect(s) incorporated as directed. Interim revisions to the documents will be
8 incorporated during the first subsequent Monthly Status Report.
9
10 3.04 START-UP SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS
11
12 A. At least 90 calendar days prior to the date of Substantial Completion, Contractor
13 shall submit a Start -Up Schedule with a time -scaled (days after notice to proceed)
14 graphic diagram detailing the work to take place in the period between 60 days
15 prior to Substantial Completion, together with a supporting narrative. The Start -
16 Up Schedule shall be identified on the Detailed Schedule. Engineer shall respond
17 within 10 calendar days after receipt of the submittal. Upon receipt of Engineer's
18 comments, Contractor shall make the necessary revisions and submit the revised
19 schedule within ten calendar days. If Contractor fails to provide acceptable
20 Start-up Schedule submittals, he will be deemed not to have provided a basis
21 upon which progress may be evaluated, which will be reason for refusing to
22 recommend payment.
23
24 B. The Start-up Schedule may not be combined with the Detailed Schedule. The
25 Start-up Schedule is intended to show much greater detail than the Detailed
26 Schedule for start-up activities. Typical information required includes, but is not
27 limited to, the timing of vendor representatives site visits, pre-op testing, individual
28 equipment start-ups, Owner's training, and performance certification testing.
29
30 C. The graphic diagram shall use the currently accepted Detailed Schedule for those
31 activities completed ahead of the last 60 calendar days prior to Substantial
32 Completion, and detailed activities for the remaining 60 -day period within the time
33 frames outlined in the currently accepted Detailed Schedule.
34
35 D. Contractor will be required to continue the requirement for monthly reports, as
36 outlined in Articles 3.03 and 3.04 above. In preparing these reports, Contractor
37 must assure that the Detailed Schedule is consistent with the progress noted in
38 the Start-up Schedule.
39
40 E. In addition, Contractor will be required to submit a revised copy of the start-up
41 graphic diagram on a monthly basis with a start-up narrative. This revised diagram
42 shall highlight percentages of completion, actual start and finish dates, and
43 remaining durations as applicable. Activities not previously included in the
44 accepted detailed work plan shall be added in these submittals, except that
45 contractual dates shall not be changed except by Change Order. Reviews of
46 these submittals by Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with
47 the time frames, durations or sequence of work for each added activity.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-7 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 3.05 CONSTRUCTION PERIOD
3
4 A. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly progress evaluation and
5 updated schedule data that any milestone and/or Contract completion date will not
6 be met, the Contractor shall take appropriate action to bring the work back on
7 schedule. Actions could include:
8
9 1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as to
10 substantially eliminate the backlog of work;
11
12 2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per work day, work
13 days per week, or the amount of construction equipment, or any
14 combination of the foregoing sufficient to substantially eliminate the
15 backlog of work; and
16
17 3. Reschedule work items to achieve concurrency of accomplishment.
18
19 B. The addition of equipment or construction forces, increasing the working hours or
20 any other method, manner, or procedure to return to the current Detailed Schedule
21 shall be at the Contractor's own cost and shall not be considered justification for a
22 Change Order or treated as an acceleration order.
23
24
25 END SECTION
26
27
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-8 03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01340
2
3 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review such working drawings,
10 shop drawings, test reports and data on materials and equipment (hereinafter
11 in this Section called data), and material samples (hereinafter in this Section
12 called samples) as are required for the proper control of work, including but not
13 limited to those working drawings, shop drawings, data and samples for
14 materials and equipment specified elsewhere in the Specifications and in the
15 Contract Drawings.
16
17 B. The Contractor shall note that there are specific submittal requirements in other
18 sections of these Specifications, including the requirement to submit and have
19 reviewed a Schedule of Shop Drawing Submittals prior to the submittal of any
20 other shop drawing, as described in Section 01300.
21
22 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
23
24 A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "shop drawings" shall be
25 considered to mean Contractor's Drawings for material and equipment that will
26 become an integral part of the Project. These drawings shall be complete and
27 detailed. Shop drawings shall consist of fabrication, erection and setting
28 drawings and schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale drawings, bills of
29 material, wiring and control diagrams, and inspection and test reports including
30 performance curves and certifications as applicable to the Work.
31
32 B. All details on shop drawings submitted for review shall show clearly the
33 elevations of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure
34 and/or equipment, and where correct fabrication of the work depends upon field
35 measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the shop
36 drawings before being submitted for review.
37
38 1.03 PRODUCT DATA
39
40 A. Product data as specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily
41 limited to, standard prepared data for manufactured products (sometimes
42 referred to as catalog data), such as the manufacturers product specification
43 and installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns, manufacturer's
44 printed statements of compliances and applicability, roughing -in diagrams and
45 templates, catalog cuts, product photographs, standard wiring diagrams, printed
46 performance curves and operational -range diagrams, production or quality
47 control inspection and test reports and certifications, mill reports, product
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 operating and maintenance instructions and recommended spare -parts listing
2 storage instructions, and printed product warranties, as applicable to the work.
3
4 1.04 WORKING DRAWINGS
5
6 A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "working drawings" shall be
7 considered to mean the Contractor's Drawings for temporary structures such as
8 temporary bulkheads, support of open cut excavation, support of utilities,
9 ground water control systems, forming and falsework; for underpinning; and for
10 such other work as may be required for construction but does not become an
11 integral part of the Project.
12
13 B. Working drawings shall be signed and sealed by a registered Professional
14 Engineer, currently licensed to practice in the State and shall convey, or be
15 accompanied by, calculations or other sufficient information to completely
16 explain the structure, machine, or system described and its intended manner of
17 use. Prior to commencing such work, working drawings must have been
18 reviewed without specific exceptions by the Engineer. Such review will be for
19 general conformance and will not relieve the Contractor in any way from his
20 responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All risks
21 of error are assumed by the Contractor. The Owner and Engineer shall have
22 no responsibility for errors on the working drawings or the finished work.
23
24 1.05 SAMPLES
25
26 A. The Contractor shall furnish, for review of the Engineer, samples required by
27 the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer. Samples shall be
28 delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed and in quantities and sizes as
29 specified. A minimum of two samples of each item shall be submitted unless
30 otherwise specified. The Contractor shall prepay all shipping charges on
31 samples. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not be
32 used in work until reviewed by the Engineer.
33
34 B. Samples specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily limited
35 to, physical examples of the work such as sections of manufactured or
36 fabricated work, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of
37 repetitively -used products, color/texture/pattern swatches and range sets,
38 specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols, and units of work
39 to be used by the Engineer or Owner for independent inspection and testing, as
40 applicable to the Work.
41
42 C. The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter for each shipment of sample,
43 shall enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment, and shall send a copy of
44 this letter to the Engineer. Review of a sample shall be only for the characteris-
45 tics or use named in such review and shall not be construed to change or modify
46 any Contract requirements.
47
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-2 03/20/2020
1 1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
2
3 A. The Contractor shall review, approve, and submit, with reasonable promptness
4 and in such sequence, so as to cause no delay in the Contract Work or in the
5 Work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all shop drawings, product data,
6 working drawings and samples required by the Contract Documents.
7
8 B. It is intended that all shop drawing be submitted electronically by email,
9 however, when electronic submittals cannot be made, the Contractor shall
10 submit to the Engineer five (5) copies of the shop drawing, plus the number of
11 copies he wants returned. The Engineer will review the submittal and
12 electronically return to the Contractor appropriate review comments and/or
13 marked -up copies of the shop drawings if applicable.
14
15 C. Shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples shall be
16 transmitted using a form provided by the Engineer and furnished with the
17 following information:
18
19 1. Number and title of the drawing.
20
21 2. Date of drawing or revision.
22
23 3. Name of project building, facility or system
24
25 4. Name of contractor, subcontractor, and manufacturer submitting
26 drawing.
27
28 5. Clear identification of contents, location of the work, and the sheet
29 numbers where the product is found in the contract drawings.
30
31 6. Contractor Certification Statement.
32
33 7. Submittal Identification Number.
34
35 8. Contract Drawing Number Reference.
36
37 9. Statement indicating any deviations from the Contract Documents.
38
39 D. All items specified are not necessarily intended to be a manufacturer's standard
40 product. Variations from specified items will be considered on an "or equal"
41 basis. If submittals show variations from Contract requirements because of
42 standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall describe such
43 variations in his letter of transmittal and on the shop drawings along with
44 notification of his intent to seek contract adjustment. If acceptable, proper
45 adjustment in the Contract shall be implemented where appropriate. If the
46 Contractor fails to describe such variations he shall not be relieved of the
47 responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-3 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 though such drawings have been reviewed. Variations submitted but not
2 described may be cause for rejection. Any variations initiated by the Contractor
3 will not be considered as an addition to the scope of work unless specifically
4 noted and then accepted as such in writing by the Engineer.
5
6 E. Data on materials and equipment shall include materials and equipment lists
7 giving, for each item thereon, the name and location of the supplier or
8 manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference, material, size, finish and all other
9 pertinent data.
10
11 F For all mechanical and electrical equipment, the Contractor shall provide a
12 single list that includes the equipment name, and address and telephone
13 number of the manufacturer's representative and service company, so that
14 service and/or spare parts can be readily obtained. In addition, a maintenance
15 and lubrication schedule for each piece of equipment shall be submitted as
16 specified in Section 01730.
17
18 G. The Contractor shall use the color "green" to make his remarks on the
19 Submittals. Only the Engineer will utilize the color "red" in marking submittals.
20
21 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
22
23 A. It is the duty of the Contractor to check, and coordinate with the work of all
24 trades, all drawings, data, schedules and samples prepared by or for him before
25 submitting them to the Engineer for review. Each copy of every drawing or data
26 sheet 11"x17" and larger shall bear Contractor's stamp showing that they have
27 been so checked and approved. Drawings or data sheets 11"x17" and smaller
28 shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and bear the Contractor's stamp
29 on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully describe the packaged data and
30 include a list of all sheet numbers within the package. Shop drawings submitted
31 to the Engineer without the Contractor's stamp will be returned to the Contractor,
32 without review at the Engineer's option.
33
34 B. The Contractor shall review shop drawings, product data, and samples prior to
35 submission to determine and verify the following:
36
37 1. Field measurements.
38
39 2. Field construction criteria.
40
41 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers and similar data.
42
43 4. Conformance with Specifications.
44
45 C. Shop drawings shall indicate any deviations in the submittal from the
46 requirements of the Contract Documents.
47
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-4 03/20/2020
1 D. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to
2 transmit complete and acceptable submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work.
3
4 E. The Contractor shall not begin any work affected by a submittal that is returned
5 indicating: "Confirm", "Amend and Resubmit", or "Rejected- Resubmit". Before
6 starting this work, all revisions must be corrected by the Contractor. After
7 resubmittal they will be reviewed and returned by the Engineer. If returned
8 marked, "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted", the Contractor
9 may begin this work. Any corrections made to these shop drawings shall be
10 followed without exception.
11
12 F. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all shop drawings and data
13 sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to provide not less than
14 twenty-one (21) calendar days for Engineer's review from the time the Engineer
15 receives them.
16
17 G. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all cost that may result from
18 the ordering of any material or from proceeding with any part of work prior to
19 review by the Engineer of the necessary shop drawings.
20
21 H. All shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples submitted by
22 subcontractors for review shall be sent directly to the Contractor for checking.
23 The Contractor shall be responsible for their submission according to the shop
24 drawing schedule in order to prevent delays in delivery of materials and project
25 completion.
26
27 1. The Contractor shall check all subcontractor's shop drawings, product data,
28 working drawings and samples regarding measurements, size of members,
29 materials, and details to satisfy him that they are in conformance to the Contract
30 Documents. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in error shall
31 be returned to the subcontractors for correction before submission to the
32 Engineer.
33
34 1.08 ENGINEER'S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING
35 DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
36
37 A. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept and
38 contract drawings. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving
39 the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications
40 or departures thereof. The Contractor remains responsible for details and
41 accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work and trades,
42 for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for
43 performing work in a safe manner.
44
45 B. The review of shop drawings, data, and samples will be general. The review
46 shall not be construed as:
47
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-5 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1. Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements;
2
3 2. Relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details,
4 dimensions, and materials;
5
6 3. Approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as
7 otherwise provided herein.
8
9 C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and
10 show a departure from the Contract Documents, which Engineer finds to be in
11 the interest of the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change in
12 Contract Price or Time, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings without
13 noting an exception.
14
15 D. Submittals pertaining to the Headworks and Equalization Basin components will
16 be returned to the Contractor under one of the following:
17
18 "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" is assigned when there are no notations or
19 comments on the submittal. When returned under this code the Contractor may
20 release the equipment and/or material for manufacture.
21
22 "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" is assigned when notations or comments
23 have been made on the submittal pointing out minor discrepancies as compared
24 with the Contract Documents. Resubmittal or confirmation is not necessary
25 prior to release for manufacturing.
26
27 "EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED" or "CONFIRM" is assigned when a confirmation of
28 the notations and comments is required from the Contractor. The Contractor
29 may release the equipment or material for manufacture; however, all notations
30 and comments must be incorporated into the final product addressing the
31 omissions and/or nonconforming items that were noted. Only the items to be
32 "confirmed" need to be resubmitted.
33
34 "REJECTED - RESUBMIT" is assigned when the submittal is in noncompliance
35 with the Contract Documents and must be corrected and the entire package
36 resubmitted. This code generally means that the equipment or material cannot
37 be released for manufacture unless the Contractor takes full responsibility for
38 providing the submitted items in accordance with Contract Documents.
39
40 "FOR YOUR INFORMATION" is assigned when the package provides
41 information of a general nature that may or may not require a response.
42
43 E. Submittals pertaining to the Blend Tanks components will be returned to the
44 Contractor under one of the following:
45
46 "NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED" is assigned when specifications and the Work
47 may proceed.
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-6 03/20/2020
1
2 "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" is assigned when the reviewer has added a
3 correction to the submission that allows the Work (modified in accordance with
4 the correction comment) to proceed. The Contractor shall accept the
5 responsibility of the modified document and the resulting Work with no
6 additional compensation.
7
8 "AMEND AND RESUBMIT" is assigned when the submittal will require
9 Contractor modifications based on the reviewer's comments that accompanied
10 the returned submittal. The Contractor will be cautioned that work may not
11 proceed under this review status.
12
13 "REJECTED" is assigned when the submittal is not in conformance with the
14 requirements of the performance Specifications and cannot be modified to gain
15 compliance. A new submittal will be required in the instance of a "REJECTED"
16 status and the Contractor will be cautioned that work may not proceed under
17 this condition.
18
19 F. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On
20 resubmittals the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing, on the
21 transmittal and on resubmitted shop drawings by use of revision triangles or
22 other similar methods, to revisions other than the corrections requested by the
23 Engineer on previous submissions. Any such revisions that are not clearly
24 identified shall be made at the risk of the Contractor. The Contractor shall make
25 corrections to any work done because of this type revision that is not in
26 accordance to the Contract Documents as may be required by the Engineer.
27
28 G. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to
29 constitute a change to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall deliver
30 written notice thereof to the Engineer at least seven (7) working days prior to
31 release for manufacture.
32
33 H. The number of shop drawings the Engineer will review is limited as described
34 in the General Condition or Supplemental General Conditions, and the
35 Contractor will be back charged for costs incurred by the Engineer due to
36 excessive shop drawing submittals or resubmittals as described therein. This
37 limitation is intended to reduce the number of submittals to be reviewed but shall
38 not be construed to limit the number of shop drawings required and the
39 Contractor shall submit all shop drawings required as directed by the Engineer.
40
41 I. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the
42 Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance
43 therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written
44 instruction from the Engineer.
45
46 J. Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The Engineer will be the only judge as
47 to the completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be returned to
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-7 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 the Contractor. The Engineer may at his option provide a list or mark the
2 submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are incomplete.
3
4 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
5
6 2.01 SHOP DRAWINGS
7
8 Final shop drawings shall be submitted in electronic format, organized by submittal
9 number, on electronic media.
10
11 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
12
13
14 END OF SECTION
15
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-8 03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01385
2
3 COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 A. Scope
10
11 The Contractor shall have digital pictures/photographs, stored on the most
12 recent type of electronic storage device of the Work from views and at such
13 times as directed by the Engineer. These photographs shall represent a visual
14 history of the Project, from Notice to Proceed through Final Completion.
15
16 The Contractor shall also use electronic "snap -shot" photography as necessary
17 to record and facilitate resolution of on-site issues through the transmission of
18 electronic photographs by e-mail from the site to the Engineer's and Owner's
19 offices.
20
21 The Contractor shall prepare color audio/video electronic storage devices of all
22 work areas within 20 days of the Notice to Proceed. These specifications shall
23 supplement the Owner's color audio -video construction records requirements,
24 if any, and the more stringent shall apply.
25
26 B. Requirements Included
27
28 Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color
29 audio/video recording and pictures taken of the entire Project, including access
30 to the site of the work. Streets, easements, rights -of way, lots or construction
31 sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre -construction
32 conditions. One copy of the electronic files and logs shall be submitted to the
33 on the most recent type of electronic storage device. Al photographs will be
34 logged and re -named reflecting the orientation and subject. The Engineer will
35 designate those areas, if any, to be omitted from or added to the audio-visual
36 coverage. All electronic storage devices and written records shall become the
37 property of the Owner.
38
39 C. Scheduling
40
41 No construction shall begin prior to review by the Owner of the electronic files
42 covering the Project construction area(s). The Owner will have the authority to
43 reject all or any portion not conforming to specifications and order that it be
44 redone at no additional charge. The Contractor shall reschedule unacceptable
45 coverage within seven days after being notified.
46
47 D. Videographer Qualifications
COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-1 05/04/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional photographer and
3 videographer known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of
4 preconstruction color photographs and audio -video documentation. The
5 professional, through the Contractor, shall furnish to the Engineer a list of all
6 equipment to be used for the recording, i.e., manufacturer's name, model
7 number, specifications and other pertinent information.
8
9 Additional information to be furnished by the professional is the names and
10 addresses of two references for work completed by the professional of a similar
11 nature within the last 12 months. Engineer's review of the selected professional
12 is required prior to taking first audio -video recording.
13
14 E. Equipment
15
16 The Contractor shall finish all equipment, accessories, materials and labor to
17 perform this service. The equipment shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear
18 pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or
19 any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall
20 reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity
21 and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio -video
22 coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled
23 vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. The color video camera
24 used in the recording shall be of Industrial Grade and shall have EIA Standard
25 NTSC type color - 1.0V 75 OHMS. Video output from camera shall be capable
26 of horizontal resolution of 350 lines at center and utilize a minimum of 8:1 zoom
27 with a 2/3 Newvicon tube or CCD pick-up element for optimum color imagery
28 plus minimum lag through of one -foot candle. The recording shall be made with
29 Industrial Grade recorder. The recordings shall be high resolution, extended
30 still frame capable, in color. The recorded video files shall be compatible for
31 playback with on any American PC based Computer.
32
33 F Recorded Information, Audio
34
35 Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed
36 by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress.
37 Accompanying each the video recording shall be a corresponding and
38 simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively
39 containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer
40 orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or
41 objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the
42 recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations.
43
44 G. Recorded Information, Video
45
46 All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to
47 include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the
COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-2 05/04/2020
1 month, day and year. The time information shall contain the actual hour,
2 minutes and seconds of the day. Additional information shall be displayed
3 periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name,
4 contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent
5 information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen.
6 Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom -out rates shall be sufficiently controlled
7 such that recorded objects are clearly viewed during video playback. In
8 addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus
9 and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus
10 shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The
11 construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode.
12
13 H. Recorded Information, Photographs
14
15 Photographs shall be digital and in color. Provide one copy of each digital
16 picture on each of three of the most recent electronic storage devices. Each
17 photograph shall be re -named to reflect to orientation and the subject.
18
19 Provide photographs taken of each of the major items during construction.
20
21 View and Quantities Required: A minimum of 30 photographs per month clearly
22 showing project status and key elements of construction. All video and pictures
23 shall be submitted as read only devices.
24
25 Deliver electronic images to the Engineer with every pay request.
26
27 Photographs shall be from locations to illustrate the condition of construction
28 and the state of progress adequately.
29
30 The Contractor shall provide before and after photographs of each portion of
31 the site. The below -ground facilities shall include all equipment, walls, floor,
32 piping, supports, and entrance. At major location photographs shall include
33 before, during, and after photographs and all photographs shall be placed in
34 ascending date order when submitted to show the Work as it progresses.
35
36 Each digital photograph shall be date and time stamped.
37
38 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a written description of each
39 photograph. The Field Engineer or inspector shall approve the description.
40
41
42 Catalog and manage Electronic "snap -shots" and images of photographs in a
43 secure digital photograph management system capable of being linked to the
44 project schedule and document management database. Add captions,
45 descriptions, and key words. Transfer a copy of all "snap -shots" and
46 photographs with their related notes, keywords, captions, and activity IDs to the
47 Engineer weekly.
COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-3 05/04/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 All photographs shall be clear, sharp, and free of distortion after enlargement.
3
4 All photographs (pictures) must display transparent digital information to include
5 the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month,
6 day and year. The time information shall contain the actual hour, minutes and
7 seconds of the day. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom -out rates shall be
8 sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects are clearly viewable. In
9 addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus
10 and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus
11 shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. Pictures
12 shall be a minimum of 72 dpi resolution and jpg or similar format. The minimum
13 picture width shall be 4000 pixels with a minimum width: height aspect ratio of
14 1.77.
15
16 I Viewer Orientation
17
18 The audio, video, and photograph portions of the recording shall maintain
19 viewer orientation. In areas where the proposed construction location is not
20 readily apparent to the viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the
21 Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of
22 construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances
23 for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the
24 ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that
25 transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady
26 picture.
27
28 J. Lighting
29
30 All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No recording shall be
31 done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when
32 sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and
33 to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects.
34
35 K. Speed of Travel
36
37 The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be
38 directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within
39 that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general
40 direction of travel of any vehicle used during recording of a linear project site
41 shall not exceed 44 feet per minute.
42
43 L. Video and photograph Log/Index
44
45 All video and photographs shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly
46 identified by location and project title. Each storage devices shall have a log of
47 that storage devices' contents. The log shall describe the various segments of
COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-4 05/04/2020
1 coverage in terms of the location, orientation and equipment and the date.
2
3 M. Area of Coverage
4
5 Coverage shall include all surface features located within 100 feet of the zone
6 of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such
7 coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks,
8 curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts,
9 fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., within the
10 area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any
11 faults, fractures, or defects. Coverage shall be limited to one side of the site,
12 street, easement or right-of-way at any one time.
13
14 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
15 (NOT USED)
16
17 PART 3 — EXECUTION
18
19 3.01 GENERAL
20
21 A. Prior to requesting Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall review the pre -
22 construction video with the Owner/Engineer and identify any work needed to
23 restore the site to pre -construction conditions.
24
25
26 END OF SECTION
27
COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-5 05/04/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-6 05/04/2020
1 SECTION 01410
2
3 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing
10 Laboratory to perform that geotechnical testing (concrete, compaction,
11 pavement, etc.) specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified
12 in the Specifications or at any other time Contractor elects to have materials and
13 equipment tested for conformity with the Contract Documents.
14
15 1. Contractor shall coordinate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution
16 of its required services.
17
18 2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's
19 obligations to perform the Work of the Contract.
20
21 B. Contractor shall perform and pay for all other testing (pressure, torque, etc.)
22 required in the specifications.
23
24 1.02 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY
25
26 A. Laboratory is not authorized to:
27
28 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract
29 Documents.
30
31 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work.
32
33 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor.
34
35 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
36
37 A. Coordinate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, to
38 Manufacturer's operations.
39
40 B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational
41 samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.
42
43 C. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for
44 concrete, and other materials mixes, which require control by the testing
45 laboratory.
46
TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES
01410-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 D. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this Contract
2 are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication.
3 Standard specifications for quality and workmanship are indicated in the
4 Contract Documents. The Engineer may require the Contractor to provide
5 statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that the
6 materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in
7 full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship
8 indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing
9 statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor,
10 and no extra charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing
11 and certification.
12
13 E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
14
15 1. To provide access to work to be tested.
16
17 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the
18 product to be tested.
19
20 3. To facilitate inspections and tests.
21
22 4. For storage and curing of test samples.
23
24 F. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the laboratory sufficiently in
25 advance (minimum 48 hours) of operations to allow for laboratory assignment
26 of personnel and scheduling of tests.
27
28 G. Employ and pay for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified
29 independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and
30 testing required for the Contractor's convenience and as reviewed by the
31 Engineer.
32
33 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
34
35 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
36
37
38 END OF SECTION
TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES
01410-2 03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01500
2
3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all of the temporary facilities
10 required for the proper execution of the work. This temporary work shall include:
11
12 1. Sanitary Facilities
13 2. Maintenance of Traffic
14 3. Barricades, Lights and the Protection of Public and Private Property
15 4. Parking
16 5. Provisions for Control of Dust, Pollution and Stormwater
17 6. Contractor's Field Office
18 7. Engineer's Field Office
19 8. Storage of Combustibles
20
21 1.02 SANITARY FACILITIES
22
23 A. Contractor shall furnish temporary separate male and female sanitary facilities
24 at the site, as provided herein, for the needs of all construction workers and
25 others performing work or furnishing services on the Project.
26
27 B. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained
28 throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the
29 greatest practical extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at
30 least one toilet will be furnished for each 20 persons. Contractor shall enforce
31 the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site.
32
33 1.03 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
34
35 A. Contractor shall conduct his work to interfere as little as possible with public
36 travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross,
37 obstruct, or close roads, driveways and walks, whether public or private,
38 Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or
39 other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private travel,
40 and shall give reasonable notice to owners of private drives before interfering
41 with them. Driveway access to commercial properties shall be maintained at all
42 times. Such maintenance of traffic shall not be required when Contractor has
43 obtained permission from the owner and tenant of private property, or from the
44 authority having jurisdiction over public property involved, to obstruct traffic at
45 the designated point. At all times, the Contractor shall perform the Work in
46 accordance with the permits and easement agreements.
47
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-1 01/04/2021
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 B. Traffic control shall be in accordance with Pinellas County and the City of
2 Clearwater Roadway and Traffic Design Standards for Traffic Control Through
3 Work Zones and as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall follow all
4 traffic rules regulated by the local governments.
5
6 C. In making open -cut street crossings, the Contractor shall not block more than
7 one-half of the street at a time. Whenever possible, Contractor shall widen the
8 shoulder on the opposite side to facilitate traffic flow. Temporary surfacing shall
9 be provided as necessary on shoulders.
10
11 1.04 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS
12
13 A. All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares which are closed to
14 traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be placed
15 acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest
16 intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section.
17
18 B. All open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades, signs,
19 and lights to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions such as
20 material piles and equipment shall be provided with similar warning signs and
21 lights. Contractor shall be responsible for public safety within the construction
22 area.
23
24 C. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights from
25 sunset to sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside
26 public streets and highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and
27 inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades, signs, lights and other
28 protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with
29 applicable statutory requirements and, where within railroad and highway rights -
30 of -way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction thereof.
31
32 D. Open trenches and other excavations shall not be left open overnight, over
33 weekends and holidays, or greater than one calendar day, except during
34 adverse weather conditions.
35
36 1.05 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY
37
38 A. Contractor shall protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain all underground
39 pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction uncovered or
40 otherwise affected by his construction operations. All pavement, surfacing,
41 driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy wires, fences, and other
42 surface structures affected by construction operations, together with all sod and
43 shrubs in yards and parking areas, shall be restored to their original condition,
44 whether within or outside the easement. All replacements shall be made with
45 new materials.
46
47 1.06 PARKING
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-2 01/04/2021
1
2 A. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all
3 construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services in
4 connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal
5 vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Owner's operations, or
6 construction activities.
7
8 1.07 DUST CONTROL
9
10 A. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust. Earth
11 surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by application of an
12 approved chemical dust suppressant. Dusty materials in piles or in transit shall
13 be covered when practicable to prevent blowing.
14
15 B. Buildings or operating facilities that may be adversely affected by dust shall be
16 adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, instrument
17 panels or similar equipment, shall be protected by suitable dust screens. Proper
18 ventilation shall be included with dust screens.
19
20 1.08 SWEEPING
21
22 A. The Contractor shall sweep loose material from all pavements at the end of
23 each workday.
24
25 1.09 POLLUTION CONTROL
26
27 A. Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary
28 wastes, sediment, debris and other substances resulting from construction
29 activities. No sanitary wastes will be permitted to enter any drain or watercourse
30 other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris or other substance will be
31 permitted to enter sanitary sewers and reasonable measures will be taken to
32 prevent such materials from entering any drain or watercourse.
33
34 1.10 STORMWATER CONTROL
35
36 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining stormwater flow and
37 drainage of the construction area. In cases where existing stormwater
38 structures and culverts are to be removed as part of construction, temporary
39 flow paths or bypass pumping shall be provided until the new stormwater system
40 is accepted and placed into service.
41
42 1.11 FIELD OFFICES
43
44 A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary field offices for the
45 Engineer and the Contractor during the entire construction period; and shall
46 furnish, install and maintain storage and work sheds needed for construction.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-3 01/04/2021
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 The Contractor shall remove field offices, sheds or contents no sooner than two
2 (2) weeks prior to achieving Substantial Completion of the Work.
3
4 B. Prior to installation of offices, the Contractor shall consult with the Owner on
5 location, access and related facilities.
6
7 C. Construction of field offices shall:
8
9 1. Be structurally sound, weather tight, with floors raised above ground.
10 2. Have temperature transmission resistance: compatible with occupancy
11 and storage requirements.
12 3. At Contractor's option, portable or mobile buildings may be used. Mobile
13 trailers, when used, shall be modified for office use. Mobile trailers shall
14 not be used for living quarters.
15
16 D. The Contractor shall furnish and install field offices as required for the
17 Contractor's superintendent and other needs, properly furnished. The
18 Contractor's field office(s) shall be separate from the Engineer's offices and the
19 conference room.
20
21 E. The Contractor shall furnish and install on-site one (1) conference room suitable
22 for meetings with 16 attendees, two (2) offices for the Engineer, one (1) office
23 for the Owner and one (1) gender -neutral restroom. The conference room,
24 restroom and the three (3) offices shall be under the same roof. All offices shall
25 be a minimum area of 150 ft2 and the conference room shall be a minimum area
26 of 500 ft2. The field office area shall be furnished with six (6) graveled parking
27 spaces and stairs. The temporary field offices shall be air conditioned, equipped
28 with standard office furniture, and potable water in addition to the following
29 equipment:
30
31 1. One (1) standard office desk (5'x3'), rolling chair with adjustable height
32 and armrest; and two (2) "visitors" standard chairs for each office.
33 2. One (1) plan table (6'x3') for full size (24"x36") drawings for each office.
34 3. One (1) five -drawer lateral file cabinets, legal size for each office.
35 4. One (1) laptop personal computer (PC), one for each office and the
36 conference room, meeting the following specifications:
37 a. Intel® Core TM i5 -2520M (Dual Core 2.50GHz, 3M cache);
38 b. Windows 10 Professional (latest version);
39 c. 4.0GB, DDR3-1333MHz SDRAM;
40 d. 17.3" (1600x900) Anti -Glare LCD screen display;
41 e. 500 GB Hardrive;
42 f. DVD/CD/CD-RW Drive;
43 g. 10/100T Ethernet Port and Wireless LAN Card;
44 h. External USB mouse;
45 i. Microsoft Office Professional (latest version with Word, Excel,
46 Access, and PowerPoint);
47 j. MS Internet Explorer;
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-4 01/04/2021
1 k. Adobe Acrobat X Standard (or latest version);
2 I. Adobe Reader X (or latest version);
3 m. Autodesk Design Review (latest version).
4 n. Scheduling software compatible with the Contractor's scheduling
5 software as specified in Section 01310.
6 5. A minimum of two (2) exit doors from the conference room area; and,
7 separate keying for each office.
8 6. High speed (cable, DSL or equal) internet service connection for each
9 PCs.
10 7. All ancillary wiring and cables to connect each PC in each office and the
11 conference room to a common Printer/Copier/Scanner device to be
12 located in the conference room area.
13 8. One (1) Hewlett-Packard laserjet (black/white) printer/copier/scanner
14 compatible with PCs furnished. Printer shall be able to print/scan both
15 sides (during the same event) of letter and 11"x17" sized documents and
16 shall be network compatible. Contractor shall configure the network to
17 print or scan from each temporary PC. The printer shall be capable of
18 scanning up to 11"x17" documents and automatically converting the
19 document to a "PDF" format file and uploading the document to the PC.
20 The printer shall also be capable of copying "letter" size up to 11"x17"
21 documents.
22
23 F All temporary offices and the conference room shall be air conditioned.
24
25 G. The conference room shall be equipped with the following:
26
27 1. A minimum of six (6) 3' x 8' tables pushed together to form a large table
28 and 16 padded folding or rolling chairs for the table.
29 2. One (1) 72 -inch flat screen monitor/TV mounted on one of the walls and
30 in clear view of everyone seated at the table, wired to the temporary office
31 network.
32 3. One (1) direct telephone line and combination phone/fax machine with
33 speaker phone capability;
34 4. One (1) minimum 1.5 cu. ft. microwave;
35 5. One (1) minimum 10 cu. ft. combination refrigerator/freezer.
36
37 H. All equipment and furniture specified herein shall be new and unused.
38 Contractor shall setup and configure all PC/printer/scanner equipment on one
39 single local area network (LAN). All other hardware/software shall be
40 configured for a complete operational PC system. Contractor shall bear all
41 monthly costs for the high-speed Internet service and phone connection
42 including installation costs. The Contractor shall arrange for and provide bi-
43 weekly cleaning services for the field offices, restroom and conference room.
44
45 I. All items listed in paragraph 1.10 E shall become the property of the Owner
46 immediately following final completion. All software and hardware shall be
47 licensed to the Owner prior to final completion. Prior to final completion, the
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-5 01/04/2021
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Contractor shall deliver the items listed in paragraph 1.10 E to the Owner."
2
3 J. The Contractor shall be responsible for regularly (at minimum bi-weekly)
4 maintain, clean, and service the Engineer's and Owner's Field Office, restroom
5 and conference room, including daily disposal of garbage (trash), replacing ink
6 toner printer cartridges, supplying sufficient quantities of letter sized and 11" x
7 17" printing paper and replacement of any office furniture, equipment or PC
8 components defective for the duration of the Contract time. Contractor shall be
9 responsible for maintaining the graveled parking area for the duration of the
10 Contract time.
11
12 K. The Contractor shall make all provisions and pay all installations and other costs
13 including maintenance and supplies for the Engineer's field office in order to
14 provide internet service, power service, water/sewer service and all other costs
15 as required for the Engineer's field office for the duration of construction.
16
17 1.12 COMBUSTIBLES STORAGE
18
19 A. The Contractor shall protect all combustible products and materials placed on
20 site from vehicular damage and vandalism.
21
22 B. Contractor shall submit a plan for all locations of fuel and vehicle storage
23 through the duration of the project, updated as necessary to address specific
24 phases or locations of the work.
25
26 C. There shall be no fuel storage in wetland areas.
27
28 D. Fuel storage containers shall be limited to 549 gallons or less. The Contractor
29 is solely responsible for maintaining fuel containers and ensuring that all
30 measures for protection and containment are provided as required by law.
31
32 PART II — PRODUCT
33 (Not Used)
34
35 PART III — EXECUTION
36 (Not Used)
37
38 END OF SECTION
39
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-6 01/04/2021
1 SECTION 01505
2
3 MOBILIZATION
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DEFINITION AND SCOPE
8
9 A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all permits, insurance, and bonds;
10 moving onto the site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting plants,
11 temporary facilities, and other construction facilities; all as required for the
12 proper performance and completion of the Work. Mobilization shall include, but
13 not be limited to, the following principal items:
14
15 1. Move onto the site all plant and equipment required for first month's
16 operations.
17
18 2. Install temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.
19
20 3. Establish fire protection plan and Health and Safety program.
21
22 4. Secure construction water supply.
23
24 5. Provide on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities.
25
26 6. Arrange for and erect Contractor's work and storage yard and
27 employees' parking facilities.
28
29 7. Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds.
30
31 8. Obtain all required permits.
32
33 9. Post all OSHA, Environmental Protection Agency, Department of Labor,
34 and all other required notices.
35
36 10. Have superintendent at the job site full time.
37
38 11. Submit a detailed construction schedule acceptable to the Engineer.
39
40 12. If required, erect project construction sign(s).
41
42 13. Submit a finalized schedule of values and schedule of payments
43 acceptable to the Owner.
44
45 14. Submit a finalized schedule of submittals.
46
47 15. Construct, maintain, and restore temporary access and haul roads.
MOBILIZATION
01505-1 03/20/2020
2 16. Provide a continuous color audio -videotape recording of existing
3 conditions.
4
5 PART 2 — PRODUCT (NOT USED)
6
7 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
8
9
10 END OF SECTION
MOBILIZATION
01505-2
03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01510
2
3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required for construction,
10 remove on completion of Work.
11
12 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
13
14 A. Comply with National Electric Code.
15
16 B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and regulations and with utility
17 company requirements.
18
19 C. Comply with Local City and County Health Department Regulations.
20
21 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
22
23 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL
24
25 A. Materials may be new or used but must be adequate in capacity for the required
26 usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of
27 applicable codes and standards.
28
29 2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
30
31 A. Arrange with utility company and Owner to provide service required for power
32 and lighting and pay all costs for service and for power used in the construction,
33 testing and trial operation prior to final acceptance of the work by the Owner.
34 All cost associated with obtaining temporary and permanent power shall be at
35 Contractor expense.
36
37 B. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not
38 adequate for work, and for areas accessible to the public.
39
40 2.03 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE
41
42 A. Arrange with local telephone service -company to provide direct line telephone
43 service or mobile phone service at the construction site for the use by personnel
44 and employees.
45
46 B. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges.
47
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 C. Provide cellular phone service for site superintendent(s).
2
3 2.04 TEMPORARY WATER
4
5 A. The Contractor shall install at each connection to the local water supply system
6 a backflow preventer and meter meeting local utility requirements.
7
8 B. The Contractor shall pay for all temporary water facilities, including the backflow
9 preventers and meters, and the actual amount of water used during
10 construction.
11
12 C. Provide connections to on-site reclaimed water for use in washdown and other
13 non -potable water needs. Clearly mark each hose and/or other hydrant as
14 required.
15
16 2.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
17
18 A. Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations.
19
20 B. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures.
21
22 PART 3 — EXECUTION
23
24 3.01 GENERAL
25
26 A. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service.
27
28 B. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires.
29
30 C. Allow the Owner and Engineer reasonable use of all temporary utilities.
31
32 3.02 REMOVAL
33
34 A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no
35 longer required as determined by the Engineer.
36
37 B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary
38 facilities.
39
40
41 END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510-2 03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01580
2
3 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9
10
11
12 B. Erect sign meeting all City standards.
13
14 C. Remove sign on completion of construction.
15
16 D. Allow no other signs to be displayed.
17
18 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SIGN(S)
19
20 A. Painted signs with painted lettering, or standard products.
21
22 1. Size of signs and lettering: as required by the Owner, or as appropriate
23 to usage.
24
25 2. Colors: as required by the Owner, otherwise of uniform colors throughout
26 Project.
27
28 B. Erect at appropriate location(s), as directed by the Owner or Engineer, to
29 provide required information.
30
31 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
32
33 A. Sign Painter: Professional experienced in type of work required.
34
35 B. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to resist weathering and fading for scheduled
36 construction period
37
38 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
39
40 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS
A. Contractor shall furnish and install one (1) construction sign at a City -approved
location at the site.
41
42 A.
43
44
45 B.
46
Structure and Framing: Minimum 8 -feet wide by 4 -feet high mounted on 4"x4"
pressure -treated lumber and braced as required, in accordance with the City of
Clearwater Standards.
Sign Surfaces: Exterior softwood plywood with medium density overlay,
standard Targe sizes to minimize joints.
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
01580-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 1. Thickness: As required by standards to span framing members, to
3 provide even, smooth surface without waves or buckles.
4
5 C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized.
6
7 D. Paint: Exterior quality.
8
9 1. Use Bulletin colors for graphics.
10
11 2. Colors for structures, framing, sign surface and graphics:
12
13 E. The project sign shall be painted in accordance with the attached detail.
14
15 F. Owner will provide the standard decal.
16
17 PART 3 - EXECUTION
18
19 3.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN(S)
20
21 A. Paint exposed surface of supports, framing and surface material; one coat of
22 primer and one coat of exterior paint.
23
24 3.02 MAINTENANCE
25
26 A. Maintain sign(s) and supports in a neat, clean condition; repair damages to
27 structures, framing or sign.
28
29 3.03 REMOVAL
30
31 A. Remove sign(s), framing, supports and foundations at completion of project.
32
33
34
35
36 END OF SECTION
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
01580-2 03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01600
2
3 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Material and equipment incorporated into the Work shall:
10
11 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
12
13 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically
14 identified in writing by the Engineer.
15
16 B. Manufactured and Fabricated Products:
17
18 1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering
19 and shop practices.
20
21 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and
22 gauges, to be interchangeable.
23
24 3. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same
25 manufacturer.
26
27 4. Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
28
29 5. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall
30 be adhered to unless variations are specifically identified in writing.
31
32 6. Materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be new
33 and shall not have been in service at any other installation unless
34 otherwise approved. They shall conform to applicable specifications
35 approved in writing by the Engineer.
36
37 7 Rotating machinery shall be designed and fabricated to provide
38 satisfactory operation without excessive wear and without excessive
39 maintenance during its operating life. Rotating parts shall be
40 statically and dynamically balanced and shall operate without
41 excessive vibration.
42
43 C. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which
44 it is designed or is specified.
45
46 1.02 REVIEW OF MATERIALS
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 A. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to
3 the inspection and review of the Engineer. No material shall be delivered
4 to the work without prior review of the Engineer.
5
6 B. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and
7 equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. If the Engineer requires,
8 either prior to beginning or during the progress of the work, the Contractor
9 shall submit samples of materials for such special tests as may be
10 necessary to demonstrate that they conform to the specifications. Such
11 samples shall be furnished, stored, packed, and shipped as directed at the
12 Contractor's expense. Except as otherwise noted, the Owner will make
13 arrangements for and pay for the tests.
14
15 C. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit
16 consideration and review before materials are necessary for incorporation
17 in the work. Any delay resulting from the Contractor's failure to submit
18 samples or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claims against the
19 Owner or the Engineer.
20
21 D. The materials and equipment used on the work shall correspond to the
22 accepted samples or other data previously submitted to the Engineer for
23 review. If requested, the Contractor shall be required to submit to the
24 Engineer ample evidence that each and every part of the materials,
25 machinery, and equipment to be furnished is of a reliable make and of a
26 type that has been in successful operation within the continental United
27 States. No equipment will be considered
28 unless the manufacturer has designed and manufactured equipment of a
29 comparable type and size for at least 3 years. The Engineer or Owner will
30 not allow any experimental or untried type of material or machinery to be
31 installed.
32
33 E. All equipment, machinery, parts, and assemblies of equipment, machinery,
34 or parts entering into the Work shall be tested as specified. Unless waived
35 in writing by the Engineer, all field and operating tests shall be made in the
36 presence of the Engineer or the Engineer's authorized representative.
37 When such a waiver is issued, the Contractor or manufacturer shall furnish
38 sworn statements in duplicate of the tests conducted and the results of the
39 tests to the Engineer.
40
41 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION
42
43 A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with
44 manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such
45 instructions to parties involved in the installation, including four copies to the
46 Engineer.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-2 03/20/2020
1
1
1
2 1 Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during I 3 installation and until completion.
4
5 B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord 1
6 with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
7
8 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with 1
9 manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further
10 instructions.
11 I 12 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.
13
14
15 C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any
I
preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or
16 exempted by Contract Documents.
17
I
18 1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
19
20 A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accordance with construction schedules, 1
21 coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site.
22
23 1. Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original 1
24 containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.
25
26 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance 1
27 with requirements of Contract Documents and submittals, and that
28 Products are properly protected and undamaged.
29 1 30 B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to
31 prevent soiling or damage to Products or packaging.
32 1
33 C. Where materials or equipment are specifically shown or specified to be
34 reused in the Work, special care shall be used in removing, handling,
35 storing, and reinstalling to ensure their proper function in the completed 1
36 Work.
37
38 1
39 1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
40
41 A. The Contractor shall furnish a covered, weather -protected storage structure 1
42 providing a clean, dry, non -corrosive environment for all mechanical
43 equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation I 44 equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this project.
45 Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for
46 storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection
I
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-3 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 of heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. The Contractor
2 shall furnish a copy of the manufacturer's instructions for storage to the
3 Engineer prior to storage of all equipment and materials. Corroded,
4 damaged or deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before
5 acceptance of the project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will
6 not be included in a payment estimate.
7
8 B. Store Products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and
9 labels intact and legible.
10
11 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather tight
12 enclosures.
13
14 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by
15 manufacturer's instructions.
16
17 3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids,
18 prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to
19 deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate
20 ventilation to avoid condensation.
21
22 4. Store loose granular materials in a well -drained area on solid
23 surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter.
24
25 C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled
26 and stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner
27 to prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any
28 injury, theft or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment.
29
30 D. Cement, sand and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and
31 shall be kept completely dry at all times. All miscellaneous steel and
32 reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent
33 accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations
34 of standing water and to minimize rusting. Precast concrete sections shall
35 be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt,
36 standing water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar
37 masonry products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce
38 breakage, chipping, cracking, and spilling to a minimum.
39
40 E. All materials that, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged
41 as to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed
42 from the site of the work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation
43 for the damaged material or its removal.
44
45 F Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make
46 periodic inspections of stored Products to assure that Products are
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-4 03/20/2020
1 maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or
2 deterioration.
3
4 G. Protection After Installation:
5
6 1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed
7 products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction
8 operations. Remove covering when no longer needed.
9
10 H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and
11 supplies sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final
12 inspection of the work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event
13 any such material, equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or
14 destroyed prior to final inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall
15 replace same without additional cost to the Owner.
16
17 I. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of
18 equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written
19 notice to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all
20 deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the
21 cost associated with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract.
22 These costs may be comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage,
23 administrative, clerical, engineering and any other costs associated with
24 making the necessary corrections.
25
26 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
27
28 A. Contractor's Options:
29
30 1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any
31 product meeting that standard.
32
33 2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers,
34 submit the products or manufacturers named, which complies with
35 the specifications.
36
37 3. For products specified by naming one or more products or
38 manufacturers and "or equal", Contractor shall submit a request as
39 for substitutions for any product or manufacturer not specifically
40 named.
41
42 B. Substitutions:
43
44 1. After the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Engineer will consider
45 written requests from Contractor for substitution of products.
46
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-5 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 2. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with
2 complete data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including:
3
4 a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with
5 that specified.
6
7 b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of
8 the substitution.
9
10 c. Effect on the construction schedule.
11
12 d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the
13 product specified.
14
15 e. Any required license fees or royalties.
16
17 f. Availability of maintenance service, and source of
18 replacement materials.
19
20 3. The Engineer will be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed
21 substitution.
22
23 C. Contractor's Representation:
24
25 1. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that
26 Contractor:
27
28 a. Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it
29 is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.
30
31 b. Shall provide the same warranties or bonds for the
32 substitution as for the product specified.
33
34 c. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into
35 the Work and make such other changes as may be required
36 to make the Work complete in all respects.
37
38 d. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility,
39 which may subsequently become apparent.
40
41 1.07 LUBRICATION SYSTEM
42
43 A. The minimum design criteria for lubricating moving parts of the equipment
44 shall include 1 week of continuous operation during which no lubricants
45 shall be added to the system.
46
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-6 03/20/2020
1 B. The system shall be designed to receive lubricants whether in operation or
2 shut down and shall not leak or waste lubricants under either condition. The
3 manufacturer's recommendations of grade and quality and a supply of the
4 lubricants so recommended in quantities sufficient to conduct start-up and
5 testing operations shall be furnished with the equipment.
6
7 1.08 SPECIAL TOOLS
8
9 A. Manufacturers of equipment and machinery shall furnish any special tools
10 (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal
11 adjustment, operations and maintenance, together with instructions for their
12 use. The Contractor shall preserve and deliver to the Owner these tools
13 and instructions in good order no later than upon completion of the Contract.
14
15 1.09 WARRANTY
16
17 A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment
18 manufacturer as specified in Section 01740. The manufacturer's warranty
19 period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's warranty.
20
21 1.10 SPARE PARTS
22
23 A. Spare parts for certain equipment have been specified in the pertinent
24 sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all
25 spare parts so required in an area to be designated by the Engineer. In
26 addition, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all
27 spare parts, the equipment they are associated with, the name and address
28 of the supplier, and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual
29 invoices for each item shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate
30 the delivered cost.
31
32 1.11 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL
33
34 A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished
35 with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's
36 supply of required lubricants including grease and oil of the type
37 recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied.
38
39 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and
40 intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break-in of
41 the equipment, which in no event shall be any longer than three weeks of
42 operation.
43
44 1.12 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
45
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-7 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 A. All items of electrical equipment that are furnished with process, heating,
2 ventilating, or other equipment shall conform to the requirements specified
3 under the appropriate electrical Sections of the Specifications. Enclosures
4 for electrical equipment, such as switches and starters, shall conform to the
5 requirements specified under the appropriate electrical Sections of the
6 Specifications.
7
8 1.13 EQUIPMENT DRIVE GUARDS
9
10 A. Screens, guards, or cages shall be provided for all exposed rotating or
11 moving parts in accordance with accepted practices of applicable
12 governmental agencies. Unless specified otherwise in the Technical
13 Specification Sections, guards shall be constructed of galvanized sheet
14 steel or galvanized woven wires or expanded metal set in a frame of
15 galvanized steel members. Guards shall be secured in position by steel
16 braces or straps, which will permit easy removal for servicing the
17 equipment.
18
19 1.14 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS
20
21 A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable
22 insulation shall be provided between adjoining surfaces so as to eliminate
23 direct contact and any resultant electrolysis. The insulation shall be
24 bituminous -impregnated felt, heavy -bituminous coatings, nonmetallic
25 separators or washers, or other acceptable materials.
26
27 1.15 CONCRETE INSERTS
28
29 A. Concrete inserts for hangers shall be designed to support safely, in the
30 concrete that is used, the maximum load that can be imposed by the
31 hangers used in the inserts. Inserts for hangers shall be of a type which will
32 permit adjustment of the hangers both horizontally (in one plane) and
33 vertically and locking of the hanger head or nut. All inserts shall be
34 galvanized.
35
36 1.16 SLEEVES
37
38 A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified, openings for the
39 passage of pipes through floors and walls shall be formed of sleeves of
40 standard -weight, galvanized -steel pipe. Each sleeve shall be of ample
41 diameter to pass the pipe and its insulation, if any, and to permit such
42 expansion as may occur. Sleeves shall be of sufficient length to be flush at
43 the walls and the bottom of the slabs and to project 2 inches above the
44 finished floor surface. Threaded nipples shall not be used as sleeves.
45
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-8 03/20/2020
1 B. Sleeves in exterior walls below ground or in walls to have liquids on one or
2 both sides shall have a 2 -inch annular fin of 1/4 -inch plate welded with a
3 continuous weld completely around the sleeve at about mid -length. Sleeves
4 shall be galvanized after the fins are attached.
5
6 C. All sleeves shall be set accurately before the concrete is placed or shall be
7 built-in accurately as the masonry is being built.
8
9 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
10
11 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
12
13 END OF SECTION
14
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-9 03/20/2020
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-10 03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01610
2
3 WATER TIGHTNESS TEST FOR HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
4
5 PART 1 – GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and incidentals required
10 and perform tightness testing of water -containing structures as listed in this
11 Section and all retesting until the structures meet the requirements as
12 specified in this Section.
13
14 1.02 RELATED WORK
15
16 Section 01600, Materials and Equipment
17 Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds.
18 Division 3, Concrete.
19
20 1.03 SUBMITTALS
21
22 A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals.
23
24 B. Submit to the Engineer the results of each water tightness test of each
25 structure. The submittal format shall be similar to that shown in Figure A
26 attached to the end of this Section.
27
28 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (not used)
29
30 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS
31
32 A. Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Section
33 shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid
34 time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section
35 differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply.
36
37 B. The testing reinforced concrete tanks or water containment structures shall
38 conform to the following standards and as modified in this Section:
39
40 C. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 350—Reinforced concrete water -
41 retaining structures, 1R and as specified.
42
43 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
44
45 A. Coordinate timing and procedures for obtaining testing water and structure
46 testing with the Owner well in advance of the actual testing.
WATER TIGHTNESS TEST FOR HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
01610-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 B. Water Source and Disposal:
3
4 Water for testing shall be provided by the Owner. Water shall be plant
5 reuse/reclaimed water. The Contractor shall supply all labor, equipment, and
6 materials. Test water shall be disposed of by the Contractor in an approved
7 manner. Water shall not be disposed of by discharging it onto the ground surface
8 of public or private land.
9
10 1.07 WARRANTIES
11
12 A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary
13 Conditions, and Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds.
14
15 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
16
17 A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01600,
18 Materials and Equipment, for storing and protecting the items specified in
19 this Section.
20
21 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (not used)
22
23
24 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
25
26 PART 3 - EXECUTION
27
28 3.01 GENERAL
29
30 A. The Contractor shall prepare structures for testing as follows:
31
32 Inspect the structure to be tested for potential leakage paths such as cracks,
33 voids, etc. and repair any leakage paths in compliance with the provisions
34 specified in this Section or as approved by the Engineer.
35
36 Thoroughly clean the structure to be tested of dirt, mud, and construction
37 debris before beginning watertightness tests. The floor and sumps shall be
38 flushed with water to provide a clean surface ready for testing.
39
40 Inlet and outlet pipes not required to be operational for the tests may be
41 temporarily sealed or bulkheaded before testing.
42
43 Confirm the adequacy of seals around valves and reset or seal as approved
44 by the Engineer. Estimates of valve leakage will not be allowed as
45 adjustments to the measured tank or structure leakage.
46
WATER TIGHTNESS TEST FOR HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
01610-2 03/20/2020
1 3.02 TESTING PROCEDURES
2
3 A. Conditions of Testing
4
5 The Contractor shall not begin initial filling of concrete structures until all
6 concrete elements of the structure have been repaired and rehabilitated
7 and the designed compressive strength of the concrete used in the repairs
8 nor Tess than 14 days after the tank repair and rehabilitation or when the
9 coating systems have been fully cured per the manufacturer's
10 recommendations.
11
12 The Contractor shall fill unlined or partially Tined concrete structures to the
13 maximum operating water surface level and maintain the water at that level
14 for at least 72 hours before beginning water tightness tests to minimize
15 water absorption into the concrete during testing. The testing of fully Tined
16 concrete structures may be started as soon as the structure is filled.
17
18 B. Testing Procedures
19
20 The duration of the test shall not be Tess than that required for a drop in the
21 water surface of 1/2 -inch based on the calculated maximum allowable
22 leakage rate for 3 days.
23
24 Loss -of -volume measurements shall be taken at 24-hour intervals. The Toss
25 of volume is usually determined by measuring the drop in water surface
26 elevation and computing the change in volume of the contained water.
27 Measure water surface elevation at not less than two locations at 180° apart
28 and preferably at four locations 90 degrees apart. Record water
29 temperature 18 inches below the water surface when taking the first and
30 last sets of measurements.
31
32 C. Reports
33
34 Submit to the Engineer water tightness test results for each structure tested
35 on the form shown in Figure A or a form with a similar format.
36
37 Notify the Owner and Engineer of the scheduling of tests 3 working days
38 before the tests. The Engineer and Owner may monitor any water tightness
39 testing performed on the structures.
40
41 3.03 ACCEPTANCE
42
43 A. The following conditions shall be considered as NOT meeting the criteria
44 for acceptance regardless of the actual Toss of water volume from the
45 structure:
46
WATER TIGHTNESS TEST FOR HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
01610-3 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 • Groundwater leakage into the structure through floors, walls, or wall -
2 floor joints.
3
4 • Structures which exhibit flowing water from joints, cracks, or from
5 beneath the foundation (except for underdrain systems).
6
7 • Lined concrete structures on which moisture can be picked up by a dry
8 hand from the exterior surface of the walls.
9
10 B. The water tightness of concrete tanks and structures shall be considered
11 acceptable when loss of water volume is within the criteria listed below:
12
13 For unlined tanks with a sidewater depth of 25 feet or less, loss of volume
14 not exceeding 0.1 percent in 24 hours.
15
16 For tanks with lined walls and a sidewater depth of 30 feet or Tess, Toss of
17 volume not exceeding 0.06 percent in 24 hours. Steel diaphragms in
18 concrete walls shall be considered the same as a wall liner.
19
20 For completely lined tanks, Toss of volume not exceeding 0.025 percent in
21 24 hours.
22
23 3.04 REPAIRS AND RETESTING
24
25 A. The Contractor may retest structures failing the water tightness test and not
26 exhibiting visible leakage after an additional stabilization period of 7 days.
27 Tanks failing this second test shall be repaired before further testing.
28
29 B. The Contractor shall repair structures which fail the water tightness test and
30 structures showing visible leakage in compliance with the provisions
31 specified in this Section or as approved by the Engineer.
32
33 C. Repairs and retesting of tanks shall be accomplished at no additional cost
34 to the Owner.
35
36 D. The following structures, where applicable, shall be tested for water
37 tightness:
38
39 • Equalization Basin
40 • North Sludge Blending Tank
41 • South Sludge Dewatering Storage Tank
42
WATER TIGHTNESS TEST FOR HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
01610-4 03/20/2020
1 FIGURE A
2 WATER TIGHTNESS TEST REPORT
3
4 PROJECT SUBMITTED BY
5 STRUCTURE* TEST DATES
6 Allowable loss of water volume percent in 24 hr.
7
8 Measured loss of water volume percent in 24 hr.
9
10 TEST READINGS
11
12 Water temperature at start degrees F Water temperature at end
13 degrees F
14
15 Location Location Location Location
16 Date Time 1 2 3 4
17
18 1.
19
20 2.
21
22 3.
23
24 4.
25
26 5.
27
28 Change in level
29 Average change in level
30 Correction for precipitation/evaporation
31 Corrected change in level = CL =
32 (CD x (surface area) x (100) = measured percent water loss in 24 hr.
33 (initial water volume) x (number of test days)
34 Notes and field observations**
35
36
Initials
37 * Attach a sketch showing a plan of the structure and measurement locations.
38 ** Place date and initials at the beginning of each entry.
39
40
WATER TIGHTNESS TEST FOR HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
01610-5 03/20/2020
END OF SECTION
WATER TIGHTNESS TEST FOR HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
01610-6 03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01625
2
3 START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Prior to requesting issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the
10 Contractor shall perform start-up testing services as specified herein.
11
12 B. Start-up of the facilities and appurtenances will require completion of all
13 structures, installation of all equipment, and all connections to existing systems.
14 All components of the new system shall be installed as if each were ready for
15 use by the Owner for their intended purposes. The Contractor shall provide a
16 written startup plan, for review by the Engineer, for individual facilities and
17 systems. As applicable, the startup plan shall be in accordance with the
18 construction phasing plan described in the Contractor's Schedule described in
19 Section 01310.
20
21 C. All equipment will be tested and accepted by the Engineer prior to placement of
22 the new facilities into operation.
23
24 D. All lubricants, water, air, fuel and power necessary for initial operation and tests
25 shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
26
27 E. In addition to furnishing, delivering, installing, and testing each piece of
28 equipment, the Contractor shall provide the services of competent factory
29 certified representatives for the periods indicated in other sections of these
30 Specifications. Such representatives shall assist the Engineer by instructing the
31 operating personnel of the Owner in the maintenance and operation of the
32 equipment, conducting tests, and making recommendations for producing the
33 most efficient results. These services shall be made during the initial operation
34 of the completed facilities and be in addition to services necessary during
35 erection or to correct defective materials or workmanship during the guarantee
36 period. These representatives shall be specially trained and qualified to provide
37 installation services, adjustment, start-up, and testing work and shall not be
38 sales representatives only. The cost of such representation, including
39 subsistence and travel, shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost
40 to the Owner.
41
42 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
43
44 PART 3 — EXECUTION
45
46 3.01 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
47
48 A. General Requirements:
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 1. Successfully execute the start-up of the system and demonstrate
3 satisfactory performance of the intended use thereof. The start-up and
4 performance demonstration shall be successfully executed prior to the
5 Engineer's issuance of Substantial Completion.
6
7 2. Field acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. At least thirty
8 (30) calendar days prior to initiating any testing, the Contractor shall
9 submit details of all test procedures to the Engineer for review and
10 comment. Test procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer in
11 accordance with Specification Section 01340. This notification shall be
12 shown on the Progress Schedule.
13
14 3. All performance tests and inspections shall be scheduled at least ten (10)
15 working days in advance with the Engineer. All performance tests and
16 inspections shall be conducted during the normal work week of Monday
17 through Friday, unless otherwise authorized, in writing, by the Engineer.
18
19 4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of
20 equipment during start-up systems testing and shall neither have nor
21 make any claim for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time
22 when the Owner takes over the operation thereof.
23
24 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all
25 necessary valves, whether shown on the Drawings or not, in order to
26 facilitate testing of pumping systems, tanks, and all other system start -
27 up testing, at no additional cost to the Owner.
28
29 B. Preparation for Systems Start -Up:
30
31 1. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure that
32 each component is in good working order and properly installed and
33 connected. All systems shall be purged as required. All sumps, tanks,
34 basins, chambers, wet wells, and pipelines that are hydraulically checked
35 shall be drained and returned to their original condition once the water
36 testing is complete. All pipelines that have been filled and flushed shall
37 be drained clean.
38
39 2. All instruments and controls shall be calibrated through their full
40 operational distribution range. Any other adjustments required for proper
41 operation of all instrumentation and control equipment shall be made and
42 confirmed by the specific factory authorized service representative.
43
44 3. The Contractor shall work with each factory certified technician to
45 complete any remaining tasks, connections, adjustments, and
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-2 03/20/2020
1 preparations needed to ensure proper equipment and/or system
2 operation.
3
4 4. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has
5 confirmed that all specified safety equipment has been installed and is in
6 good working order.
7
8 5. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has
9 verified that all maintenance equipment, spare parts, and equipment
10 Operation and Maintenance manuals have been furnished as specified.
11
12 6. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the factory certified
13 technician for that particular component has confirmed that all lubricants,
14 electrical connections, drains, fuel and exhaust systems have been
15 provided and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
16 recommendations.
17
18 7. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Contractor has
19 submitted and the Engineer has reviewed the Certificate of Proper
20 Installation.
21
22 3.02 PRESSURE TESTS
23
24 A. Field pressure tests shall be made to confirm compliance with the Contract
25 Documents. The Contractor shall perform field tests as herein specified. All
26 tanks, water mains, piping and equipment shall be tested in the field in the
27 presence of the Engineer or his authorized agent.
28
29 B. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be performed in accordance with the
30 applicable sections of the American Water Works Association Standard for
31 Installation of Cast Iron/Ductile Iron Water Mains, AWWA C-600, Concrete
32 Pressure Pipe, AWWA M9, and Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride
33 (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water Mains, AWWA C-605, except as
34 herein modified.
35
36 C. The Contractor shall submit his plan for pressure testing to the Engineer for
37 review at least ten (10) days before starting the work. The Contractor shall
38 remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and equipment after
39 completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise
40 directed by the Engineer. Any damage to the pipe shall be repaired by the
41 Contractor.
42
43 D. After completion of all work and before final acceptance, a hydrostatic and
44 leakage test shall be conducted. Water required for testing new pipelines will
45 be provided by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Water mains shall
46 be tested with potable water and force mains and storm water lines shall be
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-3 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 tested with reclaimed water, if available. Where applicable, the Contractor shall
2 coordinate the development of the water supply with the pipeline work in order
3 that water will be available to meet these requirements. At no time are valves
4 on the water supply system to be operated without the prior authorization of the
5 Engineer.
6
7 E. Each newly installed pressure main shall be tested at a pressure equal 1.5 times
8 the pipeline design pressure or 150 psi; whichever is greater. The duration of
9 each test shall be a minimum of two (2) hours.
10
11 F. Any test pump(s), piping connections, taps, fittings, pressure gauges,
12 compressors, and all necessary components thereof which might be required
13 for the hydrostatic tests, shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional
14 cost to the Owner.
15
16 G. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, air valves, blow -offs and joints shall be
17 carefully examined during the test, and all joints showing a visible leakage shall
18 be made tight. All defective pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall
19 be removed from the line and replaced by the Contractor with new components
20 at no additional cost to the Owner.
21
22 H. The Contractor may backfill the trench before testing the line, but he shall open
23 up the trench at his own expense to repair any leaks.
24
25 I. All visible leaks shall be corrected regardless of the total leakage revealed by
26 the test as compared to the allowable calculated losses. All lines that fail to
27 meet the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary, until test
28 requirements are complied with. All repairs and retests shall be performed at
29 the Contractor's own expense with no additional cost to the Owner.
30
31 J. The installation will not be accepted until the leakage is equal to or less than the
32 allowable leakage as determined by the formula below:
33
34 L=SD(P)o-
35 133,200
36
37 in which "L" equals the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; "S" is the length
38 of the pipe tested, in feet; "D" is the nominal pipe diameter, in inches; and "P" is
39 the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch,
40 gauge.
41 K. All tests shall be made under the supervision of the Engineer or authorized
42 agents thereof. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor for
43 performing the above required tests; the cost of all labor, materials, lubricants,
44 fuels, power, necessary appliances, and the coordination for testing purposes
45 shall be included in the unit price or prices bid for the various items of work.
46
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-4 03/20/2020
1
1
1 L. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a minimum of 72 hours advance
2 notice for scheduling hydrostatic and leakage tests. I 3
4 3.03 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER LINES
5
I
6 A. Prior to disinfection, the lines shall be cleaned and flushed. Flushing and
7 cleaning shall occur after all hydrostatic and leak tests have been performed
8 and passed. Lines shall be disinfected in accordance with the applicable
I
9 requirements of AWWA C651 and as described hereinafter.
10
11 B. Before being placed in service, all potable water pipelines installed under this
I
12 Contract shall be disinfected by chlorination in accordance with AWWA
13 Standards. Either of the following disinfectants may be allowed upon written
14 authorization from the Engineer.
I
15
16 1. Liquid Chlorine: A chlorine gas -water mixture shall be applied by means
17 of a solution -feed chlorination device. The device must provide a means
18 to prevent the backflow of water into the chlorine cylinder.
19
20 2. Calcium Hypochlorite Solution: A solution consisting of 5 percent 1
21 calcium hypochlorite powder and 95 percent water by weight shall be
22 prepared and this solution will be injected or pumped into the line.
23 1 24 C. The point of application of the chlorinating agent shall be at the beginning of the
25 pipeline extension and through a corporation stop inserted in the top of the
26 newly installed pipe. The water injector for delivering the chlorine -bearing water
I
27 into the pipe may be supplied from a tap on the pressure side of the valve
28 controlling the flow into the pipeline extension.
29
I
30 D. Water from the existing distribution system or other source of supply shall be
31 controlled so as to flow slowly into the newly installed pipeline during the
32 application of chlorine. The Contractor shall not allow the chlorine solution in
I
33 the line being treated to flow back into the line supplying the water.
34
35 E. Treated water shall be retained in the new pipeline at least 24 hours, after which 1
36 the chlorine residual in the line shall be at least 50 mg/I. Should the initial
37 procedure fail to result in the conditions specified, the chlorination procedure
38 shall be repeated until acceptable results are obtained, at the Contractor's
39 expense.
40 I 41 F. The Contractor shall tap the lines at points designated by the Engineer and
42 provide necessary piping to discharge water from the line to a designated
43 location as directed by the Engineer. I 44
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING 1
01625-5 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 G. Following chlorination, all treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the line,
2 at its extremities, until the replacement water throughout its length, upon testing,
3 is proved comparable to the quality of water in the existing distribution system.
4
5 H. Water for flushing will be provided through connections to the Owner's piping
6 systems. The Contractor shall pay for all water used in flushing the pipelines.
7 At no time are valves on the distribution system to be operated without the
8 presence of a duly qualified representative of the Engineer.
9
10 I. After the water lines have been disinfected and flushed, samples of water shall
11 be taken from several points in sterilized containers, and samples forwarded to
12 the Engineer, or its designated representative, for bacterial examination. If
13 repeated tests of such samples show the presence of coliform organisms, the
14 disinfection shall be repeated or continued until tests indicate absence of
15 contamination. Final acceptance of the bacterial samples shall be received prior
16 to placing the system into operation.
17
18 J. The Contractor shall submit his plan for disinfection of the potable water
19 pipelines to the Engineer for review at least ten (10) days before starting the
20 work. Lines shall be totally free and clean prior to final acceptance.
21
22 3.04 LEAKAGE TEST — GRAVITY SEWERS AND OTHER GRAVITY PIPELINES
23
24 A. All gravity sewer will be tested by the Contractor prior to final acceptance of the
25 work. All tests will be conducted in a manner to minimize any interference with
26 the Contractor's work or progress. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 72
27 hours in advance of such tests and, at his option, the Engineer shall witness
28 such tests.
29
30 B. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the work is ready for testing, and
31 tests shall be made as soon thereafter as practicable, under the observation of
32 the Engineer. Reading meters, gauges or other measuring devices shall be
33 new and furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish all other
34 labor, materials, services and equipment including power, fuel, meters and
35 gauges; water and other items and apparatus necessary for making leakage
36 tests, preparing guidelines for testing, assembling, placing, and removing
37 testing equipment and placing in service.
38
39 C. Air Leakage Test
40
41 1. Tests by this method shall be limited to sewers 36 inches in diameter and
42 smaller. The maximum allowable air leakage is based on pre -wetted
43 pipe walls. The Contractor may therefore fill the pipe with clear water
44 and then empty the pipe prior to air testing. When pipe walls are pre -
45 wetted, air leakage tests shall be completed within 24 hours after filling
46 the sewer section to be tested.
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-6 03/20/2020
1
2 2. Air pressure tests shall be made by placing the sewer under 3.0 psig air
3 pressure and measuring the volume of air required to maintain this
4 pressure. The rate of air leakage shall be determined when the system
5 reaches an equilibrium state and air flow shall be read by means of an
6 approved rotameter.
7
8 3. The maximum rate of air Toss shall be 0.003 cfm per square foot of interior
9 pipe surface and the maximum air flow shall not exceed 2.0 cfm when
10 the total pressure on the sewer is maintained at 3.0 psig. When the
11 groundwater level is above the invert of the sewer, but below a level
12 adequate for infiltration testing, the maximum air Toss shall be reduced 6
13 percent for each foot of groundwater above the sewer invert.
14
15 4. Air testing equipment shall be arranged so that compressors, valving,
16 gauges, and other test devices are located at the ground surface. Air
17 testing equipment shall have an approved air relief arrangement to
18 prevent the sewer from being pressurized to greater than 10.0 psig.
19
20 D. Manhole Vacuum Tests: Each manhole shall be visually inspected for leakage
21 or evidence thereof after assembly, installation, and backfilling activities have
22 been completed. This inspection shall occur by the Engineer or the Engineer's
23 authorized agent. The Contractor shall demonstrate the integrity of the installed
24 materials and construction procedures by conducting a vacuum test in
25 accordance with ASTM C1244-93. If the manhole shows signs of leakage, it
26 shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the
27 Owner.
28
29 E. Repairing Leaks: When leakage occurs in excess of the specified amount,
30 defective manholes, pipe, pipe joints, or other appurtenances shall be located
31 and repaired at the expense of the Contractor. If the defective portions cannot
32 be located, the Contractor shall remove, reconstruct, and retest as much of the
33 original work as necessary to obtain satisfactory test results.
34
35 3.05 SYSTEM START-UP
36
37 A. Contractor Responsibilities
38
39 1. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer ten (10) days' notice in writing
40 of his intent to perform systems start-up.
41
42 2. The Contractor shall provide sufficient personnel to test equipment,
43 monitor and record data, as directed by the Engineer.
44
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-7 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 3. The Contractor shall obtain, install, calibrate and operate all test
2 equipment, gauges, pressure recorders, communications systems, etc.,
3 as directed by the Engineer.
4
5 4. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer, provide access to the
6 work, provide all incidental labor and facilities, and provide any temporary
7 utilities or construction aids required.
8
9 5. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment, subsystems, and other
10 separable parts of the Work have been adjusted and balanced and that
11 any and all field tests have been conducted and demonstrated to be in
12 proper operating condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
13
14 B. Start -Up Tests
15
16 1. Start -Up Systems Testing shall include, but not be limited to the
17 following:
18
19 a. The Contractor shall verify that all valves (new and existing,
20 manual and automatic) are in their proper operating position in
21 accordance with the specific operating scenario being tested.
22
23 b. The Contractor shall fill the pipes with water, in an approved
24 manner, taking care to allow the gradual release of air from all
25 high points.
26
27 c. In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate
28 the operation of all equipment and facilities including all
29 instrumentation and controls and all manual and automatic control
30 systems. The Contractor shall be responsible for calibrating and
31 verifying the accuracy of all new instruments. The Contractor shall
32 demonstrate the proper operation of all auto -shutdown features
33 and standby power systems or devices.
34
35 d. The Contractor shall demonstrate proper operation of all aspects
36 of the control systems, including PLC's, Operator Interface
37 Terminals, and all hardware and software furnished. The
38 Contractor shall demonstrate the full integration of the SCADA
39 System with the Owner's existing network. The Contractor shall
40 make modifications to the existing HMI screens as required or as
41 directed by the Engineer for a fully functional system.
42
43 e. Following the successful completion of these tests, the Contractor
44 shall demonstrate automatic controlled operation of the
45 equipment and facilities over a period of not less than 72 hours of
46 continuous successful operation.
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-8 03/20/2020
1
2 f. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing all tests
3 outside of those previously described as may be required by the
4 manufacturers for all equipment, pumps and control valves.
5
6 g. Data records shall be kept by the Contractor. This information
7 shall be submitted to the Engineer for review at the end of the test
8 period.
9
10 2. Should the Contractor fail to demonstrate satisfactory performance on
11 the first and any subsequent attempt, he shall make all necessary altera-
12 tions, adjustments, repairs and replacements. The Contractor shall notify
13 the City 48 hours prior to making subsequent start up attempts. At such
14 time as the facility is again ready for operation and the City is ready for
15 the startup to occur, the system shall be brought on-line and new tests
16 shall be started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary
17 until the facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the
18 Engineer, for the specified test duration.
19
20
21 END OF SECTION
22
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-9 03/20/2020
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-10 03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01640
2
3 QUALITY CONTROL
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
8
9 A. Quality assurance and control of installation
10
11 B. References
12
13 C. Field samples
14
15 D. Mock-up
16
17 E. Inspection and testing laboratory services
18
19 F. Manufacturers' field services and reports
20
21 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
22
23 A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards
24
25 B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and
26 Certificates
27
28 C. Section 01410 - Testing- Laboratory Services
29
30 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
31
32 A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site
33 conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
34
35 B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
36
37 C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request
38 clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
39
40 D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when
41 more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher
42 standards or more precise workmanship.
43
44 E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
45
46 F Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-1 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
2
3 1.04 REFERENCES
4
5 A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner Bids.
6
7 B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request
8 clarification for Engineer before proceeding.
9
10 C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered
11 from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any
12 reference document.
13
14 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES
15
16 A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections
17 for review.
18
19 B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
20
21 C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area
22 after field sample has been accepted by Engineer.
23
24 1.06 MOCK-UP
25
26 A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section.
27
28 B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage
29 devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.
30
31 C. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area
32 after mock-up has been accepted by Engineer.
33
34 1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
35
36 A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent firm to perform
37 inspection and testing.
38
39 B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services
40 specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Engineer.
41
42 C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Engineer, in duplicate,
43 indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or
44 non-compliance with Contract Documents.
45
46 D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix,
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-2 12/17/2020
1
1
1 equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested.
2
3 1. Notify Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for
4 operations requiring services.
5
6 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional
7 samples and tests required for Contractor's use.
8
9 E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall
10 be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Engineer.
11 Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by deducting inspection
12 or testing charges from the Contract Price.
13
14 1.08 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS
111
15
16 A. Submit qualifications of observer to Engineer 30 days in advance of required
17 observations. Observer shall be subject to review of Engineer and Owner.
18
19 B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product
20 suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site
21 conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship,
22 start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and
23 to initiate instructions when necessary.
1
24
25 C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to
26 applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' 1
27 written instructions.
28
29 D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Engineer for review.
30
31 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
32
33 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
34
1
35
36 END OF SECTION
37
1
1
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-3 12/17/2020
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-4 12/17/2020
1 SECTION 01670
2
3 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 A. General:
10
11 1. This Section describes the submission, processing and handling of
12 requests for substitution and product options. See items as indicated on
13 Drawings and as specified. Any substitution or option shall be in accord
14 with provisions of Contract Documents, and completely coordinated with
15 work of other trades.
16
17 2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all
18 supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices
19 incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
20
21 3. See appropriate sections for specific items specified. See General
22 Conditions for additional information.
23
24 B. Procedure:
25
26 1. For products, equipment, and materials that are named on drawings or
27 in specifications for which a request for substitution is made, observe
28 procedures outlined in these specifications.
29
30 C. Costs: Cost incurred by requester in providing information, catalogs, and
31 samples - including but not limited to labor, materials, freight postage, and
32 transportation - are sole cost of "Requestor" with no cost assessed Owner or
33 Engineer.
34
35 1.02 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION - GENERAL
36
37 A. Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified.
38
39 B. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in specifications
40 by means of trade names and catalog numbers and/or manufacturer's names.
41 Where this occurs, it was not intended to exclude from consideration such types
42 of equipment and kinds of material bearing other trade names, catalog numbers
43 and/or manufacturer's names, capable of accomplishing purpose of types of
44 equipment or kinds of material specifically indicated.
45
46 C. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 and Engineer.
2
3 D. Types of equipment, kinds of material and methods of construction, if not
4 specifically indicated must be accepted in writing by Engineer and be agreed
5 upon by Owner.
6
7 E. Conditional bids will not be accepted.
8
9 1.03 SUBMISSION OF REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION
10
11 A. Within no more than 30 days after award of the Contract, the Engineer will
12 consider requests for substitutions of products, materials, systems or other
13 items. Requests must be received by Engineer within 30 calendar days after
14 the date of Contract award. All requests for substitution shall be completed as
15 specified below.
16
17 B. Substitute items must comply with color and pattern of base specified items
18 unless specifically approved otherwise.
19
20 C. Submit two (2) copies of request for substitution. Include in request:
21
22 1. Name of product located by Drawing No. or Specification No., followed
23 by a detail or line number the particular item(s) for which request for
24 substitution is initiated.
25
26 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
27 Contract Documents.
28
29 3. For Products:
30
31 a. Product identification by schedule or tag no., including
32 manufacturer's name.
33
34 b. Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model, type,
35 size, and options to be considered:
36
37 1) Product Description
38 2) Performance and test data
39 3) Reference standards
40 4) Difference in power demand
41 5) Dimensional differences for specified unit
42
43 c. Submit samples, full size if so required. Engineer reserves right
44 to impound sample until physical units are installed on project for
45 comparison purposes. All costs of furnishing and return of
46 samples shall be paid by requester. Engineer is not responsible
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-2 03/20/2020
1
2 1 3 d. Name and address of similar projects where product was used,
4 date of installation, and field performance data on installation.
5 1 6 4. For construction methods:
7
8 a. Detailed description of proposed method I 9
10 b. Drawings illustrating methods
11 1 12 5. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method
13 specified.
14 II15 6. Data relating to changes in construction schedule.
16
17 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product 1
18 or method specified.
19
20 8. Include with any request a specific statement defining changes in 1
21 contract time or amount.
22
23 D. In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item, 1
24 Supplier/Manufacturer represents:
25
26 1. He has personally investigated proposed product or method, and has 1
27 determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified, and
28 that it will perform function for which it is intended.
29 1
30 2. Will provide same or better warranty for substitute item as for product or
31 method specified.
32 1
33 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to include
34 but not be limited to the following: 1
35
36 a. Building and structure modifications as necessary;
37 1 38 b. Additional ancillary equipment to accommodate change;
39
40 c. Piping, valving, mechanical, electrical, or instrumentation 1
41 changes, and
42
43 d. All other changes required for work to be complete in all respects 1
44 to permit incorporation of substitution into project.
45
46 4. Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which 1
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-3 03/20/2020
1
1
1
for loss of or damage to samples.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 subsequently become apparent.
2
3 E. Written acceptance or rejection of items presented for alternative consideration
4 will be given within two weeks after request is received.
5
6 F In the event the acceptance of an alternate results in a change in contract price
7 or time, or is a deviation from the Contract Documents, a work change directive
8 or change order will be issued to reflect such change. In the event the
9 acceptance of an alternate does not result in a change in Contract price or time,
10 a field order shall be issued.
11
12 G. Alternates may be rejected for the following reasons:
13
14 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents or
15 building spaces.
16
17 2. If they are, in Engineer's opinion, not equal to base product specified, or
18 will not adequately perform function for which intended.
19
20 3. If request is not initiated by the Contractor in accordance with this
21 specification section.
22
23 4. If request will require will, in the opinion of the Engineer, excessive time
24 and/or engineering resources to evaluate.
25
26 1.04 SUBSTITUTION DUE TO UNAVAILABILITY
27
28 A. Unavailability of specified item due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy,
29 discontinuance of production, proven shortage, or similar occurrences are
30 reasons for substitution after Contract award.
31
32 B. Notify Engineer in writing, as soon as condition of unavailability becomes
33 apparent; include substantiating data. Submit request for substitution
34 sufficiently in advance to avoid delays.
35
36 C. Submit data as required in paragraph 1.03 above.
37
38 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
39
40 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
41
42
43 END OF SECTION
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-4 03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01700
2
3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Comply with requirements stated in General Conditions and in Specifications
10 for administrative procedures in closing out the Work.
11
12 B. Electronic Shop Drawings and O&M Manuals
13
14 1. The Contractor shall furnish final Shop Drawings and Operations and
15 Maintenance Data in electronic ".pdf' format for all equipment furnished
16 under all Specification Sections in Divisions 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16.
17
18 2. The Contractor shall organize all electronic Shop Drawings and
19 Operations and Maintenance Data by specification division and section
20 number and submit two (2) copies on compact disk media (CD-ROM) or
21 other approved electronic media.
22
23 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
24
25 A. When Contractor considers the Work, or portion thereof, to be substantially
26 complete, he shall submit to the Engineer:
27
28 1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is
29 substantially complete.
30
31 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected.
32
33 B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Engineer will inspect
34 to determine the status of completion.
35
36 C. Should the Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete:
37
38 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor, in writing, giving the
39 reasons therefore.
40
41 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work and send a second
42 written notice of substantial completion to the Engineer.
43
44 3. The Engineer will re -inspect the Work.
45
46 D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is substantially complete, he will:
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 1 Prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative Certificate of Substantial
3 Completion with a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected.
4
5 2. After consideration of any objections made by the Owner as provided in
6 General Conditions, and when the Engineer considers the Work
7 substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the Owner and the
8 Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a revised
9 tentative list of items to be completed or corrected.
10
11 1.03 FINAL INSPECTION
12
13 A. When Contractor considers all the Work to be complete, he shall submit written
14 certification that:
15
16 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
17
18 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
19
20 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
21
22 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's
23 representative and are operational.
24
25 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection.
26
27 B. The Engineer will inspect to verify the status of completion with reasonable
28 promptness after receipt of such certification.
29
30 C. Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective:
31
32 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the
33 incomplete or defective work.
34
35 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies
36 and send a second written certification to the Engineer that the Work is
37 complete.
38
39 3. The Engineer will re -inspect the Work.
40
41 D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract
42 Documents, he shall request the Contractor to make closeout submittals.
43
44 1.04 PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCE
45
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-2 03/20/2020
1 A. For the purpose of construction phasing and for the commencement of the
2 warranty period for equipment, the Owner may accept portions of process
3 systems. Partial Substantial Completion shall be allowed for a complete
4 process system only, or combination of process systems working together, and
5 the Owner shall only consider for partial Substantial Completion those systems
6 as specified herein.
7
8 B. The following general requirements must be completed prior to the Owner
9 accepting partial Substantial Completion of a system. Owner shall accept
10 stand-alone ancillary systems for consideration of partial substantial
11 acceptance.
12
13 1. An equipment manufacturer representative shall be present for all initial
14 start-up and testing as specified in Section 01625 and all other start-up
15 and testing as required in the equipment specifications in Division 11.
16
17 2. The Contractor shall provide training of Owner personnel in the operation
18 of new equipment, according to the equipment specifications outlined in
19 Division 11 and Section 01820.
20
21 3. Contractor shall provide Operating and Maintenance Data to the Owner
22 as required by Section 01730.
23
24 4. All electrical equipment including controls, conduit, wiring and safety
25 interlocks for each piece of equipment as shown on the Drawings must
26 be completed as outlined in Divisions 13 and 16.
27
28 5. All Control System equipment must be installed and operational for the
29 system that is being tested for partial substantial completion as outlined
30 in Divisions 13 and 16.
31
32 6. All inlet and discharge piping must be connected and tested for each
33 system that is being tested for partial substantial completion in
34 compliance with Division 01.
35
36 7. Certifications of Proper Installation shall be furnished, along with spare
37 parts, calibration certificates, and the results of all tests.
38
39 1.05 RE -INSPECTION FEES
40
41 A. Should the Engineer perform re -inspections, due to failure of the Work, to
42 comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor:
43
44 1. Owner will compensate the Engineer for such additional services.
45
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-3 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final
I
2
3 payment to the Contractor.
4 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ENGINEER
5
6 A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities.
7
I
8 B. Project Record Documents.
9
10 C. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel.
I
11
12 D. Warranties and Bonds.
13
I
14
15 E. Keys and Keying Schedule.
16 F. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.
I
17
18 G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens.
19
I
20
21 H. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations.
22 I. Contractor's Final Affidavit.
1 23
24 J. Lien Waivers from Subcontractors and Suppliers.
25
I26 K. Consent of Surety from the bonding company.
27
28 L. Contractor's Guarantee.
I29
30 1.07 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
31
I32 A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer.
33
I34 B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum:
35
36 1. The original Contract Sum.
37
I
38 2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
39
40 a. Previous Change Orders.
41
42 b. Unit Prices.
I43
44 c. Deductions for uncorrected Work.
45
I
46 d. Penalties and Bonuses.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-4 03/20/2020
1
1
2 e. Deductions for liquidated damages.
3
4 f. Deductions for re -inspection payments.
5
6 g. Other adjustments.
7
8 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.
9
10 4. Payments.
11
12 5. Sum remaining due.
13
14 C. Engineer will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting adjustments to the
15 Contract Sum, which were not previously made by Change Orders.
16
17 1.08 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
18
19 A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with
20 procedures and requirements stated in the General Conditions.
21
22 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
23
24 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
25
26
27 END OF SECTION
28
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-5 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-6 03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01710
2
3 CLEANING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall execute cleaning during progress of Work and at
10 completion of the Work as required by the General Conditions.
11
12 1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS
13
14
15 A. The Contractor shall conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with I
all applicable Laws and Regulations.
16
17
18 B. Disposal of waste materials shall be in accordance with the Section III, II
Paragraph 17.7 and local ordinances.
19
20 PART 2 — MATERIALS
21
22 2.01 MATERIALS
23
24 A. The Contractor shall use only those cleaning materials that do not create
25 hazards to health or property and that do not damage surfaces.
2 '276 B. The Contractor shall use only those cleaning materials and methods
28 recommended by the Manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned.
29
30 C. The Contractor shall use cleaning materials only on surfaces so recommended
31 by cleaning material Manufacturer.
32
33 D. Disposal of cleaning materials shall not cause disruptions in the operation of the
34 facility or otherwise cause the plant to violate its operating permit. The
35 Contractor shall be solely responsible for all costs attributable to the improper
36 disposal of such cleaning materials in the plant.
37
38 PART 3 — EXECUTION
39
40 3.01 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
41 1
42 A. The Contractor shall execute daily cleaning to keep the Work, the site and
43 adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, water, eroded
44 material, rubbish and windblown debris resulting from construction operations.
45
46 B. The Contractor shall provide suitable on-site containers for the daily collection
1
1
CLEANING
01710-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 of all waste materials, debris and rubbish.
2
3 C. The Contractor shall remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site
4 containers periodically and dispose of in accordance with Section 1.02.
5
6 D. The Contractor shall schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants
7 resulting from the cleaning process do not fall on wet or newly coated surfaces.
8
9 E. The Contractor shall remove from the site all surplus materials and temporary
10 structures when no further need therefore develops and as approved by the
11 Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for all spillage and
12 shall incur all associated costs including, but not limited to, costs related to
13 repair and maintenance resulting from any such damage.
14
15 3.02 FINAL CLEANING
16
17 A. The Contractor shall employ skilled workmen for final cleaning.
18
19 B. The Contractor shall remove all grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains,
20 fingerprints, labels and all other foreign materials from sight -exposed interior
21 and exterior surfaces.
22
23 C. Prior to Final Completion, the Contractor shall conduct an inspection of sight -
24 exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all Work areas, to verify that the
25 entire Work and the entire construction area of the Work are clean.
26
27
28 END OF SECTION
CLEANING
01710-2
03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01720
2
3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS II
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL I 6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
I
9 A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of:
10
11 1. Drawings I 12
13 2. Specifications
14 I 15 3. Addenda
16
17 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract I 18
19 5. Engineer's Field Orders or written instructions
20
I
21 6. Accepted Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples
22
23 7. Field Test Records 1
24
25 8. Construction Photographs, if provided
26
1
27 9. Detailed progress schedule
28
29 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
1
30
31 A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents
32 used for construction.
I
33
34 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
35
I
36 2. Provide locked cabinet of secure storage space for storage of samples.
37
38 B. File documents and samples in accordance with Construction Specifications 1
39 Institute (CSI) format.
40
41 C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not 1
42 use record documents for construction purposes.
43
44 D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the I
45 Engineer.
46
1
1
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 E. As a pre -requisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor shall exhibit
2 the updated "record documents" for review by the Engineer and Owner.
3
4 1.03 MARKING DEVICES
5
6 A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code
7 designated by the Engineer.
8
9 1.04 RECORDING
10
11 A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters.
12
13 B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.
14
15 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
16
17 C. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction:
18
19 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor
20 datum.
21
22 2. Denote all underground piping elevations and dimensions; all changes to
23 piping location; horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities
24 and appurtenances, all referenced to permanent surface improvements.
25 Actual installed pipe material, class, etc.
26
27 3. Locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the
28 construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the
29 structure.
30
31 4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
32
33 5. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
34
35 6. Details not on original Contract Documents.
36
37 7. Equipment and piping relocations.
38
39 8. Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors,
40 windows, etc.
41
42 9. Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor's records and
43 shop drawings.
44
45 D. Specifications and Addenda; legibly mark each Section to record:
46
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-2 03/20/2020
1 1 Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product
2 and item of equipment actually installed.
3
4 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
5
6 E. Shop Drawings (after final review):
7
8 1. Five (5) sets of shop drawings for each piece of process equipment, piping,
9 electrical and instrumentation system.
10
11 F. CAD Requirements for Record Drawings: The Contractor shall provide the
12 Engineer with a complete set of Record Drawings in the latest version of
13 AutoCAD format upon completion of the Work. No additional compensation will
14 be allowed for the Contractor to provide the Record Drawings. The Contractor
15 shall use the AutoCAD Drawings furnished by the Engineer for this purpose.
16 Record Drawings must be submitted in the AutoCAD format of the Contract
17 Drawings. No other CAD software or format will be accepted. It is Contractor's
18 sole responsibility to ensure that the Record Drawings conform to the following
19 CAD requirements:
20
21 1. Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer on CD-ROM. Each CD shall be
22 clearly labeled with the appropriate project number, client name, date, and
23 file names included on each CD. If files are compressed, a description of the
24 compression software must be included along with a copy of the appropriate
25 uncompressing software. All changes to Drawings must be done in
26 accordance with the appropriate scale of the Drawing revised and shall be
27 delineated by placing a "cloud" around the areas revised and adding a
28 revision triangle indicating the appropriate revision number.
29
30 2. Each Drawing must have the revision block completed to indicate the
31 revision number, date, and initials of the person revising the Drawing. The
32 description of the revision must say "Record Drawing." This procedure must
33 be followed for every Drawing even when no changes are made to the
34 Drawing.
35
36 3. All revisions to Drawings must be put on separate layers with the layer
37 names prefixed Record followed by the appropriate existing layer name. The
38 colors and line types of the appropriate existing layers shall be adhered to
39 when creating new layers.
40
41 4. The Contractor shall supply one full set of Record Drawings on reproducible
42 black line prints and five full sets of opaque copies.
43
44 1.05 SUBMITTAL
45
46 A. At contract close-out, deliver Record Documents to the Engineer for the Owner.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-3 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
3
4 1. Date
5
6 2. Project title and number
7
8 3. Contractor's name and address
9
10 4. Title and number of each Record Document
11
12 5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative
13
14
15 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
16
17 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
18
19
20 END OF SECTION
21
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-4 03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01730
2
3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's operation
10 and maintenance (O&M) of new equipment and processes furnished and or
11 installed by the Contractor.
12
13 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and
14 as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications.
15
16 2. Incorporate O&M data and information in an O&M Manual that is specific
17 and targeted for the equipment and processes supplied for this project.
18
19 3. Incorporate O&M data furnished by the Owner, if previously defined in
20 the scope of work.
21
22 B. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and all other items required to supply
23 and deliver to the Engineer, O&M Manuals for the work, mechanical equipment,
24 instrumentation equipment, electrical equipment, process control equipment,
25 and software on a facility wide, system by system, and individual equipment
26 basis as pertinent to the project.
27
28 C. Five (5) draft O&M Manuals for each piece of equipment shall be submitted to
29 the Engineer upon delivery of the equipment. The draft O&M Manuals shall
30 include the manufacturer's test results and specification and may be used as a
31 training aid.
32
33 D. Furnish the Owner five (5) complete hardcopy sets of O&M data and two (2)
34 complete set of operation and maintenance data in electronic "pdf' format on a
35 CD as specified herein for the project.
36
37 1. Any modifications required after final O&M submission shall be made to
38 the manuals by issuance of all new manuals with the revised or additional
39 information included and clearly identified.
40
41 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
42
43 A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel:
44
45 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described
46 products.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section.
3
4 3. Skilled and technical writer to the extent required to communicate
5 essential data.
6
7 4. Skilled as draftspersons competent to prepare required Drawings.
8
9 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
10
11 A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
12
13 B. Format:
14
15 1. Size: 8-1/2 inches x 11 -inches.
16
17 2. Paper: 20 pound minimum white, for typed pages.
18
19 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten.
20
21 4. Drawings:
22
23 a. Provide reinforced punched binder tabs, bind in with text.
24 b. Reduce larger Drawings to 11 -inches x 17 -inches and fold to size
25 of text pages and printed only on one side.
26
27 5. Provide tabbed fly -leaf for each separate product, or each piece of
28 operating equipment.
29
30 a. Provide typed description of the product, and of each major
31 component part of equipment.
32 b. Provide indexed tabs.
33
34 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING
35 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List:
36
37 a. Title of Project
38 b. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
39 c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
40
41 C. Binders:
42
43 1. Commercial quality three post- binders with durable and cleanable plastic
44 covers.
45
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-2 03/20/2020
1 2. Maximum post width: 2 -inches. Each binder filled to not more than 75%
2 capacity.
3
4 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent
5 groupings.
6
7 D. Refer to Specification Section 01300 for additional submittal requirements.
8
9 1.04 GENERAL CONTENT OF MANUAL
10
11 A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic
12 order. If more than one volume is required, the table of contents of each volume
13 shall be included with all volumes.
14
15 B. The contact information, address, and phone number for the Contractor and the
16 responsible principal shall be included.
17
18 C. A list of each product included, indexed to content of the volume.
19
20 D. A list, with each product, name, address, and telephone number of:
21
22 a. Manufacturer
23 b. Subcontractor or installer.
24 c. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
25 d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
26
27 E. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth
28 in Contract Documents.
29
30 F Product Data:
31
32 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
33
34 2. Annotate each sheet to:
35
36 a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed.
37 b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
38 c. Delete references to inapplicable information.
39
40 G. Drawings:
41
42 1. Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
43
44 a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
45 b. Control and flow diagrams.
46 c. Owner Tag Numbers.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-3 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
23
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
d. Exploded views with part numbers listed and identified.
2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to
assure correct illustration of completed installation.
H. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular
installation:
1. Organized in consistent format under separate headings for different
procedures.
2. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure.
3. Provide an overview of how the complete system should operate.
Provide a copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel with the following
information:
a.
b.
Proper procedures in event of failure.
Circumstances and events that may affect validity of warranties or
bonds.
1.05 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR ARCHITECTURAL PRODUCTS, MOISTURE -
PROTECTED, WEATHER -EXPOSED, AND APPLIED MATERIALS, AND FINISHES
A. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
1. Catalog number, size, and composition.
2. Applicable Standards
3. Chemical Composition
4. Details of Installation or Application
5. Color and texture designations.
6. Information required for re -ordering special -manufactured products.
7. Storage instructions and shelf life information.
Instructions for care and maintenance.
1. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of
methods.
2. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods
product.
cleaning agents and
that are detrimental to
3. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-4
03/20/2020
1
2 4. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
3
4 1.06 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
5
6 A. Content, for each electrical, mechanical, instrumentation, and communication
7 system, as appropriate:
8
9 1. A table identifying each piece of equipment, each associated control or
10 instrument, the location of the control or instrument, and the function of
11 the control or instrument.
12
13 2. A description of the system and its component parts.
14
15 3. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions for the
16 system, the sub -system, and the component parts.
17
18 4. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests.
19
20 5. Complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replaceable parts.
21
22 6. Assembly drawings.
23
24 7. The manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and
25 diagrams, and exploded views required for operations and maintenance.
26
27 8. Manufacturer's model and serial number.
28
29 9. List of all special tools required to service equipment and/or systems
30 including where the tools are stored.
31
32 10. Circuit directories of panel boards.
33
34 a. Electrical service.
35 b. Controls.
36 c. Communications.
37
38 11. As -installed color -coded wiring diagrams and control diagrams.
39
40 12. Instrument loop diagrams showing the path that a control or
41 instrumentation signal takes from its origin to the action it takes.
42
43 13. An electrical schematic for each item.
44
45 14. A chart listing the controls/instruments in a loop identifying the
46 equipment's abbreviated symbol, a description of the symbol, design
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-5 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 criteria, process flow, quantity supplied, and manufacturer's model and
2 serial number.
3
4 15. Operating procedures.
5
6 a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
7 b. Sequences required.
8 c. Special operating instructions.
9 d. Start-up, break-in, routine, and normal operating instructions.
10 e. Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency
11 instructions.
12 f. Special operating instructions.
13 g. Control settings and ranges.
14
15 16. Maintenance procedures.
16
17 a. Routine maintenance.
18 b. Guide to "trouble -shooting."
19 c. Disassembly, repair, and re -assembly.
20 d. Alignment, adjustment, tolerances, and checking.
21 e. Type and frequency of preventive maintenance activities required
22 for each piece of equipment.
23 f. List of lubricants required.
24 g. Period between lubrications.
25 h. Servicing and lubrication schedule.
26
27 17. The manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
28
29 18. Abnormal and emergency operations.
30
31 a. Potential overloads.
32 b. Procedures for equipment breakdown.
33 c. Action to be taken in a power outage.
34 d. Identity of alarms by equipment location and action to correct.
35 e. Equipment safety features, requirements, and potential hazards.
36
37 19. Programming manuals for programmable devices including list of
38 standard programming.
39
40 20. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of the Specifications.
41
42 21. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts, manufacturer's
43 current prices, recommended quantities to be maintained in storage, and
44 predicted life of parts subject to wear.
45
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-6 03/20/2020
1 22. The final manual shall include the startup report for each piece of
2 equipment and documentation that the Owner's designated personnel
3 attended a formal training session as applicable for each piece of
4 equipment.
5
6 23. Charts of equipment, instrument, and valve tag numbers with location,
7 function, sheet number, model number, serial number, and actuator type
8 identified.
9
10 1.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
11
12 A. Refer to Specification 01820 for Training and Instruction of Owner's personnel.
13
14 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
15
16 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
17
18
19 END OF SECTION
20
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-7 03/20/2020
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-8 03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01740
2
3 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Compile warranties and bonds, as specified in the General Conditions.
10
11 B. Co -execute submittals when so specified.
12
13 C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
14
15 D. Submit to the Engineer for review and transmittal to Owner.
16
17 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
18
19 A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts, executed
20 by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors.
21
22 B. Number of original signed copies required. Two each.
23
24 C. Table of Contents. Neatly typed in orderly sequence. Provide complete
25 information for each item.
26
27 1. Product or work item.
28
29 2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number.
30
31 3. Scope.
32
33 4. Date of beginning warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
34
35 5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract.
36
37 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
38
39 a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
40
41 b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
42
43 7 Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone
44 number.
45
46
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1.03 WARRANTY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
2
3 A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment
4 manufacturer. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with the
5 Contractor's for one (1) year, unless otherwise specified, commencing at the
6 time of substantial completion and/or final acceptance by the Owner, whichever
7 is later.
8
9 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining certificates for equipment
10 warranty for all major equipment that has a 1 HP motor or that has a list price of
11 more than $1,000. The Engineer reserves the right to request warranties for
12 equipment not classified as major. The Contractor shall still warrant equipment
13 not considered to be "major" in the Contractor's one-year warranty period even
14 though certificates of warranty may not be required.
15
16 C. In the event that the equipment manufacturer or supplier is unwilling to provide
17 a one-year warranty commencing at the time of Owner acceptance, the
18 Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty
19 commencing at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. The
20 manufacturer's warranty shall not relieve the Contractor of the one-year
21 warranty starting at the time of Owner acceptance of the equipment.
22
23 D. The Contractor shall replace and install each piece of equipment, device, or
24 component that fails within the warranty period term specified above with
25 reasonable promptness and without increase in the Contract Price. If the
26 Contractor fails to provide timely repairs as specified, the Owner shall issue a
27 claim against the Contractor's Bond. The Contractor may be allowed to repair
28 the defective equipment in some cases as required by the Owner.
29
30
31 1.04 WARRANTY START DATE
32
33 A. No warranty shall start until the Engineer has issued a "Notice of Substantial
34 Completion".
35
36 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
37
38 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
39
40
41 END OF SECTION
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740-2 03/20/2020
1 SECTION 01820
2
3 TRAINING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 The Contractor shall be responsible for performing and/or coordinating the following
10 work relating to training the Owners designated personnel for this project:
11
12 A. Instruct and train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of
13 the equipment and systems supplied and/or installed under this Contract.
14
15 B. Incorporate operation and maintenance data and training services furnished by
16 the suppliers into the training program such as shop drawings, equipment
17 manuals, and start-up, engineering, and training assistance.
18
19 C. Ensure that system suppliers provide qualified training instructors experienced
20 in the proper operation and maintenance of all applicable equipment and
21 systems.
22
23 D. Prepare instructors and training materials required for complete factory, field,
24 classroom, and hands-on training.
25
26 E. Furnish training videos and training manuals during the training program. The
27 training manual shall be a separate document from the O&M Manual.
28
29 F Include in the Contract Price the cost for training equipment; preparing training
30 manuals in addition to O&M manuals; conducting and videotaping two (2)
31 classroom instructional sessions (AM and PM) for each piece of equipment and
32 treatment process; performing field, factory, and hands-on training; and
33 coordinating and incorporating training service provided by suppliers, and all
34 other activities required to provide a comprehensive training program of
35 sufficient length, as determined by the Owner.
36
37 G. Notify the City two (2) weeks prior to scheduling the training sessions.
38
39
40 1.02 SUBMITTALS
41
42 A. TRAINING PLAN
43
44 In conjunction with submittal of draft O&M Manuals, and at least 30 days before
45 equipment or systems startup, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
46 proposed training manual and detailed training plan with specific information as
TRAINING
01820-1 03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 identified in PART 2 of this specification.
2
3 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
4
5 A. Preparation of training materials and instructions to be provided shall be
6 performed by personnel:
7
8 1. Trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment
9 and systems installed under this Contract.
10
11 2. Familiar with the training requirements of the Owner.
12
13 B. The Contractor shall furnish the resumes and references for each instructor to
14 be used in the training program.
15
16 C. The Engineer and Owner may review the resumes. Based on the review of the
17 resumes and contacts with references, the Engineer shall accept, request
18 additional information, or reject proposed instructors for the training program. If
19 a proposed instructor is rejected, the Contractor shall submit the resume and
20 references of another candidate within a reasonable time.
21
22 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
23
24 2.01 TRAINING PLAN
25
26 A. The Contractor shall submit for review by the Owner and Engineer a detailed
27 training plan specific to the project or equipment with specific information as
28 follows:
29
30 1. Title and objectives.
31 2. Training schedule.
32 3. Prerequisite training and experience of attendees.
33 4. Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, engineers,
34 operators, maintenance staff).
35 5. Course description and outline of course content.
36 6. Duration.
37 7. Location (e.g., training center or site).
38 8. Format (e.g., lecture, self -study, demonstration, hands-on).
39 9. Instruction materials and equipment requirements.
40 10. Training manual.
41
42 B. The training program shall be prepared in the manufacturer's facility and
43 completed before start-up of the Owner's system and shall use equipment
44 similar to the Owner's equipment.
45
46 C. The training program shall be conducted in the field in accordance with the
TRAINING
01820-2
03/20/2020
1 approved schedule.
2
3 D. In conjunction with start-up of the equipment or system, the Contractor shall
4 provide a competent and experienced person thoroughly familiar with the Work
5 for two (2) 8 -hour periods to instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the
6 operation, maintenance, and control of the equipment or systems.
7
8 E. The Contractor shall coordinate and submit a training schedule to the Engineer
9 30 days before the first training event.
10
11 2.02 VIDEOTAPED TRAINING MATERIAL
12
13 A. The Contractor shall produce or provide video training material subject to review
14 of the Owner.
15
16 B. Provide four copies of each videotape in DVD format in plastic case with title,
17 the Owner's name, and date on a label in a clear plastic sleeve.
18
19 C. Bear all costs associated with production and provision of the DVDs.
20
21 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
22
23
24 END OF SECTION
25
TRAINING
01820-3
03/20/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IVB
NORTHEAST WRF GRIT REMOVAL, SALNES FILTER AND
EQUALIZATION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(PROJECT No. 19 -0029 -UT)
PREPARED FOR:
BRIGHT Ai BEAU t I UL f BAY TO BEACH
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
100 SOUTH MYRTLE AVENUE
CLEARWATER, FL 33756
PREPARED BY:
1
ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, IAT
1
1
1
KING ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC.
4921 MEMORIAL HIGHWAY
MEMORIAL CENTER, SUITE 300
TAMPA, FL 33634
Bid Documents
1 January 2021
1
1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK
1
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 02 SITEWORK
02050 DEMOLITION
02062 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02063 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE
02064 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND
EQUIPMENT
02080 ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02083 LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02085 OTHER HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL
02100 SITE PREPARATION
02125 SILT BARRIERS
02140 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02220 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02221 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02276 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
02485 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02525 CONCRETE CURB
02575 PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND RESTORATION
02720 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02730 PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03250 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINTS ACCESSORIES
03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03350 CONCRETE FINISHES
03600 GROUT
03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03750 FLOW CHANNEL COATING SYSTEM
03800 LEAKAGE TESTING OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES
DIVISION 05 METALS
05500 MISCELLANEOUS METAL
DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS
06600 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 09 FINISHES
09865 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
09900 PAINTING
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
11203 WATER CONTROL GATES
11306 SUMP PUMP
11310 END SUCTION PUMPS
11317 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS
11320 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS
11321 STACKED TRAY GRIT CONCENTRATOR
11323 GRIT SEPARATION EQUIPMENT
- iv -
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11324 MACERATOR
11335 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC TANK
11350 CONTINUOUS LOOP MOVING BELT FILTER
11560 COMPRESSED GAS MIXING SYSTEM
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13210 BOLTED STEEL WATER STORAGE TANK
13300 FRP COVER SYSTEM
13525 WET TAP SYSTEM
13567 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING, TREATMENT AND PIPING SYSTEM
13600 INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS
13615 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13630 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
13640 CONTROL STRATEGY
13650 FIBER OPTIC CABLE
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15080 SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15094 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15100 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15480 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
-v-
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16050 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE
16110 RACEWAYS
16120 WIRES AND CABLES
16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES & FITTINGS
16142 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
16143 WIRING DEVICES
16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES
16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16452 GROUNDING
16460 TRANSFORMERS
16470 PANELBOARDS
16480 MOTORS
16481 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
16482 MOTOR STARTERS
16620 SURGE SUPPRESSION
16670 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
16775 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
1
1 1 SECTION 02050
2
I
3
4 DEMOLITION
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
I6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of or salvage existing structures,
10 piping, conduits, electrical equipment, mechanical equipment, and
11 appurtenances or portions thereof, as shown on the Drawings and specified
I
12
13 herein or required to complete the project.
14 B. All materials designated for disposal shall, when released by the Engineer,
I
15 become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site and
16 lawfully disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with Section III
17 Paragraph 17.7, this Section 02050, and all laws.
I18
19 C. All materials designated to be salvaged shall be carefully removed and stored
20 in a designated location on site.
I21
22 D. The following surveys and reports were performed for this project and are
23 attached in the Appendix to these specifications.
t24
25 1 Pre -Demolition NESHAP Asbestos Survey, Lead Based Paint and
26 Hazardous Materials Survey Report, prepared by Terracon
I27 Consultants, Inc., January 19, 2017.
28
I29 2 Report of Geotechnical Investigation Proposed Equalization Tank
30 Northeast WWTP prepared by Driggers Engineering Services, dated
31 March 23, 2017.
32
I
33 E. The report listed in Paragraph 1.01D indicates that, at a minimum, some of the
34 structures to be demolished as part of this project are composed of asbestos
I35 containing materials and are regulated. As such, the site is considered a
36 Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials Site (RACM). RACM sites require
37 that the asbestos material be abated prior to all other work on the project.
I38 Requirements regarding asbestos abatement are provided in Section 02080
39 Asbesos Pre -Demolition Abatement.
40
I
41
42 F. The report listed in Paragraph 1.01D indicates that, at a minimum, some of the
coatings on equipment and structures that are to be demolished as part of this
43 project containing lead materials and are regulated. Requirements regarding
I44 lead-based paint abatement are provided in Section 02083 Lead -Based Paint
45 Abatement.
1
1
DEMOLITION
02050-1
03/22/2019
1 G. The report listed in Paragraph 1.01D indicates that, at a minimum, some of the
2 equipment to be demolished and removed as part of this project contain
3 hazardous materials that are regulated. Requirements regarding the removal
4 and disposal of this equipment is provided in Section 02062.
5 H. It is not known whether the existing structures to be demolished are supported
6 on foundation piles. The foundation piles, if found to be existing, are to remain
7 and no additional payment will be made for demolishing the structures
8 supported by or connected to these piles. The foundation piles, if found, are
9 to be located and surveyed.
10
11 I. Existing conditions are as shown on the drawings and described in Section
12 01014 based on best available information. All bidders shall visit the site and
13 become familiar with existing conditions not shown on the drawings or
14 described in Section 01014.
15
16 1.02 SUBMITTALS
17
18 A. The Contractor shall submit for review, in accordance with Section 01300, a
19 proposed Demolition Plan describing the proposed methods, equipment and
20 operational sequence for demolition. Include coordination for shut-off,
21 temporary services, continuation of service and other applicable items to
22 ensure no interruption of operations except as herein before specified.
23
24 B. The Demolition Plan shall be fully coordinated as described in Sections 01040
25 and with the Construction Phasing Plan restrictions specified in Section 01016.
26
27 1. The Contractor shall identify the proposed disposal site(s) for all
28 asbestos containing materials and other regulated materials in the
29 Demolition Plan submittal.
30
31 2. The Contractor shall identify the proposed disposal site(s) for all for
32 treated and untreated wood materials in the Demolition Plan submittal.
33
34 3. Submit shipping receipts or bills of lading for all containers that are
35 hauled away and have Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM) or other
36 regulated materials.
37
38 4. Contractor's statement of proposed removal and recycling of steel
39 demolition materials. Statement to include name of proposed recycling
40 subcontractor and financial benefits.
41
42 5. The sequence of work shall be detailed in Demolition Plan and
43 submitted as a shop drawing in accordance with Sections 01016,
44 01300, and 01310.
DEMOLITION
02050-2
03/22/2019
2 6. The Demolition Plan should address the Contractor's response in the
I3 event the tank fails before the liquids have been removed.
4 C. The Contractor shall submit copies of the asbestos surveys listed in Paragraph
5 1.01D to Pinellas County Solid Waste Management and Pinellas County Air
6 Quality to obtain authorizations and permits and shall perform the Work in
7 accordance with said authorizations and permits.
8
9 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
10
I
11
12 A. The Contractor shall execute the demolition and removal work to prevent
damage or injury to structures, occupants thereof and adjacent features which
13 might result from falling debris or other causes, and so as not to interfere with
14 the use, and free and safe passage to and from adjacent structures.
15
16 B. Closing or obstructing of roadways adjacent to the work by the placement or
I
17 storage of materials will not be permitted. All operations shall be conducted
18 with a minimum interference to traffic on these ways.
19
20 C. The Contractor shall repair damage done to facilities to remain, or any
21 property belonging to the Owner.
22
23 D. The Contractor shall carry out his operations so as to avoid interference with
24 operations and work in the existing facilities.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31 1.04 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
32
33 A. Demolition Work shall be accomplished in strict accordance with 29 CFR
34 1926 -Subpart T and all other applicable local, state, and federal requirements.
35
36 B. Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. In
37 addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, Contractor's safety
38 requirements shall conform to all applicable local, state, and federal
39 requirements.
40
41 C. Furnish timely notification of this demolition/alteration project to applicable
42 federal, state, regional, and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
E. At least seven (7) calendar days prior to commencement of a demolition or
removal, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of his proposed
removal schedule. No removals shall be started until the schedule is
acceptable to the Owner.
43 Subpart M.
44
DEMOLITION
02050-3
03/22/2019
1 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 1.06 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
12
13 A. Use of explosives for demolition is prohibited.
14
15 1.07 DUST CONTROL
16
17 A. The Contractor shall use temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to
18 limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air to the lowest
19 practical level. Existing electrical and mechanical equipment to remain shall
20 be protected from damage, dust, and debris.
21
22 1.08 REFERENCES
23
24 A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this Section:
25
26 1. Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Guideline
27 K, Containers for Recovered Non-flammable Fluorocarbon
28 Refrigerants.
29 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A10.6, Safety
30 Requirements for Demolition Operations.
31 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Code of
32 Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 29 Part 1926—Occupational Safety
33 and Health Regulations for Construction.
34 4. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), U.S. Code of Federal
35 Regulations (CFR), Title 40:
36 a. Part 61—National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air
37 Pollutants.
38 b. Part 82—Protection of Stratospheric Ozone.
39 c. Part 273—Standards for Universal Waste Management.
40
41 1.09 DEFINITIONS
42
43 A. ACM: Asbestos -containing material.
44
A. The Work of this Specification shall not commence until Contractor's
Demolition Plan has been reviewed by Engineer.
Include the Work of this Specification in the progress schedule, as specified in
Section 01310, Construction Schedules.
C. Work areas are shown on the Contract Drawings.
DEMOLITION
02050-4
03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 B. Demolition: Dismantling, razing, destroying, or wrecking of any fixed building
2 or structure or any part thereof.
3
4 C. Modify: Provide all necessary material and labor to modify an existing item to
5 the condition indicated or specified.
6
7 D. Relocate: Remove, protect, clean and reinstall equipment, including electrical,
8 instrumentation, and all ancillary components required to make the equipment
9 fully functional, to the new location identified on the Drawings.
10
11 E. Renovation/Alteration: Modifying/changing an existing building by changing
12 systems, layout, or appurtenances.
13
14 F. Salvage/Salvageable: Remove and deliver, to the specified location(s), the
15 equipment, building materials, or other items so identified to be saved from
16 destruction, damage, or waste; such property to remain that of Owner. Unless
17 otherwise specified, title to items identified for demolition shall revert to
18 Contractor.
19
20 G. Steel Building: Steel building envelope consisting of rigid frame primary steel,
21 steel girls, purlins, corrugated steel panels, and steel columns.
22
23 H. Recycle: Remove, protect, and handle demolished items for recycling by a
24 third party entity, as approved by Owner.
25
26 I. Universal Waste Lamp: In accordance with 40 CFR 273, the bulb or tube
27 portion of an electric lighting device, examples of which include, but are not
28 limited to, fluorescent, high-intensity discharge, neon, mercury vapor, high
29 pressure sodium, and metal halide lamps.
30
31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
32
33 PART 3 - EXECUTION
34
35 3.01 GENERAL
36
37 A. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall check all underground and
38 exposed existing utility and process piping and all equipment in any way
39 associated or in the proximity to the items to be removed and shall verify that
40 the piping is inactive (abandoned) and that electric power to equipment,
41 lighting, controls, etc., has been permanently disconnected. Active services
42 shall be brought to the attention of the Owner for proper action.
43
44 B. The Contractor shall collect and analyze samples of the digester cover and the
45 digester liquid contents in accordance with Sections 01014 and 01016.
DEMOLITION
02050-5
03/22/2019
1
2 C. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of the foliage growing in the tank
3 and on the digester tank cover.
4
5 D. Asbestos must be surveyed and abated by an Abatement Contractor that is
6 licensed through the Florida Department of Business and Professional
7 Regulation. The Contractor shall obtain the services of a licensed Abatement
8 Contractor for all asbestos testing and abatement for the project as required.
9
10 3.06 UNAUTHORIZED REMOVAL
11
12 A. Any equipment, piping, and appurtenances removed without proper
13 authorization, shall be replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no cost to
14 the Owner.
15
16 3.07 SALVAGED ITEMS
17
18 A. Items to be salvaged shall be tagged and shall remain the property of the
19 Owner. The Contractor shall carefully move salvaged equipment to an Owner
20 designated location.
21
22 3.08 DEMOLITION
23
24 A. All materials and equipment shown on the Drawings to be removed or
25 demolished shall become the property of the Contractor, with the exception of
26 items tagged by the Owner to be salvaged. Prior to removal of any existing
27 equipment or piping from the site of work, the Contractor shall ascertain from
28 the Engineer whether or not the particular item or items are to be salvaged.
29 The Contractor shall dispose of all demolition materials, equipment, debris and
30 all other items off the project site and in conformance with all existing
31 applicable laws and regulations.
32
33 3.09 STRUCTURAL REMOVALS
34
35 A. The Contractor shall remove structures to the lines and grades shown, unless
36 otherwise indicated by the Engineer.
37
38 B. All wood, concrete, brick, tile, concrete block, roofing materials, reinforcement,
39 structural or miscellaneous metals, plaster, wire mesh and other items
40 contained in or upon the structure shall be removed and taken from the project
41 site. These items shall not be used in backfill.
42
43 3.10 MECHANICAL REMOVALS
44
DEMOLITION
02050-6
03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 A. Mechanical removals shall consist of dismantling and removing of existing
2 piping, equipment and other appurtenances as shown or required for the
3 completion of the work. It shall include cutting, capping and plugging as
4 required.
5
6 B. Wherever piping is to be removed, adjacent pipe headers that are to remain in
7 service shall be blanked off or plugged and then anchored in an acceptable
8 manner.
9
10 3.11 ELECTRICAL REMOVALS
11
12 A. Electrical removals shall consist of the removal of conduits and wires, and
13 miscellaneous electrical equipment all as shown, specified or required to
14 perform the work.
15
16 3.12 REPAIR WORK
17
18 A. Certain areas of existing structures, piping, conduits, and the like will be
19 affected by work necessary to complete modifications under this Contract. The
20 Contractor shall be responsible to rehabilitate those areas affected by its
21 construction activities.
22
23 B. All debris, materials, piping, and miscellaneous waste products from the work
24 described in this section shall be removed from the project as soon as
25 possible. They shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable federal,
26 state, and local regulations. The Contractor is responsible for determining
27 these regulations and shall bear all costs or retain any profit associated with
28 disposal of these items.
29
30 3.13 CLEANUP
31
32 A. The Contractor shall remove from the project site all debris resulting from the
33 demolition and removal operations as it accumulates. Upon completion of the
34 demolition work, all materials, equipment, waste and debris of every sort shall
35 be removed and the premises shall be left clean, neat and orderly.
36
37
38 END OF SECTION
39
DEMOLITION
02050-7
03/22/2019
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DEMOLITION
02050-8
03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02062
2
3 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, tools, equipment, materials, and incidentals required to
10 remove all existing structures, equipment, pipe, fittings, valves, electrical,
11 instrumentation and controls, and all appurtenances as noted on the Contract
12 Drawings, as reasonably inferred and as required in order to perform the work
13 as described in the Contract Documents.
14
15 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
16
17 PART 3 — EXECUTION
18
19 3.01 GENERAL
20
21 A. The Contractor shall not proceed with the removal of any equipment without
22 specific approval from the Owner. Any facilities removed without proper
23 authorization shall be replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner at the
24 Contractor's expense.
25
26 B. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and
27 supports not required to be reused and not designated as being turned over to
28 the Owner, shall become the property of the Contractor immediately upon
29 removal from their present locations. The Contractor shall remove such
30 material from the plant site at his own expense and it shall not be reused.
31
32 C. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and
33 supports designated as being turned over to the Owner, shall be identified,
34 cleaned, protected, crated or boxed and stored at the plant site where directed.
35
36 D. Pieces of equipment weighing 150 lbs or more shall be provided with suitable
37 skids before storing.
38
39 E. Wherever piping is removed for disposition, adjacent pipe, and headers that are
40 to remain in service shall be blanked off or plugged and supported and/or
41 properly anchored against thrust Toads.
42
43 F The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against damaging the
44 material and equipment to be stored and reused. The Contractor shall repair
45 any damage resulting from his operations, as directed by and to the satisfaction
46 of the Engineer. Itemized lists of materials removed and stored shall be given
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02062-1 03/22/2019
1
1 to the Resident Project Representative daily. A final typed itemized list shall be 1
2 furnished to the Engineer in 6 copies at the completion of construction. The list
3 shall include items, method of packaging, and place of storage. I 4
5 3.02 EQUIPMENT TO BE RETAINED
6
I
7 A. All equipment removed shall remain the property of the Owner unless
8 designated otherwise by the Owner.
9
I
10 B. If the Owner elects not to retain ownership of a certain item, the item shall
11 become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the plant site
12 at the Contractor's expense. I 13
14 C. If the Owner requests that the Contractor utilize a specific hauling service for
15 the removal of existing equipment or facilities, the Contractor shall utilize that
I
16 service at no additional cost to the Owner.
17
18
I
19 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT I
02062-2 03/22/2019
I
1 SECTION 02063
2
3 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish all the materials, tools, labor, supervision and
10 appliances for and properly install, connect, adjust, test and place in
11 continuous satisfactory service all high density polyethylene pipe and fittings at
12 the locations specified or required for the proper completion of all work.
13
14 B. Wherever Construction activities disturb existing conditions or work already
15 completed, Contractor shall restore the same to its original condition in every
16 detail. All such replacement and repair shall meet with the approval of the
17 Engineer and the Owner.
18
19 C. High density polyethylene pipe and fittings are not necessarily completely
20 indicated or detailed on the Construction Drawings. The Drawings are
21 schematic only and indicate pipe and fittings in a general way. It is the
22 Contractor's responsibility to furnish all materials, pipe and fittings required.
23
24 D. It is the intent of these Contract Documents to require an installation, complete
25 in every detail, whether or not indicated on the Construction Drawings, or
26 specified herein. Consequently, the Contractor shall be responsible for all
27 details, devices, accessories, and special construction necessary to properly
28 furnish, install, adjust, test, place into continuous satisfactory service, and
29 complete the Work in an acceptable manner.
30
31 E. Full responsibility for designing, fabricating, and installing the high density
32 polyethylene pipe and fittings, for selecting materials of construction, and for
33 demonstrating compliance with specified performance requirements shall rest
34 with the Contractor, and through the Contractor, the Manufacturer and the
35 Material Supplier. The Engineer's approval of 1) the manufacture and
36 installation of the high density polyethylene and fittings 2) the use of materials
37 included in this Specification, and 3) alternative materials offered by the
38 Contractor, shall not relieve the Contractor and Supplier of full responsibility for
39 meeting all performance requirements and guarantees.
40
41 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
42
43 A. This Section includes materials and methods of installation of HDPE. Pipe is
44 intended for use only as suction pipe for the Internal Recycle pump stations.
45
46 B. Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings and as
47 specified herein.
48
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-1 03/22/2019
1
1 C. All pipe, fittings, valves, solvents and flue used for potable water piping shall 1
2 be NSF -61 certified for continuous contact with potable water.
3
4 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
5
6 A. All Work specified herein shall be in accordance with the standards of the
7 below listed organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where
8 reference is made to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the
9 version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
10
11 B. American Water Works Association (AWWA).
12
13 1. C651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.
14
15 2. C906 - Standard for Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 in.
16 through 63 in., for Water Distribution and Transmission.
17
18 C. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
19
20 1. D618 — Practice for Conditioning Plastics and Electrical Insulating
21 Materials for Testing.
22
23 2. D638 — Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
24
1
25 3. D1248-84 - Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials.
26
27 4. D2122 — Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic
28 Pipe and Fittings.
29
30 5. D2837 — Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for
31 Thermoplastic Pipe Materials.
32
33 6. D3035 — Polyethylene Plastics Pipe Based on Controlled Outside
1
34 Diameter.
35
36 7 D3350-84 - Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Material.
1
37
38 8. F714-85 - Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR -PR) Based on Outside
39 Diameter. 1
40
41 D. NSF International, The Public Health and Safety Company
42
43 1. No. 14 — Plastic Piping Components and Related Materials.
44
45 2. No. 60 - Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects.
46
47 3. No. 61 -Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
48
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 E. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI)
2
3 1. TR -3 — Policies and Procedures for Developing Recommended
4 Hydrostatic Design Stresses for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials.
5
6 1.04 SUBMITTALS
7
8 A. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to the Engineer of pipe, fittings
9 and all appurtenances in accordance with these Contract Documents and
10 Sections 01300 and 01340. The requirements of AWWA C906 and the
11 following supplemental requirements are applicable:
12
13 1. Certified dimensional drawings of all of pipe, joints, and fittings.
14
15 2. Joint and pipe/fitting wall construction details, which indicate the type
16 and thickness of the wall; manufacturing tolerances; performance
17 history; and all other pertinent information required for the manufacture
18 of the product.
19
20 3. Details of fittings and specials such as elbows, wyes, tees, outlets,
21 connections, test bulkheads, bosses and nozzles or other specials
22 where shown on the Construction Drawings, which indicate amount and
23 position of reinforcement. All fittings and specials shall be properly
24 reinforced to withstand the internal pressure both circumferential and
25 longitudinal, and the external loading conditions as indicated in the
26 Contract Documents. Shop Drawings shall clearly detail special
27 castings indicating all pertinent dimensions.
28
29 4. Detail Drawings of restrained and flexible joints, including test reports to
30 confirm thrust restraint capacities and restraining mechanism
31 application.
32
33 5. Pipeline laying schedule tabulated and referenced to construction line
34 and grade controls shown on plans, with station, offset and elevations.
35 References shall be provided for pipe fittings, valves, service
36 connections and other important features of the pipeline. In addition,
37 the laying schedule shall include: the pipe station and invert elevation at
38 all changes in grade or horizontal alignment; all elements of curves and
39 bends, both in horizontal and vertical alignment; and the limits of each
40 reach of restrained joints.
41
42 6. Drawings of special details such as reinforcement, testing stations, joint
43 bonding, etc., shall be at a scale that clearly depicts the item being
44 detailed and, in general, shall not be at a scale less than 1/8 -inch equal
45 to 1 -foot.
46
47 7 Detail drawings of all Drilling Pits, service connections, valves and valve
48 boxes.
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-3 03/22/2019
1
1 1
2 8. Detailed and certified calculations of required joint restraint length
3 computed as indicated in these Contract Documents. In addition, the I 4 Contractor shall submit calculations, drawings, and/or other
5 documentation to prove to the Engineer's satisfaction that the pipe and
6 unrestrained joints downstream of in-line valves can withstand the I 7 compressive forces generated by the field test pressure without
8 affecting the pipeline system. Failure to provide adequate proof shall
9 result in the Contractor being required to provide restrained joints
10downstream of in-line valves designed to withstand the full field test
11 pressure.
12 I 13 9. The Supplier of the pipe shall submit, through the Contractor, an
14 affidavit that the pipe, fittings and other products or materials furnished
15 for this Project comply with all applicable provisions of these
I
16 Specifications.
17
18
19 10. A complete field pressure testing, flushing, and disinfection plan for
I
review and approval prior to the performance of any of these activities.
20 Pressure testing shall be performed in compliance with the
21 manufacturers recommended procedures.
1
22
23 B. Certification and test reports for the materials, manufacturing, and testing of
24
25 the types of pipe supplied shall be performed and furnished by the pipe
I
manufacturer in accordance with the latest standards of the industry as
26 described in AWWA C906.
27 I
28 C. Provide a statement in writing from the HDPE pipe manufacturer that it is listed
29 with the Plastic Pipe Institute as a qualified extruder for the polyethylene resin
30 being used to manufacture the pipe for this project.
1
31
32 D. The Contractor shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and
33 other products or materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications,
I
34 as specified in AWWA C906; respectively, and certified copies of the following
35 supplemental data for all pipe, fittings, and specials:
36
37 1. The Supplier shall provide, through the Contractor, a statement that the
38 inspection and all specified tests have been made and all results
39 thereof comply with the requirements of these Specifications.
II
40
41 E. All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests and in the
42 preparation of any design reports shall be borne by the Contractor. I
43
44 F. Approval of the Shop Drawings and the design report and acceptance of the
45 certifications by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the I
46 responsibility to ensure that the pipe is designed and installed in strict
47 accordance with the Contract Documents.
48
I
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2
3 A. The Contractor shall furnish materials under this Section that are new, unused
4 and as specified, or if not particularized herein, which are the best of their
5 respective kind, free of defects and imperfections, and suitable for the service
6 intended, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
7
8 B. The Contractor shall provide workmanship that is first class in every respect,
9 and have the installation performed by workmen thoroughly experienced in
10 such work. A neat and workmanlike appearance in the finished Work shall be
11 required.
12
13 C. The Contractor shall perform Work in accordance with all applicable laws and
14 regulations and in accordance with all applicable permits and easements.
15
16 D. The HDPE pipe furnished under this Specification shall comply with AWWA
17 C906 except as it may be modified herein.
18
19 E. All test equipment used in activities affecting quality control shall be calibrated
20 and certified at not longer than annual intervals, unless otherwise specified or
21 required.
22
23 F. All HDPE pipe and fittings shall be clean, sound, and without defects. No
24 manner of repair will be accepted, unless otherwise specified or approved by
25 the Engineer.
26
27 G. The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall perform all the testing
28 and recording that is required in these Specifications unless otherwise
29 specified.
30
31 H. The Engineer shall have the right to determine the amount of pipe to be
32 rejected.
33
34 1.06 SUPPLIER'S QUALIFICATIONS
35
36 A. All HDPE pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall be furnished by a
37 manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the
38 manufacture of the items to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed,
39 constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods
40 and shall comply with these Specifications. The Manufacturer shall have at
41 least 5 years experience in work similar in specification to that which is to be
42 furnished on this project. The Manufacturer shall be required to show
43 experience in supplying pipe in environments similar to those expected to exist
44 on this project and that the pipe supplied in those environments has functioned
45 satisfactorily.
46
47 1.07 SHOP TESTS
48
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-5 03/22/2019
1 A. All pipe shall be tested by the Manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C906,
2 the Manufacturer's standard procedures, and this Specification. Shop Tests
3 shall be subject to witness by the Engineer and/or Owner, and/or the Owner's
4 Representative and certified test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer by
5 the Contractor for approval. No lot of pipe shall be shipped to the site of the
6 Work until acceptable shop tests are completed and approved.
7
8 1. The Contractor shall perform or have performed said material tests at
9 no additional cost to the Owner. The Owner and/or the Owner's
10 Representative and/or the Engineer shall have the right to witness all
11 testing conducted by the Contractor; provided that the Contractor's
12 schedule is not delayed for the convenience of the Owner. It shall be
13 the responsibility of the Contractor to provide notice to the Owner and
14 the Engineer of proposed tests in accordance with this Section and the
15 Contract Documents. -
16
17 2. Tests and examinations to verify the quality of work shall be performed
18 by persons other than those engaged in the activity being examined.
19 Such persons shall not report directly to the production supervisor
20 responsible for the Work. All instruments, gauges and other testing and
21 measuring equipment used in activities affecting quality shall be of
22 proper range, type, and accuracy to verify conformance with the
23 Specification requirements. Procedures shall be in effect to assure that
24 they are calibrated and certified at not longer than annual intervals.
25 Calibration shall be against measurement standards, which have known
26 relationship to national standards where such exist. Gauges must be
27 calibrated and certified for the piece of equipment of which they are a
28 part and must remain on the piece of equipment following certification.
29 Materials and items including products previously checked or
30 manufactured with equipment found to be out of calibration or
31 adjustment shall be considered unacceptable until it can be determined
32 that all applicable requirements have been met.
33
34 3. The Supplier shall maintain records of all internal and required tests
35 and inspections. These records shall include records of materials,
36 manufacturing, examination, repairs, and test data taken before and
37 during fabrication. The Engineer reserves the right to request that
38 specific data be included in the records that may not otherwise be
39 included. Whenever tests and examinations are performed on a pipe
40 element or pipe, the appropriate pipe identification number shall be
41 shown on the report. Copies of all records of tests conducted by the
42 pipe Supplier, independent laboratory, or material manufacturers shall
43 be given to the Engineer in such form as to be appropriate for
44 permanent records.
45
46 4. The Engineer shall have access to all records of tests and inspections
47 related to pipe manufactured for use in the Work and shall also have
48 the right to witness any tests being performed by the Supplier relative to
49 products, materials, or the pipe being produced.
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-6 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 5. In addition to those tests specifically required, the Owner may request
3 additional samples for testing by the Owner. The cost for these
4 additional samples shall be borne by the Owner at no additional cost to
5 the Contractor.
6
7 6. All tests required by AWWA C906 and as required herein, shall be
8 performed by the Supplier and records of all such tests shall be
9 provided to the Owner.
10
11 B. Dimensions shall be subject to gauging in the presence of the Engineer.
12 Dimensions of each pipe shall be measured as specified in ASTM D2122.
13 Representative samples from each of the molds each shift when the mold is
14 used in manufacturing pipe for the Project shall be gauged.
15
16 C. If requested by the Engineer, one pipe from each diameter size and pressure
17 class each shift each day shall be non-destructively tested. The wall thickness
18 shall be measured for conformance to the thickness tolerance at the quarter
19 points of the cross-section and at any other point selected by the Engineer.
20 The measuring device shall be capable of measuring the pipe wall thickness to
21 the nearest 0.001 -inch. Any wall thickness measurement less than the
22 nominal wall thickness minus the casting tolerance, shown in Table 1, shall be
23 cause for pipe to be rejected. If the first pipe selected is rejected another pipe
24 shall be tested. If the second pipe fails a third pipe made during that shift shall
25 be tested. If the third pipe fails all pipe made during that shift shall be rejected.
26
27 D. Physical property tests shall be made on test specimens in accordance with
28 the requirements of AWWA C906 and applicable ASTM standards. Samples
29 for tests shall be taken every three hours.
30
31 1.08 INSPECTION
32
33 A. All Work under this Specification, including but not limited to proof of design
34 testing, shop testing and the production of the pipe, fittings and specials, shall
35 be subject to inspection by the Owner's representatives and/or the Engineer in
36 the Supplier's plant. All travel, lodging and meal costs associated with this
37 plant inspection shall be incurred by the Owner and/or the Engineer.
38
39 B. The Engineer shall have the right to order any pipe that, in the Engineer's
40 opinion, does not meet the Specifications to be rejected and not shipped to the
41 Project site.
42
43 C. The Owner and/or the Owner's Representative and/or the Engineer reserves
44 the right to witness the testing of materials by the pipe Supplier or have it
45 performed by an independent testing service. If the independent test results
46 show that the pipe manufactured meets the requirements of the Specifications,
47 the costs for such testing shall be paid by the Owner. If the independent test
48 results show that the pipe manufactured does not meet the requirements of
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-7 03/22/2019
1 this Specification, the Contractor shall pay for all testing and retesting costs.
2 The Supplier shall make all plant laboratory facilities available to the Owner
3 and/or the Engineer and shall notify the Engineer at least fourteen (14) days
4 prior to start of production of the pipeline materials for the Project.
5
6 D. The Contractor shall furnish six (6) copies of the Supplier's sworn certificate of
7 inspection and testing of all HDPE pipe and fittings used on the Work. All pipe
8 and fittings will be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer during
9 production and after delivery of material to the Project Site. No broken,
10 cracked, misshaped, damaged or otherwise unsatisfactory pipe or fittings shall
11 be used. Such inspection by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of
12 full responsibility for the materials installed.
13
14 E. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with lists, in duplicate, of all pieces of
15 pipe and fittings in each shipment received, and these lists shall give the
16 identifying number, weight, class, size and description of each item received at
17 the Project Site.
18
19 PART 2 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
20
21 2.01 GENERAL
22
23 A. All HDPE pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA Specification
24 C906. Minimum wall thickness of pipe shall be as specified herein. All HDPE
25 Pipe and fittings shall meet PE 3408 with a cell classification of PE345464C.
26
27 B. Pipe shall be furnished in nominal lengths of a minimum of 40 feet, unless
28 otherwise directed by the Engineer. Pipe for potable water supply and
29 accessories shall bear the NSF mark indicating pipe size, manufacturer's
30 name, AWWA and/or ASTM Specification number, working pressure and
31 production code.
32
33 C. All materials that may be in contact with the water being conveyed (gaskets,
34 lubricants, disinfecting agents, etc.) shall be in accordance with and approved
35 by the appropriate NSF Standard 61.
36
37 2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA
38
39 A. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked
40 according to applicable requirements stated herein and except as modified
41 shall conform to AWWA C906 and ASTM F714.
42
43
44 B. The HDPE pipe classifications approved for this project are as follows:
45
46 1. Class 75 DR 11; C 906
47
48 C. Where shown on the Drawings, or where required to meet the conditions
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-8 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 shown on the Drawings, the pipe, fittings and specials wall thickness shall be
2 as required to meet the following parameters:
3
4 Water Main
5 Working Pressure (PSI): 160
6
7 All Mains
8 Pt Surge Allowance (PSI) 64 / 128 (reoccurring /
9 occasional surge events)
10 Pf Field Test Pressure (PSI) 1.5 times Pw
11 F Safety Factor 2
12 Wd Dead Load wHcBc (see note 1)
13 Ww Live Load AASHTO H-20
14 w Weight of Soil (Ib/ft3) 120 Ib/ft3
15
16 Note (1): All pipe shall be designed for a single condition representing the
17 worst possible combination of dead load (Wd) and live load (Ww). The dead
18 Toad shall be computed assuming soil weight of 120lbs/ft3. The determination
19 of live load shall be as recommended by AASHTO in "Standard Specifications
20 for Highway Bridges."
21
22 D. Pipe supplied for this Project shall be suitable for use with neutral pH
23 (approximately 7.0) treated chlorinated sewage effluent or chloraminated
24 potable water.
25
26 2.03 PIPE DESIGN
27
28 A. All HDPE pipe shall have a minimum wall thickness as specified in AWWA
29 C906. The DR shall not be greater than DR 11 or as shown on the drawings.
30
31 B. The Contractor shall provide design data on the pipe including calculations
32 showing the separate and combined stresses in the wall of the pipe due to the
33 design loads.
34
35 2.04 MATERIALS
36
37 A. High Density Polyethylene pipe 4 -inches diameter and larger shall conform to
38 material standard ASTM D3350 345464 C cell classification rated as PE 3408
39 by the Plastics Pipe Institute. Minimum pressure rating shall be 160 psi SDR
40 11 (Standard Dimension Ratio). Pressure ratings are at standard test
41 conditions and temperature of 73.4°F (23°C).
42
43 B. All HDPE pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C906. The
44 Hazen -Williams friction factor will not be less than 150. Each length of pipe
45 shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C906.
46
47 C. All HDPE pipe shall have a Ductile Iron Pipe Sizing (DIPS) outside diameter
48 unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-9 03/22/2019
1
2 D. Potable water pipe shall be permanently co -extruded with blue coloring on pipe
3 outside surface. The exterior of exposed HDPE pipe and fittings shall be field
4 coated with one prime coat of Tnemec 66, 2.5 to 3.5 mils minimum dry film
5 thickness, a second coat of Tnemec 73, 2.0 to 3.0 mils per coat minimum dry
6 film thickness and a final coat equal to the second. Field coatings shall be
7 applied in strict conformance with the coating manufacturer's
8 recommendations and Section 09900.
9
10 E. The polyethylene compound shall be suitably protected against degradation by
11 ultraviolet light by means of carbon black, well dispersed by precompounding
12 in a concentration of not less than 2 percent. In plant blending at the
13 manufacturing facility will be permitted.
14
15 F The maximum allowable hoop stress shall be 800 psi at 73.4 degrees F.
16
17 G. The pipe manufacturer shall be listed with the Plastic Pipe Institute as meeting
18 the recipe and mixing requirements of the resin manufacturer for the resin
19 used to manufacture the pipe in this project
20
21 H. The HDPE pipe shall be DripscoPlex, manufactured by Performance Pipe, a
22 division of Chevron Phillips Chemical Co.; or approved equal.
23
24 2.05 JOINTS
25
26 A. HDPE pipe shall be jointed by the butt -fusion process in accordance with pipe
27 manufacturer's directions. Contractor shall provide butt -fusion technicians who
28 are trained and certified by the pipe manufacturer or representative, to
29 complete the project. The date of technician certification shall not exceed 12
30 months before commencing construction.
31
32 B. All HDPE pipe joined by butt -fusion shall be made from the same class and
33 type of raw material made by the same raw material supplier.
34
35 C. Butt -fusion means the butt -joining of the pipe by softening the aligned faces of
36 the pipe ends in a suitable apparatus and pressing them together under
37 controlled pressure.
38
39 D. The internal and external beads resulting from the butt -fusion process shall be
40 visible and examined for penetration 360 degrees around the pipe diameter.
41
42 E. Short pieces of pipe between valves and fittings shall be DIP with all joints
43 retrained for sizes 3 -inches and larger. For 2 -inch, the short pieces shall be
44 brass or Schedule 80 with IP threads and DI, HDPE or brass fittings and all
45 joints restrained.
46
47 2.06 FITTINGS
48
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-10 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 A. Internal Recycle pipe fittings shall be butt fusion fabricated HDPE long radius
2 bends as shown on the drawings. Ell fittings shall be ISCO ISFF902817IPS or
3 equal.
4
5 B. All other fittings for HDPE pipe, 4" and larger except for D.I/HDPE Mechanical
6 Joint Adaptors, shall be compact ductile iron mechanical joint fittings. If a
7 fitting is unavailable as a compact ductile iron mechanical joint fitting, then use
8 a regular ductile iron mechanical joint fitting as specified in Section 02061.
9
10 C. Dl/HDPE Mechanical Joint Adaptors.
11
12 1. The manufacturer of the HDPE pipe shall supply all Ductile Iron/HDPE
13 mechanical joint adaptors and accessories required to perform the work
14 as shown on the Drawings.
15
16 2. The Dl/HDPE mechanical joint adaptor shall consist of:
17
18 a. A molded or fabricated HDPE mechanical joint transition fitting.
19
20 b. A standard rubber gasket for a DI mechanical joint.
21
22 c. A DI mechanical joint backup drive ring.
23
24 d. Stainless steel mechanical joint tee bolts.
25
26 e. A stainless steel stiffener inserted in the MJ end of the HDPE
27 transition fitting.
28
29 3. The Dl/HDPE mechanical joint adaptor shall be connected to the HDPE
30 pipe by a heat -fused joint on one end, and connected to a ductile iron
31 pipe valve, or fitting with a mechanical joint on the other end.
32
33 4. The tee bolts and backup drive ring shall act as a joint restraint to keep
34 the connecting pieces from pulling apart.
35
36 5. The HDPE transition fitting shall be molded or fabricated by the
37 manufacturer of the HDPE pipe. All molded fittings shall be fully
38 pressure rated to match the SDR pressure rating for which they are
39 made. Fabricated fittings shall be rated for internal pressure service
40 equivalent to the full pressure rating of the mating pipe.
41
42 6. If rework compounds are required, only those generated in the
43 manufacturer's own plant from resin compounds of the same class and
44 type from the same raw material supplier shall be used.
45
46 7 Solvent epoxy cementing and mechanical joining with bolt on wrap
47 around clamps shall not be used for connections.
48
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-11 03/22/2019
1 2.07 LOCATOR WIRE
2
3 A. All HDPE pipe installed underground by directional bore or by open cut shall
4 be laid with a minimum of two (2) insulated 14 gauge solid strand copper wires
5 for location purposes. All "long" HDPE service piping (services greater than 40
6 feet in length) shall by laid with one (1) insulated 14 gauge solid strand copper
7 wire.
8
9 PART 3 - EXECUTION
10
11 3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS
12
13 A. The Contractor shall transport, deliver and distribute along the line of the work,
14 the pipe, specials and appurtenances. All Work shall be in strict accordance
15 with the provisions of applicable permits and easements.
16
17 B. Pipe shall be loaded for shipment upon suitable cars or trucks that shall be
18 provided with padded bunks with nylon belt tie -down straps or padded
19 banding. In loading and unloading the pipe, more than ordinary care shall be
20 taken to prevent any injury to the pipe, ends, and connections. Such work
21 shall be done slowly with the pipe at all times under control, and under no
22 condition shall the pipe be dropped. Field repair of damaged pipe shall not be
23 allowed. The pipe shall be protected during shipping by covering or some
24 other means acceptable to the Engineer to prevent contamination of the pipe
25 during transport.
26
27 C. All pipe, fittings, etc., shall be carefully handled and protected against damage,
28 impact shocks, and free fall. Under no circumstances shall materials be
29 dropped. Pipe handling equipment shall consist of ropes, fabric, or rubber -
30 protected slings and straps designed and constructed to prevent damage to
31 the pipe. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
32 Chains, forks, cables, hooks, or other equipment that may damage the pipe
33 shall not be allowed. Two slings spread apart shall be used for lifting each
34 length of pipe. Slings for handling the pipeline shall not be positioned at butt -
35 fused joints. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be rolled or skidded against
36 pipe on the ground. The dragging of fused HDPE pipe along asphalt and
37 concrete paving is discouraged using rollers where possible.
38
39 D. The open ends of all sections of joined and/or installed pipe (not in service)
40 shall be plugged at night to prevent animals or foreign material from entering
41 the pipe line or pipe section. Waterproof nightcaps of approved design may be
42 used but they shall be so constructed that they will prevent the entrance of any
43 type of natural precipitation into the pipe and will be fastened to the pipe in
44 such a manner that the wind cannot blow them loose. The practice of stuffing
45 cloth or paper in the open ends of the pipe will not be permitted.
46
47 E. Where possible, the pipe shall be raised and supported at a suitable distance
48 back from the open end such that the open end will be below the level of the
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-12 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 pipe at the point of support.
2
3 F. In distributing the pipe in the field, each pipe shall be placed as nearly as
4 possible to the point where it is to be laid, and facing in the proper direction.
5 Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a
6 manner that will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the trench
7 site or elsewhere. Pipe fittings and specials which are placed in storage,
8 streets or drives must be so arranged as not to cause undue inconvenience to
9 traffic and must be protected sufficiently to prevent any damage. Chains,
10 cables or other equipment likely to cause damage to the pipe or fitting shall not
11 be used. Pipe which has been improperly distributed and which must be
12 moved longitudinally along the trench shall be reloaded on a suitable car or
13 truck or lifted and swung by a derrick or moved by such means as may be
14 satisfactory to the Engineer.
15
16 G. Materials, if stored, shall be kept safe from damage. The interior as well as all
17 sealing surfaces of all pipe, fittings, and other appurtenances shall be kept free
18 from dirt or foreign matter at all times. Valves shall be drained and stored in a
19 manner that will protect them from damage or freezing.
20
21 H. Pipe stored outside and exposed to prolonged periods of sunlight shall be
22 covered with canvas or other opaque material. Air circulation shall be provided
23 under covering.
24
25 I. Pipe shall not be stacked higher than the limits recommended by the
26 manufacturer. The bottom tiers shall be kept off the ground on timbers, rails, or
27 concrete. Pipe shall not be stored close to heat sources.
28
29 J. Gaskets shall be placed in a cool location out of direct sunlight. Gaskets shall
30 not come in contact with petroleum products. Gaskets shall be used on a
31 first -in, first -out basis. Mechanical -joint bolts shall be handled and stored in a
32 manner that will ensure proper use with respect to types and sizes.
33
34 K. If in the process of manufacture, transportation, or handling, any HDPE pipe,
35 fitting or special receives any deformation to the pipe wall, ends or
36 connections, such pipe, fitting or special shall be rejected and replaced at the
37 Contractor's expense. Sections of the pipes with cuts and gouges exceeding
38 10 percent of the pipe wall thickness or kinked sections shall be removed and
39 the ends rejoined.
40
41 L. In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall inspect upon delivery all
42 pipe, fittings, and specials and mark as "rejected" all pipe lengths and fittings
43 or specials exhibiting signs of damage and the Contractor shall, at the
44 Contractor's expense, immediately remove the same from the job site, or
45 repair to the Engineer's satisfaction. Any pipe, fittings or specials deemed not
46 suitable for installation shall be replaced in kind by the Contractor at the
47 Contractor's own expense.
48
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-13 03/22/2019
1 M. The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting to insure that there are no
2 damaged portions of the pipe. If any defective pipe is discovered after having
3 been laid, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe or fitting in a
4 satisfactory manner, by the Contractor at the Contractor's own expense.
5
6 N. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean each pipe or fitting of any foreign
7 substance that may have collected on or in it prior to the pipe or fitting being
8 placed in the trench. The openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall
9 be closed during any interruption of the Work. As pipe laying progresses, the
10 Contractor shall keep the pipe interior free of all debris. The Contractor shall
11 completely clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt, mortar splatter, and
12 any other debris following completion of pipe laying, pointing of joints and any
13 necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed
14 pipeline.
15
16 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE
17
18 A. All polyethylene pipe shall be cut, fabricated, and installed in strict
19 conformance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Joining, laying,
20 and pulling of polyethylene pipe shall be accomplished by personnel
21 experienced in working with polyethylene pipe. The pipe supplier shall certify
22 in writing that the Contractor is qualified to join, lay, and pull the pipe or
23 representative of the pipe manufacturer shall be on site to oversee the pipe
24 joining. Expenses for the representative shall be paid for by the Contractor.
25
26 B. All joints shall be assembled in accordance with the Manufacturer's
27 recommended procedures. In general, the procedure shall be as described
28 herein.
29
30 1. All HDPE pipe shall be jointed by the heat fusion process, which
31 produces homogeneous, seal, leak -tight joints.
32
33
34 2. Restrained mechanical joints, shall be provided at tie-ins with
35 underground valves and other pipe materials.
36
37 3. Flanged joint connections shall be have the minimum pressure and DR
38 of the adjoining pipe. Steel adapter plates shall be fabricated as
39 required for connection to flanged wall pipe or appurtenances.
40
41 C. The pipe fusion machine will be a self-contained hydraulic fusion machine
42 capable of butt fusing HDPE pipe in sizes required for the work. The carriage
43 must be removable from the chassis for in -ditch use. The machine must be
44 compatible with an electronic data recording device. Accessories will include
45 all butt fusion inserts for the specified range of pipe sizes, a pyrometer kit for
46 checking the surface temperature of the heater, extension cord (25' minimum),
47 and hydraulic extension hoses (minimum of four). The butt fusion machine will
48 be McElroy No. 412, or approved equivalent.
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-14 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 D. Data Recording System:
3
4 1. The Data Recording System shall consist of a hand-held, battery
5 operated computer that records and documents the profile of each
6 fusion joint made. This device shall be rugged, portable and weather -
7 resistant. It will be compatible with the fusion equipment.
8
9 2. The data recorded will include the date and time, machine identification
10 and model, pipe size, heater plate surface temperature, and hydraulic
11 cylinder pressure of each fusion process. The recording device will
12 have the ability to produce printouts as well as download the
13 information to an IBM compatible personal computer.
14
15 E. Butt Fusion Testing:
16
17 1. Contractor shall test the first fusion of the day on a daily basis.
18
19 2. In testing, the fusion shall be allowed to cool completely, then fusion
20 test straps shall be cut out. The test shall be minimum of 12 or 30
21 times the wall thickness in length with the fusion in the center, and
22 minimum of 1 or 1.5 times the wall thickness in width. Bend the test
23 strap until the ends of the strap touch. Contractor shall not commence
24 until a fusion test has passed the bent strap test.
25
26 F Pipe shall be measured and installed between 65 degrees F and 75 degrees
27 F. Contractor shall adjust length for thermal expansion for installation or
28 measurement at any other temperature. Pipe shall be installed to allow for
29 thermal expansion from 40 degrees F to 120 degrees F or ±6 inches of axial
30 movement whichever is greater.
31
32 3.03 FLUSHING AND TESTING
33
34 A. Prior to pressure testing, all mains shall be flushed to remove all sand and
35 other foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water shall not be Tess than 3
36 feet per second. Flushing shall be terminated at the direction of the Engineer.
37 The Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water without causing a nuisance
38 or property damage.
39
40 B. Hydrostatic testing of pipelines shall be carried out in accordance with Section
41 01625 and the manufacturers recommended procedures.
42
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
02063-15 03/22/2019
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02064
2
3 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
9
10 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to modify, alter
11 and/or convert existing structures as shown or specified and as required for the
12 installation of new mechanical equipment, piping, and appurtenances. Existing
13 piping and equipment shall be removed and dismantled as necessary for the
14 performance of structural alterations in accordance with the requirements herein
15 specified.
16
17 B. The Contractor shall not operate the Owner's valves, equipment, etc. without a
18 representative of the Owner in attendance.
19
20 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
21 (Not Used)
22
23 PART 3 - EXECUTION
24
25 3.01 GENERAL
26
27 A. The Contractor shall cut, repair, reuse, excavate, demolish, or otherwise
28 remove parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the
29 Contract Drawings, herein specified, or as necessary to permit completion of
30 the work under this Contract. The Contractor shall dispose of surplus materials
31 resulting from the above work in an approved manner. The work shall include
32 all necessary cutting and bending of reinforcing steel, structural steel, or
33 miscellaneous metal work found embedded in the existing structures.
34
35 B. The Contractor shall dismantle and remove all existing equipment, piping and
36 other appurtenances required for the completion of the work. Where called for
37 or required, the Contractor shall cut existing pipelines for the purpose of making
38 connections thereto. Anchor bolts for equipment and structural steel removed
39 shall be cut off one (1) inch below the concrete surface.
40
41 C. At the time that a new connection is made to an existing pipeline, additional new
42 piping, extending to and including a new valve, shall be installed.
43
44 D. No existing structure, equipment, or appurtenance shall be shifted, cut,
45 removed, or otherwise altered without the express approval of and to the extent
46 approved by the Engineer.
47
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
02064-1 03/22/2019
1 E. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making
2 openings in walls and partitions, the Contractor shall take all precautions and
3 use all necessary barriers and other protective devices so as not to damage the
4 structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, and not to damage the
5 structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted,
6 line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete.
7
8 F. Materials and equipment removed in the course of making alterations and
9 additions shall become the property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him
10 off the work site at his own place of disposal. Operating equipment shall be
11 thoroughly cleaned, lubricated, and greased for protection during prolonged
12 storage.
13
14 G. All alterations to existing structures shall be done at such time and in such
15 manner as will comply with the approved time schedule. So far as possible
16 before any part of the work is started, all tools, equipment and materials shall
17 be assembled and made ready so that the work can be completed without delay.
18
19 H. All workmanship and new materials involved in constructing the alterations shall
20 conform to the specifications for the classes of work insofar as such
21 specifications are applicable.
22
23 I. All cutting of existing concrete or other material to provide suitable bonding to
24 new work shall be done in a manner to meet the requirements of the respective
25 section of these Specifications covering the new work. When not covered, the
26 work shall be carried on in the manner and to the extent directed by the Owner's
27 Representative.
28
29 J. Surfaces of seals visible in the completed work shall be made to match as nearly
30 as possible the adjacent surfaces.
31
32 K. Non -shrink grout shall be used for setting wall castings, sleeves, leveling pump
33 bases, doweling anchors into existing concrete and elsewhere as shown.
34
35 L. Where necessary or required for the purpose of making connections, the
36 Contractor shall cut existing pipelines in a manner to provide an approved joint.
37 Where required, the Contractor shall weld beads, flanges, or provide Dresser
38 Couplings or equal, all as required.
39
40 M. The Contractor shall provide flumes, hoses, piping, and other related items to
41 divert or provide suitable plugs, bulkheads, or other means to hold back the flow
42 of water or other liquids, all as required in the performance of the work under
43 this Contract.
44
45 N. Blasting will not be permitted to complete any work under this Contract. Care
46 shall be taken not to damage any part of existing buildings or foundations or
47 outside structures.
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
02064-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 3.02 CONNECTING TO EXISTING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2
3 A. The Contractor shall verify exact location, material, alignment, joint, etc. of
4 existing piping and equipment prior to making the connections called out in the
5 Drawings. The verifications shall be performed with adequate time to correct
6 any potential alignment or other problems prior to the actual time of connection.
7
8 3.03 CLEANING EXISTING STRUCTURES
9
10 A. After dewatering and before commencing work on any tank, basin, conduit or
11 other structure, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of, away from the plant
12 site, the grit and other solids remaining in such structures.
13
14
15 END OF SECTION
16
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
02064-3 03/22/2019
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
02064-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02080
2
3 ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
4
5 PART I - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 A. Perform all planning, administrative, execution, and cleaning requirements
10 necessary to safely remove the asbestos -containing materials as indicated in the
11 Contract Documents.
12
13
14 1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
A.
Work Included, as identified in Terracon Consultants, Inc., Pre -Demolition NESHAP
Asbestos Survey, Lead -Based Paint and Hazardous Materials Survey Report,
dated January 19, 2017 (Terracon Report):
HA
Material Description
Material Location
Percent
NESHAP
CATEGORY
Estimated
Quantities (1)
MS2
Pipe Gasket on 6" Pipe —
Flange (Dark Green)
Primary Pump House
35% Chrysotile
Category I
Non Friable
15 SF
MS4
Pipe Gasket on 10" Pipe —
Valve Flange (Yellow)
Primary Pump House
35% Chrysotile
Category I
Non Friable
30 SF
MS6
Caulking (Off -White)
Primary Pump House —
North & South Tank
3% Chrysotile
Category
Non-FriableII
10 SF
R2
Pitch Pan Tar (Black)
Irrigation System
— Roof
5 /o - Chrysotile
Category I -
Non -Friable
20 SF
(1)
Estimated quantities are approximate and are to be confirmed prior to any such usage.
1. Properly remove asbestos -containing materials indicated in the Terracon
Report as specified herein.
2. Apply a compatible sealant to all surfaces from which asbestos -containing
material was removed and exposed plastic sheeting in each work area.
3. Upon final clearance by the consultant, poly barriers shall be removed,
bagged and disposed of as asbestos containing materials.
30 B. Definitions
31
32 1. Abatement - procedures to decrease or eliminate fiber release from pre -
33 cast, spray- or trowel -applied asbestos -containing building materials.
34 Includes encapsulation, enclosure and removal.
35 2. AHERA - Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (40CFR763).
36 3. Airlock - system for permitting ingress and egress without permitting air
37 movement between a contaminated area and an uncontaminated area,
38 typically consisting of two curtained doorways at least three feet apart.
39 4. Amended Water — water to which a surfactant is added.
40 5. Air Monitoring - the process of measuring the fiber content of a specific
41 volume of air in a stated period of time.
42
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-1 March 2019
1 6. Clean Room - an uncontaminated area or room which is part of the worker
2 decontamination enclosure system, with provisions for storage of workers'
3 street clothes and protective equipment. Also known as the "Change
4 Room".
5 7. Curtained Doorway - a device to allow ingress and egress from one room to
6 another while minimizing air movement between the rooms. Typically
7 constructed by placing two overlapping sheets of plastic over an existing or
8 temporarily framed doorway and securing each along the top of the
9 doorway, with the vertical edge of one along one vertical side of the
10 doorway, and the vertical edge of the other along the opposite vertical side.
11 Two curtained doorways spaced a minimum of three feet apart form an
12 airlock.
13 8. Decontamination Enclosure System - a series of connected rooms, with
14 curtained doorways between any two adjacent rooms, for the
15 decontamination of workers or of materials and equipment. A
16 decontamination enclosure system always contains an airlock.
17 9. Encapsulation - the sealing of asbestos surfaces involving application of a
18 material (encapsulate/sealant) that will envelop or coat the fiber matrix and
19 minimize fiber fallout and protect against contact damage.
20 10. Enclosure - procedures necessary to completely enclose material
21 containing asbestos behind airtight, impermeable, permanent barriers.
22 11. EPA - United States Environmental Protection Agency.
23 12. Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System - a decontamination
24 enclosure system for materials and equipment, typically consisting of a
25 designated area of the work area, a washroom, and an uncontaminated
26 area.
27 13. Equipment Room - a contaminated area or room which is part of the worker
28 decontamination enclosure system, with provisions for storage of
29 contaminated clothing and equipment.
30 14. Fixed Object (immovable object) - a unit of equipment or furniture in the
31 work area which cannot be removed from the work area.
32 15. Glove -Bag - a relatively small, clear plastic enclosure which can completely
33 encompass short sections of pipe. It shall be capable of allowing the
34 removal of asbestos -containing materials without any of the materials
35 escaping from the enclosure.
36 16. HEPA Filter - a High Efficiency Particulate Air (NEPA) filter capable of
37 trapping and retaining 99.97 percent of asbestos thermally generated DOP
38 particles 0.3 microns in diameter.
39 17. HEPA Vacuum Equipment - High Efficiency Particulate Air filtered
40 vacuuming equipment with a filter system capable of collecting and retaining
41 asbestos fibers. Filters should be 99.97 percent efficient for retaining
42 thermally generated DOP particles 0.3 microns in diameter.
43 18. Holding Area - a chamber between the washroom and uncontaminated area
44 in the equipment decontamination enclosure system. The holding area
45 comprises an airlock.
46 19. Movable Object - a unit of equipment or furniture in the work area which can
47 be removed from the work area.
48 20. NIOSH - National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.
49 21. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
50 22. Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs) — as defined by OSHA, as the
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-2 March 2019
1
1
1 maximum amount or concentration of a chemical that a worker may be
2 exposed to under OSHA regulations. Under the OSHA Asbestos
3 Construction standard, the two PELs are: (1) No employee may be
1 4 exposed to an airborne concentration of asbestos in excess of 0.1 f/cc as
5 an 8 -hour TWA, and (2) No employee may be exposed to an airborne
6 concentration of asbestos in excess of 1.0 f/cc as averaged over a
I7 sampling period of 30 minutes (Excursion Limit).
8 23. Plastic Sheeting - plastic sheet material used for protection of walls, floors,
I9 etc. and used to seal openings into work areas. The thickness of the
10 material shall be as specified.
11 24. Removal - the act of removing asbestos -containing or contaminated
12 materials from a structure and depositing in a suitable disposal site.
13 25. Scaffolding - self-supporting and load-bearing temporary structure.
14 26. Shower Room - A room constituting an airlock, between the clean room and
15 the equipment room in the worker decontamination enclosure system, with
I
16 hot and cold or warm running water suitably arranged for complete
17 showering during decontamination.
18 27. Surfactant - a chemical wetting agent added to water to improve its
I
20
19 penetrating ability, thus reducing the quantity of water required to saturate
asbestos -containing materials.
21 28. Wet Cleaning - the process of eliminating asbestos contamination from
I
22 building surfaces and objects by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning tools
23 which have been dampened with amended water, and by afterwards
24 disposing of these cleaning tools as asbestos -containing waste.
25 29. Washroom - a room between the work area and the holding area in the
I26 equipment decontamination enclosure system. The washroom comprises
27 an airlock.
28 30. Work Area - area or areas of Project which undergo "abatement" or are
I
29 contaminated.
30 31. Worker Decontamination Enclosure System - a decontamination enclosure
31 system for workers, typically consisting of a clean room, a shower room,
I 32 and an equipment room.
33
34 B. Approval of, or acceptance by, Owner or Consultant of various construction
I35 activities or methods proposed by Contractor does not constitute an assumption of
36 liability either by the Consultant or Owner for inadequacy or adverse consequences
37 of said activities or methods.
I38
39 1.03 QUALITY CRITERIA
40
41 A. Qualification for Performance of Work
I42
43 1. Contractor (or subcontractor engaged to perform the Work of this Section)
44 shall:
I45
46 a. Be a licensed asbestos abatement contractor in accordance with
47 State of Florida Statutes, F.S. 469. Submit notarized documentation
I48 confirming current licensure.
49 b. Contractor shall have a record of not Tess than two years successful
1
1
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-3 March 2019
1 experience in asbestos removal and related work similar in scope
2 and magnitude to this project. Submit list of successfully completed
3 projects with bidding documents.
4 c. Maintain on site, a Superintendent and one Head Foreman, each
5 having no less than one year of full-time experience in responsible
6 charge of asbestos removal operations similar in scope and
7 magnitude to this project within the three-year period preceding start
8 of project and shall be fluent in English. Superintendent and Head
9 Foreman must be approved by Owner prior to the start of the work
10 and shall not be changed without prior approval of the Consultant.
11 Head Foreman shall remain inside of the work area at all times the
12 work is in progress. Submit notarized experience of Superintendent
13 and Head Foreman with bidding documents.
14 d. Submit certification for each and every worker to be utilized on the
15 project by the Contractor or subcontractor(s) documenting that each
16 has successfully completed (including examinations and applicable
17 refresher courses) an EPA -accredited training course approved by
18 the State of Florida for asbestos abatement workers as specified in
19 the Florida Statutes (F.S. 469). Contractor shall also submit
20 documentation confirming EPA -accreditation and state approval for
21 each training center represented in the submittals.
22 e. Submit certification for each and every supervisor to be utilized on
23 the project by the Contractor or subcontractor(s) documenting that
24 each has successfully completed (including examinations and
25 applicable refresher courses) an EPA -accredited training course
26 approved by the State of Florida for asbestos supervisors as
27 specified in the Florida Statutes (F.S. 469). Contractor shall also
28 submit documentation confirming EPA -accreditation and state
29 approval for each training center represented in the submittals.
30
31 B. Reference Standards
32
33 1. Acknowledge, by the executing of the Contract, awareness and familiarity
34 with the contents and requirements of the following regulations, codes, and
35 standards, and assume responsibility for the performance of the work in
36 strict compliance therewith and for every instance of failure to comply
37 therewith.
38
39 2. Make available for review at the site, one copy of EPA, OSHA, and
40 applicable State, County, and City Regulations governing the work.
41
42 3. The current issue of each document shall govern. Where conflict among
43 requirements or with the Contract Documents exists, the more stringent
44 requirements shall apply.
45
46 a. U.S. EPA Regulations for Asbestos (Code of Federal Regulations
47 Title 40, Part 61, Subparts A and B).
48 b. U.S. EPA Regional National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air
49 Pollutants (NESHAP) 40 CFR 61, Subpart M.
50 c. U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-4 March 2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Asbestos Regulations (Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part
2 1926, Section 1101).
3 d. U.S. EPA Office of Toxic Substances Guidance Document,
4 "Asbestos -Containing Materials in School Buildings", Part 1 and Part
5 II.
6 e. U.S. EPA Office of Pesticide and Toxic Substances Guidance
7 Document, "Guidance for Controlling Friable Asbestos -Containing
8 Materials in Buildings", EPA 56015-85-024, June 1985.
9 f. U.S. Department of Transportation, Hazardous Substances: Final
10 Rule (Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49, Parts 171 and 172),
11 Federal Register November 21, 1986, and corrected February 17,
12 1987.
13 g. State of Florida Statutes (F.S. 469): Licensure for Asbestos
14 Consultants and Contractors.
15
16 C. Patent/Copyright Compliance
17
18 Comply with all patent and copyright laws involved with processes, equipment and
19 materials regarding the work of the Contract Documents.
20
21 D. Survey Reports
22
23 1. Results of tests of asbestos -containing materials (which are specifically
24 excluded as part of this Contract) taken from areas within the scope of this
25 project are available for review at the office of the Owner.
26
27 However, the Contractor or subcontractor is cautioned that, should
28 interpretations be made, opinions be formed, and conclusions be drawn as
29 a result of examining the test results, those interpretations, opinions, and
30 conclusions will be those made, formed, and drawn solely by the Contractor
31 or subcontractor.
32
33 2. Inasmuch as randomly and/or arbitrarily selected areas were sampled, the
34 Engineering and Owner make no representation, warranty, nor guarantee
35 that the conditions indicated by the test results either are representative of
36 those conditions existing throughout the area, or that unforeseen
37 developments may occur, or that materials other than, or in proportions
38 different from, those indicated may exist.
39
40 1.04 SUBMITTALS
41
42 Refer to Article 1.03 of this Section for the submittals required by the Contract Documents.
43
44 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
45
46 A. Deliver all project materials as described in Part 2 in the original packages,
47 containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand name.
48
49 B. Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp
50 surfaces, and under cover sufficient to prevent damage or contamination.
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-5 March 2019
1
1
I
2 C. Remove from the premises, all damaged or deteriorating materials. Dispose of
3 materials that become contaminated with asbestos in accordance with applicable
4 regulatory standards.
5
6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
7
8 2.01 MATERIALS
9
10 A. Plastic Sheeting - shall be of the thicknesses specified, in sizes to minimize the
11 frequency of joints. Utilize reinforced plastic sheeting in specified thicknesses on
I
12 floors.
13
14 B. Tape - shall be glass fiber or other type capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets
1
15 of plastic and for attachment of plastic sheet to finished or unfinished surfaces of
16 dissimilar materials under both dry and wet conditions.
17
I
18 C. Surfactant (wetting agent) - shall consist of resin materials in water base which
19 have been tested to indicate material is non-toxic and non -irritating to skin and
20 eyes, and non -carcinogenic. Approved materials and manufacturers:
21
22 1. "Penewet #6450" and its sprayer mixing head amended water generator
23 manufactured by Fiberlock Technologies, Inc., 630 Putnam Avenue,
24 Cambridge, MA 02139-0432, telephone (800) FIBERLK.
I
25 2. Consultant will consider equivalent products by other manufacturers for
26 approval if submitted with appropriate information to Consultant not later
27 than five days prior to the scheduled time for the material to be used. t
28 Minimum information shall include Safety Data Sheet, OSHA Form No. 20;
29 toxicological reports, and installation recommendations for use on
30 asbestos- containing materials.
I
31
32 D. Sealant (encapsulant) - shall be manufactured by reputable, established
33 manufacturer or encapsulant/sealant materials and be approved specifically for use
I
34 in asbestos contaminated environments. Shall be compatible with the temperature
35 conditions on surfaces to which sealant is to be applied. It is the responsibility of
36 the Contractor to determine compatibility of the sealant with materials and I 37 conditions.
38
39 E. Impermeable containers — a minimum six mil thick impermeable polyethylene bags
40 shall be used. Bags shall be properly labeled, for disposal of the asbestos
I
41 containing waste material. Before starting removal, Contractor must have a
42 sufficient number of waste disposal bags on site. The disposal bags shall be sealed
43 with duct tape using the "gooseneck technique". This technique helps in minimizing
I
44 any Teaks that may occur from a poorly sealed disposal bag.
45
46 F. Warning labels and signs - shall be as required by OSHA Regulation 29 CFR
I
47 1926.1101 (and U.S. DOT 49 CFR 171 and 172 for impermeable containers).
48
49 G. Other materials - Provide all other materials, such as lumber, nails and hardware, I 50 which may be required to construct and dismantle the decontamination area and
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-6 March 2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 the barriers that isolate the Work Area(s).
2
3 H. Glovebag - Provide commercially available glovebag assemblies constructed of
4 minimum six -mil plastic sheeting and permanent, securely attached sleeves and
5 gloves. For high temperature (greater than 120 degrees Fahrenheit) applications,
6 provide glovebags constructed of suitable materials. Onsite modifications to
7 glovebags or use contrary to manufacturer's instruction must be submitted in
8 writing to Consultant for review and approval prior to initiation of work.
9
10 2.02 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
11
12 A. Provide suitable tools for asbestos removal.
13
14 1. Water sprayer - utilize airless or other low-pressure sprayer for amended
15 water application.
16
17 2. Transportation - as required for loading, temporary storage, transit, and
18 unloading of contaminated waste without exposure to persons or property.
19
20 3. Communication equipment - shall be suitable for Inter -room
21 Communications, such as "walkie-talkies".
22
23 4. Manufactured vacuum loading device - a commercially available, vacuum
24 loader possessing a minimum of:
25
26 a. As a minimum, a 4 -stage filter system consisting of water injection,
27 centrifugal cyclone separator, reverse pulse filter baghouse and a
28 HEPA filter.
29 b. Filter monitor equipped with an auto shutdown mechanism.
30 c. Direct loading of wetted material into six -mil plastic bags.
31 d. Minimum of 1500 CFM at 200 inches H2O suction.
32
33 5. Continuous evacuation device (for use with glove -bags) - provide UL listed,
34 commercially available devices, which are capable of maintaining a
35 pressure differential between 0.05 and 0.25 inches of water within a glove -
36 bag. Device assembly shall include HEPA filtered exhaust.
37
38 6. Glove -Bag - provide commercially available glove -bag assemblies
39 constructed of minimum six -mil plastic sheeting and permanent, securely
40 attached sleeves and gloves. For high temperature applications, provide
41 glove -bags constructed of suitable materials. On-site modifications to
42 glove -bags or use contrary to manufacturer's instruction must be submitted
43 in writing to Consultant for review prior to initiation of work. Glove Bags and
44 glove -bag operations will be overseen by the Owner.
45
46 7. Air purifying equipment (for internal recirculation in the Work Area) - shall
47 be HEPA Filtration Systems or Electronic Precipitators. Ensure that no
48 internal air movement system or purification equipment exhausts
49 contaminated air from the Work Area(s) outside the Work Area.
50
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-7 March 2019
1 8. Diminished air pressure equipment - comply with ANSI Z9.2-7, local
2 exhaust ventilation.
3
4 PART 3 - EXECUTION
5
6 3.01 REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS -CONTAINING MATERIAL
7
8 Properly remove and dispose of all asbestos -containing materials indicated to be removed
9 as described in the Contract Documents in accordance with the methods and procedures
10 outlined in the U.S. OSHA Regulation (Code of Regulations, Title 29, Part 1926, Section
11 1101) or as more stringently specified herein.
12
13 A. REMOVAL SEQUENCE 1 (Caulking)
14
15 1. Prepare work areas as previously specified.
16
17 2. Properly remove asbestos -containing material as designated in the Pre -
18 Demolition NESHAP survey by the Consultant.
19
20 3. Spray areas of asbestos material with amended water, using spray
21 equipment recommended by surfactant manufacturer capable of providing a
22 "mist" application to reduce the release of fibers. Wet the material
23 sufficiently to saturate it to the substrate without excessive dripping. Spray
24 the asbestos material repeatedly during removal to maintain wet condition
25 but do not use excessive amounts of water.
26
27 4. Remove the saturated asbestos material in small sections. Do not allow
28 material to dry out. As it is removed, place the material in sealable plastic
29 bags of six -mil minimum thickness and place in labeled containers for
30 transport.
31
32 5. Do not permit removed asbestos -containing material to fall more than 10
33 feet. For greater height, provide an inclined chute apparatus or scaffolds.
34
35 6. After removal of asbestos -containing material, all surfaces shall be wet -
36 cleaned to remove residual accumulated material. Continue wet -cleaning
37 until surface is free of visible material.
38
39 7 Upon completion of the removal of ACM, a visual inspection shall be
40 performed by the consultant in order to document the effectiveness of the
41 abatement. If any noted ACM remain, the contractor shall address the
42 concerns of the consultant.
43
44 8. Downwind "work in progress" air sampling will be performed in lieu of post
45 abatement clearance sampling. Final clearance is dependent on successful
46 final visual clearances and when the air fiber count is 0.01 f/cc or less by
47 NIOSH #7400
48
49 B. REMOVAL SEQUENCE 2 (Roofing)
50
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-8 March 2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1. The competent person shall determine if the walking/working surfaces of the
2 roof area on which the employees are to work have the strength and
3 structural integrity to support the employees safely. Each employee on a
4 walking/working surface (horizontal and vertical surface) with an
5 unprotected side or edge which is 6 feet or more above a lower level shall
6 be protected from falling by the use of guardrail systems, safety net
7 systems, or personal fall arrest system.
8
9 2. Roofing material shall be removed in an intact state to the extent that it is
10 feasible. Wet methods shall be used to remove roofing materials that are
11 not intact, or that will be rendered not intact during removal, unless such wet
12 methods are not feasible or will create safety hazards
13
14 3. Asbestos -containing material that has been removed from a roof shall not
15 be dropped or thrown to the ground. Removed roofing ACM shall be double
16 bagged and passed to the ground by hand or shall be lowered to the ground
17 via a rope.
18
19 4. Upon completion of the removal of ACM, a visual inspection shall be
20 performed by the consultant in order to document the effectiveness of the
21 abatement. If any noted ACM remain, the contractor shall address the
22 concerns of the consultant.
23
24 5. Downwind "work in progress" air sampling will be performed in lieu of post
25 abatement clearance sampling. Final clearance is dependent on successful
26 final visual clearances and when the air fiber count is 0.01 f/cc or Tess by
27 NIOSH #7400
28
29 6. Alternative Roofing Removal Techniques: The contractor may elect to leave
30 the ACM roof material in place and be removed as part of the wet demolition
31 of the roofing structure, per Florida statutes 469. Contact Pinellas County
32 Air Quality Division at 727-464-4422 with questions regarding local
33 requirements for wet demolition of roofing materials.
34
35 C. REMOVAL SEQUENCE 3 (Gasket Material)
36
37 1. Prepare work area as previously specified.
38
39 2. Wrap the asbestos -containing thermal system insulation gasket area with a
40 minimum of two layers of six -mil plastic sheeting and secure with tape.
41
42 3. Support the pipe runs on each side adjacent to the area containing ACM to
43 be removed.
44
45 4. After pipe run is safely supported, cut each side of the pipe approximately 1
46 foot from each adjacent side of the ACM materials.
47
48 5. Safely removed section of pipe containing ACM and place in 6 mill disposal
49 bag.
50
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-9 March 2019
1 6. Clean work area and dispose of any metal shavings and debris.
2
3 7. Alternative Glove -Bag Removal Techniques
4
5 a. Contractor may elect to use continuously evacuated glove -bag
6 techniques for the removal of asbestos -containing materials. Prior
7 to the use of such techniques, Contractor shall submit shop
8 drawings or product data for equipment to be utilized for review by
9 Consultant.
10 b. A continuous diminished air pressure of minimum 0.05 inches of
11 water must be maintained within the glove -bag assembly at all times
12 during removal and cleaning methods.
13
14 8. Upon completion of the removal of ACM, a visual inspection shall be
15 performed by the consultant in order to document the effectiveness of the
16 abatement. If any noted ACM remain, the contractor shall address the
17 concerns of the consultant.
18
19 7. Downwind "work in progress" air sampling will be performed in lieu of post
20 abatement clearance sampling. Final clearance is dependent on successful
21 final visual clearances and when the air fiber count is 0.01 f/cc or less by
22 NIOSH #7400
23
24 3.02 CLEAN-UP AND DECONTAMINATION
25
26 A. Provide general clean-up of work areas concurrently with the removal of asbestos -
27 containing materials. Do not permit accumulation of removed materials on floor or
28 ground.
29
30 B. CLEAN-UP AND DECONTAMINATION
31
32 1. Remove all visible accumulations of asbestos material and debris.
33
34 2. Wet -clean all surfaces in the work areas.
35
36 3. Notify Owner for observation of cleaning to determine completeness.
37
38 4. Clean all sealed impermeable containers and all equipment (excluding that,
39 which will be needed for further cleaning) used in the work areas and
40 remove from work areas via the equipment decontamination enclosure
41 system.
42
43 5. Following the successful final visual clearance and when the air fiber count
44 is 0.01 f/cc or Tess by NIOSH #7400 and prior to removing plastic sheeting,
45 all surfaces from which asbestos -containing materials were removed shall
46 receive one coat of sealant to seal existing surfaces as follows:
47
48 a. Misting, spraying, and pumping equipment, as recommended by the
49 encapsulant material's manufacturer, shall be used.
50
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-10 March 2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 b. Encapsulant, compatible with finish material and conditions specified
2 in other Divisions, shall be installed in procedures as recommended
3 by the manufacturer's written instructions if found to be compatible
4 with temperature conditions.
5
6
7 3.03 COMPLETENESS TESTING AND DEMOBILIZATION
8
9 A. STANDARD OF COMPLETION FOR AREA DEMOBILIZATION
10
11 1. Standard of Completion: Consider the removal complete when air testing
12 performed by the consultant employed and paid for by the Owner shows
13 0.01 or less f/cc for each sample using NIOSH #7400 for Phase Contrast
14 Microscopy (PCM).
15
16 2. Testing Laboratory will test for completeness of the removal upon notice
17 from contractor that work areas and all other decontaminated and cleaned
18 areas are ready.
19
20 3. Re -clean at Contractor's expense all areas that do not comply with the
21 standard of completion for final clearance. Continue cleaning until the
22 specified standard of completeness is achieved by the consultant.
23 Contractor shall bear cost of all follow-up tests necessitated by the failure
24 of the air tests to meet the specified final clearance level. Owner will
25 deduct the cost of such follow-up tests from whatever monies remain due
26 to the Contractor.
27
28 a. Dismantle and remove sturdy barriers and plastic seals on all
29 openings and wet clean immediate areas.
30 b. Dismantle decontamination enclosure systems and thoroughly wet
31 clean immediate areas.
32 c. Dispose of debris, using cleaning materials, unsalvageable
33 materials used for sturdy barriers, and any other remaining
34 materials. Consider the materials as contaminated and dispose of
35 accordingly.
36
37 3.04 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED WASTE
38
39 A. Remove sealed and labeled containers of contaminated material and wastes and
40 dispose of in approved sanitary landfill as follows:
41
42 1. Notify Owner not less than 48 hours prior to the proposed time of removing
43 and delivery of contaminated waste to the landfill. The Owner may elect to
44 observe this operation.
45
46 2. Seal asbestos waste in Teak -proof, impermeable containers labeled in
47 accordance with Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Section 1926.1101,
48 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Sections 171 and 172.
49
50 3. Transport double -bagged contaminated waste from work area to truck in
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-11 March 2019
1 fiber or steel drums.
2
3 4. Use only enclosed or covered trucks to haul impermeable containers to
4 prevent loss or damage to containers enroute to sanitary landfill.
5
6 5. Preclean using HEPA vacuum equipment and wet -cleaning methods and
7 place one layer of six -mil plastic sheeting on walls and floor of truck prior to
8 transport of contaminated waste.
9
10 6. Allow only sealed plastic bags or impermeable containers to be deposited in
11 landfill. Leave damaged, broken, or leaking plastic bags in the impermeable
12 container and deposit entire container in landfill.
13
14 7. Ensure that there are no visible emissions to the outside air from site where
15 materials and waste are deposited.
16
17 8. Contractor may recycle uncontaminated impermeable containers.
18
19 9. Submit landfill receipts to the Owner after completion of the work.
20
21 10. Following the last trip to dispose of contaminated waste, all plastic sheeting
22 shall be removed from the walls and floor of the truck and also be disposed
23 of as contaminated waste. Contractor shall then notify Owner to examined
24 truck for cleanliness.
25
26 11. Final completion may not be satisfied until approval of truck by Consultant
27 after completion of transportation of contaminated waste.
28
29 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
30
31 A. A testing laboratory may be provided by the Owner at no cost to the Contractor,
32 except as outlined in other sections of the Contract Documents, to periodically
33 observe the removal process and perform the work in progress air monitoring.
34
35 B. Testing laboratory may conduct air monitoring throughout removal and cleaning
36 operations.
37
38 C. The testing laboratory may perform prevalent and isolation air sampling according
39 to the method prescribed by Section 1926.1101 of OSHA CFR Title 29 and analyze
40 the samples in general accordance with the procedures outlined by NIOSH #7400
41 for PCM.
42
43 D. The testing laboratory may perform the Owner's testing and conduct both the
44 preliminary and completeness of removal response action testing. Completeness
45 of removal response action testing will be performed in general accordance with
46 NIOSH #7400 and #7402. Such testing for the Owner does not relieve the
47 Contractor of providing necessary tests required by other regulations, codes, and
48 standards for the protection of his workers, or for any other purposes.
49
50 E. Air tests will be made both inside work areas and outside work areas where
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-12 March 2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 applicable, and test results will be made available to the Contractor. The Contractor
2 is cautioned, however, that should interpretations be made, opinions be formed,
3 and conclusions be drawn as a result of examining the test results, those
4 interpretations, opinions, and conclusions will be those made, formed, and drawn
5 solely by the Contractor. The Contractor will be responsible for performing air tests
6 required for his evaluation of the safety of his employees.
7
8 F. A preliminary visual observation will be performed in the work area by the
9 Consultant following notification by the Contractor that said areas have been
10 properly cleaned. Areas will be observed for the presence of visible dust, dirt and
11 debris.
12
13 G. Test results will be reported in terms of total fiber count per cubic centimeter of air
14 (f/cc) for air samples analyzed by PCM.
15
16 I. Work in progress air sampling will be ran in performed of post abatement clearance
17 sampling. Final clearance is dependent on successful final visual clearances and
18 when the air fiber count is 0.01 f/cc or less by NIOSH #7400.
19
20 J. After final clean-up of an area is completed, the work areas shall satisfactorily pass
21 the response action completeness criteria specified in Section 13280-3.03.
22
23 K. A final visual observation will be performed by the Consultant and Owner (or his
24 representative) after final clean-up to inspect visible dust, dirt and debris and areas
25 of damage.
26
27 L. Contractor shall perform additional cleaning of areas if, in the opinion of the Owner,
28 based upon the final visual observation, previous clean-up operations were
29 determined to be inadequate.
30
31 M. Any area whose air test results fail to comply with Paragraph J of this Section will be
32 retested following re -cleaning of the areas. Contractor shall pay all costs
33 associated with retesting.
34
35 END OF SECTION
36
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-13 March 2019
1 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT - CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION
2
3
4 Date: Terracon Project No.
5
6 Owner: Contractor:
7
8 Facility:
9
10 Address:
11
12
13
14
15
16 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT
17
18 I CERTIFY: That work under the above named contract has/have been satisfactorily completed
19 and that the work area has been inspected in general accordance with the field observation
20 portions of the ASTM E1368 - 11 Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos
21 Abatement Projects.
22
23 Name: Signature/Date:
24 (Printed)
25
26
27
28
29 STATEMENT OF CONSULTANT
30
31 To the best of my knowledge and belief, the work under the above-named contract has been
32 satisfactorily completed under the terms of the contract and that the contractor has satisfactorily
33 completed the job in accordance with the terms of the contract.
34
35 Name: Signature/Date:
36 (Printed)
37
38
ASBESTOS PRE -DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
02080-14 March 2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02083
2
3 LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 Perform all planning, administrative, execution, and cleaning requirements necessary to
10 safely perform specified lead-based paint abatement as described in this specification
11 and in the drawings.
12
13 1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK
14
15 A. Work Included, shall include as identified in Terracon Consultants, Inc., Pre -
16 Demolition NESHAP Asbestos Survey, Lead -Based Paint and Hazardous Materials
17 Survey Report, dated January 19, 2017 (Terracon Report):
18
1
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-1 03/22/19
1
Sample location
Compone
nt
Color
Substra
to
Primary Pump House — 1 FL — Pipe, 10"
Pipe
Yellow
Metal
Primary Pump House — 1 FL — Pipe, 6"
Pipe
Green
Metal
Primary Pump House — 1 FL — Valve, 6"
Valve
Green
Metal
Primary Pump House — 1 FL — Pump #2 — Valve
Valve
Red
Metal
Primary Pump House — 1 FL — Sludge Pump #1
Pump
Light
Blue
Metal
Primary Pump House — 1 FL — Stairs
Step
Yellow
Concret
e
Primary Pump House — North Tank — Drive Motor
Motor
Red
Metal
Headworks — Lower Level — Grit Pumps — Pipe, 6"
Pipe
Green
Metal
Headworks — Lower Level — Grit Pumps — Pipe, 6"
Pipe
Black
Metal
Headworks — Lower Level — Grit Pump — Pipe, 36"
Pipe
Gray
Metal
Irrigation System — Reclaimed Water Pump #2
Pump
Gray
Metal
Irrigation System — Reclaimed Water — Electric Panel
Cabinet
Doors
Gray
Metal
Irrigation System — Reclaimed Water — Storage Box
Lid/Cover
Gray
Metal
Irrigation System — Reclaimed Water — Natural Gas
Pipeline, 3"
Pipe
Orange
Metal
Irrigation System — Reclaimed Water — Pump #2
Motor
Gray
Metal
Irrigation System — Reclaimed Water — Wall
Wall
Light
Yellow
Concret
e
Irrigation System — Reclaimed Water — Roof Support
Beam
Beam
Yellow
Wood
Irrigation System — Reclaimed Water — Overhead PVC
Drain Pipe, 2"
Pipe
Yellow
PVC
Irrigation System — Chlorine Feed System Room
Wall
White
CMU
Irrigation System — Chlorine Feed System Room
Wall
Gray
CMU
Irrigation System — Chlorine Feed System Room
Door
Frame
Yellow
Metal
1
2 B. Work Not Included:
3
4
5
6
7
1. Area air monitoring.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT '
02083-2 03/22/19
1
1
1 C. Definitions:
2 1. Abatement - procedures to decrease or eliminate exposure to lead-based
3 substances that may results in lead toxicity or poisoning, by the removal or
4 demolition of lead -containing substances, by thorough cleanup procedures,
5 and by post -cleanup treatment of surfaces.
6 2. Action Level - employee exposure, without regard to the use of respirators,
7 to an airborne concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air
8 (ug/m3) calculated as an 8 hour time weighted average.
9 3. Air Monitoring - the process of measuring the lead content of a specific
10 volume of air in a stated period of time.
11 4. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12 5. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
13 6. Clean Room - an uncontaminated area or room which is part of the worker
14 decontamination enclosure system, with provisions for storage of workers'
15 street clothes and protective equipment. Also known as the "Change
16 Room".
17 7. Contractor - any business entity, public unit, or person performing the actual
18 abatement for a lead abatement project.
19 8. Cleaning Solution - solution which contains at least one ounce of 5 percent
20 Trisodium Phosphate (TSP) to each gallon of hot water.
21 9. Decontamination Enclosure System - a series of connected rooms, with
22 curtained doorways between any two adjacent rooms, for the
23 decontamination of workers or of materials and equipment.
24 10. Encapsulation - to resurface or cover surfaces and to seal or caulk seams
25 with durable material, so as to prevent or control chalking or flaking of lead -
26 containing substances.
27 11. Enclosure - procedures necessary to completely enclose material
28 containing lead-based paint behind airtight, impermeable, permanent
29 barriers.
30 12. EPA - United States Environmental Protection Agency.
31 13. Equipment Room - a contaminated area or room which is part of the
32 decontamination enclosure system, with provisions for storage of
33 contaminated clothing and equipment.
34 14. HEPA Filter - a High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filter capable of
35 trapping and retaining 99.97 percent of thermally generated DOP particles
36 0.3 microns in diameter.
37 15. HEPA Vacuum Equipment - High Efficiency Particulate Air filtered
I38 vacuuming equipment with a filter system capable of collecting and
39 retaining asbestos fibers. Filters should be 99.97 percent efficient for
40 retaining thermally generated DOP particles 0.3 microns in diameter.
I 41
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-3 03/22/19
1
1 16. Lead - metallic lead, all inorganic lead compounds, and organic lead soaps.
2 17. Lead Abatement Project - any work performed in order to abate the
3 presence of a lead -containing substance.
4 18. Lead -Based Paint - any paint, plaster, or other surface coating material
5 containing more than 0.50 percent lead by weight calculated as lead metal
6 in the dried solid, or more than 1.0 milligrams per square centimeter by x-
7 ray fluorescence.
8 19. NESHAPS - National Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants.
9 20. NIOSH - National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.
10 21. OSHA - United States Occupational Safety & Health Administration.
11 22. PEL - Permissible Exposure Limit. Employee exposure to an airborne
12 concentration of lead of 50 micrograms per cubic meter of air (ug/m3)
13 calculated as an 8 hour time weighted average. For work periods of less
14 than 8 hours, the PEL is reduced according to the following formula:
15
16
Allowable Employee Exposure = 400
hrs. worked in the day
17 When respirators are used, employee exposures may be considered to be
18 at the level provided by the protection factor of the respirator for those
19 periods where a respirator is worn. The periods may be averaged with
20 exposure levels during periods when respirators are not worn to determine
21 the employee's daily TWA.
22 23. Plastic Sheeting - plastic sheet material used for protection of dumpsters,
23 trucks, and used to air intakes adjacent to the work areas. The thickness of
24 the material shall be as specified.
25 24. Removal - the act of removing lead -containing or contaminated materials
26 from a structure under properly controlled conditions and depositing in a
27 suitable disposal site.
28 25. Scaffolding - self-supporting and load bearing temporary structure.
29 26. Surface Stabilization - means repairing any physical defect in the
30 substrate of a painted surface that is causing paint deterioration, removing
31 loose paint and other material from the surface to be treated, and applying
32 a new protective coating or paint.
33 27. TCLP - Toxic Characteristic Leachate Potential. Test conducted to
34 determine compliance with the U. S. EPA RCRA regulations (40 CFR 261).
35 28. TSD — Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facility
36 29. Wet Cleaning - the process of eliminating lead contamination from building
37 surfaces and objects by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning tools which
38 have been dampened with TSP cleaning solution, and by afterwards
39 disposing of these cleaning tools as lead.
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-4 03/22/19
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 30. Work Area - Area or areas of Project which undergo "abatement" or are
2 contaminated.
3
4 D. Approval of or acceptance by Consultant of various construction activities or
5 methods proposed by Contractor does not constitute an assumption of liability
6 either by the Consultant or Owner for inadequacy or adverse consequences of
7 said activities or methods.
8
9 1.03 QUALITY CRITERIA
10
11 A. Qualifications for Performance of Work:
12
13 1. Contractor (or subcontractor engaged to perform the removal of lead-based
14 paint material) shall:
15
16 a. Have a record of not less than two years successful experience in
17 lead-based paint removal and related work similar in scope and
18 magnitude to this project.
19
20 b. Maintain on-site, a Superintendent and one Head Foreman, each
21 having not Tess than one year of full-time experience in responsible
22 charge of lead removal operations similar in scope and magnitude to
23 this project within the three-year period preceding start of project.
24 Superintendent and Head Foreman must be approved by Consultant
25 or prior to the start of the work and shall not be changed without prior
26 approval of the Consultant. Head Foreman shall remain inside the
27 work area at all times the work is in progress. Submit certification of
28 successful completion of training course for lead abatement
29 supervisors as required by 40 CFR 745, Subpart L, (preferred) or
30 OSHA -related equivalent.
31
32 c. Use only trained and experienced lead abatement removal workers
33 to perform the work. Train in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.62.
34 Submit documentation of each workers training in the pre job
35 submittal package required in Part 1.0 of this Section.
36
37 B. Reference Standards:
38
39 1. The Contractor acknowledges, by the executing of the Contract, awareness
40 and familiarity with the contents and requirements of the following
41 regulations, codes, standards, and guidance documents, and assumes
42 responsibility for the performance of the Work in strict compliance therewith
43 and, for every instance of failure, to comply therewith.
44
45 2. The current issue of each document shall govern. Where conflict among
46 requirements or with the Contract Documents exists, the more stringent
47 requirements shall apply.
48
49 a. Department of Housing and Urban Development; Guidelines for the
50 Evaluation and Control of Lead -Based Paint Hazards in Housing.
51
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-5 03/22/19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
b.
c.
d.
e.
ANSI Publications: Z88.2-80; Practices for Respiratory Protection.
Environmental Protection Agency: SW -846/1311 Toxicity
Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP).
NIOSH: 81-123; Occupational Health Guidelines for Chemical
Hazards.
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Publications:
29 CFR 1910.134
29 CFR 1926
29 CFR 1910
40 CFR 61
40 CFR 261
40 CFR 262
40 CFR 263
40 CFR 745
49 CFR 171-179
24 CFR 35.24
f. ASTM Standards:
9.
E1796-97
E1797-03
OSHA Respiratory Protection
OSHA Standards for Construction Industry (esp.
1926.62 Lead)
OSHA Standards for General Industry (esp.
1910.1025 Lead)
EPA NESHAP
EPA Regulations Identifying Hazardous Waste
EPA Regulations for Hazardous Waste
Generators
EPA Regulations for Hazardous Waste
Transporters
EPA Lead Based Paint Rules
DOT Hazardous Material Regulations
HUD Subpart C Inspection & Hazard
Assessment Requirements
Standard Guide for Selection and Use of Liquid
Coating Encapsulation Products for Leaded
Paint in Buildings
Standard Specification for Reinforced Liquid
Coating Encapsulation Products for Leaded
Paint in Buildings
All state, county, and city codes and ordinances as applicable. Make
available for review at the site one copy of HUD, OSHA, and
applicable State, County, and City Regulations governing the Work.
1.04 PATENT/COPYRIGHT COMPLIANCE
Comply with all patent and copyright laws involved with processes, equipment and
materials regarding the work of the Contract Documents.
1.05 TEST REPORTS
A. Sampling of painted surfaces within the areas scheduled for demolition by the
Owner generally indicated the presence of paint containing lead. A summary is
provided - for awareness purposes only - in Section 1.02.
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-6 03/22/19
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 B. Results of tests of lead-based paints taken from surfaces within the scope of this
2 Project are available for review at the office of the Owner. However, the Contractor
3 or subcontractor is cautioned that, should interpretations be made, opinions be
4 formed, and conclusions be drawn as a result of examining the test results, those
5 interpretations, opinions, and conclusions will be those made, formed, and drawn
6 solely by the Contractor or subcontractor.
7
8 C. Inasmuch as randomly and/or arbitrarily selected areas were sampled, the
9 Consultant and Owner make no representation, warranty, nor guarantee that the
10 conditions indicated by the test reports either are representative of those
11 conditions existing throughout the area, or that unforeseen developments may not
12 occur, or that materials other than, or in proportions different from, those indicated
13 may not exist.
14
15 1.06 DAILY LOG
16
17 A. The Contractor shall maintain at the work site, a daily log documenting the dates
18 and time of, but not limited to, the following items:
19
20 1. Meetings; purpose, attendees, brief discussion.
21 2. Visitations; authorized and unauthorized.
22 3. Personnel; by name, entering and leaving the work area.
23 4. Special or unusual events; i.e. barrier breaching, equipment failures,
24 accidents.
25 5. Air monitoring tests and test results (included OSHA compliance
26 monitoring).
27 6. Evidence of the work area being maintained under diminished air pressure
28 by means of a strip recorder chart.
29 7. Documentation of Contractor's completion of the following:
30
31 a. Inspection of the work area preparation prior to start of lead removal
32 activities and daily thereafter.
33 b. Removal of any sheet plastic barriers.
34 c. Contractor's inspections prior to lock -down, encapsulation, or any
35 other operation that will conceal the condition of lead materials or the
36 substrate from which such materials have been removed.
37 d. Removal of waste materials from the work area.
38 e. Contractor's final inspection/final air tests.
39
40 B. Submit copies of this log at final closeout of project as a project closeout submittal.
41
42 1.07 SUBMITTALS
43
44 A. Submittals Prior to Beginning Work:
45
46 1. Lead Paint Removal Plan - Submit a detailed job -specific plan of the work
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-7 03/22/19
1 procedures to be used in the removal of paint containing lead or removal of
2 building components containing lead based paints. The plan shall be
3 prepared, signed, and dated by the Contractor. Such plan shall include a
4 sketch (or sketches) showing the location, size, and details of lead control
5 areas. The plan shall also include interface of trades involved in the work,
6 sequencing of lead removal work, waste disposal plan, personal air
7 monitoring, respirators, and protective equipment will be used, and a
8 detailed description of the method to be employed in order to control the
9 generation of airborne lead. The plan will describe the protective measures
10 to be taken to protect workers and the public from exposure to lead at a
11 level greater than or equal to 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air at all
12 times. The plan shall include cleanup procedures and specify the
13 cleanliness requirements and airborne lead levels which must be achieved
14 prior to the disestablishment of a lead control area, and the methods that
15 will be used to determine these requirements have been met. The plan
16 shall be approved by the Consultant prior to the start of lead paint removal
17 work. Prior to beginning work, the Contractor, Consultant, and Owner's
18 Representative shall meet to discuss in detail the lead removal plan,
19 including work procedures and safety precautions.
20 2. Contractor's Testing Laboratory - Submit name, address, and telephone
21 number of the Contractor's Testing Laboratory selected to analyze the
22 representative samples of waste by TCLP (if required), personal air
23 samples, and blood samples.
24 3. Contractor's testing laboratory will perform air testing according to the
25 method prescribed by Section 1910.1926.62 of OSHA CFR Title 29 and
26 analyzed in accordance with the procedures outlined by current NIOSH
27 methods.
28 4. Training Certification: Submit evidence of each supervisor and foreman
29 training.
30 5. Report from Medical Examination: Submit a doctor's written opinion for a
31 medical examination conducted within the last 12 months as part of
32 compliance with OSHA medical surveillance requirements for each worker
33 who is to enter the Work Area, or wear a negative -pressure respirator.
34 6. Notarized Certifications: Submit a notarized certification, signed by an
35 officer of the abatement contracting firm, that exposure measurements,
36 medical surveillance, and worker training records are being kept in
37 conformance with 29 CFR 1926.62.
38 7 Respiratory Protection Schedule: Submit level of respiratory protection
39 intended for each operation required by the project. Submit this information
40 on the "Respiratory Protection Schedule" form included in Section 1.10.
41 8. Respirator Fitting Documentation: Submit documentation indicating
42 successful fit check testing of respirators for the individuals working on this
43 project in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.134.
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-8 03/22/19
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 9. Submit to the Consultant a sample in/out log as required in Part 3 of this
2 section.
3 10. Submit product data indicating compliance with the contract documents for
4 products and equipment to be utilized on the project. Include
5 manufacturer's instructions and SDS sheets (as applicable).
6
7 B. Submittals Following Completion of the Work
8
9 1. Submit to the Consultant, manifests which indicate the Contractor's
10 delivery(s) of hazardous waste materials to TSD facility. Manifest shall
11 include date, quantity of material delivered, and signature of authorized
12 representative of TSD.
13
14 2. Submit to the Consultant copies of daily in/out logs and daily logs (including
15 pressure differential monitor strip charts, if employed).
16
17 3. Submit to the Consultant evidence of compliance with the applicable OSHA
18 regulation including, as a minimum, copies of employee air monitoring
19 results or representative background data.
20
21 1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING
22
23 A. Deliver all materials as described in Part 2 in the original packages, containers, or
24 bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand name.
25
26 B. Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp
27 surfaces, and under cover sufficient to prevent damage or contamination.
28
29 C. Remove from the premises all damaged or deteriorating materials. Dispose of
30 materials that become contaminated with lead-based paint in accordance with
31 applicable regulatory standards.
32
33 1.09 WORKSITE CONDITIONS
34
35 A. Worker and Visitor Procedures: The Contractor is hereby advised that lead-based
36 paint has been determined by the U.S. Government to be a toxic substance and
37 Contractor shall provide workers and authorized visitors with respirators which as a
38 minimum shall meet the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1910.134 and protective
39 clothing during work area preparation, prior to commencing, during actual lead -
40 based paint removal, and until final cleanup is completed.
41
42 1.10 PERSONNEL PROTECTION
43
44 A. Prior to commencement of work, all workers shall be instructed by the Contractor
45 and shall be knowledgeable, in the appropriate procedures of personnel protection
46 and lead-based paint removal.
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-9 03/22/19
1
2 B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that he is solely responsible for enforcing
3 worker protection requirements at least equal to those required by federal
4 regulations.
5
6 C. In accordance with OSHA lead standard for the construction industry regulation
7 (29 CFR 1926.62), the contractor shall initially assume that employee exposures
8 area greater than the PEL, but not greater than ten times the PEL, and shall
9 implement the following employee protective measures:
10
11 1. Appropriate respiratory protection
12 2. Appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment
13 3. Change Areas and hygiene facilities
14 4. Biological monitoring including sampling and analysis for lead, zinc, and
15 protoporphyrin levels
16
17 Regardless of the results of the assessment of employee exposures, the minimum
18 acceptable level of personnel protection shall be the use of half -face, disposable
19 cartridge respirators and protective clothing.
20
21 D. Contractor shall provide workers with personally issued and marked respiratory
22 equipment approved by NIOSH and OSHA and as a minimum suitable for the lead
23 exposure level in the work areas.
24
25 1. Type of respiratory protection required:
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
a. Provide Respiratory Protection as allowed by these specifications.
For the work of all sections, the level of respiratory protection which
supplies an airborne lead concentration inside the respirator below
50 micrograms of lead per cubic meter (mg/m3) is the minimum level
of protection allowed. Determine the proper level of protection by
dividing the expected or actual airborne lead concentration in the
Work Area by the "Protection Factors" given below:
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION FACTOR
AIRBORNE
CONCENTRATION OF
LEAD
REQUIRED RESPIRATOR
PROTECTION FACTOR
Not in excess of 500 ug/m3
1/2 Mask Air Purifying with
HEPA Filters
10
Not in excess of 1,250
ug/m3
Loose Fitting Hood or
Helmet Powered Air
Purifying with HEPA Filters
25
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-10
03/22/19
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION FACTOR
AIRBORNE
CONCENTRATION OF
LEAD
REQUIRED RESPIRATOR
PROTECTION FACTOR
Not in excess of 2,500
ug/m3
Full-Facepiece Air Purifying
Respirator with HEPA
Filters, or
Tight Fitting Powered Air
Purifying with HEPA Filters,
or
Full Facepiece supplied Air
Respirator in a continuous
Flow Mode, or
Full Facepiece Self -
Contained Breathing
apparatus(SCBA)
Operated in the Demand
Mode
50
Not in excess of 50,000
ug/m3
1/2 Mask Supplied Air
Respirator Operated in the
Pressure Demand Mode
1,000
Not in excess of 100,000
ug/m3
Full Facepiece Supplied Air
Respirator Operated in the
Pressure Demand Mode
2,000
1
2 D. Where respirators with disposable filters are used, provide sufficient filters for
3 replacement as necessary by the workers, or as required by applicable
4 regulations.
5 E. Permit no visitors, except for governmental inspectors having jurisdiction, or as
6 authorized by Consultant or Owner, in the work areas after commencement of
7 lead-based paint disturbance or removal. Provide authorized visitors with suitable
8 respirators in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62 and 1910.1025
9
10 F. Provide workers with sufficient sets of protective disposable clothing, consisting of
11 full-body coveralls, head covers, gloves, and foot covers; of sizes to properly fit
12 individual workers.
13
14 G. Provide authorized visitors with a set of suitable protective disposable clothing,
15 headgear, eye protection, and footwear of sizes to properly fit visitors whenever
16 they are required to enter the work area, to a maximum of six sets per day.
17
18 1.11 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S CONSULTANT
19
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-11 03/22/19
1 A. The Owner will provide a testing laboratory for periodic air monitoring.
2
3 B. Owner has retained a consultant to perform periodic visual observations during
4 execution of the work. Allow Consultant and authorized visitors access to work
5 areas during all phases of the work.
6
7 C. Contractor shall coordinate with, and notify Consultant a minimum of 48 hours prior
8 to work on weekends or holidays to allow coordination of testing and monitoring
9 services.
10
11 1.12 OWNER'S TESTING LABORATORY
12
13 A. The Owner will provide a testing laboratory analysis of final clearance wipe
14 samples within each work area. Final clearance wipes, if required, will be obtained
15 by the Consultant.
16
17 B. The wipe samples from each work area will be transmitted to the laboratory via first
18 available overnight courier service. The results of these samples will be available
19 within five working days following receipt by the laboratory.
20
21 C. The Contractor will be responsible for the costs of retesting for work areas which
22 fail to meet the specified level of cleanliness.
23
24 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
25
26 2.01 MATERIALS
27
28 A. Provide suitable materials for lead-based paint removal.
29
30 1. Impermeable containers - Shall be suitable to receive and retain lead-based
31 paint or contaminated materials until disposal at an approved site and shall
32 be labeled in accordance with U.S. DOT 49 CFR 171 and 172, and the EPA
33 NESHAPS regulations. Containers shall be both air and water- tight. As a
34 minimum, utilize one of the three following types of impermeable containers:
35 1) six mil plastic bags sized to fit within the drum 2) metal or fiber drums
36 with tightly fitting lids 3) leak -tight wrapping with plastic sheeting.
37
38 2. Warning labels and signs - Shall be as required by OSHA regulation 29
39 CFR 1910.1025 (and U.S. DOT 49CFR 171 - 180 for impermeable
40 containers).
41
42 3. Other materials - Provide all other materials, such as lumber, nails and
43 hardware, which may be required to construct and dismantle the
44 decontamination area and the barriers that isolate the work area(s).
45
46 4. Chemical Stripping Agents - Shall be commercially available products
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-12 03/22/19
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 intended for paint removal such as the Peel Away Series manufactured by
2 Dumond Chemicals, or equivalent. Provide incidental products, such as
3 neutralizers, as required by manufacturer's instructions and
4 recommendations.
5
6 5. Plastic Sheeting - Polyethylene sheeting, minimum 6 mil thickness.
7
8 6. Duct Tape - glass fiber or other type capable of securing adjacent sheets of
9 plastic and attachment of plastic sheeting to finished and unfinished
10 surfaces of dissimilar materials under wet and dry conditions.
11
12 7 Cleaning Solution - mixture of at least one ounce of 5 percent TSP to each
13 gallon of hot water, or equivalent.
14
15 2.02 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
16
17 A. Provide suitable tools for lead-based paint removal.
18
19 1. Air Purifying Equipment - HEPA filtration systems. Verify that no air
20 movement system or purification exhausts contaminated air from inside the
21 work area into uncontaminated areas.
22
23 2. Scaffolding - Shall be as required to accomplish the specified work and
24 shall meet all applicable safety regulations.
25
26 3. Transportation - As required for loading, temporary storage, transit, and
27 unloading of contaminated waste without exposure to persons or property.
28 Use only enclosed or covered trucks to haul waste containers to prevent
29 loss or damage enroute to the landfill.
30
31 4. Vacuum Equipped Pneumatic Needle Scaler - A commercially available
32 pneumatic needle scaler such as to Corner -Cutter equipped with Vac-Pac
33 manufactured by Pentek, Inc., or equivalent possessing a minimum of:
34
35 a. A 2 -stage filter consisting of reverse pulse filter and a HEPA filter
36 efficient to 99.97% at 0.3 microns.
37
38 b. Direct loading of waste material into 55 -gallon or 21 -gallon disposal
39 drums.
40
41 c. Shrouds sized to conform to window frame contours.
42
43 PART 3 - EXECUTION
44
45 3.01 PREPARATION AND WORK AREA ENCLOSURE
46
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-13 03/22/19
1 A. Identify location and amount of all lead-based paint materials to be removed
2 present in areas indicated on Drawings.
3
4 B. Establish a regulated area where lead-based paint removal will be performed.
5 Seal openings and penetrations within the Work Area with 6 mil plastic sheeting
6 secured with tape.
7
8 C. Coordinate sequence of work area preparation with Owner and other trades to
9 properly segregate work areas from areas that must remain fully or partially
10 operational or in which other construction is being performed.
11
12 D. Construct worker decontamination units adjacent to the regulated area where lead -
13 based paint removal will take place. Construct decontamination unit in compliance
14 with OSHA guidelines concerning number, size, and placement of chambers.
15 Shower in decontamination unit shall be open on two sides and open to
16 contaminated and non -contaminated areas.
17
18 E. Plastic Sheeting Enclosures (as applicable). Cover floor with a minimum of two
19 layers of 6 mil plastic sheeting turning each layer up walls 16 inches and fastened
20 to wall. Cover walls which are not to be demolished or receive lead paint removal,
21 with two layers of 6 mil plastic sheeting overlapping upturned floor plastic 12
22 inches. Glue and tape in such a manner as to prohibit the movement of air
23 through joints in plastic sheeting.
24
25 F. As applicable, place the interior work areas under diminished air pressure utilizing
26 HEPA equipped fan units which comply with ANSI Z9.2-79. Allow no discharge of
27 unfiltered air outside work area. Maintain diminished air pressure continuously
28 until completion of lead-based paint removal. Maintain a minimum of 0.02 inches
29 of water diminished air pressure for fully enclosed work areas.
30
31 G. Maintain emergency and fire exits from the work areas, or establish alternative
32 exits satisfactory to fire officials.
33
34 H. Maintain for the duration of the project from the first activity requiring disturbance of
35 lead-based paint materials, a sign in/out log in the immediate area of the work
36 area. Log shall be utilized by every person and each time upon entering and
37 leaving the work area(s). Submit copies of this log to Consultant in accordance
38 with Part 1 of this section for permanent file upon completion of Project.
39
40
41 I. Trap and filter wastewater using filters having a pore size of not larger than one
42 micron. Drain wastewater into a sanitary sewer. Replace contaminated filters
43 when they become clogged but not less than every third day. Dispose of filters as
44 hazardous waste.
45
46 3.02 REMOVAL OF LEAD-BASED PAINT
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-14 03/22/19
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 A. Properly remove and dispose of all lead-based paint materials indicated to be
3 removed as described in the Contract Documents in accordance with the methods
4 and procedures outlined in 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 745, 49 CFR 171-179, 29 CFR
5 1926.62, or as more stringently specified herein;
6
7 1. Prepare Work Areas as previously specified.
8
9 2. Properly remove lead-based paint from specified interior building
10 components by use of approved chemical methods or approved mechanical
11 stripping techniques.
12
13 3. Demolish and remove specified finish assemblies with lead paint in whole
14 sections. Conduct demolition and/or lead -paint removal in such a manner
15 as to minimize the disturbance to lead-based paint and generation of dust.
16
17 4. In lieu of lead based paint removal from the substrate, the painted
18 component may be removed as a whole and disposed of as hazardous
19 materials, as noted in section 3.04. Noted items shall be wrapped with 2
20 layers of 6 mill poly prior to disposal.
21
22 5. After removal of lead-based paint material and/or building components
23 containing lead based paint, all abated and surrounding surfaces shall be
24 wet -cleaned with a TSP solution to remove residual accumulated material.
25 Continue wet -cleaning until surface is free of visible material.
26
27 3.03 WORK AREA DECONTAMINATION
28
29 A. After completion of the removal, the Contractor shall;
30
31 1. Deposit all non -hazardous waste, including sealing tape, plastic sheeting,
32 mop heads, sponges, filters, and disposable clothing in double plastic bags
33 of at least 4 mil thickness, or single bags of minimum 6 mil thickness, and
34 seal the bags;
35
36 2. Deposit all hazardous waste in 55 -gallon drums, tanks, or other containers
37 suitable for the type of waste generated provided by Owner;
38
39 3. Before washing as required in paragraph 3.03 A.(4), vacuum clean all
40 surfaces in the work area with a HEPA filtered vacuum;
41
42 4. After vacuum cleaning as required in paragraph 3.03 A (3), wet wash all
43 surfaces in the work area with a solution containing at least one ounce of 5
44 percent trisodium phosphate to each gallon of hot water; and
45 5. After washing as required in paragraph 3.03 A (4), vacuum clean all
46 surfaces after they have dried, with a HEPA filtered vacuum until no visible
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-15 03/22/19
1 residue remains.
2 B. Standard of Cleaning for Final Clearance:
3
4 1. Consider work areas and all other decontaminated and cleaned areas clean
5 when;
6
7 a. Visual Inspection - The Contractor shall perform a complete visual
8 inspection of the entire Work Area including: all surfaces, ceilings,
9 walls, floors, decontamination unit, all plastic sheeting, seals over
10 ventilation openings, doorways, windows, and other openings; look
11 for debris from any sources, residue on surfaces, dust, or other
12 matter. If any debris, residue, dust, or other matter is found, repeat
13 final cleaning and continue decontamination procedure from that
14 point. When the Work Area is visually clean, and no debris, residue,
15 dust, or other material is found, complete the certification found at
16 the end of this Section. The visual inspection is not complete until
17 confirmed in writing, on the statement by the Consultant.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
b. When a thorough visual inspection by the Contractor indicates that
each area is clean and ready for clearance sampling, wipe samples
will be collected from representative surfaces (if present). Samples
will be collected no sooner than one hour after the completion of
cleaning. A minimum of one wipe sample will be collected from each
surface type within the abatement area. Decontamination of each
work area is complete when the lead concentration for each sample
collected within the work area is below the following levels:
Component
Clearance Level
Sills or other Elevated Horizontal
Surfaces
250 ug/ft2
Troughs, concrete, or other rough
surfaces
400 ug/ft2
Wipe testing will be performed in general accordance with the HUD
Guidelines for the Evaluation and Control of Lead Based Paint
c. Substantial Completion of Abatement Work - Lead abatement work
is substantially complete upon meeting the requirements of this
Section including submission of:
1. Certificate of Visual Inspection.
2. Receipts and manifests documenting proper disposal as
required by Part 3.04.
3. Punch list detailing repairs to be made and incomplete items.
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-16 03/22/19
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 d. Certificate of Visual Inspection - Following this section is a
3 "Certificate of Visual Inspection". This certificate is to be completed
4 by the Contractor and confirmed by the Consultant. Submit the
5 completed certificate as a part of submittals following completion of
6 the work.
7
8 3.04 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED WASTE
9
10 A. Contractor shall be responsible for the testing and disposal of lead-based paint
11 abatement waste and debris as hazardous waste/materials. Contractor shall
12 appropriately test if the waste exhibits the characteristic of ignitability, corrosivity,
13 reactivity, or toxicity as defined in 40 CFR Sections 261.20 to 261.24, per, as a
14 minimum, EPA Method SW.846/1311, or equivalent.
15
16 B. If hazardous, remove labeled containers of hazardous waste and transport to
17 proper treatment, storage, and disposal facility (TSD) as follows:
18
19 1. Seal hazardous waste in Teak -proof impermeable containers labeled in
20 accordance with Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Sections 171 - 180.
21 Contractor may recycle uncontaminated impermeable containers.
22
23 2. Use only enclosed or covered trucks or dumpsters to haul impermeable
24 containers to prevent Toss or damage to containers enroute to TSD facility.
25
26 3. Ensure that there are no volatile or visible emissions to the outside air from
27 site where materials and waste are deposited as a result of materials from
28 this project.
29
30 4. Submit hazardous waste manifest to the Consultant after completion of the
31 Work in accordance with Part 1 of this section.
32
33 5. Final Completion shall not be satisfied until receipt of hazardous waste
34 manifest by Consultant after completion of transportation of hazardous
35 waste.
36
37 C. Solid waste which has been evaluated and determined not to be hazardous can be
38 disposed of in a state -approved landfill which accepts construction debris as
39 follows:
40
41 1. Use only enclosed or covered trucks or dumpsters to haul impermeable
42 containers to prevent Toss or damage to containers enroute to landfill.
43
44 2. Ensure that there are no volatile or visible emissions to the outside air from
45 site where materials and waste are deposited as a result of materials from
46 this project.
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-17 03/22/19
1
2 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3
4 A. A testing laboratory will be provided by the Owner at no cost to the Contractor,
5 except as outlined in other sections of the Contract Documents, to periodically
6 observe the removal process and perform area air monitoring.
7
8 B. Testing laboratory may conduct air monitoring prior to and throughout removal and
9 cleaning operations.
10
11 C. The Consultant's testing laboratory will perform the Owner's testing and confirm
12 the final visual inspection by the Contractor. Such testing and confirmation for the
13 Owner does not relieve the Contractor of providing necessary tests required by
14 other regulations, codes, and standards for the protection of his workers, or for any
15 other purposes.
16
17 D. Consultant's air tests will be made both inside the work areas and outside the work
18 areas and test results will be made available to the Contractor. The Contractor is
19 cautioned, however, that should interpretations be made, opinions be formed, and
20 conclusions be drawn as a result of examining the test results, those
21 interpretations, opinions, and conclusions will be those made, formed, and drawn
22 solely by the Contractor. The Contractor will be responsible for performing air
23 tests required for his evaluation of the safety of his employees.
24
25 E. A preliminary visual observation will be performed in the work area by the
26 Consultant following notification by the Contractor that said areas have been
27 properly cleaned. Areas will be observed for the presence of visible dust, dirt, and
28 debris.
29
30 F. Wipe tests shall be performed in each work area after final clean-up.
31
32 G. After final clean-up of an area is completed, the work area shall satisfactorily pass
33 the final visual inspection criteria specified in Section 3.03.B.
34
35 H A final visual observation will be performed by the Contractor, Consultant and
36 Owner (or his representative, as needed) after final clean-up to inspect visible
37 dust, dirt, debris, and areas of damage.
38
39 I Contractor shall perform additional cleaning of area if, in the opinion of the
40 Consultant based upon the final visual observation, previous clean-up operations
41 were determined to be inadequate. All costs for recleaning required due to failure
42 to meet the specified level of cleanliness shall borne by the Contractor.
43
44
45
46
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-18 03/22/19
1
2
3
1
END OF SECTION 02083
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-19 03/22/19
1
2
3 WORK AREA:
4
5
6 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION OF VISUAL INSPECTION
7
8 In accordance with Section 13285, Part 3.03 (B), the Contractor hereby certifies that he
9 has visually inspected the Work Area (all surfaces including pipes, beams, ledges, walls,
10 ceiling and floor, Decontamination Unit, sheet plastic, etc.) and has found no dust, debris
11 or residue.
12
13
14 by: (Signature Date
15
16 (Print Name) (Print Title)
17
18
19 CONSULTANT'S STATEMENT OF VISUAL INSPECTION
20
21 The Consultant hereby confirms that he has accompanied the Contractor on his visual
22 inspection and verifies that this inspection has been thorough. To the best of his
23 knowledge and belief, the Work Area has been cleaned in substantial conformance with
24 the contract documents.
25
26
27 by: (Signature) Date
28
29 (Print Name) (Print
30 Title)
31
32
33 WORK AREA CLEARANCE
34
35
36 The Consultant hereby confirms that all wipe samples collected and analyzed in
37 accordance with Section 13285 are equal to or below the specified clearance level.
38
39
40 by: (Signature) Date
41
42 (Print Name) (Print
43 Title)
44
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
02083-20 03/22/19
1
1
1 SECTION 02085
2
I
4
3 OTHER HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL
5
I6
7 PART 1 - GENERAL
8
I9 1.01 TRANSFORMERS AND BATTERIES
10
11 A. Prior to initiating demolition activities, the Contractor shall remove and properly
I12 disposed of the electrical transformer and the two (2) acid batteries associated
13 with the generator in the vicinity of the irrigation tank/chlorine feed system
14 room in accordance with Federal, state, and local regulations. The acid
I
15
16 batteries shall be recycled or sent to an EPA -certified waste disposal facility.
17 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
18
19 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
20
21
22
23 END OF SECTION
1 24
25
I
26
27
28
29
30
31
I
32
33
34
I
35
36
37
I
38
39
40
'41
42
43
1
44
1
1
1
1
OTHER HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL
02085-1 03/22/2019
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
OTHER HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL
02085-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02100
2
3 SITE PREPARATION
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. This Section covers clearing, grubbing, stripping, proof -rolling, and
10 undercutting.
11
12 B. The Contractor shall clear and grub all of the area within the limits of
13 construction, or as required, which includes, but is not limited to, utility
14 easements. The width of the area to be cleared shall be reviewed by the
15 Engineer prior to the beginning of any clearing.
16
17 C. Embankment and structure areas shall be proof -rolled. Proof -rolling must be
18 observed on a full time basis by the Engineer or Owner's Representative.
19 Undercutting of unsatisfactory materials will be as recommended by the
20 Engineer or Owner's Representative.
21
22 D. Undercutting unsatisfactory soils will likely extend below the prevailing water
23 table. Temporary construction dewatering may be required.
24
25 E. The Contractor's attention is directed to any and all applicable Local, State or
26 Federal Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control and water discharge
27 ordinances. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable sections of these
28 ordinances and obtain all required permits.
29
30 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
31
32 A. The Owner will select and pay for a qualified geotechnical engineering and
33 testing laboratory (Testing Laboratory) to monitor all aspects of this section.
34 Scheduling shall be performed by the Engineer.
35
36 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
37 (Not Used)
38
39 PART 3 — EXECUTION
40
41 3.01 CLEARING
42
43 A. The area to be cleared shall be completely cleared of all timber, brush, stumps,
44 roots, grass, weeds, rubbish, asphalt, base material, piping, pond inlets and all
45 other objectionable obstructions resting on or protruding through the surface of
46 the ground. However, trees designated by the Engineer will be preserved as
47 hereinafter specified. Clearing operations shall be conducted so as to prevent
SITE PREPARATION
02100-1 12/17/2020
1 damage to existing structures and installations.
2
3 3.02 GRUBBING
4
5 A. Grubbing shall consist of the complete removal of all stumps, roots, matted
6 roots, brush, timber, logs, and any other organic or metallic debris not suitable
7 for support purposes, resting on, under or protruding through the surface of the
8 ground to a depth of 18 inches below the subgrade unless otherwise noted on
9 the Drawings.
10
11 3.03 STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING
12
13 A. The entire site shall be stripped and cleared of all surface vegetation, root -laden
14 topsoil, and pond or wetland muck. Stripping about of unsuitable materials
15 should be anticipated in non -pond areas. Removal of pond or wetland muck is
16 not expected on this project.
17
18 B. In areas so designated, and impacted wetlands, topsoil and pond muck shall be
19 stockpiled for replacement as topsoil in the affected areas to promote vegetation
20 growth. Topsoil and pond muck, so stockpiled, shall be protected until the
21 material is placed as specified. The Contractor shall dispose at their own
22 expense of any of these materials remaining after all work is in place.
23
24 3.04 STOCKPILING
25
26 A. Material identified by the Engineer as satisfactory structural fill shall be
27 stockpiled in an area approved by the Engineer. This stockpile shall be
28 protected until the material is placed as specified. The Contractor shall dispose
29 of any of these materials remaining after all work is in place.
30
31 B. Siltation and erosion control measures shall be in place in all stockpile areas to
32 prevent turbid runoff and remain in compliance with the environmental permits
33 and applicable regulations.
34
35 3.05 DISPOSAL OF CLEARED AND GRUBBED MATERIAL
36
37 A. The Contractor shall dispose of all material and debris from the clearing and
38 grubbing operation by hauling such material and debris off-site.
39
40
41 END OF SECTION
SITE PREPARATION
02100-2 12/17/2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02125
2
3 SILT BARRIERS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The work included under this section consists of furnishing all necessary labor,
10 equipment, tools and materials, and in performing all operations in connection
11 with the installation of a staked silt barrier, of cloth or straw bales, or a floating silt
12 barrier for the protection of open water, wetland systems or areas intended to
13 remain undisturbed by adjoining work.
14
15 B. This work shall be performed in strict accordance with the requirements of all
16 applicable sections of these specifications and in conformity with lines, grades,
17 notes and typical sections as shown on the drawings, as directed by the Engineer
18 or as directed by representatives of governmental agencies having permitting
19 jurisdiction over areas to be protected.
20
21 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
22
23 2.01 STAKED FABRIC SILT BARRIER
24
25 A. The sediment control fabric is to be woven polypropylene meeting the following
26 standards:
27
28 Mullen Burst Test (ASTM D-3786) 200 psi (min.)
29 Grab Elongation (ASTM D-1682) 30% (max.)
30 Slurry Flow Rate (VTM-51) 0.3 gpm/sf (min.)
31 Retention Efficiency (VTM-51) 75% (min.)
32
33 B. The fabric shall be provided in widths adequate to provide a barrier of a minimum
34 of 24 inches in height and allow for 8 inches of fabric to be buried for restraint.
35
36 PART 3 — EXECUTION
37
38 3.01 STAKED CLOTH SILT BARRIER
39
40 A. The sediment control fabric shall be attached per the manufacturer's
41 recommendations to the uphill or sediment producing side of the stakes. The
42 stakes shall be spaced at 6 to 10 foot intervals. A 4" to 6" trench shall be dug
43 along the fence line and backfilled with the bottom 10 inches of control fabric in
44 place.
45
46 B. The ends of each unit of fence shall be connected to adjoining fence sections
47 with a connector provided by the manufacturer or by intertwining the two end
SILT BARRIERS
02125-1
03/22/2019
1 posts to overlap the fabric sufficiently to prevent sediment from escaping, as
2 shown in the Drawings.
3
4 3.02 STAKED STRAW/SYNTHETIC BALES
5
6 A. Securely bound straw/synthetic bales may be used as a sediment barrier.
7 The bales shall be securely bound with two strands of rope or wire. The
8 bales shall be positioned in a 4 inch trench along the plan alignment and
9 each bale is to be secured by driving two 1 "x 2" stakes or #5 rebar through
10 the bale and 6" min. into the ground. The tops of the stakes shall then be
11 secured by a continuous wire tie.
12
13 B. Deteriorated bales shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer.
14
15 3.03 REMOVAL
16
17 A. Upon obtaining Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall be responsible
18 for the complete removal of all silt barriers unless so directed by the
19 Engineer. Following removal, all materials shall become the property of the
20 Contractor.
21
22
23 END OF SECTION
SILT BARRIERS
02125-2 03/22/2019
1
1 1 SECTION 02140
2
' 4
3 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
I6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
I
9 A. The Work to be performed includes the furnishing of all equipment, materials
10 and labor necessary to remove surface or subsurface waters from excavation
11 areas in accordance with the requirements set forth and as shown on the
I
12 Drawings or as specified.
13
14 B. Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe and structures shall be
15 laid "in the dry".
16
17 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I 18
19 A. The dewatering of any excavation areas and the disposal of the water
20 produced shall be in strict accordance with the latest revision of all Laws and
1
21 Regulations; with the local, State and Federal permits for the project; and, with
22 the Contractor's approved Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).
23
I24 B. The Contractor shall comply with the FDEP Generic Permit for the Disposal of
25 Non -contaminated Produced Groundwater per Chapter 62-621.300 F.A.C.
26
27 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
28
29 PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
30
31 3.01 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
32
33 A. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
34 approval the Contractor's plans for dewatering. The dewatering system shall
I
35 be in conformity with the overall construction plan.
36
37 B. The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for the removal of surface or
I
39
38 subsurface waters that may accumulate in the excavation. Flotation and
migration of fines shall be prevented by the Contractor by maintaining a
40 positive and continuous operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor
I41 shall be fully responsible and liable for all damages that may result from the
42 operation and/or failure of this system.
43
I44 C. If subsurface water is encountered, the Contractor shall utilize suitable
45 equipment to adequately dewater the excavation so that it will be dry to a
46 depth of 12 -inches below the pipeline subgrade compaction level or over-
' 47 excavation level, whichever is lower, but not more than 5 -feet, to facilitate
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-1 03/22/2019
1
1 effective subgrade compaction and to provide for a stable trench bottom. For
2 concrete structures, the dewatering system shall maintain the water at such a
3 level at least 2 feet below the subgrade of the structure. A wellpoint system,
4 trench drain, sump pump operation, or other dewatering method shall be
5 selected, designed and utilized by the Contractor to maintain the excavation in
6 a dry condition for preparation of the trench bottom and thereafter until the fills,
7 structures or pipes to be built thereon have been completed to such extent that
8 they will not be floated or otherwise damaged by allowing water levels to
9 return to natural levels. No water shall be allowed to contact masonry or
10 concrete within 24 hours after being placed.
11
12 D. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve
13 the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at proposed bottom of
14 excavation and to preserve the integrity of adjacent structures and utilities.
15 Well or sump installations shall be constructed and operated continuously with
16 proper sand filters to prevent drawing of finer grained soil from the surrounding
17 ground. Dewatering by trench pumping shall not be permitted if migration of
18 fine grained natural material from bottom, side walls, or bedding material may
19 occur.
20
21 E. In the event that satisfactory dewatering cannot be accomplished due to
22 subsurface conditions, or where dewatering could damage existing structures,
23 the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval of wet trench construction
24 or procedure before commencing construction.
25
26 F. Engine -driven dewatering pumps shall be equipped with residential type
27 mufflers. Where practical and feasible, electrical "power drops" and electric
28 motor -driven equipment shall be used in lieu of portable generators.
29
30 G. The Contractor shall take all additional precautions to prevent uplift of any
31 structure during construction.
32
33 H. The Contractor shall take all precautions to preclude the accidental discharge
34 of fuel, oil, etc. to prevent adverse effects on groundwater quality. All costs
35 associated with any such adverse effects shall be borne by the Contractor.
36
37 I. The Contractor shall, at no expense to the Owner, be required to excavate
38 below grade and refill with approved fill material if the Engineer determines
39 that adequate drainage has not been provided.
40
41 3.02 DISPOSAL
42
43 A. All product water from dewatering shall be pumped from the trench or other
44 excavation and shall be disposed of in strict accordance with the Permits. The
45 Contractor will be allowed to discharge product water from dewatering offsite
46 into storm sewers, or ditches having adequate capacity, canals or suitable
47 disposal pits, or other surface waters in accordance with the Contractor's
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, provided that the water has been
2 sampled and tested by the Contractor, is in compliance with the concentration
3 limits specified in 62-621.300(2) FAC, the Contractor has obtained a Generic
4 Permit for the Production of Groundwater, and the Contractor has obtained the
5 permission of the Owner of the recipient storm water system. The frequency
6 of water sampling and testing shall be determined by the Engineer based on
7 existing conditions and field observations.
8
9 B. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the
10 Contractor shall collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must
11 meet acceptable discharge limits per 62-621.300(2) FAC.
12
13 C. Permission to use any storm sewers, or drains, for water disposal purposes
14 shall be obtained from the authority having jurisdiction. Any requirements and
15 costs for such use shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. However, the
16 Contractor shall not cause flooding by overloading or blocking up the flow in
17 the drainage facilities, and shall leave the facilities unrestricted and as clean
18 as originally found. Any damage to existing facilities shall be repaired or
19 restored as directed by the Engineer or the authority having jurisdiction, at no
20 cost to the Owner.
21
22 D. Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring and complying with all permits
23 required to discharge the product water from dewatering and shall protect
24 waterways from turbidity during the operation.
25
26 E. In areas where adequate disposal sites are not available, partially backfilled
27 trenches may be used for water disposal only when the Contractor's plan for
28 trench disposal is approved in writing by the Engineer. The Contractor's plan
29 shall include temporary culverts, barricades and other protective measures to
30 prevent damage to property or injury to any person or persons.
31
32 F. Contractor shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing
33 gutters, pavements or other structures. To do this he will be required to
34 conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge determined by the Engineer.
35
36 G. No flooding of streets, roadways, driveways or private property will be allowed.
37
38 3.03 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
39
40 A. Removal of dewatering equipment shall be accomplished after the system is
41 no longer required. All materials and equipment constituting the system shall
42 be removed by the Contractor.
43
44 B. All sock drains shall be filled with grout when no longer needed, and
45 abandoned in place.
46
47 END OF SECTION
48 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-3 03/22/2019
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02220
2
3 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals
10 necessary to perform all excavation, backfill, and grading for structures
11 required to complete the work shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
12 The work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, excavation for
13 structures, footings, all backfilling and fill; embankment grading for structures;
14 disposal of waste and surplus materials; and all related work such as sheeting,
15 bracing and dewatering.
16
17 B. Structures and structural elements shall be installed at such places as
18 indicated by the drawings at the elevations shown or as directed by the
19 Engineer.
20
21 C. Excess topsoil and fill generated during construction of the project shall be
22 stockpiled on site for the Contractor's use. All unused excess fill shall be
23 salvaged/disposed of by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.
24
25 D. During the process of grading, the subgrade shall be maintained in such
26 condition that it will be well drained at all times. Temporary drains and
27 drainage ditched shall be installed by the Contractor as required to intercept or
28 divert surface water at no additional cost to the Owner.
29
30 E. If, during the excavation sequence, any earth material that could be used as fill
31 is encountered that cannot be directly placed, it shall be stockpiled for later
32 use. No extra payment will be made for stockpiling or double handling of
33 material.
34
35 F. No grading is to be done in areas where there are existing utilities that may be
36 uncovered or damaged until such utilities have been located. Prior to
37 relocating lines, all service must be stopped, including closing required valves,
38 electrical circuits, etc. Pipeline to be abandoned must be plugged and sealed
39 according to these drawings and specifications.
40
41 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND PAYMENT
42
43 A. Soil Testing
44
45 1. Prior to the general placement of fill, and during such placement, the
46 Engineer may select areas within the limits of the fill for testing the
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-1 03/22/2019
1 degree of compaction obtained. The Contractor shall cooperate fully in
2 obtaining the information desired.
3
4 2. Payment for testing shall be made by the Contractor.
5
6 B. Reference Standards (American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM,
7 latest edition):
8
9 1. ASTM C136 — Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Course
10 Aggregates.
11
12 2. ASTM D1556 (1974) — Density of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone
13 Method.
14
15 3. ASTM D1557 — Moisture -Density Relations of Soils using 10 -Ib. (4.5 -kg)
16 Rammer and 18 -in. (457 -mm) Drop.
17
18 4. ASTM D422 — Particle Size Analysis for Soils.
19
20 5. ASTM D2216 — Laboratory Determination of Water Content of Soil &
21 Rock.
22
23 6. ASTM D2487 — Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.
24
25 7. ASTM D2937 — Density of Soil in Place by the Drive -Cylinder Method.
26
27 8. ASTM D2972 — Density of Soil in Place by the Nuclear Method.
28
29 9. ASTM D4643 — Determination of Water Content of Soil & Rock by the
30 Microwave Oven Method
31
32 10. ASTM D4959 — Determination of Water Content of Soil by Direct
33 Heating Method
34
35 1.03 SUBMITTALS
36
37 A. Testing laboratory reports that material for controlled fill meets requirements of
38 this Section.
39
40 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
41
42 A. Lateral Support of Excavation for Structures
43
44 Furnish, put in place, and maintain sheeting and bracing required to support
45 the sides of the excavations, to prevent any movement which could in any way
46 diminish the width of the excavation below that necessary for proper
47 construction, and to protect structures, pipe and utilities from damage due to
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-2 03/22/2019
1
1 1 lateral movement or settlement of ground. If the Engineer is of the opinion that
2 at any point sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, he may
I 3 order additional supports put in at the expense of the Contractor, and
4 compliance with such order shall not relieve or release the Contractor from his
5 responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports.
6
7 B. Dewatering for Structures
8
I
9 Furnish, install, maintain, operate, and remove a temporary dewatering
10 system, as required to lower and control the groundwater level, so that the
11 structures may be constructed in the dry. The Contractor shall, at his own
I
12 expense, correct all damage resulting from inadequacy of the dewatering
13 system or from flooding or the construction site from other causes.
14
'15
16 C. Dewatering System
17 1. The dewatering system shall be adequate to drain any excavated area,
I
18 to maintain the water at such a level at least 2 feet below the lowest
19 subgrade within the structure, including utilities. The dewatering
20 system must maintain the lowered water table 24 hours per day, 7 days
I
21
22 per week until the structure has been completed to the required stages.
23 2. Continuously maintain excavation in a dry condition so as to prevent
I
24 damage to the subsoil or fill during interruptions due to weather, labor
25 strikes, power failures or other delays. Provide and have ready for
26 immediate use at all times diesel or gasoline powered standby pumping
27 units to serve the system in case of failure of the normal pumping units.
28
29 3. Piping and boiling, or any form of uncontrolled seepage, in the bottom
Il30 or sides of the excavation shall be prevented at all times. If for any
31 reason the dewatering system is found to be inadequate to meet the
32 requirements set forth herein, the Contractor shall, at his own expense,
I33 make such additions, changes and/or replacements as necessary to
34 provide a satisfactory dewatering system.
35
I36 4. If applicable, the Contractor shall be responsible for creating and
37 implementing a dewatering plan that shall be submitted to the Engineer
I38 as specified in the Environmental Resource Permit, if any. The plan
39 shall be approved prior to initiating any construction activities.
40
41 D. Control of Groundwater Level
42
43 1. Maintain the groundwater level at or below subgrade of the structure
I
44
45 until the concrete structures are up high enough to: (1) prevent flooding
the structure, (2) support both bottom and top levels of walls, and (3)
46 prevent flotation.
1
1
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-3 03/22/2019
1
2
3
2. After the structure has been completed in its entirety, backfill as
described hereinafter.
4 3. Flotation shall be prevented by maintaining a positive and continuous
5 operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully
6 responsible and liable for all damages, which may result from failure of
7 this system.
8
9 4. Disposal of drainage water shall be in an area approved by the
10 Engineer. Precautions shall be taken to prevent the flow or seepage of
11 drainage back into the drainage area. Particular care shall be taken to
12 prevent the discharge of unsuitable drainage to a water supply or
13 surface water body.
14
15 5. Removal of the dewatering system shall be accomplished after the
16 dewatering system is no longer required.
17
18 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
19
20 2.01 MATERIAL FOR CONTROLLED FILL
21
22 A. General
23
24 1. Materials for use as fill shall be as described below:
25
26 2. For each material, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's designated
27 representative of the source of the material at least ten (10) calendar
28 days prior to the date of anticipated use of such material, so that
29 necessary laboratory classification testing can be performed.
30
31 3. Structural fill shall be used to provide support for building foundations,
32 structure foundations and the reject pond embankments. Common fill
33 shall be used to as backfill over pipes.
34
35 4. All structural fill and crushed stone shall be wrapped in filter fabric.
36
37 B. Structural Fill
38
39 1. Compacted granular fill, which will provide support for building or
40 structure foundations, will be referred to as "structural fill." Backfill,
41 which is placed against the exterior side of the building walls or
42 structures, or as fill over pipelines, will be referred to as "common fill."
43
44 2. Materials for compacted structural granular fill shall be gravel, sandy
45 gravel, or gravely sand free of organic material, loam, wood, trash, wire
46 and other objectionable material and shall be well -graded within the
47 following limits:
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight
3
4 6 -in. 100
5 No. 4 20 - 95
6 No. 40 0 - 60
7 No. 200 0 - 8
8
9 C. Common Fill
10
11 1. Common fill shall consist of mineral soil, free of organic material, loam,
12 wood, trash and other objectionable material which may be
13 compressible or which cannot be compacted properly. Common fill
14 shall not contain stones larger than 10 -in. in any dimension, broken
15 concrete, masonry, rubble or other such materials. It shall have physical
16 properties such that it can be readily spread and compacted during
17 filling.
18
19 2. Material falling within the above Specification, encountered during the
20 excavation, may be stored in segregated stockpiles for reuse. All
21 material which, in the opinion of the Engineer is not suitable for reuse,
22 shall be spoiled as specified herein for disposal of unsuitable materials.
23
24 D. Crushed Stone
25
26 1. Crushed stone shall be used for structure bases where indicated on the
27 drawings or directed by the Engineer. Crushed stone shall be used for
28 manhole bases, as a drainage layer below structures with underdrains
29 and at other locations indicated on the Drawings.
30
31 2. Crushed stone shall be size No. 57 with gradation as noted in Table 1
32 of Section 901 of Department of Transportation, Construction of Roads
33 and Bridges.
34
35 2.02 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL
36
37 A. Unsuitable material will be designated as highly organic soil ASTM D 2487
38 Group PT, topsoil, roots, vegetable matter, trash and debris. All unsuitable
39 material shall be removed in it entirety as to provide adequate bearing
40 capacity for proposed structures, buildings, manholes, pipelines, etc.
41
42 PART 3 - EXECUTION
43
44 3.01 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND COMPACTION PROCEDURES - GENERAL
45
46 A. Excavation shall be made to such widths as will give suitable room for
47 construction of the structures, for bracing and supporting, pumping and
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-5 03/22/2019
1 drainage; and the bottom of the excavations shall be rendered firm and dry
2 and in all respects acceptable to the Engineer.
3
4 B. Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods which preserve
5 the undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Subgrade soil which becomes soft,
6 loose, "quick," or otherwise unsatisfactory for support of structures as a result
7 of inadequate excavation, dewatering or other construction methods shall be
8 removed and replaced by structural fill as required by the Engineer at the
9 Contractor's expense.
10
11 C. Dewatering shall be such as to prevent boiling or detrimental under -seepage
12 at the base of the excavation as specified herein. The Contractor shall install
13 such means as required to preserve the stability of the base of the operation.
14
15 D. Excavating equipment shall be satisfactory for carrying out the work in
16 accordance with the Specifications. In no case shall the earth be ploughed,
17 scraped or dug with machinery so near to the finished subgrade as to result in
18 excavation of, or disturbance of material below grade, the last of the
19 excavated material being removed with pick and shovel just before placing of
20 concrete or working mat thereon.
21
22 E. During final excavation to subgrade level, take whatever precautions are
23 required to prevent disturbance and remolding of the subgrade. Material
24 which has become softened and mixed with water shall be removed. Hand
25 excavation of the final 3 to 6 -in. will be required as necessary to obtain a
26 satisfactory undisturbed bottom. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to
27 whether the work has been accomplished satisfactorily.
28
29 F All structure areas shall be stripped, cleared and grubbed of all surface
30 vegetation and root laden top soils.
31
32 G. After stripping, the structure areas should be leveled sufficiently to permit
33 equipment traffic and then proof -rolled. Careful observations should be made
34 during proof rolling of the stripped subgrade area to identify any areas of soft
35 yielding soils that may require over excavation and replacement.
36
37 H. Compaction should continue until a minimum density of 95% of the maximum
38 modified Proctor dry density, as established in accordance with ASTM D-1557,
39 is achieved for a minimum depth of 2 feet below the subgrade surface.
40
41 3.02 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
42
43 A. Following satisfactory proof -rolling of the stripped subgrade, the structure
44 areas may be brought up to finished subgrade level. Structural fill shall be
45 placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12 -inches and should be compacted to a
46 minimum of 95% of the maximum modified Proctor dry density, as established
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-6 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 in accordance with ASTM D-1557. Density tests should be performed in each
2 fill lift to confirm compaction before the next lift is placed.
3
4 B. Common fill may be used as backfill against the exterior walls of the
5 structures, including manholes and storm structures, or in other areas as
6 designated by the Engineer. Common fill shall be placed in loose lifts not
7 exceeding 12 -inches and should be compacted to a minimum of 95% of the
8 maximum modified Proctor dry density, as established in accordance with
9 ASTM D-1557. Density tests should be performed in each fill lift to confirm
10 compaction before the next lift is placed. Common fill material in place shall be
11 compacted with such mechanical compaction equipment as approved by the
12 Engineer.
13
14 C. Materials placed in fill areas shall be deposited to the lines and grades shown
15 on the Drawings making due allowance for settlement of the material and for
16 the placing of topsoil thereon.
17
18 D. The surfaces of filled areas shall be grades to smooth true lines, strictly
19 conforming to grades indicated on the paving and grading Drawings, and no
20 soft spots or uncompacted areas will be allowed in the work.
21
22 E. No compacting shall be done when the material is too wet either from rain or
23 from excess application of water. At such times, work shall be suspended until
24 the previously placed and new materials have dried sufficiently to permit
25 proper compaction.
26
27 3.04 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE AND SURPLUS MATERIAL
28
29 A. Unsuitable excavated materials and pavement shall become the property of
30 the Contractor and removed and disposed of by him off the project site.
31
32 B. Suitable excavated material may be used for fill or backfill if it meets the
33 Specifications for common fill and is approved by the Engineer. Excavated
34 materials so approved may be neatly stockpiled at the site, where there is an
35 area available that will not interfere with the operation of the plant or
36 inconvenience traffic or adjoining property owners. If space limitations do not
37 permit stockpiling on the site, the Contractor will be required to make
38 arrangements for off-site stockpiling. Transport of such material from and to
39 the immediate site, including any stockpiling agreements, shall be entirely at
40 the Contractor's expense and shall not constitute grounds for additional
41 payment.
42
43 C. Surplus excavated material shall be used to fill depressions or other purposes
44 as the Engineer may direct. All suitable surplus excavated material shall
45 remain property of the Owner and the Contractor shall stockpile excess
46 suitable excavated material where directed by the Engineer. All unsuitable
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-7 03/22/2019
1 excavated material shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be
2 removed and disposed of by him off the project site.
3
4 3.05 GRADING
5
6 A. Grading in preparation for placing of topsoil, planting areas, paved walks and
7 drives, and appurtenances shall be performed at all places that are indicated
8 on the Drawings, to the lines, grades, and elevations shown and otherwise as
9 directed by the Engineer. Such work shall be performed in a manner that the
10 requirements for formation of slopes, lines, and grades can be followed. All
11 material encountered, of whatever nature, within the limits indicated, shall be
12 removed and disposed of as directed. During the process of grading, the
13 subgrade shall be maintained in such condition that it will be well drained at all
14 times. When directed, temporary drains and drainage ditches shall be
15 installed to intercept or divert surface water which may affect the progress or
16 condition of the work.
17
18 B. If, at the time of grading, it is not possible to place any material in its proper
19 section of the permanent structure, it shall be stockpiled for later use. No
20 extra payment will be made for the stockpiling or double handling of excavated
21 material.
22
23 C. The right is reserved to make minor adjustments or revisions in lines or
24 grades, if found necessary as the work progresses, due to discrepancies on
25 the Drawings or in order to obtain satisfactory construction.
26
27 D. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4 -in. in their greatest dimensions will not
28 be permitted in the top 6 -in. of the finished subgrade of all fills or
29 embankments.
30
31 E. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be barred loose
32 or otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and fill slopes
33 shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross section, and alignment shown
34 on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
35
36 F No grading is to be done in areas where there are existing pipe lines that may
37 be uncovered or damaged until such lines have been located and it has been
38 determined if such lines must be maintained are relocated, or where lines are
39 to be abandoned, all required valves are closed and remaining pipes are
40 plugged.
41
42 END OF SECTION
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-8 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02221
2
3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPES
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. This section includes, except as elsewhere provided, all excavation for pipelines
10 and appurtenances including drainage, filling, backfilling, grading, disposal of
11 surplus material and restoration of trench surfaces.
12
13 B. Excavation shall provide suitable room for installing pipe, structures and
14 appurtenances. Pavement shall be cut with saws or pneumatic chisels along
15 straight lines before excavating.
16
17 C. The Contractor shall furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports, and
18 shall remove from the excavation all materials that the Engineer may deem
19 unsuitable for backfilling. The bottom of the excavation shall be firm, dry and in
20 all respects, acceptable. The length of open trench shall be related closely to
21 the rate of pipe laying.
22
23 1.02 SUBMITTALS
24
25 A. All submittals shall be presented to the Engineer for review in accordance with
26 the General Conditions.
27
28 B. Testing laboratory reports that material for controlled fill meets requirements of
29 this Section.
30
31 1.03 CLEAN-UP
32
33 A. Clean-up is an essential part of the work. As the work progresses and is
34 completed, the Contractor shall clean the various sites of all operations and
35 completely restore all work areas to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the
36 Owner. This clean-up shall be done as promptly as practical and shall not be
37 left until the end of the construction period. No part of the work shall be
38 considered complete, and no payment will be made, until clean-up is completed.
39
40 B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to assure that all construction sites and all
41 other affected properties are restored to a condition equal to, or better than, the
42 existing conditions prior to construction. All restoration is subject to the approval
43 of the Engineer and/or Owner.
44
45 1.04 DUST CONTROL
46
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPES
02221-1 03/22/2019
1 A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to control all dust problems that may
2 occur during the construction with required watering. Dust control will be
3 required seven days a week.
4
5 1.05 EROSION CONTROL
6
7 A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to erect suitable silt fences, hay bales or other
8 erosion runoff control devices prior to commencement of earth moving or
9 excavation activities. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the silt
10 fences, hay bales or other erosion runoff control devices in an effective manner,
11 repairing or replacing damaged or ineffective section during the course of the
12 work until a ground cover of grass is established and final environmental
13 approval has been obtained.
14
15 1.06 PERMITS FOR DEWATERING OPERATIONS
16
17 A. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining all permits required for dewatering
18 discharges, including a Florida Department of Environmental Protection Generic
19 Permit for Produced Groundwater per F.A.0 62-621.300 and as specified in
20 Section 02140.
21
22 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
23
24 2.01 MATERIALS
25
26 A. General
27
28 1. Materials for use as fill shall be described below. For each material, the
29 Contractor shall notify the Testing Lab of the source of the material at
30 least ten (10) calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such
31 material.
32
33 2. Materials shall be furnished as required from an approved source, hauled
34 to/on the site and placed at the locations indicated on the Drawings.
35
36 3. Disposal of unsuitable material is specified in this Section. See
37 Paragraph 3.11.
38
39 B. Common Fill
40
41 1. Common fill shall consist of mineral soil, free of organic material, loam,
42 wood, trash and other objectionable material which may be compressible
43 or which cannot be compacted properly. Common fill shall not contain
44 stones larger than 2.5 inches in any dimension, broken concrete,
45 masonry, rubble, or other similar materials, and shall have physical
46 properties such that it can be readily spread and compacted during filling.
47
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPES
02221-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 2. Material falling within the above specification, encountered during the
2 excavation, may be stored in segregated stockpiles for reuse. In the
3 opinion of the Engineer, all material that is not suitable for reuse shall be
4 spoiled as specified herein for disposal of unsuitable materials.
5
6 C. Crushed Stone
7
8 1. Crushed stone shall be used for manhole bases, as a drainage layer
9 below structures with underdrains, for backfilling ductile iron pipe, and at
10 other locations indicated on the Drawings. Crushed stone for pipe
11 bedding shall be Class I Material. Aggregate size shall not exceed 1-1/2".
12
13 2. When crushed stone is used as bedding material, the crushed stone shall
14 be wrapped in filter fabric to avoid migration of fines into the stone layers
15 and subsequent loss of soil around the haunches of the pipe.
16
17 D. Select Fill
18
19 1. Select fill shall be non -cohesive, low -plasticity material free of all debris,
20 lumps or clods, AASHTO A2-4 or A3 designation. Fill material shall be
21 clean earth fill composed of sand or an approved mixture of clay and
22 sand. Backfill material placed within one foot of piping and
23 appurtenances shall not contain any stones or rocks larger than two
24 inches in diameter, or three-quarter inch in diameter for PVC pipe.
25
26 PART 3 - EXECUTION
27
28 3.01 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
29
30 A. Excavated material shall be stacked without excessive surcharge on the trench
31 bank. Excavated material shall be segregated for use in backfilling as specified
32 below.
33
34 B. Surplus excavated material that, in the opinion of the Engineer, is suitable for
35 use in backfilling or for replacing rock and boulders shall be stockpiled at a satis-
36 factory site to be obtained by the Contractor to be used as required. Unsatisfac-
37 tory surplus material including paving, rock or boulders, muck, stumps and other
38 material, as directed by the Engineer, shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
39
40 C. It is expressly understood that no excavated material shall be removed from the
41 site of the work or disposed of by the Contractor except as directed by the
42 Engineer. When removal of surplus material has been approved by the
43 Engineer, the Contractor shall dispose of such surplus material.
44
45 D. Should conditions make it impracticable or unsafe to stack material adjacent to
46 the trench, the material shall be hauled and stored at a location provided by the
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPES
02221-3 03/22/2019
1 Contractor. When required, it shall be re -handled and used in backfilling the
2 trench. No extra compensation will be made for re -handling material.
3
4 3.02 SHEETING AND BRACING
5
6 A. The Contractor shall do all shoring and sheeting required to perform and protect
7 the excavation and, as required, for the safety of the employees.
8
9 B. All trenches shall be sheeted and braced as required by the Engineer and all
10 applicable Federal, State, County and Municipal regulations. Sheeting and
11 bracing shall be used to prevent shifting of adjacent soil and to prevent damage
12 to structures or the work. The sole responsibility for the design, methods of
13 installation, and adequacy of the sheeting and bracing, shall be and shall remain
14 that of the Contractor.
15
16 C. Sheeting and bracing or approved laying box shall be used in all trenches unless
17 the slopes are excavated until the natural angle of repose of the soil is
18 encountered.
19
20 D. In general, sheeting and bracing shall be removed as the excavation is
21 backfilled in such a manner as to avoid the caving in of the bank or disturbance
22 of adjacent areas or structures. The voids left by withdrawal of the sheeting and
23 bracing shall be carefully filled by jetting, ramming or other means approved by
24 the Engineer. Permission shall be obtained from the Engineer prior to removal
25 of any sheeting or bracing. Permission shall not relieve the Contractor of any
26 responsibility for damage due to failure to leave such sheeting and bracing in
27 place.
28
29 E. The Engineer may order, in writing, any or all sheeting or bracing to be left in
30 place for the purpose of preventing injury to adjacent structures, property, etc.
31 If left in place, such sheeting shall be cut off at the elevation ordered, but in no
32 case less than thirty-six (36) inches below the existing grade. Bracing remaining
33 in place shall be driven in tight. The right of the Engineer to order sheeting and
34 bracing to remain in place shall not be construed as creating any obligation on
35 his part to issue such orders. Payment for sheeting and bracing, unless
36 specifically called for on the Drawings shall not be paid under separate item, but
37 shall be included in the payment for other items of Work.
38
39 3.03 TEST PITS
40
41 A. The Contractor shall be required to excavate test pits for the purpose of locating
42 underground utilities or structures and as an aid in establishing the precise
43 location of new work. Test pits shall be backfilled as soon as the desired infor-
44 mation has been obtained. Backfill shall be compacted per as specified herein.
45 The backfilled surface shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition for travel
46 until resurfaced as hereinafter specified.
47
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPES
02221-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
B. Excavation of test pits shall be considered work incidental to the project and
shall be done at the Contractor's expense.
4 C. If, for any reason, a test pit is left open for any period of time, it shall be properly
5 barricaded and lighted by the Contractor, when directed by the Engineer, in
6 accordance with State and Local laws.
7
8 3.04 DEWATERING AND DRAINAGE
9
10 A. The Contractor shall provide temporary dewatering in accordance with Section
11 02140.
12
13 B. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform all
14 incidental work required to install and maintain the drainage system proposed
15 for handling ground water or surface water encountered. The Contractor shall
16 assume all responsibility for the adequacy of the methods, materials, and equip -
17 ment employed. Construction shall not begin until the Engineer is assured that
18 the proposed method will be satisfactory. A stable subgrade is required, and
19 the Contractor shall alter his drainage methods, if, in the opinion of the Engineer,
20 the trench bottom is unsatisfactory.
21
22 C. The Contractor shall provide pumping equipment and devices to properly
23 remove and dispose of all water entering trench and excavation. The grade
24 shall be maintained acceptably dry until structures and pipe to be constructed
25 therein are completed. All drainage shall be performed without damage to the
26 trench, pavements, pipes, electrical conduits, or other utilities.
27
28 D. Pipe and masonry shall not be laid in water or submerged within 24 hours after
29 being placed. Water shall not flow over new masonry within four days after
30 placement.
31
32 E. In no event shall water rise to cause unbalanced pressure on structures until
33 the concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours or reach 70% of its designed
34 compressive strength. The Contractor shall prevent flotation of the pipe
35 promptly placing backfill.
36
37 F If the Contractor elects to use underdrains for handling water, he shall furnish
38 and install pipe and crushed stone graded from course to fine, and shall furnish
39 and install all pumps and equipment necessary to maintain the water level
40 continuously at the required elevation. Pipe underdrains shall be laid with open
41 joints and bedded in crushed stone for the full width of trench, and to a depth of
42 6 -inches below the invert of underdrain.
43
44 G. The invert of underdrain shall be 12 -inches below the normal subgrade. Pipe
45 underdrains shall have no permanent outlet and shall be sealed at the
46 completion of the work. The length of continuous underdrain to be used shall
47 be limited as conditions require. An impervious bulkhead of clay or concrete
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPES
02221-5 03/22/2019
1 shall be constructed in the trench bottom between 100 ft. lengths of the
2 underdrainage system to obstruct the free flow of ground water after
3 construction is completed. All excavation below normal grade for the purpose
4 of installing underdrains, the crushed stone and underdrain pipe shall be
5 considered a part of the drainage work to be done under the pipe items. The
6 Contractor shall continuously guard against the loss of earth through subbase
7 or the underdrain. Should loss of either take place, the Contractor shall alter
8 the stone size to provide a satisfactory barrier or filter
9
10 H. Socks for sock dewatering systems shall be removed or filled with grout if left in
11 place. Well points shall be backfilled and rodded to ensure there are no voids.
12
13 I. Where other methods of handling water prove inadequate, the Contractor shall
14 furnish, install, operate, and remove proper well point or other dewatering
15 facilities
16
17 3.05 TRENCH EXCAVATION
18
19 A. Excavation shall be made for all trenches that are required for the installation of
20 pipes, culverts, manholes and drainage structures.
21
22 B. Trench width at the ground surface may vary depending on depth, type of soil,
23 and position of surface structures. The minimum clear width of the trench,
24 sheeted or unsheeted, measured at the springline of the pipe should be 1 foot
25 greater than the outside diameter of the pipe. The maximum recommended
26 clear width of the trench at the top of the pipe is equal to the pipe outside
27 diameter plus 2 feet, for pipe diameters 12 inches and smaller, or the pipe
28 outside diameter plus 3 feet, for pipes over 12 inches. If the maximum
29 recommended trench width must be exceeded or if the pipe is installed in a
30 compacted embankment, then pipe embedment should be compacted to a point
31 of at least 2-1/2 pipe diameters from the pipe on both sides of the pipe or to the
32 trench walls, whichever is less.
33
34 C. The trench may be excavated by machinery to the limits shown on the Drawings
35 and scarified.
36
37 D. Rock shall be removed to a minimum of 8 -inch clearance around the bottom
38 and sides of the pipe being laid.
39
40 E. The trench bottom should be constructed to provide a firm, stable and uniform
41 support for the full length of the pipe. Bell holes should be provided at each joint
42 to permit proper assembly and pipe support. Any part of the trench bottom
43 excavated below grade should be backfilled to grade and should be compacted
44 as required to provide firm pipe support. When an unstable subgrade condition
45 is encountered that could provide inadequate pipe support, additional trench
46 depth should be excavated and refilled with suitable foundation material. Ledge
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPES
02221-6 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 rock, boulders, and large stones should be removed to provide a minimum of 4
2 inches of soil cushion of all sides of the pipe and accessories.
3
4 3.06 CREEK AND STREAM CROSSINGS
5
6 A. When installing mains below creeks or streams, the Contractor shall take all
7 precautions to identify and restore confining hydrogeologic layers, to the
8 satisfaction of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP). The
9 Engineer shall be notified when confining layers are identified.
10
11 B. Surface water crossings shall be carried out in accordance with details shown
12 on the plans. Any deviation from these details shall be agreed upon ahead of
13 excavation.
14
15 C. The Contractor shall separate the materials of the confining layer from common
16 fill, for later replacement at the depth originally encountered. Contractor shall
17 survey exiting conditions and ensure that final elevations of the crossing shall
18 match existing conditions.
19
20 D. The Contractor shall maintain a means of bypassing or allowing the free flow of
21 water during the construction of the crossing, to avoid upstream flooding during
22 heavy rains. The transport of sediment through or from the work area is
23 prohibited.
24
25 E. All costs associated with layer selection, complying with FDEP conditions,
26 temporary berms/ cofferdams, dewatering, and dealing with water flows shall be
27 considered part of the work to be done under the relevant pipe items.
28
29 3.07 PIPE BEDDING
30
31 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install pipe on the type of bedding shown on
32 the Drawings or as specified by the Engineer. Regardless of the type of bedding
33 used by the Contractor, holes in the trench shall be provided to receive the pipe
34 bell. The hole excavated shall be sufficient to relieve pipe bells of all loads and
35 yet provide support over the total length of the pipe barrel.
36
37 B. Pipe should be installed with proper bedding providing uniform longitudinal
38 support under the pipe. Backfill material should be worked under the sides of
39 the pipe to provide satisfactory supports around the haunches of the pipe. All
40 pipe bedding materials shall be select fill. Sharp stones and crushed rock
41 (larger than 3/4 -inch), which could cause significant scratching or abrasion of
42 the pipe, shall be excluded from the embedment material. Proper compaction
43 procedures shall be exercised.
44
45 C. Where required to provide firm bedding for the pipe, and with the approval of
46 the Engineer, crushed stone bedding shall be provided from a depth of 12"
47 below the pipe up to the pipe haunches.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPES
02221-7 03/22/2019
1
2 3.08 BACKFILLING
3
4 A. As soon as practicable after the pipe has been laid, joined and bedded,
5 backfilling shall begin and thereafter prosecuted expeditiously.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13 C. The remainder of the trench above the compacted backfill, as described shall
14 be filled thoroughly compacted by rolling, ramming, as the Engineer may direct,
15 sufficiently to prevent subsequent settling.
16
17 D. No mechanical equipment, or machinery other than a hand operated
18 mechanical vibrator, shall be allowed within the trench area until the backfill has
19 been properly tamped to one foot above the top of pipe. The remainder of the
20 backfill shall be deposited in one foot layers and thoroughly tamped. Settling the
21 backfill with water shall not be permitted.
22
23 E. Where trenches are improperly backfilled, or where settlement occurs, the
24 trenches shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, refilled
25 and compacted, and the surface restored to the required grade and compaction,
26 mounded over and smoothed off.
27
28 3.09 COMPACTION
29
30 A. Gravel and crushed stone in open areas, shall be placed in layers not to exceed
31 eight (8) inches in depth as measured before compaction. Each layer shall be
32 compacted by a minimum of four (4) coverages. Incidental compaction due to
33 traffic by construction equipment will not be credited toward the required
34 minimum four (4) coverages.
35
36 B. Common fill shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12 -inches and shall be
37 compacted to a minimum of 98% of the maximum modified Proctor dry density,
38 as established in accordance with ASTM D-1557. Select fill shall be placed in
39 loose lifts not exceeding 6 -inches and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95%
40 of the maximum modified Proctor dry density, as established in accordance with
41 ASTM D-1557. Density tests shall be performed every 250 feet of pipe length,
42 in each fill lift, on each side of the pipe, to confirm compaction before the next
43 lift is placed. Fill material in place shall be compacted with such mechanical
44 compaction equipment as approved by the Engineer.
45
B. Select backfill material, free from stones and other foreign material, shall be
placed to the limits shown on the Drawings or a minimum or 12 -inches above
the pipe. In all areas, backfill material shall be deposited in six -inch layers and
carefully tamped until the compacted backfill depth reaches one foot above the
top of pipe.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPES
02221-8 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 C. Areas adjacent to structures and other confined inaccessible to the roller or truck
2 shall be compacted with approved hand guided mechanical compaction
3 equipment.
4
5 D. It is the intention that the fill materials, with respect to moisture, be used in the
6 condition they are excavated insofar as this is practicable. Material that is too
7 wet shall be spread on the fill area and permitted to dry, assisted by harrowing
8 if necessary, until the moisture content is reduced enough to allow for proper
9 compaction as determined by the Engineer. Muck, mud, or organic material
10 shall not be utilized as trench fill. Such matter shall be removed from the trench
11 and replaced with suitable fill material.
12
13 3.10 GRADING
14
15 A. Grading shall be performed at such places as are indicated on the Drawings, to
16 the lines, grades, and elevations shown or as directed by the Engineer. Such
17 work shall be performed in a manner that the requirements for formation of
18 slopes, lines, and grades can be followed. All unacceptable material
19 encountered, or whatever nature within the limits indicated, shall be removed
20 and disposed of as directed. During the process of grading, the subgrade shall
21 be maintained in such condition that it will be well drained at all times. When
22 directed, temporary drains and drainage ditches shall be installed to intercept
23 or divert surface water, which may affect the progress or condition of the work.
24
25 B. If, at the time of grading, it is not possible to place any material in its proper
26 section of the permanent structure, it shall be stockpiled for later use. No extra
27 payment will be made for the stockpiling or double handling of excavated
28 material.
29
30 C. The right is reserved to make minor adjustments or revisions in lines or grades
31 if found necessary as the work progresses, due to discrepancies on the
32 Drawings of in order to obtain satisfactory construction.
33
34 D. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4 inches in their greatest dimensions will
35 not be permitted in the top 6 inches of the subgrade line.
36
37 E. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be barred loose or
38 otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and fill slopes shall
39 be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross section, and alignment shown on the
40 Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
41
42 F. No grading is to be done in areas where there are existing pipe lines that may
43 be uncovered or damaged until such lines have been located and it has been
44 determined if such lines must be maintained are relocated, or where lines are
45 to be abandoned, all required valves are closed and remaining pipes are
46 plugged.
47
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPES
02221-9 03/22/2019
1 3.11 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE SURPLUS MATERIAL
2
3 A. Unsuitable and surplus excavated materials and pavement shall become the
4 property of the Contractor and removed and disposed of by him off the project
5 site.
6
7 B. Suitable excavated materials may be used for fill or backfill if it meets the
8 Specification for common fill and is approved by the Engineer. Excavated
9 material so approved may be neatly stockpiled at the site where designated by
10 the Engineer provided there is an area available that will not interfere with the
11 operation of the plant or inconvenience traffic or adjoining property owners. If
12 space limitations do not permit stockpiling on the site, the Contractor will be
13 required to make arrangements for off-site stockpiling. Transport of such
14 material from and to the immediate site including any stockpiling agreements
15 shall by entirely at the Contractor's expense and shall not constitute grounds for
16 additional payment.
17
18 C. Surplus excavated material shall be used to fill depressions or other purposes
19 as the Engineer may direct.
20
21 3.12 DISPOSAL AND REPLACING OF ROCK
22
23 A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all pieces of rock which are not
24 suitable for use in other parts of the work. Rock disposed of by hauling away to
25 spoil areas is to be replaced and approved surplus excavation obtained
26 elsewhere on the site, insofar as it is available. Any deficiency in the backfill
27 material shall be made up with acceptable material from outside sources.
28
29 B. Rock may be used in fill only with the approval of the Engineer.
30
31
32
33 END OF SECTION
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPES
02221-10 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02276
2
3 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The work specified in this Section consists of designing, providing, maintaining
10 and removing temporary erosion and sedimentation controls as necessary.
11
12 B. Temporary erosion controls include, but are not limited to, straw, hay, filter
13 fabric, permanent vegetation, grassing, mulching, netting, watering and
14 reseeding on-site surfaces, spoil and borrow areas and providing interceptor
15 ditches at those locations that will ensure that erosion during construction will
16 be either eliminated or maintained within acceptable limits as established by the
17 Engineer, Owner and the permitting agencies.
18
19 C. Temporary sedimentation controls include, but are not limited to, silt dams,
20 traps, barriers and appurtenances, which ensure that sedimentation, will be
21 either eliminated or maintained within acceptable limits as established by the
22 Owner and the permitting agencies.
23
24 D. The Contractor shall provide routine re-establishment, daily maintenance of
25 permanent and temporary erosion and sediment control measures features
26 until the project is complete and all soil stabilized.
27
28 E. Contractor shall be required to comply with all permit conditions included as
29 attachments to these Contract Documents and as required by these
30 Specifications.
31
32 F The Contractor shall use all methods and products that meet or exceed those
33 set forth in the FDOT Standard Specifications.
34
35 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
36
37 A. Standard Building Code.
38
39 B. Environmental Resource Permit
40
41 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
42
43 2.01 EROSION CONTROL
44
45 A. Loaming, seeding, sodding, and mulching is specified herein.
46
47 B. Netting - fabricated of material acceptable to the Engineer.
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
02276-1 03/22/2019
1
2 2.02 SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
3
4 A. Bales — synthetic or clean, seed -free cereal hay type.
5
6 B. Netting - fabricated of material acceptable to the Engineer.
7
8 C. Filter stone - crushed stone conforming to Florida Department of Transportation
9 specifications.
10
11 D. Concrete block - hollow, non -load-bearing type.
12
13 E. Concrete - exterior grade not less than one inch thick.
14
15 F. Drain pipe with sock (sedimentation control) shall be used to prevent and control
16 soil erosion runoff and intrusion into stormwater drainage systems.
17
18 1. Drain sock products such as "ADSSock" or approved equal.
19
20 2. Sock material shall be on ultra -porous filter (synthetic wrap material)
21 fitted snuggly over pipe. Material shall be 100 percent knitted polyester
22 (or approved equal), equivalent opening size of 30 to 40, burst strength
23 of 100-135 (ASTM D 3786), fiber size of 100-40 200 denier filament, 2.5
24 to 3.5 ounces per square yard (ASTM D 3776).
25
26 3. Approval of material is required by Owner prior to use.
27
28 4. Drain pipe with sock shall span the entire opening of the inlet.
29
30 PART 3 - EXECUTION
31
32 3.01 EROSION CONTROL
33
34 A. Type of erosion control barriers used shall be governed by the nature of the
35 construction operation, Contract Documents and all applicable permits.
36
37 B. Diversion ditches or swales may be required to prevent turbid storm water
38 runoff from being discharged to wetlands or other water bodies. It may be
39 necessary to employ a combination of barriers, ditches and other
40 erosion/turbidity control measures as conditions warrant.
41
42 C. Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage
43 controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from
44 such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the
45 expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall a non -
46 stabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
47
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
02276-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 D. No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days
2 unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Within sixty (60) calendar days
3 after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of
4 the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization
5 measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or
6 landscaping.
7
8 E. Minimum procedures for grassing are:
9
10 1. Scarify slopes to a depth of not Tess than 6 inches and remove large
11 clods, rock, stumps and roots all larger than 1/2 -inch in diameter and
12 debris.
13
14 2. Sow seed within twenty-four (24) hours after the ground is scarified with
15 either mechanical seed drills or rotary hand seeders.
16
17 3. Apply mulch loosely and to a thickness between 3/4 -inch and 1-1/2
18 inches.
19
20 4. Apply netting over mulched areas on all sloped surfaces.
21
22 5. Roll and water seeded areas in a manner which will encourage sprouting
23 of seeds and growing of grass. Reseed areas that exhibit unsatisfactory
24 growth. Backfill and seed eroded areas.
25
26 3.02 SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
27
28 A. Install and maintain silt dams, traps, barriers and appurtenances, as shown on
29 the Drawings and as described herein. Hay bales that deteriorate and filter
30 stone that is dislodged shall be replaced.
31
32 B. Existing storm water systems shall be protected at all times to prevent
33 sedimentation of the storm water system. Sedimentation prevention shall
34 comply with or exceed "Best Management Practices" in accordance with the
35 Southwest Florida Water Management District.
36
37 C. Siltation accumulations greater than the lesser of 12 inches or one-half the
38 depth of the siltation control barrier shall be immediately removed and placed
39 in upland areas.
40
41 D. Where pumps are to be used to remove turbid waters from the construction
42 area, the water shall be treated to reduce turbidity to state water quality
43 standards prior to discharge to the wetlands. Treatment methods include, for
44 example, turbid water being pumped into grassed swales or appropriate
45 vegetated areas (other than upland preservation areas and wetland buffers),
46 sediment basins, or confined by an appropriate enclosure such as turbidity
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
02276-3 03/22/2019
1 barriers and kept confined until its turbidity level meets state water quality
2 standards.
3
4 E. Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment
5 barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment
6 and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into
7 existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of
8 vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land
9 alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected before
10 any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not
11 limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected
12 from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation.
13
14 F. Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation
15 basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown
16 and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention
17 areas may be used in place of silt basins provided they are maintained to the
18 satisfaction of the Owner.
19
20 G. The Contractor shall be prohibited from discharging silt through any stormwater
21 outfall structure during construction. When temporary sedimentation basins are
22 used, they shall be capable at all times of containing at least one (1) cubic foot
23 of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the
24 basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular
25 removal of sediment from the basin.
26
27 H. Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and
28 intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top
29 of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers
30 shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided,
31 precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration,
32 development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer
33 area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three
34 (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed.
35
36 I. Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the
37 downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due
38 to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized
39 temporary culverts shall be provided by the Contractor and removed when
40 construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a
41 condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any
42 construction activity.
43
44 3.03 PERFORMANCE
45
46 A. Should any temporary erosion and sediment control measures employed by the
47 Contractor fail to produce results, which comply with the requirements of the
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
02276-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 State of Florida, the Contractor shall immediately take the necessary steps to
2 correct the deficiency at his or her own expense.
3
4 3.04 MAINTENANCE
5
6 A. All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially
7 after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
8
9 3.05 COMPLIANCE
10
11 A. Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine
12 and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to)
13 issuance of a "Stop Work Order".
14
15
16 END OF SECTION
17
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
02276-5 03/22/2019
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
02276-6 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02485
2
3 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily return all
10 construction areas to their original conditions or better.
11
12 B. Work includes furnishing and placing seed, sod, fertilizer, gravel, concrete,
13 asphalt, planting, watering and maintenance until acceptance by the Owner.
14
15 C. The restoration of grassed areas under this project shall be by sodding.
16
17 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
18
19 A. The Contractor shall provide a satisfactory stand of grass as specified. If
20 necessary, the Contractor shall repeat any or all of the work, including grading,
21 fertilizing, watering, and seeding or sodding at no additional cost to the Owner
22 until a satisfactory stand is obtained.
23
24 B. A satisfactory stand of grass is defined herein as a full lawn cover over areas to
25 be seeded or sodded, with grass free of weeds, alive and growing, leaving no
26 bare spots larger than 3/4 sq. yd. within a radius of 10 ft.
27
28 1.03 SUBMITTALS
29
30 A. Provide technical data as required for shop drawings on all materials or
31 installation procedures required under this Section and in accordance with the
32 contract documents.
33
34 B. Submit representative topsoil samples for analysis by a private laboratory to
35 determine nutrient deficiencies and outline a proper fertilization program.
36
37 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
38
39 2.01 MATERIALS
40
41 A. Fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer, the elements of which are derived from
42 organic sources. Fertilizer shall be a standard product complying with State and
43 Federal fertilizer laws.
44
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-1 03/22/2019
1 1 Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus and potash shall be based on
2 laboratory tests on soils outlined in Paragraph 1.03B. For purpose of
3 bidding, assume 6% nitrogen, 6% phosphorus and 6% potash by weight.
4 At least 50% of the total nitrogen shall contain no Tess than 3%
5 water -insoluble nitrogen.
6
7 2. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site, mixed as specified, in the original
8 unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name of
9 manufacturer. Containers shall bear the manufacturer's guaranteed
10 statement of analysis, or a manufacturer's certificate of compliance
11 covering analysis shall be furnished to the Engineer. Store fertilizer in a
12 weatherproof place and in such a manner that it will be kept dry and its
13 effectiveness will not be impaired.
14
15 3. Superphosphate shall be composed of finely ground phosphate rock as
16 commonly used for agricultural purposes containing not less than 20%
17 available phosphoric acid.
18
19 B. Grass seed shall be the same as existed prior to construction and shall be 99
20 percent minimum purity, 80 percent minimum germination and 1 percent
21 maximum weed seed, labeled in accordance with U.S. Department of
22 Agriculture Rules and Regulations under Federal Seed Act in effect. Seed
23 which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or storage shall
24 not be acceptable.
25
26 C. All disturbed areas with the limits of construction shall receive vegetative
27 treatment after final grading in accordance with these plans or landscaping
28 plans. Disturbed areas not specifically designated with a vegetative cover shall
29 be vegetated as follows:
30
31 Side slopes constructed at 4:1 (H to V) shall be sodded with argentine Bahia or
32 seeded and then covered with an erosion control blanket. The blanket shall be
33 the S75BN blanket as manufactured by North America Green or equal.
34
35 Side slopes less than 4:1 (H to V) shall be seeded and mulched.
36
37 D. Sodding
38
39 1. Sod shall be Argentine Bahia of firm texture having a compacted growth
40 and good root development.
41
42 2. Sod shall be certified to meet Florida State Plant Board Specifications,
43 absolutely true to varietal type, and free from weeds or other
44 objectionable vegetation, fungus, insects and disease of any kind.
45
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 3. Before being cut and lifted the sod shall have been mowed 3 times with
2 the final mowing not more than a week before cutting into uniform
3 dimensions.
4
5 E. Mulch shall be fresh hay. Rate of application specified herein shall correspond
6 to depth not Tess than 1 inch or more than 3 inches according to texture and
7 moisture content of mulch material.
8
9 F. It is the Contractor's responsibility to water the site, as required during seeding
10 and sodding operations and through the maintenance period and until the work
11 is accepted. The Contractor shall make whatever arrangements may be
12 necessary to ensure an adequate supply of water to meet the needs for his
13 work. The Contractor shall also furnish all necessary hose, equipment,
14 attachments and accessories for the adequate irrigation of lawns and planted
15 areas as may be required.
16
17 PART 3 — EXECUTION
18
19 3.01 INSTALLATION
20
21 A. Following the subgrade preparation, the Contractor shall commence work on
22 lawns and grassed areas. Areas to be seeded or sodded shall be free from soft
23 spots and uneven grades. Apply 20 lbs. of 12-3-6 fertilizer per 1,000 sq. ft.
24
25 B. Seeded and sodded areas shall be protected from traffic or other use by placing
26 warning signs or erecting barricades as necessary. Any areas damaged prior
27 to actual acceptance by the Owner shall be repaired by the Contractor as
28 directed by the Engineer.
29
30 3.02 LAWN BED PREPARATION
31
32 A. Areas to be sodded shall be cleared of all rough grass, weeds, and debris and
33 the ground brought to an even grade.
34
35 B. The soil shall then be thoroughly tilled to a minimum 8 -inch depth.
36
37 C. Superphosphate at a rate for bidding purposes of 5 pounds per 1,000 square
38 foot and complete fertilizer at a rate for bidding purposes of 16 pounds per 1000
39 square foot shall be evenly distributed over entire area and cross -disked into a
40 depth of 4-6 inches.
41
42 D. The areas shall then be brought to proper grade, free of sticks, stones, or other
43 foreign matter over 1 -inch in diameter of dimension. The surface shall conform
44 to finish grade, less the thickness of sod, free of water -retaining depressions,
45 the soil friable and of uniformly fill texture.
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-3 03/22/2019
1
2 3.03 SOD HANDLING AND INSTALLATION
3
4 A. A one -foot wide strip of sod shall be provided around all structures, except
5 fencing, along the edges of slabs and along the edge of pavement.
6
7 B. During delivery, prior to planting, and during the planting of the lawn areas, the
8 sod panels at all times be protected from excessive drying and unnecessary
9 exposure of the roots to the sun. All sod shall be stacked during construction
10 and planting so as not to be damaged by sweating or excessive heat and
11 moisture.
12
13 C. After completion of soil conditioning as specified above, sod panels shall be laid
14 tightly together so as to make a solid sodded lawn area. On mounds and other
15 slopes, the long dimension of the sod shall be laid perpendicular to the slope.
16 Immediately following sod laying the lawn areas shall be rolled with a lawn roller
17 customarily used for such purposes, and then thoroughly watered.
18
19 D. Bring the sod edge in a neat, clean manner to the edge of all paving and shrub
20 areas. Top dressing with clean, weed free, sand may be required at no
21 additional cost to the Owner if deemed necessary by the Engineer.
22
23 3.04 CLEANUP
24
25 A. Soil, mulch, seed, or similar materials spilled onto paved areas shall be removed
26 promptly, keeping those areas as clean as possible at all times. Upon
27 completion of seeding and sodding operations, all excess soil, stones, and
28 debris remaining shall be removed from the construction areas.
29
30 3.05 MAINTENANCE
31
32 A. Any existing landscape items damaged or altered during construction by the
33 Contractor shall be restored or replaced as directed by the Engineer.
34
35 B. Maintain landscape work until Owner accepts project. Watering, weeding,
36 cultivating, restoration of grade, mowing and trimming grass, protection from
37 insects and diseases, fertilizing and similar operations as needed to ensure
38 normal growth and good health for live plant material shall be the responsibility
39 of the Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner. Sodded areas shall
40 receive no less than 1.5 inches of water per week.
41
42 3.06 REPAIRS TO LAWN AREAS DISTURBED BY CONTRACTOR'S OPERATIONS
43
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 A. Lawn areas planted under this Contract and all lawn areas damaged by the
2 Contractor's operation shall be repaired by proper soil preparation, fertilizing,
3 and reseeding, in accordance with these Specifications.
4
5 END OF SECTION
6
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-5 03/22/2019
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-6 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 SECTION 02525
2
I
3
4 CONCRETE CURB
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
I6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
8
I
9 A. The work included under this section consists of furnishing all necessary
10 labor, equipment, tools and materials, and in performing all operations in
11 connection with the construction of concrete curb, concrete valley curb,
I12 concrete swale curb, median curb, and traffic separator.
13
14 B. This work shall be performed in strict accordance with the requirements of all
I 15 applicable sections of these specifications and in conformity with lines,
16 grades, notes and typical cross sections shown on the drawings or as
17 directed by the Design Engineer.
I18
19 1.02 ALTERNATE SPECIFICATIONS
20
I
21 Special attention is called to the fact that certain portions of the work for this project
22 are described by reference to the "Standard Specifications". The term "Standard
23 Specifications" refers to "The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
24 Construction", latest edition, approved and adopted by the Florida Department of
25 Transportation. In any case, where a specific detail regarding materials or method
26 of construction has been omitted in the specifications, such work shall be performed
1 27 in accordance with the requirements of the "Standard Specifications".
28
29 1.03 TESTING STANDARDS
30
31 Shall be per the governing authorities' criteria.
32
I
33 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
34
35 2.01 CONCRETE
I36
37 Concrete for use in the construction of curbs and other miscellaneous items shall be
I
38
39 Class "B" concrete that conforms to the requirements of "Section 03300 - Cast -In -
Place Concrete", except that membrane curing compound may be used in lieu of the
40 wet cure method or the initial cure may be by the wet method followed by a
I
41
42 membrane cure. Membrane curing compound shall be applied at a uniform rate of
one gallon per 200 square feet.
43
44
45
46
I
47
CONCRETE CURB
02525-1 03/22/2019
1
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3 3.01 GENERAL
4
5 Concrete items as required by these plans shall be constructed on a prepared
6 smooth stabilized subgrade of uniform density. Large boulders and other
7 obstructions shall be removed to a minimum depth of 6 inches below the finished
8 subgrade elevation and the space shall be backfilled with sand or gravel or other
9 suitable material which shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling or tamping. The
10 Contractor shall furnish a template and shall thoroughly check the subgrade prior to
11 depositing concrete.
12
13 3.02 JOINTS
14
15 One-half inch expansion joints shall be placed through curbs at all inlet structures, at
16 all radius points, and at other locations as may be required by the plans and
17 specifications. Contraction joints shall be formed not later than the morning after the
18 pour, and shall be placed in all concrete items at intervals not to exceed 10 -feet.
19 Joints may be either formed or sawed and shall extend the full perimeter of the
20 exposed portion of the curb. Contraction joints shall be a minimum of 1 -inch in
21 depth. Joints shall be constructed for pavements or other items as required by the
22 plans or specifications.
23
24 3.03 BACKFILLING
25
26 After the concrete has sufficiently set (a minimum of 12 hours), the Contractor shall
27 remove the forms and shall backfill the space on each side of the concrete. The
28 backfill material shall be compacted and graded in a satisfactory manner.
29
30
31 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CONCRETE CURB '
02525-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02575
I2
3 PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND RESTORATION
4
I5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
I8
9 A. The work covered by this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
10 equipment, tools and materials, and in performing all operations in connection with the
111 construction of all streets, parking and other paved areas.
12
13 B. This work shall be performed in strict accordance with the requirements of all
114 applicable sections of these Specifications and in conformity with lines, grades, notes
15 and typical cross-sections shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
16
117 C. Special attention is called to the fact that certain portions of the work for this project are
18 described by reference to the "Standard Specifications". The term "Standard
19 Specifications" refers to "The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
120 Construction" approved and adopted by the F.D.O.T. In any case, where a specific
21 detail regarding materials or method of construction has been omitted in the
22 specifications, such work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of
23 the "Standard Specifications."
24
25 D. All "open cuts" shall be restored, in accordance with the details shown on the
126 construction Drawings.
27
28 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
129
30 PART 3 - EXECUTION
31
132 3.01 SUBGRADE CONSTRUCTION
33
34 A. The construction of all subgrades shall conform to the requirements set forth
135 hereinafter and shall consist of bringing the bottom of excavation and top of
36 embankments of the roadways, drives and parking areas between the outer limits of
I37 the base course, to a surface conforming to the grades, lines and cross section shown
38 on the Drawings, of uniform density, ready to receive the base course. When forms
39 are to be used, the subgrade shall be prepared for an additional width, equal to the
40 width of the base of the form plus 6 inches outside of each form line.
141
42 B. All soft and yielding material and other portions of the subgrade, which will not readily
143 compact, shall be removed and replaced with suitable material and the whole subgrade
44 brought to line and grade and to a foundation of uniform compaction and supporting
45 power. All submerged stumps, roots or other perishable matter encountered in the
PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND RESTORATION
02575-1 03/22/2019
1
1
1 preparation of the subgrade shall be removed to a depth of not Tess than 12 inches
2 below the bottom of the base course.
3
4 C. After the subgrade has been properly shaped, it shall be brought to a firm, unyielding
5 surface, by rolling the entire area with an approved 3 wheel power roller weighing not
6 Tess than 10 tons. All areas inaccessible to the roller shall be thoroughly compacted
7 with hand tampers weighing not less than 50 pounds, the face of which shall not
8 exceed 100 square inches in area. Unless the subgrade material at the time of the
9 rolling contains sufficient moisture to insure proper compaction, it shall be watered as
10 directed and then compacted. Subgrade material containing excess moisture, as
11 determined by the Engineer, shall be permitted to dry to the proper consistency before
12 being compacted.
13
14 D. The subgrade surface shall have the density and bearing value or ratio specified on the
15 construction drawings as determined by the Florida Bearing Value Test or Limerock
16 Bearing Ratio (as appropriate).
17
18 E. After the subgrade has been prepared as specified above, the Contractor shall
19 maintain it free from ruts and depressions and all damage resulting from the hauling or
20 handling of any materials, equipment tools, etc. Ditches and drains shall be
21 constructed and maintained along the completed subgrade section. A completed
22 subgrade equal to the length of the base of pavement to be laid the next working day
23 shall be maintained at all times.
24
25 F. After the subgrade has been prepared (and forms, if used, set true to line and grade),
26 and immediately before any additional material is laid, the subgrade shall be tested as
27 to crown and elevation by the use of an approved subgrade template furnished by the
28 Contractor. If forms are used, the subgrade template shall be so constructed that its
29 lower or testing edge will just come to the true position of the subgrade when the
30 template is riding on the forms. Testing of the subgrade elevation shall be done by
31 moving the template back and forth without tilting or lifting. The template shall be
32 drawn along just ahead of the point where the materials for base course are being
33 deposited and shall always be kept in position while materials are being placed. If the
34 subgrade is found not to be at the proper elevation at all points, material shall be
35 removed or added, as the condition necessitates, and compacted to bring all portions
36 of the subgrade to the correct elevation and the specified density.
37
38 3.02 LIMEROCK STABILIZED SUBGRADE
39
40 A. Subgrade not meeting the above F.B.V. or L.B.R. value shall be stabilized by mixing a
41 loose depth of crushed limerock meeting D.O.T. Standard Specifications, Section 911
42 with a specified depth of local materials. The limerock shall be thoroughly mixed with
43 the local material by a manner approved by the Engineer. No limerock shall be spread
44 that cannot be mixed within five days after spreading. Before spreading of limerock,
45 the road bed shall be completed to the lines shown on the Drawings and to a grade
46 parallel to the finished elevation of the stabilized base.
PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND RESTORATION
02575-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 B. Before placing of the stabilizing material, the elevation of the road bed shall be such
2 that when the work is completed the requirements of the typical cross section shall
I 34 have been fulfilled. As soon as the proper condition of moisture is attained, the
material shall be compacted to the density required on Drawings.
5
I6 3.03 LIMEROCK BASE COURSE
7
8 A. General: The work shall consist of furnishing all necessary limerock base material,
I9 spreading materials on the prepared subgrade, mixing, blending, finishing and
10 compacting the materials to the required lines, grades and cross sections.
11
I 12 B. Materials:
13
14 1. Limerock: Limerock shall conform with the requirements specified in Section
115 911 of the D.O.T. Standard Specifications.
16
17 At the Contractor's option, either Miami or Ocala formation may be used, but
118 only one formation may be used on any Contract.
19
20 2. Sampling and Testing: All samples of base course material shall be supplied by
I21 the Contractor at his expense and all materials shall be approved by the
22 Engineer prior to use in the work. Additional samples of base course material
23 shall be furnished during construction as required by the Engineer.
1 24
25 C. Placing of Material:
26
1 27 1. The material shall be transported to the point where it is to be used, over
28 material previously placed, if practicable, and dumped on the end of the
29 preceding spread. Hauling over the subgrade and dumping on the subgrade will
I30 be permitted only when, in the Engineer's opinion, these operations will not be
31 detrimental to the base or subbase.
32
33 D. Spreading of Material:
34
35 1. Method of Spreading: Base course material shall be spread uniformly. All
I36 segregated areas of fine or course rock shall be removed and replaced with
37 properly graded rock.
I38
39 2. Number of Courses: When the specified compacted thickness of the base is
40 greater than 6-1/2 inches, the base shall be constructed in two courses. The
41 thickness of the first course shall be approximately one-half the total thickness
I42 of the finished base, or enough additional to bear the weight of the construction
43 equipment without disturbing the subgrade. At no time shall more than three
I44 days' work of the first course be spread and compacted ahead of the second
45 course except where specifically authorized by the Engineer.
46
1
1
PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND RESTORATION
02575-3 03/22/2019
1 E. Compacting and Finishing Base
2
3 1. The base shall be bladed and shaped to conform to the typical sections shown
4 on the Drawings. The base shall be compacted to not less than 98% of
5 maximum modified proctor dry density, as determined by ASTM D1557, with a
6 minimum LBR of 100.
7
8 3.04 SURFACE COURSE
9
10 A. Bituminous Prime and Tack Coats
11
12 1. General: When the prime or tack coat is applied adjacent to curb, gutter, or any
13 other concrete surface (except where they are to be covered with a bituminous
14 wearing course) such concrete surfaces shall be protected by heavy paper or
15 other protective material while the prime or tack coat is being applied. Any
16 bituminous material deposited on such concrete surfaces shall be removed
17 immediately.
18
19 2. Weather Limitations: No bituminous material shall be applied when the air
20 temperature is less than 50EF in the shade or when the weather conditions or
21 the condition of the existing surface is unsuitable.
22
23 3. Application of Prime Coat: After the base has been finished and cured, the full
24 width of surface shall be swept with a power broom supplemented with hand
25 brooms and mechanical blowers prior to the application of the prime coat. Care
26 shall be taken to remove all loose dust, dirt, and objectionable matter. If
27 deemed necessary, the base shall be slightly sprinkled with water immediately
28 in advance of the prime coat.
29
30 The temperature of the prime material shall be such as to insure uniform
31 distribution. The material shall be applied with a pressure distributor. The
32 amount to be applied shall be sufficient to coat the surface thoroughly and
33 uniformly without any excess to form pools or to flow off the base. The base
34 shall be primed by the application of approximately 0.10 gallons per square yard
35 RC -70. Cut-back asphalt shall conform to the requirements of 916-2 D.O.T.
36 Standard Specifications.
37
38 Following the application of the prime material, a light uniform application of
39 clean sand shall be applied and rolled for the full width of the base. The sand
40 shall be non -plastic, shall be free from silt and rock particles and shall not
41 contain any sticks, vegetation, grass, roots or organic matter. After the sand
42 covering has been applied, the surface may be opened to traffic.
43
44 4. Application of Tack Coat: In general, a tack coat will not be used on primed
45 bases except in areas which have become excessively dirty and cannot be
46 cleaned or where the prime has cured and lost all of its bonding effect. No tack
PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND RESTORATION
02575-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 coat shall be applied until the primed base or leveling course has been cleaned
2 and is free from sand, dust or other objectionable material.
I3
4 The tack coat shall be applied with a pressure distributor. It shall be heated to a
5 suitable consistency and applied in a thin uniform layer at the rate of between
I6 0.03 and 0.06 gallons per square yard. The tack coat shall be applied
7 sufficiently in advance of the laying of the wearing surface to permit drying, but
8 shall not be applied so far in advance or over such an area as to lose its
I9 adhesiveness as a result of being covered with dust or other foreign material.
10 Suitable precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to protect the surface
11 while the tack coat is drying until the wearing surface is applied. Material for
1 12 tack coat shall be RS -2 or AC -20 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer
13 prior to use.
14
I15 3.05 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SURFACE
16
17 A. Materials:
I18
19 The material used shall be a plant -prepared asphalt of the type as shown on the
20 Drawings and conform to D.O.T. Specifications, Section 332 latest edition.
1 21
22 B. Placing the Mix
23
124 1. Place asphalt concrete mixture on prepared surface, spread and strike -off using
25 paving machine.
26
27 2. Spread mixture at a minimum temperature of 225EF (107.2EC)
28
29 3. Inaccessible and small areas may be placed by hand.
1 30
31 4. Place each course of thickness so that when compacted it will conform to the
32 indicated grade, cross-section, finish thickness and density indicated.
1 33
34 5. Paver Placing:
I35
36 a. Unless otherwise directed, begin placing along centerline of areas to be
37 paved on crowned section, and at high side of sections on one-way
38 slope, and in direction of traffic flow.
139
40 b. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and
141 extend rolling to overlap previous strips.
42
43 c. Complete base courses for a section before placing surface courses.
144
45 d. Place mixture in continuous operation as practicable.
46
1
1
PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND RESTORATION
02575-5 03/22/2019
1
1 6. Hand Placing: '
2
3 a. Spread, tamp, and finish mixture using hand tools in areas where
4 machine spreading is not possible, as acceptable to Engineer.
5
6 b. Place mixture at a rate that will insure handling and compaction before
7 mixture becomes cooler than acceptable working temperature.
8
9 7 Joints:
10
11 a. Carefully make joints between old and new pavements, or between
12 successive days work, to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining I
13 work.
14
15 b. Construct joints to have same texture, density and smoothness as I
16 adjacent sections of asphalt course.
17
18 c. Clean contact surfaces free of sand, dirt, or other objectionable material I
19 and apply tack coat.
20
21 d. Offset transverse joints in succeeding courses not Tess than 24 -inches. I
22
23 e. Cut back edge of previously placed courses not less than 6 -inches.
24
25 f. Offset longitudinal joints in succeeding courses not less than 6 -inches.
26
27 g. When edges of longitudinal joints are irregular, honeycombed or I
28 inadequately compacted, cut back unsatisfactory sections to expose an
29 even, vertical surface for full course thickness.
30
1
31 C. Compacting the Mix
32
33 1. Provide sufficient rollers to obtain the required pavement density.
34
35 2. Begin rolling operations as soon after placing when the mixture will bear weight
36 of roller without excessive displacement.
37
38 3. Do not permit heavy equipment, including rollers to stand on finished surface
39 before it has thoroughly cooled or set.
40
41 4. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas
42 inaccessible to rollers.
43
44 5. Start rolling longitudinally at extreme lower side of sections and proceed toward
45 center of pavement. Roll to slightly different lengths on alternate roller runs. ,
46
PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND RESTORATION
02575-6 03/22/2019
1
1
1
' 1 6. Do not roll centers of sections first under any circumstances.
2
I
37. Breakdown Rolling:
4
5 a. Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of
I6 transverse and longitudinal joints and outside edge.
7
8 b. Operate rollers as close as possible to paver without causing pavement
I9 displacement.
10
11 c. Check crown, grade, and smoothness after breakdown rolling.
I12
13 d. Repair displaced areas by loosening at once with lutes or rakes and
14 filling, if required, with hot loose material before continuing rolling.
I15
16 8. Second Rolling:
17
18 a. Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot and in
19 condition for compaction.
20
121 b. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted.
22
23 9. Finish Rolling:
1 24
25 a. Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of
26 roller marks.
127
28 b. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained
29 specified density.
130
31 10. Patching:
I32
33 a. Remove and replace defective areas.
34
35 b. Cut-out and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete.
I36
37 c. Compact by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness.
I38
39 d. Remove deficient areas for full depth of course.
40
• 41 e. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel to direction of traffic with edges
I 42 vertical.
43
▪ 44 f. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new asphalt concrete
I 45 mixture.
46
1
1
PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND RESTORATION
02575-7 03/22/2019
1
1 3.06 PARKING MARKING 1
2
3 A. Materials:
4
5 1. Parking marking paint with chlorinated rubber base.
6
7 2. Factory mixed, quick drying and non-bleeding, FS TT -P -115C, Type III.
8
9 3. Color: Parking Dividers - White
10
11 B. Marking Asphalt Concrete Pavement
12
13 1. Cleaning:
14
15 a. Sweep surfaces with power broom supplemented by hand brooms to I
16 remove loose material and dirt.
17
18 b. Do not begin marking asphalt concrete pavement until acceptable to the I
19 Engineer.
20
21 2. Apply paint with mechanical equipment:
1
22
23 a. Provide uniform straight edges.
24 1 25 b. Not less than 2 separate coats in accordance with manufacturer's
26 recommended rates.
27
1
28 3.07 OVERLAYING
29
30 A. Overlaying:
1
31
32 1. Roadways shall be resurfaced in accordance with the provisions in 3.04 and 3.05 of
33 this section.
34
35 2. The pavement shall be resurfaced with a 1 -inch overlay.
36
37 3. Those areas as indicated on the drawings to be restored shall be overlayed.
38
39
1
40 END OF SECTION
PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND RESTORATION
02575-8 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 SECTION 02720
2
I3 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
I6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
II 9 A. Furnish all necessary labor, materials, equipment and performing all operations in
• 10 connection with construction of storm sewers, inlets, manholes, end sections and other
11 drainage structures or drainage construction as shown or indicated on the Drawings, or
112 as specified herein.
13
14 B. Special attention is called to the fact that certain portions of the work for this project are
115 described by reference to the Standard Specifications. The term Standard
16 Specifications refers to The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,
17 latest edition approved and adopted by the Florida Department of Transportation. In
118 any case where a specific detail regarding materials or method of construction has
19 been omitted in the specification or on the Drawings, such work shall be performed in
20 accordance with the requirements of the Standard Specifications.
121
22 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS
23
I24 A. All precast structures shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, who is fully
25 experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of items to be furnished. The
26 structures shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best
1 27 practices and methods, and shall comply with the requirements of the Standard
28 Specifications.
29
I30 1.03 SUBMITTALS
31
32 A. In general, 6 copies of the following data or shop drawings shall be submitted to the
I33 Engineer for approval prior to construction:
34
35 1. Manhole frames, covers and other castings.
I36 2. Precast manholes
37 3. Precast structures
38
`39 B. The quality of all materials, the process of manufacture and the finished sections, shall
40 be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer, or other representative of the
I41 Engineer. Such inspection may be made at the place of manufacture, or on the work
421 site after delivery, or at both places. The sections shall be subject to rejection at any
43 time on account of failure to meet any of the Specification requirements, even though a
I44 sample section may have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture.
45 Sections rejected after delivery to the site shall be marked for identification and shall be
46 removed from the site at once. All sections, which have been damaged after delivery,
1
1
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02720-1 03/22/2019
1 will be rejected and, if already installed, shall be acceptably repaired, if approved by the
2 Engineer, or removed and replaced, entirely at the Contractor's expense.
3
4 C. At the time of inspection, the sections will be carefully examined for compliance with
5 the ASTM designation specified below and these Specifications, and with the approved
6 manufacturer's drawings. All sections shall be inspected for general appearance,
7 dimension, "scratch -strength", blisters, crack, roughness, soundness and other
8 features. The surface shall be dense and close -textured.
9
10 D. Imperfections may be repaired, subject to the approval of the Engineer, after
11 demonstration by the manufacturer that strong and permanent repairs result. Repairs
12 shall be carefully inspected before final approval. Cement mortar used for repairs shall
13 have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi at the end of 7 days and 5,000 psi
14 at the end of 28 days, when tested in 3 -in. by 6 -in. cylinders stored in the standard
15 manner. Epoxy mortar may be utilized for repairs, subject to the approval of the
16 Engineer.
17
18 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
19
20 2.01 MATERIALS AND DESIGN
21
22 A. Precast structures shall conform to ASTM Designation C478 and meet the following
23 additional requirements:
24
25 1. Type II cement shall be used, except as otherwise approved.
26
27 2. Holes to accommodate pipe shall be precast into the section at the
28 manufacturer's plant.
29
30 3. All sections shall be cured by an approved method and shall not be shipped
31 until the concrete compressive strength has attained 4,000 psi and not before 6
32 days after fabrication and/or repair, whichever is longer.
33
34 4. Precast concrete top slabs shall be designed for an AASHTO H-20 wheel
35 loading.
36
37 5. The date of manufacture and the name or trademark of the manufacturer shall
38 be clearly marked on the inside of each precast unit.
39
40 6. Minimum wall thickness shall be 6 inches.
41
42 7. Minimum inside diameter shall be 48 inches for manholes.
43
44 8. The precast reinforced based shall be a minimum of 8 inches thick and be cast
45 monolithically with the bottom section of manhole walls.
46
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02720-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I1 9. Manholes sections shall be joined with a tongue and groove joint complete with
2 flexible plastic gasket. The tongue and groove joint shall be sealed with a
I
3 flexible plastic gasket, as manufactured by K. T. Snyder & Sons, or equal. After
4 the manhole sections have been assembled, the gasket shall be trimmed to a
5 depth of 1/4" and filled with hydraulic cement.
I6
7 10. Openings for pipes larger than 6 inches in diameter are to be precast. A
8 minimum of 6 inches along the intercircumference is to remain between the
9 extremities of hole for adjacent pipe in any single unit. A minimum of two (2)
• 10 reinforcing bars shall remain in wall between any two (2) openings.
11
112 11. The Contractor will furnish the fabricator with the angle of alignment and size of
13 all pipes to enter manhole and the height of structure.
14
I 15 12. Base units shall have sufficient height to allow for minimum of 6 inches of wall
• 16 between top of highest opening for pipes and bottom of joint.
17
118 13. Pipes are to be extended into structure wall a minimum of 4 inches, but should
19 not extend beyond interior wall of structure.
20
121 B. Concrete pipe shall be reinforced concrete culvert pipe conforming to ASTM
22 Designation C-76, Table III, except when otherwise indicated. Reinforced concreted
23 horizontal elliptical pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation C-507,
1 24 Class HE III. Pipe joints shall be rubber gasket joints and the pipe joint shall be
25 manufactured to meet the requirements of the approved type of gasket to be used.
26 Pipe joints and rubber gaskets shall meet the requirements of the Standard
127 Specifications. Rubber gaskets for elliptical pipe (ERCP) shall conform to the
28 requirements of ASTM C443 and ASSHTO M198.
29
' 30 C. All bricks for drainage structures shall be first class, dense, free from cracks, true in
31 shape, have square edges, and a clear ringing sound when struck. Clay brick shall be
32 hard burned, sound, and burned entirely through. Brick of any one make shall not vary
I33 more than 1/16 inch in thickness, nor more than 1/8 inch in width or length. The
34 average amount of water absorbed by the brick, after being thoroughly dried and then
35 immersed for 24 hours, shall not exceed 8 percent. Concrete brick shall conform to the
I36 requirements the Standard Specifications.
37
38 D. Mortar shall consist of one part cement and two parts clean sharp sand to which may
I 39 be added lime in the amount of not over 25 percent of the volume of cement. It shall
40 be mixed dry and then wetted to proper consistency for use. No mortars that have
• 41 stood for more than one hour shall be used.
42
43 E. All castings for manhole frames, covers, steps and other purposes shall conform to the
144 ASTM Designation A48-74, Class 25. Castings shall be true to pattern in form and
45 dimensions and free of pouring faults and other defects in positions which would impair
46 their strength or otherwise make them unfit for the services intended. The seating
1
1
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02720-3 03/22/2019
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
surfaces between frames and covers or grates shall be machined to fit true. No
plugging or filling will be allowed. Lifting or "pick" holes shall be provided but shall not
penetrate the manhole cover. Casting patterns shall conform to those shown or
indicated on the Drawings.
F. Riprap
1. General
The work specified in this Section consists of the construction of Riprap
composed of sand and cement. The Riprap shall be placed against the
embankment or other work to be protected, in accordance with these
specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions and notes
shown in the Drawings. Riprap materials shall conform to the Standard
Specifications.
2. Portland Cement
The Portland cement used in sand -cement Riprap will not be subject to tests,
provided it is from an approved source and is the product of an established and
reputable manufacturer. The sandbag mixture shall contain at least one part
cement to five parts of clean sand.
3. Fine Aggregate
The fine aggregate shall be graded so as to fall within the following limits:
Passing Percent
No. 4 sieve Minimum 97
No. 100 sieve Maximum 20
No. 200 sieve Maximum 5
This sand shall be subjected to the colorimetric test for impurities and if the color
produced is darker than the standard solution it will be rejected.
4. Sacks
The sacks shall be cloth cement sacks, or any suitable cloth or jute sacks which
will hold the sand -cement mixture without leakage when handled. The sacks
shall be of uniform size and dimensions, in order to provide uniformity of lines in
the completed work. They shall be free from holes and strong enough to stand
handling without ripping or splitting. Only one type and size of sack shall be
used at any one structure.
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02720-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1 5. Grout
2
3 The cement and the sand used in the grout between the sacks will not be
4 required to be tested for specification requirements, provided the cement is the
5 product of a reputable manufacturer and of a type and quality appropriate for
6 this work, and that the sand is a clear commercial sand meeting the approval of
7 the Engineer for this particular use.
8
I9 PART 3 - EXECUTION
10
11 3.01 INSTALLATION
I12
13 A. Manholes shall be constructed to requirements of the Standard Specifications and as
14 specified herein.
I15
16 B. Precast concrete sections shall be set, so as to be vertical and with section in true
17 alignment with a 1/4 -inch maximum tolerance to be allowed. Backfilling shall be done
I18 in a careful manner, bringing the fill up evenly on all sides. The Contractor shall install
19 the precast sections in a manner that will result in a watertight joint.
20
121 C. Holes in the concrete pipe sections required for handling or other purposes shall be
22 plugged with a non -shrinking grout or by grout in combination with concrete plugs.
23
124 D. Where holes must be cut in the precast section to accommodate pipe, cutting shall be
25 done prior to setting them in place.
26
I27 E. The precast concrete base shall be placed on a bed of 3/4" rock, to provide even
28 bearing and grade control.
129
30 F A tapered hole filled with non -shrink waterproof after the pipe is inserted is acceptable,
31 providing the grout is placed carefully to completely fill all around the pipe. If this
32 method is used, place concrete encasement around the stub.
I33
34 G. Cast iron frames, specified and furnished, shall be placed, shimmed and set in Portland
I35 cement mortar to the required grade.
36
37 H. The lines entering the manhole shall be laid to the grade shown on the Drawings.
38
39 I. The interior and exterior surfaces of the precast and cast -in-place manholes shall be
40 given two (2) coats of bituminous dampproofing for a total minimum thickness of 16
I41 mils DFT.
42
43 J. Manhole frame and cover shall be brought to (or adjusted to) grade from the top of the
I44 structure with brick.
45
1
1
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02720-5 03/22/2019
1 K. All manholes and cast -in-place structures shall be constructed watertight. If leaks
2 appear, they shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3
4 L. Manholes shall be provided with stubs and plugs, if indicated on the Drawings. Pipe
5 stubs shall be as specified in the applicable section for pipe and shall be provided via
6 suitable caps.
7
8 M. Drainage ditches shall be constructed to the configuration indicated on the
9 Drawings --with care being taken to hold to the specified slope. Sodding or seeding of
10 the ditch as called for on the Drawings shall be accomplished as soon as possible after
11 the slopes are dressed.
12
13 N. Pipe Trenches
14
15 1. General
16
17 Pipe trenches shall be of necessary widths for the proper laying of the pipe, and
18 the banks shall be as nearly vertical as practicable. The bottom of the trenches
19 shall be excavated to a depth of 6 -inches below the outside bottom of the pipe
20 barrel. The resulting excavation shall be backfilled with pipe bedding material
21 up to the level of the lower one-third of the proposed pipe barrel. This backfill
22 material shall be tamped and compacted to provide proper bedding for the pipe
23 and shall then be shaped to receive the pipe. Bell holes and depressions for
24 joints shall be dug after the trench bottom has been graded, and in order that
25 the pipe rest upon the prepared bottom for as nearly its full length as
26 practicable, shall be only of such length, depth and width as required for
27 properly making the particular type of joint.
28
29 2. Removal of Unstable Material
30
31 Soft, spongy, or otherwise unstable material (A-8 Material) encountered below
32 the established grade of the excavation which will not provide a firm foundation
33 for subsequent work, shall be removed and replaced as directed. Unless
34 otherwise directed, all such unstable materials shall be removed for the full
35 width of the excavation and replaced with approved fill material.
36
37 3. Pumping, Sheeting and Bracing
38
39 Where sheeting and bracing are necessary to prevent caving of the trench
40 sidewalls or sidewalls of excavation for other structures and to safeguard the
41 workmen, the trench or excavation for other structures shall be dug to such
42 width that the proper allowance is made for the space occupied by the sheeting
43 and bracing, and also is in compliance with the Trench Safety Act.
44
45
46
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02720-6 03/22/2019
1
1 1 O. Pipe Laying and Jointing
2
I34 1. General
5 The grade as shown or indicated on the Drawings is that of the invert and to
I6 which the work must conform. Any variation from this grade will be deemed
7 sufficient reason to cause the work to be rejected and rebuilt at the Contractor's
8 expense. Each piece of pipe, just before being lowered into the trench shall be
9 inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in fitting the pieces together,
• 10 this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and
11 the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be
I 12 trimmed or chipped to fit. Pipes having defects that have not caused their
• 13 rejection are to be so laid that these defects will be in the upper half of the
14 sewer. A bell hole is to be cut for each piece.
115
16 Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded and not simply wedged
17 up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that
I18 the inverts coincide. Each pipe shall be laid to the line and grade shown or
19 indicated on the Drawings. All pipes shall be laid with bells or grooves uphill.
20 As the pipes are laid throughout the work they must be thoroughly cleaned and
I21 protected from dirt and water. No length of pipe shall be laid until the two
22 preceding lengths have been thoroughly embedded in place so as to prevent
23 any movement or disturbance of the finished joint. No walking on or working
I24 over the pipes after they are laid, except as may be necessary in tamping earth
25 and refilling, will be permitted until they are covered to a depth of one foot.
26 Whenever the pipe laying is discontinued, as at night, the unfinished end is to
27 be securely protected from displacement by caving of the banks or from other
28 injury and a suitable stopper is to be inserted therein.
29
I30 2. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Joints
31
32 Joints for reinforced concrete pipe storm sewer or culverts shall be made using
I33 an approved performed or molded rubber gasket. The gasket and the surface
34 of the pipe joint, including the gasket recess, shall be clean and free from grit,
35 dirt or other foreign matter at the time the joints are made. In order to facilitate
136 closure of the joint, application of an approved vegetable soap lubricant
37 immediately prior to closing of the joint will be permitted.
38
139 3. Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Pipe
40
I41 Joints for reinforced concrete elliptical pipe shall be made as specified above for
42 reinforced concrete pipe joints. Elliptical pipe shall be laid with the longest
43 dimensions placed horizontally.
I44
45
46
1
1
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02720-7 03/22/2019
1 P Drainage Structures
2
3 1. Drainage structures shall be built at points shown on the Drawings or
4 designated by the Engineer and in strict accordance with the Drawings.
5
6 2. Excavation for drainage structures shall be sufficient to provide a clearance
7 between their surfaces and the face of the excavation or sheeting, if used, of not
8 less than 12 -inches. Backfill shall be placed as specified herein before.
9 Unsuitable material uncovered at the footing elevation shall be excavated to
10 suitable material and the excavation backfilled with pipe bedding material to the
11 required elevation.
12
13 3. Brick masonry for manholes, inlets or other structures shall be built of brick and
14 mortar of the specified quality. Every fifth course of brick shall be laid as
15 stretchers, the remainder being laid as headers. Every brick shall have full
16 mortar joints on the bottom and sides which shall have been formed at one
17 operation by placing sufficient mortar on the head and forcing the brick into it.
18 Horizontal joints shall not exceed 1/4 of an inch. All brick shall be thoroughly
19 drenched with water immediately before being laid.
20
21 Q. Sand -Cement Riprap
22
23 1. Mixing Materials
24
25 The sand and cement shall be mixed dry, in the proportion of one part cement to
26 five parts sand, until the mixture is of uniform color.
27
28 2. Filling Sacks
29
30 The mixed material shall be accurately measured into each sack, with care
31 being taken to place the same amount of material in each sack, and at least the
32 top six inches of the sacks shall remain unfilled to allow for proper tying and
33 folding and to insure against breaking of the sack during placing.
34
35 3. Placing
36
37 The filled sacks shall be placed with their tied or folded ends all in the same
38 direction unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. The sacks shall be laid with
39 broken joints and, where so directed by the Engineer, header courses shall be
40 laid in order to tie the units together. The sacks shall be rammed or packed
41 against each other so as to form a close and molded contact after the sand and
42 cement mixture has set up. All sacks shall then be thoroughly wetted.
43
44 4. Grouting
45
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02720-8 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
After the wetting, all openings between sacks shall be filled with grout
composed of one part Portland cement and five parts sand.
END OF SECTION
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02720-9 03/22/2019
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02720-10 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
SECTION 02730
PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES
I9 A. The work included under this section consists of furnishing all necessary labor,
10 equipment, materials, and performing all operations in connection with construction of
11 Sanitary Manholes, ARV Structures (where applicable), Lift Station Wet Wells, and any
112 other appurtenant structures including excavation, trenching, backfilling along with any
13 other work as required or as directed that would be required to install a fully functional
14 system.
I15
16 1.02 SUBMITTALS
17
118 A. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Specification 01340 for all
19 materials associated with construction of the sanitary sewer collection system.
20
121 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
22
23 2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES
1 24
25 A. All precast concrete structures shall be new, unused and manufactured for this project.
26 All manholes shall be precast concrete. The minimum acceptable manhole inside
I27 diameter is 4 feet. Precast, reinforced concrete manholes shall have tongue and
28 groove interlocking joints. Inverts shall be formed as specified herein. It shall be the
29 responsibility of the Contractor to assure that all manhole inlets are provided at the
I30 proper locations and elevations to accommodate the actual field requirements without
31 additional compensation. Slabs for precast manholes shall be no less than 7 feet
32 square. All slabs for precast drop manholes shall be of sufficient size to entirely
I33 support the drop structures. All manholes shall be placed on a FDOT No. 57 gravel
34 base of a minimum of 12 inches in depth and wrapped in filter fabric.
35
136 B. Precast reinforced concrete manhole risers, grade rings and tops shall conform as to
37 materials, design, and fabrication with the requirements of ASTM Designation C-478.
38 The concrete shall consist of 4000 psi/28 day Type II Portland cement. The walls for
I39 manholes shall be no less than 8 -inches thick. All precast manhole parts are to be free
40 of fractures, honeycomb, and other defects of concrete. Cones shall be concentric.
41 Flat top assemblies will be considered acceptable for lift station construction only.
I 42
43 C. Precast manholes shall consist of a base unit with openings for the sewer pipe, riser
I44 units of various lengths to build the manhole up to the required depth and concentric
45 cones. The minimum height of the shortest riser shall be 12 -inches. The maximum
1
1
PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES
02730-1 03/22/2019
1 height of adjusting ring is 18 - inches. All interior and exterior surfaces and the tongue
2 and groove ends of each unit shall be sand blasted and brushed clean and immediately
3 thereafter the exterior shall be completely coated with a protective bituminous coating
4 of not less than 15 mils. The coating shall be applied in strict accordance with the
5 manufacturer's recommendations. The exterior paint shall be intact and continuous.
6 Any chips or holidays shall be patched using two coats of approved coatings used
7 according to manufacturer instructions and with the knowledge of the Owner's
8 Engineer. Top and bottom ends of riser or sections shall be perfectly formed so that
9 continuous and uniform contact is possible around the entire joint. Malformed joints
10 shall be rejected. The interior of all manhole units shall be lined with Agru American
11 HDPE Sure Grip® or equal.
12
13 2.02 MORTAR
14
15 A. Mortar for manholes shall consist of one part Portland Type II cement, two to three
16 parts fine sand mixed with water for proper consistency. Lime shall not be used in
17 mortar for manholes. Commercially prepared mortar mixes or expanding grout shall
18 not be used. Admixtures to mortar or commercial fast -setting cements shall not be
19 used without approval of the Owner's Engineer.
20
21 2.03 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS
22
23 A. All frames and covers shall be U.S. Foundry and Manufacturing Corporation #170 with
24 165 pound cover. All mating surfaces shall be machined for proper fit. Castings are to
25 be cleaned and tar coated. All manhole covers shall have two watertight pick holes.
26 Waterproof sewer guards are required for manholes in drainage pathways and other
27 areas prone to flooding as determined by the County. Manhole covers in paved areas
28 shall be flush with the top of pavement. Manholes in non -paved areas shall be 3 -
29 inches above finished grade. Identification lettering shall be in accordance with the
30 details included on the project drawings.
31
32 PART 3 - EXECUTION
33
34 3.01 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
35
36 A. All excavation, preparation of pipe bedding, and backfill for sewers, sewer connections,
37 manholes and other appurtenances shall be performed in accordance with the
38 requirements of Section 02221 - "Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill, and Grading for
39 Pipes."
40
41 3.02 JOINING PIPE TO MANHOLES OR OTHER STRUCTURES
42
43 A. A flexible rubber boot shall be used at the manhole to pipe connection. The boot shall
44 be manufactured of neoprene or isoprene compounds formulated and tested to resist
45 deterioration due to sewage, hydrogen sulfide, oils, fats, greases, petroleum products
46 and by-products. The connection at the manhole wall shall be flexible and water -tight.
PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES
02730-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1 Any annular space inside the manhole at the connection shall be filled with approved
2 caulking material or joint filler.
3
4 B. For manholes greater than or equal to 20 feet deep, all sewer connections to precast
5 manholes shall be grouted on the interior and on the exterior in addition to the use of
6 the rubber boot. The interior and exterior of connections to fiberglass manholes
7 greater than or equal to 20 feet deep shall be glassed in.
8
I9 C. No pipe to manhole connections shall occur within 12 inches of a manhole -to -manhole
10 section joint.
11
112 3.03 PRECAST MANHOLES
13
14 A. All slabs or bottom sections shall be installed at a grade that will allow clearance under
I
15 the bells of the pipe. All slabs or bottom sections shall be solidly installed on 3/4 -inch
16 bedding stone that has been compacted against firm undisturbed soil. Depth of
17 bedding stone will be as directed by the Engineer.
118
19 B. The tongue and groove ends of each unit shall be primed with Ram-nek primer and
20 allowed to dry. Immediately before placing the next unit, the joints shall receive a
21 coating of Ram-nek. Enough plastic material shall be placed in the joint to squeeze a
22 bead of excess material out of the joint insuring a completely sealed joint.
23
24 C. The top of the cone shall be set between 2 1/2 inches and 14 1/2 inches below the
25 bottom of the manhole cover frame. It is the intent of the Specifications to provide a
26 minimum of 2 1/2 inches to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the
1 27 manhole. Where the distance between the bottom of the manhole cover frame and the
28 top of the cone is greater than 14 1/2 inches, 12 inch riser units shall be used to bring
29 the top of the cone to within the limits specified.
I30
31 D. On sewers 20 -feet and deeper, the interior and exterior annular space between the
32 sewer pipe and the opening in the manhole shall be grouted with Portland cement
I33 mortar and wiped or collared to insure a watertight joint. Invert channels shall be
34 formed after the manhole is set by one of the following methods: Build up with brick
35 and mortar, or lay a full section of sewer pipe through manhole and cut out the top half.
I36 The manhole floor outside of the channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward
37 the channels on a slope of 2 inches per foot.
38
39 3.04 DROP MANHOLES
40
I
41 A. External drops are required on all manholes where the upper invert is 2 -feet or more
42 above the lowest invert. The upper invert shall not be blocked.
43
I44 B. Drop manholes shall be constructed in accordance with details shown on the plans.
45
1
1
PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES
02730-3 03/22/2019
1 C. Special drop manholes may be required at points where force mains connect to gravity
2 sewers above the flow line of the manhole. The special drop shall be constructed of
3 standard ductile iron pipe and fittings the same size as the force main.
4
5 3.05 MANHOLE INVERTS
6
7 A. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular, conforming to the inside
8 of adjacent sewer section. The mortared invert channel shall have a steel trowel finish.
9 Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as
10 possible. Changes in size and grade shall be made gradually and smoothly.
11 Whenever possible, inverts shall be formed with a full section of pipe laid through the
12 manhole and then breaking out the top half. Benches shall be built up solidly with
13 concrete or brick and mortar and shall be sloping to the invert. All inside drops shall
14 have a flume construction to channel flow into the invert. All pipe entering the manhole
15 must be trimmed flush with the walls. All exposed sharp edges of pipe shall be wiped
16 smooth with mortar.
17
18 B. Manhole inverts and benches shall be constructed at the same profile slope as the
19 downstream pipe.
20
21 C. Manhole inverts shall be as follows:
22
23 1. Precut PVC half -pipe for flow through manhole; or
24
25 2. Manhole bench constructed of solid clay brick forming an invert the shape of a
26 half -pipe.
27
28 3.06 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS
29
30 A. Existing manhole frames and covers shall be adjusted to pavement grade during road
31 resurfacing by addition or removal of height adjustment rings. Where required by the
32 Engineer, height adjustment inserts of continuous rings of a type as directed by the
33 Engineer shall be installed in the existing frame/cover assembly.
34
35
36
37 END OF SECTION
PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES
02730-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 03100
2
3 CONCRETE FORMWORK
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and design,
10 install and remove formwork for cast -in-place concrete as shown on the
11 Drawings and as specified herein.
12
13 B. Secure to forms as required or set for embedment as required, all miscellaneous
14 metal items, sleeves, reglets, anchor bolts, inserts and other items furnished
15 under other Sections and required to be cast into concrete.
16
17 1.02 RELATED WORK
18
19 A. Concrete Reinforcement is included in Section 03200.
20 B. Concrete Joints and Joint Accessories are included in Section 03250.
21 C. Cast -in -Place Concrete is included in Section 03300.
22 D. Concrete Finished are included in Section 03350.
23 E. Grout is included in Section 03600.
24
25 1.03 SUBMITTALS
26
27 A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, shop drawings and
28 product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for:
29
30 1. Form release agent
31 2. Form ties
32 3. Tapered Ties: Proposed method and products for sealing form tie hole
33
34 B. Samples
35
36 1. Demonstrate to the Engineer on a designated area of the concrete
37 substructure exterior surface that the form release agent will not
38 adversely affect concrete surfaces to be painted, coated or otherwise
39 finished and will not affect the forming materials.
40
41 C. Certificates
42
43 1. Statement of qualification for the formwork designer retained by
44 Contractor, Formwork designer shall be a professional engineer
45 registered in the same state as the project site. Designer shall have at a
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100-1 03/22/2019
1 minimum, five years of experience designing the required formwork and
2 falsework systems.
3 2. Certify form release agent is suitable for use in contact with potable water
4 after 30 days (non-toxic and free of taste and odor).
5
6 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
7
8 A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
9
10 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete
11 2. ACI 117 — Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
12 Materials
13
14 B. American Plywood Association (APA)
15
16 1. Material grades and designations as specified
17
18 C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect
19 at the time of bid opening shall apply.
20
21 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
22
23 A. The form liner manufacturer's representative shall be on-site during the initial
24 installation of the form liner to instruct the Contractor on the proper methods of
25 application and use of the liner.
26
27 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
28
29 A. Structural design responsibility: All forms and shoring shall be designed at the
30 Contractor's expense by a professional engineer registered in the State of
31 Florida. Formwork shall be designed and erected in accordance with the
32 requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 117 and shall comply with all applicable
33 regulations and codes. The design shall consider any special requirements due
34 to the use of plasticized and/or retarded set concrete.
35
36 B. Architectural Concrete is wall, slab, beam or column concrete which will have
37 surfaces exposed to view in the finished work. It includes similar exposed
38 surfaces in water containment structures from the top of walls to 2 -ft below the
39 normal water surface in open tanks and basins.
40
41
42 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
43
44 2.01 GENERAL
45
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 A. The usage of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the
2 purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configurations
3 desired.
4
5 2.02 MATERIALS
6
7 A. Forms for cast -in-place concrete shall be made of wood, metal, or other
8 approved material. Construct wood forms of sound lumber or plywood of
9 suitable dimensions and free from knotholes and loose knots. Where used for
10 exposed surfaces, dress and match boards. Sand plywood smooth and fit
11 adjacent panels with tight joints. Metal forms may be used when approved by
12 the Engineer and shall be of an appropriate type for the class of work involved.
13 All forms shall be designed and constructed to provide a flat, uniform concrete
14 surface requiring minimal finishing or repairs.
15
16 B. Wall Forms
17
18 1. Forms for all exposed exterior and interior concrete walls shall be new
19 and unused "Plyform" exterior grade plywood panels manufactured in
20 compliance with the APA and bearing the trademark of that group, or
21 equal acceptable to the Engineer. Provide B grade or better veneer on
22 all faces to be placed against concrete during forming. The class of
23 material and grades of interior plies shall be of sufficient strength and
24 stiffness to provide a flat, uniform concrete surface requiring minimal
25 finishing and grinding.
26
27 2. All joints or gaps in forms shall be taped, gasketed, plugged, and/or
28 caulked with an approved material so that the joint will remain watertight
29 and will withstand placing pressures without bulging outward or creating
30 surface patterns.
31
32 3. Circular Structures: Use forms conforming to the circular shape of the
33 structure. Straight panels may be substitute for circular form provided
34 panels to not exceed two (2) feet in horizontal width and angular
35 deflection is no greater than 3 1/2 degrees per joint.
36
37 C. Column Forms
38
39 1. Rectangular columns: as specified for walls.
40
41 2. Circular columns: Fabricated steel or fiber reinforced plastic with bolted
42 together sections or spirally wound laminated fiber form internally treated
43 with form release agent for height of columns.
44
45 D. Rustications shall be at the location and shall conform to the details shown on
46 the Drawings. Moldings for chamfers and rustications shall be milled and planed
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100-3 03/22/2019
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
smooth. Rustications and corner strips shall be of a nonabsorbent material,
compatible with the form surface and fully sealed on all sides to prohibit the loss
of paste or water between the two surfaces.
E. Form Release Agent
1. Coat all forming surfaces in contact with concrete using an effective,
non -staining, non -residual, water based, bond -breaking form coating
unless otherwise noted. Form release agents used in potable water
containment structures shall be suitable for use in contact with potable
water and shall be non-toxic and free of taste or odor and meet the
requirements of NSF/ANSI Standard 61. Form release agent shall be
Farm Fresh by Unitex or Engineer approved equal.
F. Concrete surfaces which are to be painted shall be formed with hard plastic
finished plywood or a similar material which does not require a form release
agent unless the Contractor can substantiate to the satisfaction of the Engineer
that the form release agent will not remain on the formed surface after it is
stripped.
G. Form Ties
1. Form ties encased in concrete other than those specified herein shall be
designed so that after removal of the projecting part no metal shall remain
within 1 -1/2 -in of the face of the concrete. The part of the tie to be
removed shall be at least 1/2 -in diameter or be provided with a wood or
metal cone at least 1/2 -in diameter and 1 -1/2 -in long. Form ties in
concrete exposed to view shall be the cone -washer type.
2. Form ties for exposed exterior and interior walls shall be as specified in
the preceding paragraph except that the cones shall be of approved
wood or plastic.
3. Flat bar ties for panel forms shall have plastic or rubber inserts having a
minimum depth of 1 -1/2 -in and sufficient dimensions to permit proper
patching of the tie hole.
4. Ties for liquid containment structures shall have an integral waterstop
that is tightly welded to the tie.
5. Common wire shall not be used for form ties.
6. Alternate form ties consisting of tapered through -bolts at least 1 -in in
diameter at smallest end or through -bolts that utilize a removable tapered
sleeve of the same minimum size may be used at the Contractor's option.
Obtain Engineer's acceptance of system and spacing of ties prior to
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 ordering or purchase of forming. Clean, fill and seal form tie hole with
2 non -shrink cement grout. The Contractor shall be responsible for
3 watertightness of the form ties and any repairs needed.
4
5 H. Bond breakers for precast and tilt -up construction when cast against concrete
6 shall be a nonstaining, non -residual type, which will provide a positive bond
7 prevention. Bond breakers shall be Williams Distributors, Inc., Seattle,
8 WA - Williams Tilt -Up Compound; SCA Construction Supply Division, Superior
9 Concrete Accessories, Franklin Park, IL - Silcoseal 77 or equal.
10
11 PART 3 - EXECUTION
12
13 3.01 GENERAL
14
15 A. Forms shall be used for all cast -in-place concrete including sides of footings.
16 Forms shall be constructed and placed so that the resulting concrete will be of
17 the shape, lines, dimensions and appearance indicated on the drawings.
18
19 B. Forms for walls shall have removable panels at the bottom for cleaning,
20 inspection and joint surface preparation. Forms for walls of considerable height
21 (15 feet or greater) shall have closable intermediate inspection ports. Tremies
22 and hoppers for placing concrete shall be used to allow concrete inspection,
23 prevent segregation and prevent the accumulation of hardened concrete on the
24 forms above the fresh concrete.
25
26 C. Molding, bevels, or other types of chamfer strips shall be placed to produce
27 blockouts, rustications, or chamfers as shown on the Drawings or as specified
28 herein. Chamfer strips shall be provided at horizontal and vertical projecting
29 corners to produce a 3/4 -in chamfer. Rectangular or trapezoidal moldings shall
30 be placed in locations requiring sealants where specified or shown on the
31 Drawings. Sizes of moldings shall conform to the sealants manufacturer's
32 recommendations.
33
34 D. Forms shall be sufficiently rigid to withstand construction loads and vibration
35 and to prevent displacement or sagging between supports. Construct forms so
36 that the concrete will not be damaged by their removal. The Contractor shall be
37 entirely responsible for the adequacy of the forming system.
38
39 E. Before form material is re -used, all surfaces to be in contact with concrete shall
40 be thoroughly cleaned, all damaged places repaired, all projecting nails
41 withdrawn and all protrusions smoothed. Reuse of wooden forms for other than
42 rough finish will be permitted only if a "like new" condition of the form is
43 maintained.
44
45 3.02 FORM TOLERANCES
46
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100-5 03/22/2019
1 A. Forms shall be surfaced, designed and constructed in accordance with the
2 recommendations of ACI 117 and shall meet the following additional
3 requirements for the specified finishes.
4
5 B. Formed Surface Exposed to View: Edges of all form panels in contact with
6 concrete shall be flush within 1/32 -in and forms for plane surfaces shall be such
7 that the concrete will be plane within 1/16 -in in 4 -ft. Forms shall be tight to
8 prevent the passage of mortar, water and grout. The maximum deviation of the
9 finish wall surface at any point shall not exceed 1/4 -in from the intended surface
10 as shown on the Drawings. Form panels shall be arranged symmetrically and
11 in an orderly manner to minimize the number of seams.
12
13 C. Formed surfaces not exposed to view or buried shall meet requirements of
14 Class "C" Surface in ACI 117.
15
16 D. Formed rough surfaces including mass concrete, pipe encasement, electrical
17 duct encasement and other similar installations shall have no minimum
18 requirements for surface smoothness and surface deflections. The overall
19 dimensions of the concrete shall be plus or minus 1 -in.
20
21 E. Formed concrete Surfaces to Receive Paint: Surface deflections shall be
22 limited to 1/32 -in at any point and the variation in wall deflection shall not exceed
23 1/16 -in per 4 -ft. The maximum deviation of the finish wall surface at any point
24 shall not exceed 1/4 -in from the intended surface as shown on the Drawings.
25
26 3.03 FORM PREPARATION
27
28 A. Wood forms in contact with the concrete shall be coated with an effective
29 release agent prior to form installation.
30
31 B. Steel forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and mill scale and other ferrous
32 deposits shall be sandblasted or otherwise removed from the contact surface
33 for all forms, except those utilized for surfaces receiving a rough finish. All forms
34 shall have the contact surfaces coated with a release agent.
35
36 3.04 REMOVAL OF FORMS
37
38 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage resulting from removal of
39 forms. Forms and shoring for structural slabs or beams shall remain in place in
40 accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 117. Form removal shall conform to the
41 requirements specified in Section 03300 including curing requirements
42
43 B. Repair all damages resulting from removal of forms.
44
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100-6 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 C. Clean, fill and seal form tie hole with non -shrink cement grout. The Contractor
2 shall be responsible for the watertightness of the form ties holes and any repair
3 necessary to maintain watertightness of tie holes.
4
5 3.05 INSPECTION
6
7 A. The Engineer shall be notified when the forms are complete and ready for
8 inspection at least 6 hours prior to the proposed concrete placement.
9
10 B. Failure of the forms to comply with the requirements specified herein or to
11 produce concrete complying with requirements of this Section shall be grounds
12 for rejection of that portion of the concrete work. Rejected work shall be repaired
13 or replaced as directed by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. Such
14 repair or replacement shall be subject to the requirements of this Section and
15 approval of the Engineer.
16
17
18 END OF SECTION
19
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100-7 03/22/2019
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100-8 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 03200
2
3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all
10 concrete reinforcement complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified
11 herein.
12
13 1.02 RELATED WORK
14
15 A. Concrete Formwork is included in Section 03100.
16
17 B. Concrete Joint and Joint Accessories are included in Section 03250.
18
19 C. Cast -in-place Concrete is included in Section 03300.
20
21 D. Grout is included in Section 03600.
22
23 1.03 SUBMITTALS
24
25 A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Sections 01300 and 01340, shop
26 drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of
27 installation for all cast -in-place concrete tanks, retaining walls, building stem
28 walls, wall sections, and slabs
29
30 1. Reinforcing steel: Placement drawings shall conform to the
31 recommendations of the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and ACI SP -
32 66. All reinforcement in a concrete placement shall be included on a
33 single placement drawing or cross referenced to the pertinent main
34 placement drawing. The main drawing shall include the additional
35 reinforcement (around openings, at corners, etc) shown on the standard
36 detail sheets. Bars to have special coatings and/or to be of special steel
37 or special yield strength are to be clearly identified.
38
39 2. All splice and joint locations shall be indicated on placement drawings.
40 Splice lengths shall be clearly dimensioned.
41
42 3. Reinforcement cover shall be clearly indicated.
43
44 4. Submit reinforcement shop drawing for each structure as a complete
45 package. Submittal showing portions of a structure will not be
46 acceptable, unless acceptable by Engineer in advance.
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-1 03/22/2019
1
2 5. Submittals consisting of schedules without accompanying placement
3 drawings will not be acceptable, unless acceptable by Engineer in
4 advance.
5
6 6. Bar bending details: The bars shall be referenced to the same
7 identification marks shown on the placement drawings. Schedules shall
8 be located on the same sheet where the bar mark is referenced. Bars to
9 have special coatings and/or to be of special steel or special yield
10 strength shall be clearly identified.
11
12 7. Schedule of all placements to contain synthetic reinforcing fibers. The
13 amount of fibers per cubic yard to be used for each of the placements
14 shall be noted on the schedule. The name of the manufacturer of the
15 fibers and the product data shall be included with the submittal.
16
17 B. Test Reports:
18
19 1. Certified copy of mill test on each steel proposed for use showing the
20 physical properties of the steel and the chemical analysis.
21
22 2. Mechanical Reinforcing Bar Couplers. Current Evaluation Report
23 prepared by ICC -ES or by other approved testing agency.
24
25 C. Certificates
26
27 1. Welder's certification. The certification shall be in accordance with AWS
28 D1.4 when welding of reinforcement is required.
29
30 2. Weld Procedures. Provide procedure for each type of welded reinforcing
31 splice in accordance with AWS D1.4 when welding of reinforcing is
32 required.
33
34 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
35
36 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
37
38 1. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
39 Reinforcement.
40
41 2. ASTM A184 - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar
42 Mats for Concrete Reinforcement.
43
44 3. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain,
45 for Concrete Reinforcement
46
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 4. ASTM A496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for
2 Concrete Reinforcement
3
4 5. ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric,
5 Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
6
7 6. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel
8 Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
9
10 7. ASTM A616 - Standard Specification for Rail -Steel Deformed and Plain
11 Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
12
13 8. ASTM A617 - Standard Specification for Axle -Steel Deformed and Plain
14 Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
15
16 9. ASTM A706 - Standard Specification for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed and
17 Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
18
19 10. ASTM A767 - Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel
20 Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
21
22 11. ASTM A775 - Standard Specification for Epoxy -Coated Reinforcing Steel
23 Bars.
24 12. ASTM A884 - Standard Specification for Epoxy -Coated Steel Wire and
25 Welded Wire Fabric for Reinforcement.
26
27 13. ASTM A934 - Standard Specification for Epoxy -Coated Prefabricated
28 Steel Reinforcing Bars.
29
30 B. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
31
32 1. ACI 301 - Standard Specification for Structural Concrete
33
34 2. ACI SP -66 - ACI Detailing Manual
35
36 C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)
37
38 1. Manual of Standard Practice
39
40 D. American Welding Society (AWS)
41
42 1. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel
43
44 E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect
45 at the time of bid opening shall apply.
46
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-3 03/22/2019
1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2
3 A. Provide services of a manufacturer's representative, with at least 2 years'
4 experience in the use of the reinforcing fibers for a preconstruction meeting and
5 assistance during the first placement of the material.
6
7 1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
8
9 A. Reinforcing steel shall be substantially free from mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, or
10 other foreign matter.
11
12 B. Reinforcing steel shall be shipped and stored with bars of the same size and
13 shape fastened in bundles with durable tags, marked in a legible manner with
14 waterproof markings showing the same "mark" designations as those shown on
15 the submitted Placing Drawings.
16
17 C. Reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground, protected from moisture and
18 kept free from dirt, oil, or other injurious contaminants.
19
20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21
22 2.01 MATERIALS
23
24 A. Materials shall be new, of domestic manufacture and shall comply with the
25 following material specifications.
26
27 B. Deformed Concrete Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars.
28
29 C. Concrete Reinforcing Bars required on the Drawings to be Welded: ASTM
30 A706.
31
32 D. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. Provide in flat sheets.
33
34 E. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A497.
35
36 F. Welded Plain Bar Mats: ASTM A704 and ASTM A615 Grade 60 plain bars.
37
38 G. Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184 and ASTM A615 Grade 60
39 deformed bars.
40
41 H. Reinforcing Steel Accessories
42
43 1. Plastic Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Class
44 1 - Maximum Protection.
45
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 2. Stainless Steel Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support
2 Specifications, Class 2 - Moderate Protection.
3
4 3. Precast Concrete Block Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications,
5 Precast Blocks. Blocks shall have equal or greater strength than the
6 surrounding concrete.
7
8 4. Steel Protected Bar Supports: #4 Steel chairs with plastic or rubber tips.
9
10 I. Tie Wire
11
12 1. Tie Wires for Reinforcement shall be 16 -gauge or heavier, black
13 annealed wire.
14
15 J. Mechanical Reinforcing Bar Couplers
16
17 1. General : Use only at locations indicated on the Drawings or where
18 written approval has been obtained from the Engineer.
19
20 2. Mechanical reinforcing steel butt splices shall be positive connecting
21 taper threaded type employing a hexagonal coupler such as Lenton rebar
22 splices as manufactured by Erico Products Inc., Solon, OH or equal.
23 They shall meet all ACI 318 Building Code requirements. Bar ends must
24 be taper threaded with coupler manufacturer's bar threader to ensure
25 proper taper and thread engagement.
26
27 3. Bar couplers shall be torqued to manufacturer's recommended value.
28
29 4. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, mechanical tension splices
30 shall be designed to produce a splice strength in tension or compression
31 of not less than 125 percent of the ASTM specified minimum yield
32 strength of the rebar.
33
34 5. Compression type mechanical splices shall provide concentric bearing
35 from one bar to the other bar and shall be capable of developing the
36 ultimate strength of the rebar in compression.
37
38 6. Form saver type mechanical couplers shall have flanges with nailing
39 holes to positively attach coupler to formwork.
40
41 K. Fiber Reinforcement
42
43 Synthetic reinforcing fiber for concrete shall be 100 percent polypropylene
44 collated, fibrillated fibers as manufactured by Fibermesh Company of Synthetic
45 Industries Inc., Chattanooga, TN - Fibermesh or equal. Fiber length and
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-5 03/22/2019
1 quantity for the concrete mix shall be in strict compliance with the
2 manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Engineer.
3
4 2.02 FABRICATION
5
6 A. Fabrication of reinforcement shall be in compliance with the CRSI Manual of
7 Standard Practice and ACI SP -66.
8
9 B. Bars shall be cold bent. Bars shall not be straightened or rebent.
10
11 C. Bars shall be bent around a revolving collar having a diameter of not less than
12 that recommended by the ACI SP -66.
13
14 D. Bar ends that are to be butt spliced, placed through limited diameter holes in
15 metal, or threaded, shall have the applicable end(s) saw -cut. Such ends shall
16 terminate in flat surfaces within 1-1/2 degrees of a right angle to the axis of the
17 bar.
18
19 PART 3 - EXECUTION
20
21 3.01 INSTALLATION
22
23 A. Surface condition, bending, spacing and tolerances of placement of
24 reinforcement shall comply with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and ACI
25 SP -66. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing an adequate
26 number of bars and maintaining the spacing and clearances shown on the
27 Drawings.
28
29 B. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the minimum concrete cover of
30 reinforcement shall be as follows:
31
32 1. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth: 3 -in
33
34 2. Concrete exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge and/or weather: 2 -inch
35 (including bottom cover of slabs over water or sewage)
36
37 3. Concrete not exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge and/or weather:
38
39 a. Slabs (top and bottom cover), walls, joists, shells and folded plate
40 members - 1 -inch
41
42 b. Beams and columns (principal reinforcement, ties, spirals and
43 stirrups) - 1 -1/2 -inch
44
45 C. Reinforcement which will be exposed for a considerable length of time after
46 being placed shall be coated with a heavy coat of neat cement slurry.
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-6 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 D. No reinforcing steel bars shall be welded either during fabrication or erection
3 unless specifically shown on the Drawings or specified herein, or unless prior
4 written approval has been obtained from the Engineer. All bars that have been
5 welded, including tack welds, without such approval shall be immediately
6 removed from the work. When welding of reinforcement is approved or called
7 for, it shall comply with AWS D1.4.
8
9 E. Reinforcing steel interfering with the location of other reinforcing steel, conduits
10 or embedded items, may be moved within the specified tolerances or one bar
11 diameter, whichever is greater. Greater displacement of bars to avoid
12 interference, shall only be made with the approval of the Engineer. Do not cut
13 reinforcement to install inserts, conduits, mechanical openings or other items
14 without the prior approval of the Engineer.
15
16 F. Securely support and tie reinforcing steel to prevent movement during concrete
17 placement. Secure dowels in place before placing concrete.
18
19 G. Reinforcing steel bars shall not be field bent except where shown on the
20 Drawings or specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer. If authorized,
21 bars shall be cold -bent around the standard diameter spool specified in the
22 CRSI. Do not heat bars. Closely inspect the reinforcing steel for breaks. If the
23 reinforcing steel is damaged, replace, Cadweld or otherwise repair as directed
24 by the Engineer. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete
25 unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings.
26
27 3.02 REINFORCEMENT AROUND OPENINGS
28
29 A. Unless specific additional reinforcement around openings is shown on the
30 Drawings, provide additional reinforcing steel on each side of the opening
31 equivalent to one half of the cross-sectional area of the reinforcing steel
32 interrupted by an opening. The bars shall have sufficient length to develop bond
33 at each end beyond the opening or penetration.
34
35 3.03 SPLICING OF REINFORCEMENT
36
37 A. Splices designated as compression splices on the Drawings, unless otherwise
38 noted, shall be 30 bar diameters, but not less than 12 -in. The lap splice length
39 for column vertical bars shall be based on the bar size in the column above.
40
41 B. Tension lap splices shall be provided at all laps in compliance with ACI SP -66.
42 Splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered. Class A splices may be used when
43 50 percent or less of the bars are spliced within the required lap length. Class
44 B splices shall be used at all other locations.
45
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-7 03/22/2019
1 C. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, splices in circumferential
2 reinforcement in circular walls shall be Class B tension splices and shall be
3 staggered. Adjacent bars shall not be spliced within the required lap length.
4
5 D. Splicing of reinforcing steel in concrete elements noted to be "tension members"
6 on the Drawings shall be avoided whenever possible. However, if required for
7 constructability, splices in the reinforcement subject to direct tension shall be
8 welded to develop, in tension, at least 125 percent of the specified yield strength
9 of the bar. Splices in adjacent bars shall be offset the distance of a Class B
10 splice.
11
12 E. Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Wire fabric from rolls shall
13 be rolled flat and firmly held in place. Splices in welded wire fabric shall be
14 lapped in accordance with the requirements of ACI SP -66 but not less than
15 12 -in. The spliced fabrics shall be tied together with wire ties spaced not more
16 than 24 -in on center and laced with wire of the same diameter as the welded
17 wire fabric. Do not position laps midway between supporting beams, or directly
18 over beams of continuous structures. Offset splices in adjacent widths to
19 prevent continuous splices.
20
21 F. Mechanical reinforcing steel splicers shall be used only where shown on the
22 Drawings. Splices in adjacent bars shall be offset by at least 30 bar diameters.
23 Mechanical reinforcing splices are only to be used for special splice and dowel
24 conditions approved by the Engineer.
25
26 3.04 ACCESSORIES
27
28 A. Determine, provide and install accessories such as chairs, chair bars and the
29 like in sufficient quantities and strength to adequately support the reinforcement
30 and prevent its displacement during the erection of the reinforcement and the
31 placement of concrete.
32
33 B. Use precast concrete blocks where the reinforcing steel is to be supported over
34 soil.
35
36 C. Stainless steel bar supports or steel chairs with stainless steel tips shall be used
37 where the chairs are set on forms for a concrete surface that will be exposed to
38 weather, high humidity, or liquid (including bottom of slabs over liquid containing
39 areas). Use of galvanized or plastic tipped metal chairs is permissible in all
40 other locations unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or specified herein.
41
42 D. Alternate methods of supporting top steel in slabs, such as steel channels
43 supported on the bottom steel or vertical reinforcing steel fastened to the bottom
44 and top mats, may be used if approved by the Engineer.
45
46
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-8 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 3.05 INSPECTION
2
3 A. In no case shall any reinforcing steel be covered with concrete until the
4 installation of the reinforcement, including the size, spacing and position of the
5 reinforcement has been observed by the Engineer and the Engineer's release
6 to proceed with the concreting has been obtained. The Engineer shall be given
7 ample prior notice of the readiness of placed reinforcement for observation. The
8 forms shall be kept open until the Engineer has finished his/her observations of
9 the reinforcing steel.
10
11
18 END OF SECTION
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-9 03/22/2019
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-10 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 03250
2
3 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install
10 accessories for concrete joints as shown on the Drawings and as specified
11 herein.
12
13 1.02 RELATED WORK
14
15 A. Concrete Formwork is included in Section 03100.
16
17 B. Concrete Reinforcement is included in Section 03200.
18
19 C. Cast -In -Place Concrete is included in Section 03300.
20
21 D. Concrete Finishes are included in Section 03350.
22
23 E. Grout is included in Section 03600.
24
25 F. Miscellaneous Metals are included in Section 05500.
26
27 1.03 SUBMITTALS
28
29 A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, shop drawings and
30 product data. Submittals shall include at least the following:
31
32 1. Standard Waterstops: Product data including catalogue cut, technical
33 data, storage requirements, splicing methods and conformity to ASTM
34 standards.
35
36 2. Special Waterstops: Product data including catalogue cut, technical
37 data, location of use, storage requirements, splicing methods,
38 installation instructions and conformity to ASTM standards.
39
40 3. Premolded joint fillers: Product data including catalogue cut, technical
41 data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use
42 and conformity to ASTM standards.
43
44 4. Bond breaker: Product data including catalogue cut, technical data,
45 storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use and
46 conformity to ASTM standards.
CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES
03250-1 03/22/2019
1
2 5. Expansion joint dowels: Product data on the complete assembly
3 including dowels, coatings, lubricants, spacers, sleeves, expansion
4 caps, installation requirements and conformity to ASTM standards.
5
6 6. Compressible joint filler: Product data including catalogue cut, technical
7 data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use
8 and conformity to ASTM standards.
9
10 7 Bonding agents: Product data including catalogue cut, technical data,
11 storage requirements, product life, application requirements and
12 conformity to ASTM standards.
13
14 B. Certifications
15
16 1. Certification that all materials used within the joint system are
17 compatible with each other.
18
19 2. Certification that materials used in the construction of joints are suitable
20 for use in contact with potable water 30 days after installation.
21
22 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
23
24 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
25
26 1. ASTM A675 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot -
27 Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties
28
29 2. ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding
30 Systems for Concrete
31
32 3. ASTM 01059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding
33 Fresh to Hardened Concrete
34
35 4. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
36
37 5. ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional
38 Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.
39
40 6. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
41
42 7 ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of
43 Plastics and Elastomers by Impact.
44
45 8. ASTM D747 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Bending Modulus of
46 Plastics by Means of a Cantilever Beam.
CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES
03250-2 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 9. ASTM D792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity
3 (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement.
4
5 10. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint
6 Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. (Nonextruding
7 and Resilient Bituminous Types)
8
9 11. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber
10 and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
11 Construction.
12
13 B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (CRD).
14
15 1. CRD C572 - Specification for Polyvinylchloride Waterstops
16
17 C. Federal Specifications
18
19 1. FS SS -S -210A - Sealing Compound for Expansion Joints
20
21 D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect
22 at the time of bid opening shall apply.
23
24 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
25
26 2.01 GENERAL
27
28 A. The use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the
29 purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration
30 desired.
31
32 B. All materials used together in a given joint (bond breakers, backer rods, joint
33 fillers, sealants, etc) shall be compatible with one another. Coordinate
34 selection of suppliers and products to ensure compatibility. Under no
35 circumstances shall asphaltic bond breakers or joint fillers be used in joints
36 receiving sealant.
37
38 C. All chemical sealant type waterstops shall be products specifically
39 manufactured for the purpose for which they will be used and the products
40 shall have been successfully used on similar structures for more than five
41 years.
42
43 2.02 MATERIALS
44
45 A. Standard Waterstops
46
CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES
03250-3 03/22/2019
1 1 PVC Waterstops: The waterstop shall be made by extruding
2 elastomeric plastic compound with virgin polyvinylchloride as the basic
3 resins. The compound shall contain no reprocessed materials.
4 Minimum tensile strength of waterstop shall be 1750 psi. The waterstop
5 shall conform to CRD C572. The waterstop shall be Greenstreak
6 Group, Inc. model No. 679 or approved equal for construction joints.
7 The waterstop shall be Greenstreak Group Inc. model No.732 or
8 approved equal for control joints and Greenstreak Group Inc. Model No.
9 738 for expansion joints. Provide grommets or pre -punched holes
10 spaced at 12 inches on center along length of waterstop.
11
12 2. Factory Fabrications: Provide factory made waterstop fabrications for all
13 changes of direction, transitions, and intersections, leaving only straight
14 butt joints of sufficient length for splicing in the field.
15
16 B. Special Waterstops
17
18 1. Retrofit PVC Waterstop - The waterstop shall be made by extruding
19 elastomeric plastic compound with virgin polyvinylchloride as the basic
20 resins. The compound shall contain no reprocessed materials.
21 Minimum tensile strength of waterstop shall be 1750 psi. The waterstop
22 shall conform to CRD -0572. Waterstops shall be style 667 by Sika
23 Greenstreak or equal.
24
25 2. Preformed adhesive waterstops - The waterstop shall be a rope type
26 preformed plastic waterstop meeting the requirements of Federal
27 Specification SS -S -210A. The rope shall have a cross-section of
28 approximately one square inch unless otherwise specified or shown on
29 the Drawings. The waterstop shall be Synko-Flex waterstop as
30 manufactured by Henry Company Lockstop by Sika Greenstreak or
31 equal. Primer for the material shall be as recommended by the
32 waterstop manufacturer.
33
34 C. Expansion Joint Material
35
36 1. Joint Material at Structures - Self -expanding cork, premolded joint filler
37 shall conform to ASTM D1752, Type III. The thickness shall be 3/4 -in
38 unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.
39
40 2. Joint Material at sidewalk and roadway concrete pavements or where
41 fiber joint filler is specifically noted on the Drawings. The joint filler shall
42 be asphalt -impregnated fiber board conforming to ASTM D1751.
43 Thickness shall be 3/4 -in unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
44
45 D. Bond Breaker
46
CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES
03250-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 Bond breaker tape shall be an adhesive -backed glazed butyl or
2 polyethylene tape which will satisfactorily adhere to the premolded joint
3 filler or concrete surface as required. The tape shall be the same width
4 as the joint.
5
6 2. Except where tape is specifically called for on the drawings, bond
7 breaker for concrete shall be either bond breaker tape or a nonstaining
8 type bond prevention coating such as Maxi -Tilt with Dye by Dayton
9 Superior, Inc.; Silcoseal 77, by SCA Construction Supply Division,
10 Superior Concrete Accessories or equal.
11
12 E. Expansion Joint Dowels
13
14 1. Dowels shall be smooth steel conforming to ASTM A675, Grade 70.
15 Dowels must be straight and clean, free of loose flaky rust and loose
16 scale. Dowels may be sheared to length provided deformation from
17 true shape caused by shearing does not exceed 0.04 -in on the
18 diameter of the dowel and extends no more than 0.04 -in from the end.
19 Bars shall be coated with a bond breaker on the expansion end of the
20 dowel. Expansion caps shall be provided on the expansion end. Caps
21 shall allow for at least 1 -1/2 -in of expansion.
22
23 2. Dowel Bar Sleeves: Provide two component Speed Dowel System by
24 Sika, to accept 1" diameter x 12" long slip dowels. Speed Dowel
25 System is comprised of a reusable base and a plastic sleeve. Both
26 pieces shall be manufactured from polypropylene plastic.
27
28 F Bonding Agent
29
30 1. Epoxy bonding agent shall be a two -component, solvent -free, moisture
31 insensitive, epoxy resin material conforming to ASTM C881, Type II.
32 The bonding agent shall be Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod by Sika Corporation of
33 Lyndhurst, N.J.; MasterEmaco ADH 326 by BASF or equal. Acrylic
34 may be used if approved by the Engineer.
35
36 G. Compressible Joint Filler
37
38 1. The joint filler shall be a non -extruded watertight strip material use to fill
39 expansion joints between structures. The material shall be capable of
40 being compressed at least 40 percent for 70 hours at 68 degrees F and
41 subsequently recovering at least 20 percent of its original thickness in
42 the first 1/2 hour after unloading. Compressible Joint filler shall be
43 Wabo®Evasote by BASF, Inc., Ravena, NY or equal.
44
45 2. The Joint sealant shall be a 1 -component, polyurethane -based non -sag
46 elastomeric sealant. Joint sealant shall be Sikaflex-1 a of equal.
CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES
03250-5 03/22/2019
1
2 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3
4 3.01 INSTALLATION
5
6 A. Standard Waterstops
7
8 1. Install waterstops for all joints where indicated on the Drawings.
9 Waterstops shall be continuous around all corners and intersections so
10 that a continuous seal is provided. Provide factory made waterstop
11 fabrications for all changes in direction, intersections and transitions
12 leaving only straight butt joints splices for the field.
13 2. Horizontal waterstops in slabs shall be clamped in position by the
14 bulkhead (unless previously set in concrete).
15 3. Waterstops shall be installed so that half of the width will be embedded
16 on each side of the joint. Care shall be exercised to ensure that the
17 waterstop is completely embedded in void -free concrete. All waterstops
18 shall be tied to reinforcement with reinforcement tie wire through the
19 factory provided grommets.
20 4. Waterstops shall be terminated 3 -in below the exposed top of walls.
21 Expansion joint waterstop center bulbs shall be plugged with foam
22 rubber, 1 -in deep, at point of termination.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
B. Special Waterstops
1. Install special waterstops at joints where specifically noted on the
Drawings. Waterstops shall be continuous around all corners and
intersections so that a continuous seal is provided. Provide factory
made waterstop fabrications for all changes in direction, intersections,
and transiti0ons leaving only straight butt joint splices for the field.
2. Each piece of the waterstop shall be of maximum practicable length to
provide a minimum number of connections or splices. Connections and
splices shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and as
specified herein.
3. Waterstops shall be terminated 3 -in below the exposed top of walls.
4. PVC base seal waterstops shall be spliced as specified for PVC
standard waterstops. Base seals for expansion joints shall set on
concrete sleeper beams, not less than 24 -in wide, and the beam
covered with two layers of sheet material such as vapor barrier
material. The seal shall not be fastened by nails but firmly held in
position by the bulkhead form. Base seals at non -expansion joints may
CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES
03250-6 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 be set on vapor barrier material that extends at least two feet on each
2 side of the joint.
3
4 C. Construction Joints
5
6 1. Make construction joints only at locations shown on the Drawings or as
7 approved by the Engineer. Any additional or relocation of construction
8 joints proposed by the Contractor, must be submitted to the Engineer
9 for written approval.
10
11 2. Additional or relocated joints should be located where they least impair
12 strength of the member. In general, locate joints within the middle third
13 of spans of slabs, beams and girders. However, if a beam intersects a
14 girder at the joint, offset the joint a distance equal to twice the width of
15 the member being connected. Locate joints in walls and columns at the
16 underside of floors, slabs, beams or girders and at tops of footings or
17 floor slabs. Do not locate joints between beams, girders, column
18 capitals, or drop panels and the slabs above them. Do not locate joints
19 between brackets or haunches and walls or columns supporting them.
20
21 3. All joints shall be perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue
22 reinforcing steel through the joint as indicated on the Drawings. When
23 joints in beams are allowed, provide a shear key and inclined dowels as
24 approved by the Engineer.
25
26 4. Provide sealant grooves for joint sealant where indicated on the
27 Drawings.
28
29 5. At all construction joints and at concrete joints designated on the
30 Drawings to be "roughened", uniformly roughen the surface of the
31 concrete to a full amplitude (distance between high and low points or
32 side to side) of approximately 1/4 -in to expose a fresh face. Thoroughly
33 clean joint surfaces of loose or weakened materials by waterblasting or
34 sandblasting and prepare for bonding. At least 2 hours before and
35 again shortly before the new concrete is deposited, the joints and
36 adjacent concrete surfaces to at least 12 -in past the joint shall be
37 saturated with water. After glistening water disappears, the joints shall
38 be given a thorough coating of neat cement slurry mixed to the
39 consistency of very heavy paste. The surfaces shall receive a coating
40 at least 1/8 -in thick, well scrubbed -in by means of stiff bristle brushes
41 whenever possible. Horizontal wall joints with no access to the earlier
42 concrete placement surface shall have the roughened surface
43 thoroughly coated with a neat cement slurry of pouring consistency.
44 New concrete shall be deposited before the neat cement dries.
45
CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES
03250-7 03/22/2019
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
6. In lieu of the above method for bonding plastic concrete to hardened
concrete, the following optional method may be used. Concrete must
be allowed to set a minimum of 28 days. Use an epoxy bonding agent
applied to roughened and cleaned surfaces of set concrete in strict
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations [and as specified in
Section 03740 with respect to preparation of surfaces and applications
of bonding agent].
7 Provide waterstops in all wall and slab construction joints in liquid
containment structures and at other locations shown on the Drawings.
8. Keyways shall not be used in construction joints unless specifically
shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer.
D. Expansion Joints
1. Do not extend through expansion joints, reinforcement or other
embedded metal items that are continuously bonded to concrete on
each side of joint.
2. Position premolded joint filler material accurately. Secure the joint filler
against displacement during concrete placement and compaction.
Place joint filler over the face of the joint, allowing for sealant grooves
as detailed on the Drawings. Tape all joint filler splices to prevent
intrusion of mortar. Seal expansion joints as shown on the Drawings.
3. Expansion joints shall be 3/4 -in in width unless otherwise noted on the
Drawings.
4. Where indicated on Drawings, install smooth dowels at right angles to
expansion joints. Align dowels accurately with finished surface. Rigidly
hold in place and support during concrete placement. Unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings, apply oil or grease to one end of all dowels
through expansion joints. Provide plastic expansion caps on the
lubricated ends of expansion dowels.
5. Provide center bulb type waterstops in all wall and slab expansion joints
in liquid containment structures and at other locations shown on the
Drawings.
E. Control Joints
1. Provide sealant grooves, sealants and waterstops at control joints in
slabs on grade or walls as detailed. Provide waterstops at all wall and
slab control joints in water containment structures and at other locations
shown on the Drawings.
CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES
03250-8 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 2. Control joints may be sawed if specifically approved by the Engineer. If
3 control joint grooves are sawed, properly time the saw cutting with the
4 time of the concrete set. Start cutting as soon as concrete has
5 hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates from being dislodged by the
6 saw. Complete cutting before shrinkage stresses have developed
7 sufficiently to induce cracking. No reinforcing shall be cut during
8 sawcutting.
9
10 3. Extend every other bar of reinforcing steel through control joints or as
11 indicated on the Drawings. Where specifically noted on the Drawings,
12 coat the concrete surface with a bond breaker prior to placing new
13 concrete against it. Avoid coating reinforcement or waterstops with
14 bond breaker at these locations.
15
16 END OF SECTION
17
CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES
03250-9 03/22/2019
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES
03250-10 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 03300
2
3 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor and materials required and install cast -in-place concrete
10 complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
11
12 1.02 RELATED WORK
13
14 A. Concrete Formwork is included in Section 03100.
15
16 B. Concrete Reinforcement is included in Section 03200.
17
18 C. Concrete Joints and Joint Accessories are included in Section 03250.
19
20 D. Concrete Finishes are included in Section 03350.
21
22 E. Grout is included in Section 03600.
23
24 1.03 SUBMITTALS
25
26 A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Sections 01300 and 01340, shop
27 drawings and product data including the following:
28
29 1. Sources of cement, pozzolan and aggregates.
30
31 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all concrete components and
32 admixtures.
33
34 3. Air -entraining admixture. Product data including catalogue cut,
35 technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended
36 dosage, temperature considerations and conformity to ASTM
37 standards.
38
39 4. Water -reducing admixture. Product data including catalogue cut,
40 technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended
41 dosage, temperature considerations and conformity to ASTM
42 standards.
43
44 5. High -range water -reducing admixture (plasticizer). Product data
45 including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product
46 life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, retarding
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-1 03/22/2019
1
1 effect, slump range and conformity to ASTM standards. Identify 1
2 proposed locations of use.
3 I 4 6. Concrete mix for each formulation of concrete proposed for use
5 including constituent quantities per cubic yard, water-cementitious
6 materials ratio, concrete slump, type and manufacturer of cement.
7Provide either a. or b. below for each mix proposed.
8
9 a. Standard deviation data for each proposed concrete mix based
I
10 on statistical records.
11
12 b. The curve of water-cementitious materials ratio versus concrete I
13 cylinder strength for each formulation of concrete proposed
14 based on laboratory tests. The cylinder strength shall be the
15 average of the 28 day cylinder strength test results for each mix.
16 Provide results of 7 and 14 day tests if available.
17
18 7. Sheet curing material. Product data including catalogue cut, technical
1
19 data and conformity to ASTM standard.
20
21 8. Liquid curing compound. Product data including catalogue cut,
I
22 technical data, storage requirements, product life, application rate and
23 conformity to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use.
24
1
25 B. Samples
26
27 1. Fine and coarse aggregates if requested by the Engineer.
1
28
29 C. Test Reports
30
I
31 1. Fine aggregates - sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious
32 substance.
33 1
34 2. Coarse aggregates - sieve analysis, physical properties, and
35 deleterious substances.
36
37 3. Cements - chemical analysis and physical properties for each type.
38 I 39 4. Pozzolans - chemical analysis and physical properties.
40
41 5. Proposed concrete mixes - compressive strength, slump and air I 42 content.
43
44 D. Certifications I 45
46 1. Certify admixtures used in the same concrete mix are compatible with
47 each other and the aggregates.
I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-2 03/22/2019
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 2. Certify admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable water
3 after 30 days of concrete curing.
4
5 3. Certify curing compound is suitable for use in contact with potable water
6 after 30 days (non-toxic and free of taste or odor).
7
8 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
9
10 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
11
12 1. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
13 Specimens in the Field.
14
15 2. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
16
17 3. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
18 Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
19
20 4. ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled
21 Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
22
23 5. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete.
24
25 6. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement
26 Concrete
27
28 7. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
29
30 8. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing
31 Concrete
32
33 9. ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
34 Concrete by the Volumetric Method.
35
36 10. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
37 Concrete by the Pressure Method.
38
39 11. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for
40 Concrete.
41
42 12. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming
43 Compounds for Curing Concrete.
44
45 13. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
46 Concrete.
47
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-3 03/22/2019
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
14. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or
Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
15. ASTM C1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for use
in Producing Flowing Concrete.
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI).
1. ACI 301- Standard Specification for Structural Concrete
2. ACI 305.1 — Standard Specification for Hot Weather Concreting.
3. ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
4. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in
effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reinforced concrete shall comply with specifications and standards noted
above. The most stringent requirement of the codes, standards and this
Section shall apply when conflicts exist.
B. Only one source of cement and aggregates shall be used on any one
structure. Concrete shall be uniform in color and appearance.
C. Well in advance of placing concrete, discuss with the Engineer the sources of
individual materials and batched concrete proposed for use. Discuss
placement methods, waterstops and curing. Propose methods of hot and cold
weather concreting as required. Prior to the placement of any concrete
containing a high -range water -reducing admixture (plasticizer), the Contractor,
accompanied by the plasticizer manufacturer, shall discuss the properties and
techniques of batching and placing plasticized concrete.
D. If, during the progress of the work, it is impossible to secure concrete of the
required workability and strength with the materials being furnished, the
Engineer may order such changes in proportions or materials, or both, as may
be necessary to secure the desired properties. All changes so ordered shall
be made at the Contractor's expense.
E. If, during the progress of the work, the materials from the sources originally
accepted change in characteristics, the Contractor shall, at his/her expense,
make new acceptance tests of aggregates and establish new design mixes.
F Testing of the following materials shall be furnished by Contractor to verify
conformity with this Specification Section and the stated ASTM Standards.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-4 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 Fine aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 - sieve analysis,
2 physical properties, and deleterious substances.
3
4 2. Coarse aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 - sieve analysis,
5 physical properties, and deleterious substances.
6
7 3. Cements for conformity with ASTM C150 - chemical analysis and
8 physical properties.
9
10 4. Pozzolans for conformity with ASTM C618 - chemical analysis and
11 physical properties.
12
13 5. Proposed concrete mix designs - compressive strength, slump and air
14 content.
15
16 6. Concrete placements - compressive strength (cylinders), compressive
17 strength (cores), slump, and air content.
18
19 G. Field testing and inspection services will be provided by the Owner. The cost
20 of such work, except as specifically stated otherwise, shall be paid by the
21 Owner. Testing of the following items shall be by the Owner to verify
22 conformity with this Specification Section.
23
24 1. Other materials or products that may come under question.
25
26 H. All materials incorporated in the work shall conform to accepted samples.
27
28 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
29
30 A. Cement: Store in weather -tight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection
31 from dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set.
32
33 B. Aggregate: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or
34 contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build
35 stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 3 -ft in thickness.
36 Complete each layer before the next is started. Do not use frozen or partially
37 frozen aggregate.
38
39 C. Sand: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid contamination. Allow sand to drain
40 to uniform moisture content before using. Do not use frozen or partially frozen
41 aggregates.
42
43 D. Admixtures: Store in closed containers to avoid contamination, evaporation or
44 damage. Provide suitable agitating equipment to assure uniform dispersion of
45 ingredients in admixture solutions which tend to separate. Protect liquid
46 admixtures from freezing andother temperature changes which could
47 adversely affect their characteristics.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-5 03/22/2019
1
2 E. Pozzolan: Store in weather -tight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection
3 from dampness and contamination.
4
5 F Sheet Curing Materials: Store in weather -tight buildings or off the ground and
6 under cover.
7
8 G. Liquid Curing Compounds: Store in closed containers.
9
10 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
11
12 2.01 GENERAL
13
14 A. The use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the
15 purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration
16 desired.
17
18 2.02 MATERIALS
19
20 A. Materials shall comply with this Section and any applicable State or local
21 requirements.
22
23 B. Cement: Domestic portland cement complying with ASTM C150. Air
24 entraining cements shall not be used. Cement brand shall be subject to
25 approval by the Engineer and one brand shall be used throughout the Work.
26 The following cement type(s) shall be used:
27
28 1. All Classes — Type I/11 or Type II.
29
30 C. Fine Aggregate: Washed inert natural sand conforming to the requirements of
31 ASTM C33.
32
33 D. Coarse Aggregate: Well -graded crushed stone or washed gravel conforming
34 to the requirements of ASTM C33. Grading requirements shall be as listed in
35 ASTM C33 Table 2 for the specified coarse aggregate size number. Limits of
36 Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements shall be as listed
37 in ASTM C33 Table 3 for severe weathering regions. Size numbers for the
38 concrete mixes shall be as shown in Table 1 herein.
39
40 E. Water: Potable water free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts,
41 organic matter, or other deleterious substances.
42
43 F Admixtures: Admixtures shall be free of chlorides and alkalis (except for those
44 attributable to water). When it is required to use more than one admixture in a
45 concrete mix, the admixtures shall be from the same manufacturer.
46 Admixtures shall be compatible with the concrete mix including other
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-6 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 admixtures and shall be suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30
2 days of concrete curing.
3
4 1. Air -Entraining Admixture: The admixture shall comply with ASTM
5 C260. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with
6 manufacturer's recommendations.
7
8 2. Water -Reducing Agent: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494,
9 Type A. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with
10 manufacturer's recommendations.
11
12 3. High -Range Water -Reducer (Plasticizer): The admixture shall comply
13 with ASTM C494, Type F and shall result in non -segregating plasticized
14 concrete with little bleeding and with the physical properties of low
15 water/cement ratio concrete. The treated concrete shall be capable of
16 maintaining its plastic state in excess of 2 hours. Proportioning and
17 mixing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
18 Where walls are 14" thick or less and the wall height exceeds 12 ft a
19 mix including a plasticizer must be used.
20
21 4. Admixtures causing retarded or accelerated setting of concrete shall not
22 be used without written approval from the Engineer. When allowed, the
23 admixtures shall be retarding or accelerating water reducing or high
24 range water reducing admixtures.
25
26 G. Pozzolan (Fly Ash): Pozzolan shall be Class C or Class F fly ash complying
27 with ASTM C618 except the Loss on Ignition (LOI) shall be limited to 3 percent
28 maximum.
29
30 H. Ground -granulated Blast Furnace Slaq. Ground -granulated blast furnace slaq
31 shall conform to the following:
32
33 1. ASTM C989
34 2. Slaq activity classification: Grade 100 or 120.
35
36 I. Sheet Curing Materials. Waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white
37 burlap -polyethylene sheeting all complying with ASTM C171.
38
39 J. Liquid Curing Compound. Liquid membrane -forming curing compound shall
40 comply with the requirements of ASTM C309, Type 1-D (clear or translucent
41 with fugitive dye) and shall contain no wax, paraffin, or oil. Curing compound
42 shall be approved for use in contact with potable water after 30 days
43 (non-toxic and free of taste or odor). Curing compound shall comply with
44 Federal, State and local VOC limits.
45
46 2.03 MIXES
47
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-7 03/22/2019
1 A. Development of mix designs and testing shall be by an independent testing
2 laboratory acceptable to the Engineer engaged by and at the expense of the
3 Contractor.
4
5 B. Select proportions of ingredients to meet the design strength and materials
6 limits specified in Table 1 and to produce concrete having proper placability,
7 durability, strength, appearance and other required properties. Proportion
8 ingredients to produce a homogenous mixture which will readily work into
9 corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement without permitting
10 materials to segregate or allowing excessive free water to collect on the
11 surface.
12
13 C. The design mix shall be based on standard deviation data of prior mixes with
14 essentially the same proportions of the same constituents or, if such data is
15 not available, be developed by a testing laboratory, acceptable to the
16 Engineer, engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor. Acceptance of
17 mixes based on standard deviation shall be based on the modification factors
18 for standard deviation tests contained in ACI 318. The water content of the
19 concrete mix, determined by laboratory testing, shall be based on a curve
20 showing the relation between water cementitious ratio and 7 and 28 day
21 compressive strengths of concrete made using the proposed materials. The
22 curves shall be determined by four or more points, each representing an
23 average value of at least three test specimens at each age. The curves shall
24 have a range of values sufficient to yield the desired data, including the
25 specified design strengths as modified below, without extrapolation. The
26 water content of the concrete mixes to be used, as determined from the curve,
27 shall correspond to strengths 16 percent greater than the specified design
28 strengths. The resulting mix shall not conflict with the limiting values for
29 maximum water cementitious ratio and net minimum cementitious content as
30 specified in Table 1.
31
32 D. Compression Tests: Provide testing of the proposed concrete mix or mixes to
33 demonstrate compliance with the specified design strength requirements in
34 conformity with the above paragraph.
35
36 E. Entrained air, as measured by ASTM C231, shall be as shown in Table 1.
37
38 1. If the air -entraining agent proposed for use in the mix requires testing
39 methods other than ASTM C231 to accurately determine air content,
40 make special note of this requirement in the admixture submittal.
41
42 F Slump of the concrete as measured by ASTM C143, shall be as shown in
43 Table 1. If a high -range water -reducer (plasticizer) is used, the slump
44 indicated shall be that measured before plasticizer is added. Plasticized
45 concrete shall have a slump ranging from 5 to 8 -in.
46
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-8 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 G. Proportion admixtures according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
2 Two or more admixtures specified may be used in the same mix provided that
3 the admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious
4 effect on the concrete or on the properties of each other.
5
6
7
8
9
10 TABLE 1
11 CONCRETE MIX REQUIREMENTS
12
13 Design Fine Coarse Cementitious
14 Class Strength Cement Aggregate Aggregate Content
15 (1) (2) (2) (3) (4)
16
17
18 A 2500 C150 Type II C33 57 440 min.
19 B 3000 C150 Type II C33 57 480 min.
20 C 4000 C150 Type II C33 57 560 min.
21 D 5000 C150 Type II C33 57 600 min.
22
23 W/Cm AE Slump
24 Class Ratio Fly Ash Range WR HRWR Range
25 (5) (6) (7) (8) Inches
26
27
28 A 0.62 max. 3.5 to 5 Yes * 1-4
29 B 0.54 max. 3.5 to 5 Yes * 1-3
30 C 0.44 max. 25% max 3.5 to 5 Yes * 3-5
31 D 0.40 max. 3.5 to 5 Yes * 3-5
32
33 NOTES:
34 (1) Minimum compressive strength in psi at 28 days
35 (2) ASTM designation
36 (3) Size Number in ASTM C33
37 (4) Cementitious content in lbs/cu yd
38 (5) W/Cm is Water-Cementitious ratio by weight
39 (6) AE is percent air -entrainment
40 (7) WR is water -reducer admixture
41 (8) HRWR is high -range water -reducer admixture
42 HRWR used at contractor's option except where walls are 14" thick or less and the wall height
43 exceeds 12 ft a mix including a plasticizer must be used.
44
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-9 03/22/2019
1 PART 3 — EXECUTION
2
3 3.01 MEASURING MATERIALS
4
5 A. Concrete shall be composed of portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse
6 aggregate, water and admixtures as specified and shall be produced by a
7 plant acceptable to the Engineer. All constituents, including admixtures, shall
8 be batched at the plant except a high -range water -reducer may also be added
9 in the field.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 C. Measure the amount of free water in fine aggregates within 0.3 percent with a
17 moisture meter. Compensate for varying moisture contents of fine
18 aggregates. Record the number of gallons of water as -batched on printed
19 batching tickets.
20
21 D. Admixtures shall be dispensed either manually using calibrated containers or
22 measuring tanks, or by means of an automatic dispenser approved by the
23 manufacturer of the specific admixture.
24
25 1. Charge air -entraining and chemical admixtures into the mixer as a
26 solution using an automatic dispenser or similar metering device.
27
28 2. Inject multiple admixtures separately during the batching sequence.
29
30 3.02 MIXING AND TRANSPORTING
31
32 A. Batch plants shall have a current NRMCA Certification or equal.
33
34 B. Concrete shall be ready -mixed concrete produced by equipment acceptable to
35 the Engineer. No hand -mixing will be permitted. Clean each transit mix truck
36 drum and reverse drum rotation before the truck proceeds under the batching
37 plant. Equip each transit -mix truck with a continuous, nonreversible, revolution
38 counter showing the number of revolutions at mixing speeds.
39
40 C. Ready -mix concrete shall be transported to the site in watertight agitator or
41 mixer trucks loaded not in excess of their rated capacities as stated on the
42 name plate.
43
44 D. Keep the water tank valve on each transit truck locked at all times. Any
45 addition of water above the appropriate W/Cm ratio must be directed by the
46 Engineer. Added water shall be incorporated by additional mixing of at least
B. Measure materials for batching concrete by weighing in conformity with and
within the tolerances given in ASTM C94 except as otherwise specified.
Scales shall have been certified by the local Sealer of Weights and Measures
within 1 year of use.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-10 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 35 revolutions. All added water shall be metered and the amount of water
2 added shall be shown on each delivery ticket.
3
4 E. All central plant and rolling stock equipment and methods shall comply with
5 ACI 318 and ASTM C94.
6
7 F. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at
8 the delivery end. Metal or metal -lined non -aluminum discharge chutes shall
9 be used and shall have slopes not exceeding 1 vertical to 2 horizontal and not
10 less than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. Chutes more than 20 -ft long and chutes
11 not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into a
12 hopper before distribution.
13
14 G. Retempering (mixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water) of
15 concrete or mortar which has reached initial set will not be permitted.
16
17 H. Handle concrete from mixer to placement as quickly as practicable while
18 providing concrete of required quality in the placement area. Dispatch trucks
19 from the batching plant so they arrive at the work site just before the concrete
20 is required, thus avoiding excessive mixing of concrete while waiting or delays
21 in placing successive layers of concrete in the forms.
22
23 1. Furnish a delivery ticket for ready mixed concrete to the Engineer as each
24 truck arrives. Each ticket shall provide a printed record of the weight of
25 cement and each aggregate as batched individually. Use the type of indicator
26 that returns for zero punch or returns to zero after a batch is discharged.
27 Clearly indicate the weight of fine and coarse aggregate, cement and water in
28 each batch, the quantity delivered, the time any water is added, and the
29 numerical sequence of the delivery. Show the time of day batched and time of
30 discharge from the truck. Indicate the number of revolutions of the truck
31 mixer.
32
33 J. Temperature and Mixing Time Control
34
35 1. In cold weather, do not allow the as -mixed temperature of the concrete
36 and concrete temperatures at the time of placement in the forms to drop
37 below 40 degrees F.
38
39 2. If water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate
40 in the mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of
41 water and aggregate when the temperature of the mixture is greater
42 than 90 degrees F.
43
44 3. In hot weather, cool ingredients before mixing to maintain temperature
45 of the concrete below the maximum placing temperature of 90 degrees
46 F. If necessary, substitute well -crushed ice for all or part of the mixing
47 water.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-11 03/22/2019
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
4. The maximum time interval between the addition of mixing water and/or
cement to the batch and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not
exceed the values shown in Table 2.
TABLE 2
MAXIMUM TIME TO DISCHARGE OF CONCRETE
Air or Concrete Temperature (whichever is higher) Maximum Time
80 to 90 Degree F (27 to 32 Degree C) 45 minutes
70 to 79 Degree F (21 to 26 Degree C) 60 minutes
40 to 69 Degree F (5 to 20 Degree C) 90 minutes
If an approved high -range water -reducer (plasticizer) is used to produce
plasticized concrete, the maximum time interval shall not exceed 90 minutes.
20 3.03 CONCRETE APPEARANCE
21
22 A. Concrete mix showing either poor cohesion or poor coating of the coarse
23 aggregate with paste shall be remixed. If this does not correct the condition,
24 the concrete shall be rejected. If the slump is within the allowable limit, but
25 excessive bleeding, poor workability, or poor finishability are observed,
26 changes in the concrete mix shall be obtained only by adjusting one or more of
27 the following:
28
29 1. The gradation of aggregate.
30
31 2. The proportion of fine and coarse aggregate.
32
33 3. The percentage of entrained air, within the allowable limits.
34
35 B. Concrete for the work shall provide a homogeneous structure which, when
36 hardened, will have the required strength, durability and appearance. Mixtures
37 and workmanship shall be such that concrete surfaces, when exposed, will
38 require no finishing. When concrete surfaces are stripped, the concrete, when
39 viewed in good lighting from 10 -ft away, shall be pleasing in appearance, and
40 at 20 -ft shall show no visible defects.
41
42 3.04 PLACING AND COMPACTING
43
44 A. Placing
45
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-12 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1. Verify that all formwork completely encloses concrete to be placed and
2 is securely braced prior to concrete placement. Remove ice, excess
3 water, dirt and other foreign materials from forms. Confirm that
4 reinforcement and other embedded items are securely in place. Have a
5 competent workman at the location of the placement who can assure
6 that reinforcing steel and embedded items remain in designated
7 locations while concrete is being placed. Sprinkle semi -porous
8 subgrades or forms to eliminate suction of water from the mix. Seal
9 extremely porous subgrades in an approved manner.
10
11 2. Deposit concrete as near its final position as possible to avoid
12 segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Place concrete continuously
13 at a rate which ensures the concrete is being integrated with fresh
14 plastic concrete. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened
15 or has been contaminated by foreign materials or on concrete which
16 has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of
17 weakness within the section. If the section cannot be placed
18 continuously, place construction joints as specified or as approved.
19
20 3. Pumping of concrete will be permitted. Use a mix design and
21 aggregate sizes suitable for pumping and submit for approval.
22
23 4. Remove temporary spreaders from forms when the spreader is no
24 longer useful. Temporary spreaders may remain embedded in concrete
25 only when made of galvanized metal or concrete and if prior approval
26 has been obtained.
27
28 5. Do not place concrete for supported elements until concrete previously
29 placed in the supporting element (columns, slabs and/or walls) has
30 reached adequate strength.
31
32 6. Where surface mortar is to form the base of a finish, especially surfaces
33 designated to be painted, work coarse aggregate back from forms with
34 a suitable tool to bring the full surface of the mortar against the form.
35 Prevent the formation of excessive surface voids.
36
37 7. Slabs
38
39 a. After suitable bulkheads, screeds and jointing materials have
40 been positioned, the concrete shall be placed continuously
41 between construction joints beginning at a bulkhead, edge form,
42 or corner. Each batch shall be placed into the edge of the
43 previously placed concrete to avoid stone pockets and
44 segregation.
45
46 b. Avoid delays in casting. If there is a delay in casting, the
47 concrete placed after the delay shall be thoroughly spaded and
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-13 03/22/2019
1 consolidated at the edge of that previously placed to avoid cold
2 joints. Concrete shall then be brought to correct level and struck
3 off with a straightedge. Bullfloats or darbies shall be used to
4 smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows.
5
6 c. Where slabs are to be placed integrally with the walls below
7 them, place the walls and compact as specified. Allow 1 hour to
8 pass between placement of the wall and the overlying slab to
9 permit consolidation of the wall concrete. Keep the top surface
10 of the wall moist so as to prevent cold joints.
11
12 8. Formed Concrete
13
14 a. Place concrete in forms using tremie tubes and taking care to
15 prevent segregation. Bottom of tremie tubes shall preferably be
16 in contact with the concrete already placed. Do not permit
17 concrete to drop freely more than 4 -ft. Place concrete for walls
18 in 12 to 24 -in lifts, keeping the surface horizontal. If plasticized
19 concrete is used, the maximum lift thickness may be increased
20 to 7 -ft and the maximum free fall of concrete shall not exceed 15-
21 ft.
22
23 9. Underwater concreting shall be performed in conformity with the
24 recommendations of ACI 304R. The tremie system shall be used to
25 place underwater concrete. Tremie pipes shall be in the range of 8 to
26 12 -in in diameter and be spaced at not more than 16 -ft on centers nor
27 more than 8 -ft from an end form. Where concrete is being placed
28 around a pipe, there shall be at least one tremie pipe on each side of
29 each pipe. Where the tremie system is not practical, direct pumped
30 concrete for underwater placement may be used subject to approval of
31 the system including details by the Engineer.
32
33 B. Compacting
34
35 1. Consolidate concrete by vibration, puddling, spading, rodding or forking
36 so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, embedded
37 items and openings and into corners of forms. Puddling, spading, etc.,
38 shall be continuously performed along with vibration of the placement to
39 eliminate air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting
40 or planes of weakness.
41
42 2. All concrete shall be placed and compacted with mechanical vibrators.
43 The number, type and size of the units shall be approved by the
44 Engineer in advance of placing operations. No concrete shall be
45 ordered until sufficient approved vibrators (including standby units in
46 working order) are on the job.
47
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-14 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 3. A minimum frequency of 7000 rpm is required for mechanical vibrators.
2 Insert vibrators and withdraw at points from 18 to 30 -in apart. At each
3 insertion, vibrate sufficiently to consolidate concrete, generally from 5 to
4 15 seconds. Do not over vibrate so as to segregate. Keep a spare
5 vibrator on the site during concrete placing operations.
6
7 4. Concrete Slabs: Concrete for slabs less than 8 -in thick shall be
8 consolidated with vibrating screeds; slabs 8 to 12 -in thick shall be
9 compacted with internal vibrators and (optionally) with vibrating
10 screeds. Vibrators shall always be placed into concrete vertically and
11 shall not be laid horizontally or laid over.
12
13 5. Walls and Columns: Internal vibrators (rather than form vibrators) shall
14 be used unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. In general, for
15 each vibrator needed to melt down the batch at the point of discharge,
16 one or more additional vibrators must be used to densify, homogenize
17 and perfect the surface. The vibrators shall be inserted vertically at
18 regular intervals, through the fresh concrete and slightly into the
19 previous lift, if any.
20
21 6. Amount of Vibration: Vibrators are to be used to consolidate properly
22 placed concrete but shall not be used to move or transport concrete in
23 the forms. Vibration shall continue until:
24
25 a. Frequency returns to normal.
26
27 b. Surface appears liquefied, flattened and glistening.
28
29 c. Trapped air ceases to rise.
30
31 d. Coarse aggregate has blended into surface, but has not
32 disappeared.
33
34 3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION
35
36 A. Protect all concrete work against injury from the elements and defacements of
37 any nature during construction operations.
38
39 B. Curing Methods
40
41 1. Curing Methods for Concrete Surfaces: Cure concrete to retain
42 moisture and maintain specified temperature at the surface for a
43 minimum of 7 days after placement. Curing methods to be used are as
44 follows:
45
46 a. Water Curing: Keep entire concrete surface wet by ponding,
47 continuous sprinkling or covered with saturated burlap. Begin
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-15 03/22/2019
1 wet cure as soon as concrete attains an initial set and maintain
2 wet cure 24 hours a day.
3
4 b. Sheet Material Curing: Cover entire surface with sheet material.
5 Securely anchor sheeting to prevent wind and air from lifting the
6 sheeting or entrapping air under the sheet. Place and secure
7 sheet as soon as initial concrete set occurs.
8
9 c. Liquid Membrane Curing: Apply over the entire concrete surface
10 except for surfaces to receive additional concrete. Curing
11 compound shall NOT be placed on any concrete surface where
12 additional concrete is to be placed, where concrete sealers or
13 surface coatings are to be used, or where the concrete finish
14 requires an integral floor product. Curing compound shall be
15 applied as soon as the free water on the surface has
16 disappeared and no water sheen is visible, but not after the
17 concrete is dry or when the curing compound can be absorbed
18 into the concrete. Application shall be in compliance with the
19 manufacturer's recommendations.
20
21 2. Specified applications of curing methods.
22
23 a. Slabs for Water Containment Structures: Water curing only.
24
25 b. Slabs on Grade and Footings (not used to contain water): Water
26 curing, sheet material curing or liquid membrane curing.
27
28 c. Structural Slabs (other than water containment): Water curing or
29 liquid membrane curing.
30
31 d. Horizontal Surfaces which will Receive Additional Concrete,
32 Coatings, Grout or Other Material that Requires Bond to the
33 substrate: Water curing.
34
35 e. Formed Surfaces: None if nonabsorbent forms are left in place 7
36 days. Water cure if absorbent forms are used. Water cure if
37 forms are removed prior to 7 days. Exposed horizontal surfaces
38 of formed walls or columns shall be water cured for 7 days or
39 until next placement of concrete is made.
40
41 f. Surfaces of Concrete Joints: Water cured or sheet material
42 cured.
43
44 g. Finished surfaces and slabs shall be protected from the direct
45 rays of the sun to prevent checking and crazing.
46
47 h. Cold Weather Concreting:
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-16 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 C. Finished surfaces and slabs shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun
3 to prevent checking and crazing.
4
5 D. Cold Weather Concreting:
6
7 1. "Cold weather" is defined as a period when for more than 3 successive
8 days, the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40 degrees F.
9 The average daily temperature shall be calculated as the average of the
10 highest and the lowest temperature during the period from midnight to
11 midnight.
12
13 2. Cold weather concreting shall conform to ACI 306.1 and the additional
14 requirements specified herein. Temperatures at the concrete
15 placement shall be recorded at 12 hour intervals (minimum).
16
17 3. Discuss a cold weather work plan with the Engineer. The discussion
18 shall encompass the methods and procedures proposed for use during
19 cold weather including the production, transportation, placement,
20 protection, curing and temperature monitoring of the concrete. The
21 procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather
22 conditions or equipment failures shall also be discussed. Cold weather
23 concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the
24 Engineer.
25
26 4. During periods of cold weather, concrete shall be protected to provide
27 continuous warm, moist curing (with supplementary heat when
28 required) for a total of at least 350 degree-days of curing.
29
30 a. Degree-days are defined as the total number of 24 hour periods
31 multiplied by the weighted average daily air temperature at the
32 surface of the concrete (eg: 5 days at an average 70 degrees F
33 = 350 degree-days).
34
35 b. To calculate the weighted average daily air temperature, sum
36 hourly measurements of the air temperature in the shade at the
37 surface of the concrete taking any measurement less than 50
38 degrees F as 0 degrees F. Divide the sum thus calculated by 24
39 to obtain the weighted average temperature for that day.
40
41 5. Salt, manure or other chemicals shall not be used for protection.
42
43 6. The protection period for concrete being water cured shall not be
44 terminated during cold weather until at least 24 hours after water curing
45 has been terminated.
46
47 E. Hot Weather Concreting
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-17 03/22/2019
1
2 1. "Hot weather" is defined as any combination of high air temperatures,
3 low relative humidity and wind velocity which produces a rate of
4 evaporation estimated in accordance with ACI 305R, approaching or
5 exceeding 0.2 lbs/sgft/hr).
6
7 2. Concrete placed during hot weather, shall be batched, delivered,
8 placed, cured and protected in compliance with the recommendations
9 of ACI 305R and the additional requirements specified herein.
10
11 a. Temperature of concrete being placed shall not exceed 90
12 degrees F and every effort shall be made to maintain a uniform
13 concrete mix temperature below this level. The temperature of
14 the concrete shall be such that it will cause no difficulties from
15 loss of slump, flash set or cold joints.
16
17 b. All necessary precautions shall be taken to promptly deliver, to
18 promptly place the concrete upon its arrival at the job and to
19 provide vibration immediately after placement.
20
21 c. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to immediately cover
22 plastic concrete with sheet material.
23
24 3. Discuss with the Engineer a work plan describing the methods and
25 procedures proposed to use for concrete placement and curing during
26 hot weather periods. Hot weather concreting shall not begin until the
27 work plan is acceptable to the Engineer.
28
29 3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMS
30
31 A. Except as otherwise specifically authorized by the Engineer, forms shall not be
32 removed before the concrete has attained a strength of at least 30 percent of
33 its specified design strength, nor before reaching the following number of
34 day -degrees of curing (whichever is the longer):
35
36 TABLE 3
37
38 MINIMUM TIME TO FORM REMOVAL
39
40 Forms for Degree Days
41
42 Beams and slabs 500
43 Walls and vertical surfaces 100
44
45 (See definition of degree-days in Paragraph 3.05D above).
46
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-18 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 B. Shores shall not be removed until the concrete has attained at least 70
2 percent of its specified design strength and also sufficient strength to support
3 safely its own weight and construction live loads.
4
5 3.07 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING
6
7 A. The batching, mixing, transporting, placing and curing of concrete shall be
8 subject to the inspection of the Engineer at all times. The Contractor shall
9 advise the Engineer of his/her readiness to proceed at least 24 hours prior to
10 each concrete placement. The Engineer will inspect the preparations for
11 concreting including the preparation of previously placed concrete, the
12 reinforcing steel and the alignment, cleanliness and tightness of formwork. No
13 placement shall be made without the inspection and acceptance of the
14 Engineer.
15
16 B. Sets of field control cylinder specimens will be collected and tested by an
17 independent testing company hired by the Contractor and subject to approval
18 by the Engineer. The cylinder specimens shall be collected and tested during
19 the progress of the work, in compliance with ASTM C31. The number of sets
20 of concrete test cylinders taken of each class of concrete placed each day
21 shall not be less than one set per day, nor less than one set for each 150 cu
22 yds of concrete nor less than one set for each 5,000 sq ft of surface area for
23 slabs or walls.
24
25 1. A "set" of test cylinders consists of five cylinders: one to be tested at 7
26 days and two to be tested and their strengths averaged at 28 days.
27 The fourth may be used for a special test at 3 days or to verify strength
28 after 28 days if 28 day test results are low. The fifth is to be used at 28
29 days or 56 days where test results are low.
30
31 2. When the average 28 day compressive strength of the cylinders in any
32 set falls below the specified design strength or below proportional
33 minimum 7 day strengths (where proper relation between seven and 28
34 day strengths have been established by tests), proportions, water
35 content, or temperature conditions shall be changed to achieve the
36 required strengths.
37
38 C. Cooperate in the making of tests by allowing free access to the work for the
39 selection of samples, providing an insulated closed curing box for specimens,
40 affording protection to the specimens against injury or loss through the
41 operations and furnish material and labor required for the purpose of taking
42 concrete cylinder samples. All shipping of specimens will be paid for by the
43 Owner. Curing boxes shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
44
45 D. Slump tests will be made in the field immediately prior to placing the concrete.
46 Such tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C143. If the slump is
47 greater the specified range, the concrete shall be rejected.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-19 03/22/2019
1
2 E. Air Content: Test for air content shall be made on fresh concrete samples. Air
3 content for concrete made of ordinary aggregates having low absorption shall
4 be made in compliance with either the pressure method complying with ASTM
5 C231 or by the volumetric method complying with ASTM C173.
6
7 F The Engineer may have cores taken from any questionable area in the
8 concrete work such as construction joints and other locations as required for
9 determination of concrete quality. The results of tests on such cores shall be
10 the basis for acceptance, rejection or determining the continuation of concrete
11 work.
12
13 G. Cooperate in obtaining cores by allowing free access to the work and
14 permitting the use of ladders, scaffolding and such incidental equipment as
15 may be required. Repair all core holes. The work of cutting and testing the
16 cores will be at the expense of the Owner.
17
18 3.08 FAILURE TO MEET REQUIREMENTS
19
20 A. Should the strengths shown by the test specimens made and tested in
21 compliance with the previous provisions fall below the values given in Table 1,
22 the Engineer shall have the right to require changes in proportions outlined to
23 apply to the remainder of the work. Furthermore, the Engineer shall have the
24 right to require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented
25 by the test specimens which failed. The cost of such additional curing shall be
26 at the Contractor's expense. In the event that such additional curing does not
27 give the strength required, as evidenced by core and/or load tests, the
28 Engineer shall have the right to require strengthening or replacement of those
29 portions of the structure which fail to develop the required strength. The cost
30 of all such core borings and/or load tests and any strengthening or concrete
31 replacement required because strengths of test specimens are below that
32 specified, shall be entirely at the expense of the Contractor. In such cases of
33 failure to meet strength requirements the Contractor and Engineer shall confer
34 to determine what adjustment, if any, can be made in compliance with
35 Sections titled "Strength" and "Failure to Meet Strength Requirements" of
36 ASTM C94. The "purchaser" referred to in ASTM C94 is the Contractor in this
37 Section.
38
39 B. When the tests on control specimens of concrete fall below the specified
40 strength, the Engineer will permit check tests for strengths to be made by
41 means of typical cores drilled from the structure in compliance with ASTM C42
42 and C39. In the case of cores not indicating adequate strength, the Engineer,
43 in addition to other recourses, may require, at the Contractor's expense, load
44 tests on any one of the slabs, beams, piles, caps, and columns in which such
45 concrete was used. Tests need not be made until concrete has aged 60 days.
46
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-20 03/22/2019
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 C. Should the strength of test cylinders fall below 60 percent of the required
2 minimum 28 day strength, the concrete shall be rejected and shall be removed
3 and replaced.
4
5 3.09 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
6
7 A. It is the intent of this Section to require quality work including adequate
8 forming, proper mixture and placement of concrete and curing so completed
9 concrete surfaces will require no patching.
10
11 B. Defective concrete and honeycombed areas as determined by the Engineer
12 shall be repaired as specified by the Engineer.
13
14 C. As soon as the forms have been stripped and the concrete surfaces exposed,
15 fins and other projections shall be removed; recesses left by the removal of
16 form ties shall be filled; and surface defects which do not impair structural
17 strength shall be repaired. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining
18 work stained by leakage of concrete, to approval of the Engineer.
19
20 D. Immediately after removal of forms remove plugs and break off metal ties as
21 required by Section 03100. Promptly fill holes upon stripping as follows:
22 Moisten the hole with water, followed by a 1/16 -in brush coat of neat cement
23 slurry mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately plug the hole
24 with a 1 to 1.5 mixture of cement and concrete sand mixed slightly damp to the
25 touch (just short of "balling"). Hammer the grout into the hole until dense, and
26 an excess of paste appears on the surface in the form of a spiderweb. Trowel
27 smooth with heavy pressure. Avoid burnishing.
28
29 E. When patching exposed surfaces the same source of cement and sand as
30 used in the parent concrete shall be employed. Adjust color if necessary by
31 addition of proper amounts of white cement. Rub lightly with a fine
32 Carborundum stone at an age of 1 to 5 days if necessary to bring the surface
33 down with the parent concrete. Exercise care to avoid damaging or staining
34 the virgin skin of the surrounding parent concrete. Wash thoroughly to remove
35 all rubbed matter.
36
37 3.10 SCHEDULE
38
39 A. The following (Table 4) are the general applications for the various concrete
40 classes and design strengths:
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-21 03/22/2019
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
TABLE 4
CONCRETE SCHEDULE
Design
Strength
Class (psi) Description
A 2,500 Concrete fill and duct encasement
B 3,000 Concrete overlay slabs and pavements
C 4,000 Walls, slabs on grade, suspended slab and
beam systems, columns, grade beams and all
other structural concrete
5,000 Prestressed concrete
END OF SECTION
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-22 03/22/2019